aspen capitalcostestimator(kbase)-usr_guide v7.1 (2009) $$$$

Aspen Capital Cost Estimator V7.1

User Guide

Version Number: V7.1 January 2009

Copyright (c) 2001-2009 by Aspen Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.

Aspen Capital Cost Estimator, the aspen leaf logo and Plantelligence and Enterprise Optimization are trademarks or registered trademarks of Aspen Technology, Inc., Burlington, MA.

All other brand and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies.

This document is intended as a guide to using AspenTech's software. This documentation contains AspenTech proprietary and confidential information and may not be disclosed, used, or copied without the prior consent of AspenTech or as set forth in the applicable license agreement. Users are solely responsible for the proper use of the software and the application of the results obtained.

Although AspenTech has tested the software and reviewed the documentation, the sole warranty for the software may be found in the applicable license agreement between AspenTech and the user. ASPENTECH MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, WITH RESPECT TO THIS DOCUMENTATION, ITS QUALITY, PERFORMANCE, MERCHANTABILITY, OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.

Aspen Technology, Inc. 200 Wheeler Road Burlington, MA 01803-5501 USA Phone: 781 221-6400 Toll Free: 888 996-7100 URL: http://www.aspentech.com

Contents 3

Contents

Contents ............................................................................................3

Introducing Aspen Capital Cost Estimator .......................................13

Main Features........................................................................... 13 Detailed EPC Estimates...................................................... 13 CPM Schedules................................................................. 14 Information Tracking......................................................... 14

Aspen Capital Cost Estimator Project Workflow.............................. 14 The Guide................................................................................ 15

Organization .................................................................... 15 Related Documentation.............................................................. 16

Installation Manual ........................................................... 16 Known Issues and Workarounds ......................................... 16 New Features in Aspen Engineering V7.0 ............................. 16 Icarus Reference .............................................................. 16 Piping and Instrumentation Drawings .................................. 16

Technical Support ..................................................................... 16

1 Getting Started .............................................................................18

Starting Aspen Capital Cost Estimator.......................................... 18 Starting a Project Scenario................................................. 20 Creating a New Project Scenario ......................................... 20 Importing a Project Scenario .............................................. 24

Opening an Existing Project Scenario ........................................... 27 Palette Shortcut ............................................................... 28

Understanding the Icarus Interface.............................................. 28 Project Explorer................................................................ 29 Main Window ................................................................... 31 Palette ............................................................................ 35 Properties Window ............................................................ 38 Customizing the Icarus Interface ........................................ 39

4 Contents

Aspen Capital Cost Estimator Toolbar .................................. 41 Aspen Capital Cost Estimator Menu Bar................................ 42 Run Menu........................................................................ 43 View Menu....................................................................... 43 Tools Menu ...................................................................... 44 Window Menu .................................................................. 45 Help Menu ....................................................................... 45

Working with Project Scenarios ................................................... 46 Saving Project Scenarios ................................................... 46 Deleting Project Scenarios ................................................. 47 Salvaging Project Scenarios ............................................... 47 Unlocking Project Scenarios ............................................... 48

Copying Project Directories ........................................................ 49 Preferences.............................................................................. 50

General ........................................................................... 51 Forms ............................................................................. 53 Backup............................................................................ 53 Process ........................................................................... 54 Locations......................................................................... 55 Logging........................................................................... 59 Schedule ......................................................................... 59

Unzipping Files After Upgrading to Newer Versions of Aspen Capital Cost Estimator.......................................................................... 59

2 Defining the Project Basis ............................................................61

Project Properties ..................................................................... 62 General Project Data ................................................................. 63 Basis for Capital Costs ............................................................... 65

Input Units of Measure Customization.................................. 65 Output (Reports) Units of Measure Customization.................. 67 Design Basis .................................................................... 69 Contingency and Miscellaneous Project Costs........................ 77 Escalation........................................................................ 78 Engineering Workforce ...................................................... 80 Construction Workforce ..................................................... 88 Code of Accounts.............................................................. 93 Indexing.......................................................................... 98 Equipment Rental ............................................................105 Systems.........................................................................108 Contracts .......................................................................116

Importing old Standard basis files ..............................................127 Customer External Files ............................................................128 Project Execution Schedule Settings ...........................................129

Adjusting Schedule and Barcharts ......................................129

Contents 5

Setting Delivery Times for Equipment Classes......................131 Scheduling Individual Project Components ..........................132 Adding Bar Chart Items ....................................................133

IPS Project Schedule Settings ....................................................134 Using Aspen Icarus Project Scheduler (IPS) in the Aspen Capital Cost Estimator Environment ..............................................134 Schedule Appearance Adjustments.....................................135 Schedule Adjustments by Duration.....................................141 Schedule Adjustments by Activity and Logic ........................146 Primavera Information......................................................157

Process Design ........................................................................158 Simulator Type and Simulator File Name.............................159 Simulator Units of Measure Mapping Specs..........................159 Project Component Map Specifications ................................162 Default Simulator Mapping Specs.......................................164 Design Criteria ................................................................169 Utility Specifications.........................................................184

Investment Analysis .................................................................188 Investment Parameters ....................................................188 Operating Unit Costs ........................................................193 Raw Material Specifications ...............................................194 Product Specifications ......................................................198

Developing Streams .................................................................201 Viewing or Modifying an Existing Stream.............................202 Mixture Specs Dialog Box..................................................205 Estimation of Utility Usage and Resulting Costs in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator ................................................................206 Stream Connectivity.........................................................207 Creating A New Stream ....................................................208 Deleting a Stream............................................................211

Specification Libraries...............................................................212 Customizing Specification Libraries.....................................213 Selecting Specification File for Use in a Project.....................217 Changing File Directory Location ........................................218

Instrument Field Hook-Up Customization.....................................218 Using the Plot Plan Layout Tool ..................................................222

Workflow for Plot Plan Layout Tool: ....................................222

3 Loading and Mapping Simulation Data........................................225

Overview ................................................................................225 Preparing Simulation Reports.....................................................226

AspenPlus Report Generation ............................................226 AspenPlus – Aspen Process Economic Analyzer Simulator link 230 ChemCAD Report Generation.............................................231

6 Contents

HYSIM Report Generation .................................................233 HYSYS Report Generation .................................................235 SimSci’s PRO/II with PROVISION Report Generation .............238

Loading Simulation Data ...........................................................239 Viewing Data Derived from Simulator .................................242

Working with Block Flow Diagrams .............................................243 Displaying the Block Flow Diagram.....................................243 The Drag & Find Feature...................................................244 Accessing Commands in the Block Flow Diagram..................245 Zooming.........................................................................246 BlockFlow Diagram View Menu...........................................247

Mapping Simulator Items to Icarus Project Components ................249 Component Status ...........................................................255 Deleting Mappings ...........................................................256

Tower Configurations................................................................256 Sizing Selection .......................................................................267 Project Sizing Selection.............................................................267 Specifying Additional Components..............................................269 Working with Process Flow Diagrams ..........................................269

Editing the Layout............................................................270 Process Flow Diagram View Menu.......................................271 Setting Grid Properties .....................................................273 Editing Connectivity .........................................................274 Adding a Stream..............................................................276 Drawing a Disconnected Stream ........................................279 Working with Streams ......................................................279

4 Defining Report Groups, Areas, and Project Components ...........281

Adding a Report Group .............................................................282 Adding an Area........................................................................283 Copying a Report Area over another Report Area..........................284 Defining Area Specifications ......................................................284

Method 1: Defining area specifications using Project View......284 Method 2: Defining area specifications using Spreadsheet View286

Adding and Defining Pipeline Areas.............................................287 Adding a Project Component .....................................................288

Method 1: Dragging a Component from the Palette ..............288 Method 2: Using the Pop-up Menu......................................290

Entering Component Specifications.............................................291 Defining Installation Bulks.........................................................293

Mat’l/Man-hours Adjustments ............................................295 Mat’l/Man-hours Additions.................................................297 Pipe – General Specs........................................................297 Pipe – Item Details ..........................................................298

Contents 7

Duct ..............................................................................300 Civil ...............................................................................301 Steel..............................................................................301 Instrumentation ..............................................................301 Electrical ........................................................................305 Insulation .......................................................................305 Paint..............................................................................305

Importing Areas and Components ..............................................306 Importing an Entire Scenario .....................................................307 Copying Components................................................................308

Cut and Paste .................................................................308 Drag and Drop ................................................................309

Modifying Components .............................................................309 Copying Areas .........................................................................309 Deleting Components ...............................................................310

Re-numbering Components...............................................311 Deleting Areas.........................................................................311

Re-numbering Areas ........................................................312 Using the Custom Model Tool.....................................................312

Creating a Template.........................................................317 Running the Custom Model Tool at Project-Level for Batch Update...........................................................................318

5 Sizing Project Components .........................................................320

Overview ................................................................................320 Sizing for Project Components Mapped from Simulator Items.320 Interactive Sizing Expert...................................................321 Sizing for Project Components Not Mapped from Simulator Items322 Resizing Project Components.............................................322

Creating Streams to Connect to Equipment Items.........................323 Using the Interactive Sizing Form...............................................328

Utility Resources..............................................................330 Global Sizing Selection .............................................................334 Sizing Areas ............................................................................337 Sizing Requirements, Calculations, and Defaults...........................339

Air Coolers......................................................................339 Agitated Tanks ................................................................341 Compressors...................................................................342 Crushers ........................................................................344 Crystallizers ....................................................................344 Dryers............................................................................345 Dust Collectors................................................................346 Filters ............................................................................347 Heat Exchangers .............................................................347

8 Contents

Pumps ...........................................................................351 Screens..........................................................................353 Towers...........................................................................354 Vessels ..........................................................................369

6 Piping and Instrumentation Models............................................376

Overview ................................................................................376 Using the P&ID Editor ...............................................................376

Features of P&IDs............................................................376 P&ID Modes ....................................................................377 P&ID Layout and Structure................................................377 The Aspen Capital Cost Estimator PID Layout: Radpfs Interface380 Working with Ports...........................................................383 Editing P&IDs..................................................................385 Adding Instrumentation Loops ...........................................388 Efficient PID Creation .......................................................394 Cosmetic Tips..................................................................395 Custom Equipment Symbols..............................................398 Modifying a system equipment symbol................................399 Importing an equipment symbol ........................................400 Creating an equipment symbol from scratch ........................401 Line sizing Tutorial...........................................................401 Using Custom P&ID’s in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator ...........406

Working with Non-Graphic P&ID Data .........................................411 Saving Coimponent Information as Non-Graphical P&ID ........411 Creating Non-Graphical P&ID Libraries Outside a Project .......412

Importing External P&ID Data....................................................412 Interconnecting Volumetric P&ID Lines........................................418

Open a Aspen Capital Cost Estimator project .......................418 Run Interconnect Piping Lines............................................418 Connecting Piping Lines ....................................................420 Disconnecting Piping Lines ................................................421 Renaming a Line Tag........................................................421 Saving All Connections and (optionally) Updating the Project .422 Getting the Connected Line List Report ...............................422

Mapping Streams to Piping Lines................................................424 Importing 3D Piping and Structure Data Using the SmartPlant 3D–Aspen Icarus Interface..............................................................424

Overview........................................................................424 Step 1: Exporting Data from SmartPlant 3D ........................425 Step 2: Importing the data to Aspen Icarus.........................427 Step 3: Loading the Data..................................................433 Known Issues..................................................................433

Contents 9

7 Developing and Using Cost Libraries...........................................435

Overview ................................................................................435 Equipment Model Library (EML) .........................................435 Unit Cost Library (UCL).....................................................436

Developing and Using an Equipment Model Library (EML) ..............436 Creating an EML ..............................................................436 Adding an Item to an EML.................................................438 Adding an EML Item as a Project Component.......................440

Developing and Using a Unit Cost Library (UCL) ...........................442 Creating a Unit Cost Library ..............................................442 Adding an Item to a UCL...................................................444 Adding a UCL Item to a Project..........................................447 Creating an Assembly of UCL Items....................................449

Working with Cost Libraries .......................................................453 Copying a Library Item.....................................................453 Deleting a Library Item.....................................................453 Escalating Library Costs....................................................453 Importing a Cost Library...................................................454 Duplicating a Cost Library .................................................455 Deleting a Cost Library .....................................................456

8 Changing Plant Capacity and Location ........................................457

Changing Plant Capacity ...........................................................457 Analyzer Scale-Up Module (ASM) ...............................................459

How ASM Works ..............................................................459 Scale-Up Rule Set............................................................460 Scale-Up for Configuration Analysis ....................................461

Analyzer Relocation Module (ARM) .............................................461 Relocation Terminology ....................................................462 Workflow........................................................................462 How the Analyzer Plant Relocation Module (ARM) Works........463 Relocating the Project ......................................................466 ARM Knowledge Base .......................................................466

9 Aspen Utility Modules .................................................................477

Introduction ............................................................................477 Analyzer Utility Modules (AUM) – Design and Scope Generators for Utility Systems ...........................................................478 AUM_CW: Cooling Water Utility Selection, Sizing, and Design Module...........................................................................478 AUM_Air: Instrument and Plant Air Utility Selection, Sizing, and Design Module.................................................................479

Analyzer Utility Module (AUM) Cooling Water (AUM_Water)............480

10 Contents

Introduction to Analyzer Utility Module (AUM) Cooling Water .480 1. Overview ...................................................................482 2. Working with the Cooling Water Model ...........................484 3. Working with the Cooling Water Model Worksheets ..........491 4. Basis for the Cooling Water Design Model .......................501 Notes to Analyzer Utility Model (AUM) Users:.......................514

AUM_Air .................................................................................514 Utility Design and Scope Generator for Instrument and Plant Air514

Overview ................................................................................514 Project areas and their project components .........................515 Benefits: ........................................................................515 How AUM_Air Works ........................................................516

General AUM_Air Workflow........................................................516 Using AUM_Air.........................................................................517

Accessing AUM_Air...........................................................517 The Initial Design ............................................................519 Modifying Air – Instrument, Plant Data ...............................521

Guide for the Air Utility Model (AUM) ..........................................524 SPECS Organization Chart.................................................524 About this SPECS Book.....................................................524 About an Air Plant Unit .....................................................526 About Distribution Piping for an APU...................................526 Schematic ......................................................................527

Configuration of Air Utility Project Components ............................528 Project Components .........................................................528 An “Air Plant Unit” - APU...................................................529 Schematic of an Air Plant Unit ...........................................530 General Layout................................................................531 Multiple Air Plant Units for Multiple Areas ............................531 Compressor Redundancy: Multiple, Stand-by, Start-up .........532

Design Considerations ..............................................................532 Units of Measure..............................................................532 Air Utility Area.................................................................533 Air Utility Project Components ...........................................533 Instrument Air (IA) Requirements: Air Flow Rate..................534 Plant Air (PA) Requirements: Air Flow Rate..........................534 Compressor Model Selection Method...................................535

Interactive Specs .....................................................................538 User Preferences .............................................................539 Equipment Redundancy ....................................................539 Equipment Configurations .................................................540 Basis for Design: Preferences - 1 ......................................540 Configuration Layout Method and Distribution......................543 Example layout – group of areas served by APU “A” .............544

Contents 11

Circuit Preferences: Configuration of APUs..........................544 Sample Layouts: One APU................................................545 Sample Layouts: Multiple APUs.........................................545

Design Methods .......................................................................545 Basis for Sizing Air Distribution Piping.................................546

Sample AUM_Air Worksheets.....................................................547 List of AUM_Air Worksheets...............................................548 Welcome Worksheet.........................................................548 Control Center Worksheet .................................................549 Guide Worksheet .............................................................549 Status Worksheet ............................................................554 Preferences Worksheet .....................................................556 Configuration Part 1: Assignment of Plant Air to Areas Not Requiring Instrument Air ..................................................558 Configuration Part 2: Assignment of Areas to an APU............558 Report – Equipment Component Stats ................................559 Report – Pipe Stats ..........................................................561

10 Evaluating the Project ..............................................................562

Running a Project Evaluation .....................................................562 Reviewing Results in Icarus Editor ..............................................564

Accessing .......................................................................564 Printing a Single Section ...................................................565 Icarus Editor Toolbar........................................................566 Report Sections ...............................................................567 Project Schedule..............................................................570

Reviewing Results in Aspen Icarus Reporter.................................574 Accessing Aspen Icarus Reporter .......................................574 Aspen Icarus Reporter Menu Bar.............................................576 Which Report Mode? ........................................................577 Standard Reports.............................................................577 List of Standard Reports ...................................................583 HTML Reports .................................................................588 Management Reports .......................................................590 Excel Reports ..................................................................594 Data Trending .................................................................599 Importing Data into Aspen Icarus Reporter..........................602 Creating a User Database .................................................603

Reviewing Investment Analysis ..................................................605 Viewing Investment Analysis .............................................605 Equipment Summary........................................................605 Project Summary.............................................................606 Cashflow ........................................................................614 Executive Summary .........................................................622

12 Contents

Using the Reporting Assistant ............................................626 Item Evaluation .......................................................................630

11 Introducing IPS ........................................................................636

12 Getting Started With IPS ..........................................................638

Starting Icarus Project Scheduler ...............................................638 Starting a Project Scenario........................................................639

Creating a New Project Scenario ........................................640 Opening an Existing Project Scenario ..........................................642 Understanding the Icarus Interface.............................................648

13 IPS Project Schedule Settings ..................................................650

IPS Project Schedule Settings ....................................................650 Schedule Appearance Adjustments.....................................651 Schedule Adjustments by Duration.....................................656 Schedule Adjustments by Activity and Logic ........................661 Primavera Information......................................................672

IPS Appendix A: Engineering and Procurement Activity Numbers .675

Numbering Convention .............................................................675

Appendix B: Site Development and Construction Activity Numbers717

Numbering Conventions............................................................717 List of Activity Numbers ............................................................719

Appendix C: Equipment Class Definitions.......................................725

Appendix D: Equipment Codes.......................................................727

Appendix E: Tutorial ......................................................................730

Index.............................................................................................735

Introducing Aspen Capital Cost Estimator 13

Introducing Aspen Capital Cost Estimator

Aspen Capital Cost Estimator, formerly known as Aspen Kbase, is a fully integrated, design, estimating, and scheduling system designed to help you evaluate the capital cost of process plants worldwide.

Main Features

Detailed EPC Estimates Aspen Capital Cost Estimator uses the equipment models contained in the Icarus Evaluation Engine (IEE) – a knowledge base of design, cost, and scheduling data, methods, and models – to generate preliminary equipment designs and simulate vendor-costing procedures to develop detailed Engineering-Procurement-Construction (EPC) estimates. Volumetric models generate a costed, quantity takeoff for the bulk materials without using factors or user input. The volumetric models also produce the quantities of pipe, valves, concrete, steel, and instruments identified by the associated equipment or area. Components of each line of pipe and instrument loop are quantified and costed, enabling you to view and adjust construction tasks. The Aspen Capital Cost Estimator Work Item Models produce the required man-hours by craft and task needed to install Aspen Capital Cost Estimator-generated bulks, as well as the equipment Aspen Capital Cost Estimator designed, by simulating detailed design construction tasks. Finally, the Engineering Models in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator produce man-hours by discipline and engineering work product.

DELL

강조

DELL

사각형

14 Introducing Aspen Capital Cost Estimator

CPM Schedules Aspen Capital Cost Estimator has a built-in activity network generator to automatically prepare Critical Path Method (CPM) schedules. The EPC estimate and the planning schedule are in tune with one another, each having been prepared from the same project scope.

Information Tracking Aspen Capital Cost Estimator provides tree diagrams that allow you to view, track and revise information such as power distribution, process control networks, tiered contracts, areas and their equipment specs, and installation procedures.

Aspen Capital Cost Estimator Project Workflow Before using Aspen Capital Cost Estimator, it may be helpful to review the recommended project workflow:

Note: Early in the life of a project, when limited mechanical design detail is available, you need only enter a rough outline of scope to produce the initial estimate of cost and schedule. As more information becomes available, the details of the project can be entered and new reports can be generated and analyzed. 1 Create project scenario and define properties like country

base, units of measure, and currency. 2 Define design basis (general mechanical design rules), wage

rates and productivities, code of account definition and allocation, material and man-hour indexing, equipment rental, and project execution schedule settings.

3 Define the Power Distribution system (if desired). 4 Define the Process Control system (if desired) and link to

areas and substations. 5 Add contractors and redefine responsibilities (if desired) and

link to areas and substations. 6 Run an item evaluation to produce direct costs for an

individual component or run a project evaluation to produce design and cost results needed to prepare project reports.

7 View and/or print reports.


The Guide

Organization This guide contains the following:

Introducing Aspen Capital Cost Estimator− an overview of Aspen Capital Cost Estimator and the user's guide, as well as a list of related documentation and information on technical support.

Chapter 1 − Getting Started − instructions on how to start Aspen Capital Cost Estimator, open a project, enter project specifications, and work with the Icarus Interface.

Chapter 2 − Defining the Project Basis − instructions on defining specifications: units of measure, standard basis, component map, design criteria, investment analysis, raw material, product, operating unit costs, and utility.

Chapter 3 − Loading and Mapping Simulation Data − instructions on preparing different kinds of simulator reports for use in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator, loading simulator data, mapping simulator models to Icarus project components, adding additional components to simulator models, and viewing and defining simulator models in Block Flow Diagram (BFD) and Process Flow Diagram (PFD) view.

Chapter 4 − Defining Areas, Report Groups, and Project Components − instructions on how to define areas and report groups and then populate them with project components, which are the pieces of the process plant that, when linked together, complete a process.

Chapter 5 − Sizing Project Components − instructions on sizing project components.

Chapter 6 – Piping and Instrumentation Models − instructions on accessing the P&ID Editor and creating and selecting custom P&ID’s.

Chapter 7 – Developing and Using Cost Libraries − instructions on developing cost libraries and adding library items as project components.

Chapter 8 – Changing Plant Capacity and Location − instructions on using the plant scale-up and relocation modules available if you are licensed to use Aspen Decision Analyzer.

16 Introducing Aspen Capital Cost Estimator

Chapter 9 - Analyzer Utility Modules – instructions on using Analyzer Utility Modules for cooling water and air.

Chapter 10 − Evaluating the Project − instructions on running a project and item evaluations and reviewing capital costs, operating costs, and investment analysis reports.

Related Documentation In addition to this document, a number of other documents are provided to help users learn and use Aspen Capital Cost Estimator. The documentation set consists of the following:

Installation Manual Aspen Engineering V7.1 Installation Guide

Known Issues and Workarounds Aspen Engineering V7.1 Known Issues

New Features in Aspen Engineering V7.1 Aspen Engineering V7.1 What's New

Icarus Reference Aspen Icarus Reference Guide, for Icarus Evaluation Engine (IEE)

Piping and Instrumentation Drawings Piping and Instrumentation Drawings, 3rd edition

Technical Support AspenTech customers with a valid license and software maintenance agreement can register to access the online AspenTech Support Center at:

0Hhttp://support.aspentech.com H

This Web support site lets you: • Access current product documentation


• Search for tech tips, solutions and frequently asked questions (FAQs)

• Search for and download application examples • Search for and download service packs and product updates • Submit and track technical issues • Send suggestions • Report product defects • Review lists of known deficiencies and defects

Registered users can also subscribe to our Technical Support e-Bulletins. These e-Bulletins are used to alert users to important technical support information such as: • Technical advisories • Product updates and releases

Customer support is also available by phone, fax, and email. The most up-to-date contact information is available at the AspenTech Support Center at H1Hhttp://support.aspentech.com H.

18 1 Getting Started

1 Getting Started

Starting Aspen Capital Cost Estimator After completing the installation, you can start Aspen Capital Cost Estimator.

To start Aspen Capital Cost Estimator: 1 Click the Windows Start button. 2 Point to Programs | AspenTech.

3 Point to Economic Evaluation 7.1; then click Aspen

Capital Cost Estimator.

Aspen Capital Cost Estimator starts.

The Main window, empty because no project is open, appears on the left. The Palette appears in the upper-right and the Properties Window appears in the lower-right.

1 Getting Started 19

Note: You can change the position of the Main Window, Palette, and Properties Window, as explained under Customizing the Interface Arrangement on page XXX398H39XXX.

If you are also licensed to use Aspen Decision Analyzer or Aspen Icarus Process Evaluator (Aspen Process Economic Analyzer), Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays at startup the Options dialog box, in which you can select to use Aspen Decision Analyzer, Aspen Process Economic Analyzer, in the Aspen Capital Cost Estimator environment.

If you are licensed to use Aspen Icarus Project Scheduler (IPS), you can also select to use IPS with any of these options.


Your selection makes certain features of the selected product available in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator.

Starting a Project Scenario

Note: Viewing the sample project scenario provided with Aspen Capital Cost Estimator before creating a new one will allow you to familiarize yourself with Aspen Capital Cost Estimator without having to fill out specifications. To open the sample project, follow the instructions under “Opening an Existing Project Scenario” on page XXX399H27XXX.

Creating a New Project Scenario To create a new project scenario: 1 Do one of the following:

• On the File menu, click New.

-or-

• Click on the toolbar.

The Create New Project dialog box appears.

Note: Under Preferences, you can create scenarios in project directories other than the default one provided by Aspen Capital Cost Estimator. See page XXX400H55XXX for instructions on adding project directories. 3 Either select an existing project in which to start a new

scenario, or enter a new Project Name. Long filenames are accepted, including spaces. However, punctuation marks,


such as question marks (?), exclamation points (!), tildes (~), and asterisks (*), are not allowed.

4 Enter the Scenario Name.

This is the name of the scenario within the project. As with the Project Name, long filenames are accepted, including spaces, while punctuation marks, such as question marks (?), exclamation points (!), tildes (~), and asterisks (*) are not allowed.

If you do not enter a Scenario Name, Aspen Capital Cost Estimator uses “BaseCase” as the default. 5 Click OK.

The Project Properties dialog box appears.

6 Enter a Project Description. The description can be up to 500

characters in length and can be comprised of letters, numbers, and punctuation. You can enter or revise the description later on the Project Properties form accessed from the Project Basis view (see page XXX401H62XXX).

In the Units of Measure section, you can keep the default basis of Inch-Pound (IP) or select Metric. The Units of Measure selection cannot be changed after creating the project scenario. 7 If desired, enter more details about the project scenario in

the Remarks field. Remarks can be up to 6,000 characters in length and can be comprised of letters, numbers, and punctuation. You can enter and revise remarks later on the Project Properties form accessed from the Project Basis view (see page XXX402H62XXX).

8 Click OK.


Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays the Input Units of Measure Specifications dialog box, which lets you customize the units of measure that appear on specification forms.

For example, if you want to use CM/H (centimeters per hour) instead of M/H (meters per hour) to specify conveyor belt speed in your metric-basis project, do the following:

A Select Velocity and Flow Rate and click Modify.

B On the Velocity and Flow Rate Units form, enter “CM/H” as the new unit name for M/H. Then enter the conversion factor between the two units in the Conversion field. In this example, the conversion factor between the two units is 100 because:

100 CM/H = 1 M/H.

C Click OK to accept the modifications and return to the previous dialog

box.


Note: You can also customize input units of measure after creating a project scenario, through the Basis for Capital Costs library (see page XXX403H65XXX for instructions). 9 When finished modifying input units of measure, click Close.

Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays the General Project Data form.

Most specifications on this form can be entered later by selecting General Project Data in the Project Basis view (see page XXX404H63XXX). However, country base, currency description and symbol, and allowing pipeline areas can only be selected at this time.

Selecting Country Base and Currency

The default country base is US and the default currency is Dollars (USD). Changing the country base to UK, EU, or JP automatically changes the currency to Pounds (PS), Euros, or K-Yen (KY), respectively. You can, however, enter a currency different than that of the country base. Just be sure to also enter a currency conversion rate, which is the number of currency units per one country base currency unit.


Allowing Pipeline Areas 2 If this is to be a pipeline project, select P in the Allow

Pipeline Areas box.

In a pipeline project, items marked with a double-asterisk in Project Explorer’s Project Basis view (see page XXX405H61XX) are not applicable.

A pipeline project has no multiple contractors.

A pipeline project will have both main (process) and pipeline areas. Process equipment may be defined in the main (process) area(s), but not in the pipeline areas. 3 Click OK when finished entering General Project Data.

The Main Window now displays Project Explorer and the List view. See “Understanding the Icarus Interface” on page XX406H28XX for instructions on working with these and other features now available on the interface.

Importing a Project Scenario Aspen Capital Cost Estimator provides an Import feature so that you can import Analyzer 2.0B, Icarus 2000 9.0, Aspen Process Economic Analyzer 5.0/5.1, IPM 5.0, or Questimate 14.0 project scenarios into Aspen Capital Cost Estimator.

To import a project scenario: 1 Do one of the following:

• On the File menu, click New.

-or-



The Create New Project dialog box appears.

Note: You can create scenarios in project directories other than the default one provided by Aspen Capital Cost Estimator. See “Preferences,” particularly the “Locations” subsection on page XX407H55XX, for instructions. 2 Either select an existing project in which to start a new

scenario, or enter a new Project Name. Long filenames are accepted, including spaces. However, punctuation marks, such as question marks (?), exclamation points (!), tildes (~), and asterisks (*), are not allowed.


Again, long filenames are accepted, including spaces, while punctuation marks, such as question marks (?), exclamation points (!), tildes (~), and asterisks (*) are not allowed.

After making an entry in the Scenario Name field, the Import button becomes active. 4 Click Import.


The Select Import Type dialog box appears.

5 Select the project type you wish to import and click OK. The Browse for Folder dialog box appears.

2 Select the project scenario folder and click OK.

The project scenario’s settings will be imported into the new project scenario.


Opening an Existing Project Scenario To open an existing project scenario: 1 Do one of the following:

• On the File menu, click Open.

-or-

• On the toolbar, click . The Open Existing Project dialog box appears.

In the pictured dialog box, the project named Expansion has been expanded on the tree structure to show the scenario named Asp_Eng01.

The tree structure on the left side of the dialog box displays the projects in the default project folder: ...\AspenTech\Economic Evaluation V7.1\Data\Archives_Aspen Capital Cost Estimator

Clicking + next to a project expands the view to display the scenarios under that project.

Selecting a scenario displays the following scenario information in the pane on the right:

Version of Aspen Capital Cost Estimator in which the scenario was created • Name of the user who created the scenario • Name of the computer on which the scenario was created • Units of measure used in the scenario


3 Select a scenario and click OK.

The project scenario opens. The Main window now displays Project Explorer and the List view. See “Understanding the Icarus Interface” on page XX408H28XX for instructions on working with these and other features now available on the interface.

Palette Shortcut You can also open a project from the Palette, which appears to the right of the Main Window in the default interface arrangement (it can also be floated in the Main Window or dragged onto the Main Window and re-sized, as shown below). 1 In the Projects tab view, right-click on a scenario. 2 On the menu that appears, click Open.

This opens the selected scenario.

Understanding the Icarus Interface The Icarus interface lets you see multiple windows and documents. You can customize the interface arrangement. The following is the default interface arrangement, with a specifications form open in the Main Window.


The Icarus interface includes the following features:

This feature Does this

Title Bar Displays the project file name and current Main Window view.

Menu Bar Displays menu options.

Toolbar Allows access to Aspen Capital Cost Estimator functions. See page XX409H41XX.

Main Window Provides workspace for all Aspen Capital Cost Estimator documents, List view, specification forms, and other views. See page XX410H31XX.

Project Explorer Organizes project items in tree format. See page XX411H29XX.

Palette Allows access to libraries, projects, and components. See page XX412H35XX.

Status Bar Displays Aspen Capital Cost Estimator system status.

Properties Window Describes the field selected on specifications form. See page XX413H38XX.

Project Explorer Project Explorer is a graphical representation of the project. It has three views: Project Basis view, Process view, and Project view. Each view organizes items in a tree format. Switch


views by selecting the appropriate tab at the bottom of Project Explorer. (Stretching the width of the Project Explorer will display the full names on the tabs.) The different views are described on page XX414H30XX.

To expand a tree level: • Click the PLUS SIGN (+) next to the condensed level.

To condense a tree level: • Click the MINUS SIGN ( -) next to the expanded level.

Project Explorer Views Project Basis View displays project basis specifications. Double-click on a specification to view and/or modify it. A red arrow on an icon in this view indicates that you can right click on the icon for options.

Level Icon Description

2 Specifications folder

3 Specification

Process View displays simulator data information. In this view, simulator items can be mapped to Icarus project components. Mapped items can then be sized, modified, and/or deleted.

Note: Simulation data can only be used in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator if you are licensed to use Icarus Process Evaluator (Aspen Process Economic Analyzer) or Analyzer. As in a process simulator, like AspenPlus or HYSYS, blocks represent different operations within the process. A block is sometimes referred to as a unit operation.


2 Main Project, containing a group of simulator areas

3 Process simulator area

4 Unmapped simulator block (yellow)

Mapped simulator block (green)

Project View displays project data information. In this view, mapped items can be sized, modified, and/or deleted. In addition, new areas and Icarus project components can be defined.



1 Main Project, containing the default Main Area and any user-added areas

2 Report Group, displayed only if Show Report Group in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator is marked in Preferences (see page XX415H52XX for instructions)

3 Area

4 Project component

Main Window The Main Window is located to the right of Project Explorer by default. The Main Window is a workspace for all Aspen Capital Cost Estimator documents, the List view, and other views. You can adjust the relative size of each window by clicking on the division bar and dragging it to the desired location.

Note: Here, the Main Window in Workbook Mode displays several tabs because a component specifications form (component A1) and a project specifications form (Escalation Specs) have been opened.

By default, the Main Window is in Workbook Mode. In this mode, tabs are placed at the bottom of the window. These tabs represent all windows open in the Main Window. Clicking on a tab brings the associated window to the foreground.


Clicking Tile or Cascade on the Window menu displays all windows open in the Main Window. Regardless of the window arrangement, the tabs are still at the bottom of the Main Window when in Workbook Mode. Clicking the maximize button ( ) on a window returns all windows to full tab view. Clicking the condense button ( ) on the menu bar displays all windows open in the Main Window as they were when last condensed.

This is how the Main Window appears when in Workbook Mode with Cascade selected as the condensed window arrangement.

Aspen Capital Cost Estimator lets you float Project Explorer, the Palette, and the Properties Window in the Main window. When in this state, these windows behave just like other windows that are part of the Main Window. See “Customizing the Icarus Interface” on page XX416H39XX for details.

You can turn off Workbook Mode by unmarking Workbook Mode on the View menu. When Workbook Mode is off, no tabs are displayed; to bring a window to the front, you must click on the desired window or select the desired window from the Window menu.

List View The List view in the Main Window displays details on items selected in Project Explorer. For example, when you click on an area in Project Explorer’s Project view, the List view displays a list of all components in the area. This is referred to as the


“area-level” list (shown below), in which the components are displayed in rows with component details in columns. When you click on a component in Project Explorer’s Project view, the List provides information only on the selected component, with component details listed in rows. This is referred to as the “component-level” list.

Note: In the interface arrangement pictured here, the Palette and the Properties Window have been hidden to make room for the Main Window.

Press ALT+1 to hide or display the Palette and press ALT+2 to hide or display the Properties Window. Press ALT+0 to hide or display Project Explorer.

Filtering Mechanism You can limit area-level lists to a single category of component. To do so, click the drop-down arrow on the toolbar and click on a category.


For example, if you click ? Incomplete Items the list will only include components that still have specifications that need to be entered in order for the component to be included in an evaluation.

Column Settings You can select which columns appear on the area-level list and in which order.

To change column settings on the area-level list: 1 Right-click on any of the column headings.

A pop-up menu lists all of the columns. Columns currently displayed are checked.

2 To simply hide/unhide a column, you can click it on the menu. 2 To change the order, click Settings on the menu.

The Settings dialog box appears.


3 To move a column to the right on the List View, click Move

Down. To move a column to the left, click Move Up. The Reset button returns to columns to the default setting (shown above).

4 Click OK to save the settings.

When you restart Aspen Capital Cost Estimator, all columns will be displayed in the default order unless Save Window States is selected in Preferences (by default, Save Window States is selected). See “Saving Window States” on page XX417H40XX for more information.

Palette The Palette contains elements that you can apply to the project scenario. If you think of Project Explorer as a picture of the project scenario, you might think of the Palette’s contents as the pigments and dyes used to first sketch out and then color in that picture.

For example, if you wish to import areas or components from another scenario into your current scenario, you can double-click on the scenario in the Palette to get a listing of its areas and components and then drag the area/component to the Project Explorer’s Project View. (See “Importing Project Components” on page XX418H306XX.)


Likewise, the Palette’s Libraries view contains libraries of Project Basis specification files that, in Project Explorer’s Project Basis view, you can select to use. From the Palette, you can develop the libraries by creating new files, modifying existing files, and importing files. (See “Specification Libraries” on page XX419H212XX.)

Finally, when you add a component to the project scenario, you can choose from the components listed in the Palette’s Components view. Then, after you add the component, it appears in Project Explorer’s Project view. (See “Adding a Project Component” on page XX420H286XX).


In the default interface arrangement, the Palette appears on the right side of the screen. Like Project Explorer, it can be displayed in a variety of ways. See “Customizing the Icarus Interface” (page XX421H39XX) for display options. To hide/display the Palette, press ALT+1 or used the checked command on the View menu.

As indicated previously, the Palette has three views: Projects, Libraries, and Components. The Components view, shown below, has a scrollable split window that displays details on equipment items. The division bar can be adjusted to hide or expand the details section.

Note: The Palette pictured in this section has been dragged onto the Main Window and re-sized.

In addition to allowing you to import the contents of other scenarios, the Projects view provides options for opening scenarios, viewing scenario properties, and deleting scenarios. Right-click on a project scenario to access the pop-up menu of options. The Projects view displays all projects in the default project folder and any other active project folders. (See “Preferences,” particularly the “Locations” subsection on page XX422H55XX, for instructions.)


Properties Window When you select a field on a specifications form, the Properties Window provides a description of the field. The description often includes minimum, maximum, and default values.

Here, the Properties Window (docked on the right side of the screen) displays information on the Process Description field, which is selected on the specifications form.

Click on the Properties Window to freeze and unfreeze the content. When the content is frozen, you can move to another field while retaining the description of the original field in the Properties Window.


Like the Palette and Project Explorer, the Properties Window can be displayed in a variety of ways. See “Customizing the Icarus Interface” on page XX423H39XX for display options.

To hide/display the Properties Window, press ALT+2 or use the checked command on the View menu.

Customizing the Icarus Interface In the default interface arrangement, Project Explorer docks to the left edge and the Palette and the Properties Window share the right. When docked, windows remain attached to an edge and all other windows are sized to fit in the remaining space available.

Right-clicking on a border of any of these three windows accesses a pop-up menu from which you can select Allow Docking. When Allow Docking is marked, the window can be docked to any edge.

Note: When Float In Main Window is selected on the pop-up menu, the Allow Docking option is inactive.

To dock to a different edge: 1 Click the border that contains the Close button ( ) and hold

down the left mouse button.

A bounding outline will appear as you drag the window. 2 Drag the outline to the desired edge and release the left

mouse button.


Here, Project Explorer is docked to the top of the screen.

When multiple windows are docked to the same edge, you can use the division bar to adjust the relative sizes. You can also use the Contract/Expand ( / ) buttons to either switch from one window to the other or split the side.

Undocking by Dragging onto Main Window One way to undock the window is by dragging it onto the Main Window. Its size can then be adjusted.

Float In Main Window Option You can at any time select Float In Main Window on the pop-up menu. In this state, the window behaves like the List view or a specifications form, with a tab at the bottom of the Main Window.

Saving Window States If you are using the default Preferences, Aspen Capital Cost Estimator will save the interface arrangement. This way, when you open Aspen Capital Cost Estimator the arrangement is the same as you left it.

You can also set the Preferences so that Aspen Capital Cost Estimator opens displaying the default arrangement. See the


section on the General tab view of the Preference dialog box (page XX424H51XX) for more information.

Aspen Capital Cost Estimator Toolbar By default, the toolbar is docked under the menu bar. However, you can float the toolbar by clicking on a blank area of the toolbar and dragging it. You can also dock the toolbar to the bottom of the screen or vertically to the edge of the Project Explorer, Main Window, or the Palette. To do so, drag the toolbar over any one of these areas until an outline of the toolbar appears. Release the mouse button when the outline appears in the desired area.

The following toolbar buttons are available in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator:

Click this

to

Create a new project scenario. See “Creating a New Project Scenario” on page XX425H20XX.

Open an existing project scenario. See “Opening an Existing Project Scenario” on page XX426H27XX.

Save the current project. See “Saving a Project Scenario” on page XX427H46XX.

Print.

Run project evaluation. See “Running a Project Evaluation” on page XX428H562XX for instructions.

Load Capital Costs and other reports. See “Reviewing Reports in Aspen Icarus Reporter,” page XX429H574XX, for instructions.

Go back. Navigate back through previously viewed links.

Go forward. Navigate forward through previously viewed links.

Other buttons that appear on the toolbar are always inactive in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator. They are for use in other Icarus programs.


Aspen Capital Cost Estimator Menu Bar

Click this

to

New Start a new project scenario. Details on page XX430H20XX.

Open Open an existing project scenario. Details on page XX431H27XX.

Close Close the current project scenario.

Save Save the current project scenario. Details on page XX432H46XX.

Save As Save the current project scenario as a different file. Details on page XX433H46XX.

Import Access instructions for importing areas and components. Details on page XX434H306XX.

Export to SPECS file

Save the current project scenario as an SPECS (*.ic2) project file.

Print Print the form or report currently active in the Main Window.

Print Preview

Preview how form or report will appear printed.

Print Setup

View and modify printer name and properties, paper size and source, and orientation

Page Setup

Define page specifications.

Exit Close Aspen Capital Cost Estimator.


Run Menu

Click this to

Evaluate Project

Run a project evaluation. See page XX435H562XX for details.

Develop Schedule

This sub-menu contains commands for use in Icarus Project Manager (Aspen In-Plant Cost Estimator) only.

Decision Analyzer

(Only active if you are using Aspen Decision Analyzer in the Aspen Capital Cost Estimator environment.) Accesses options for changing plant capacity and location. See Chapter 8.

Scan for Errors

Scan for potential errors in the project evaluation.

Re-number Re-number project components or project areas so that the numbering contains no gaps. Details on page XX436H311XX.

View Menu


Use this to

Toolbar View or hide the toolbar. See page XX437H41XX for description of the toolbar.

Status Bar View or hide the status bar. See page XX438H28XX for description of the status bar.

Project Explorer

View or hide Project Explorer. See page XX439H29XX for a description of Project Explorer.

Palette View or hide the Palette. See page XX440H35XX for description of the Palette.

Properties Window

View or hide the Properties Window. See page XX441H38XX for a description of the Properties Window.

Workbook Mode

Turn Workbook Mode on and off. See page XX442H31XX for an explanation of Workbook Mode.

Capital Costs View

Launch Aspen Icarus Reporter. The Project Evaluation needs to have already been run. See page XX443H574XX for details.

Investment Analysis View

Display Investment Analysis spreadsheets in Main Window. This option is not active until you have run a project evaluation. You must also be licensed to use Icarus Process Evaluator (Aspen Process Economic Analyzer) and/or Analyzer. See page XX444H605XX for information on reviewing the Investment Analysis.

Block Flow Diagram

Display Block Flow Diagram of the loaded simulator data. This option is not active until you have loaded simulator data.

Process Flow Diagram

Display Process Flow Diagram. This option is not active until you have mapped the simulator items.

Streams List

Display a read-only list of all simulator-derived stream properties in a spreadsheet. This option is not active until you have mapped similator items. You can customize some of the features of the spreadsheet (which stream properties to display, whether to display names of the properties, and the display style of the property values) by editing the stream list template file:

...\ Economic Evaluation V7.1\Data\ICS\strlist.fil

Tools Menu

Use this to

Icarus Editor

Launch Icarus Editor. See “Reviewing Results in Icarus Editor” on page XX445H564XX for instructions.

Batch Import

Batch import Icarus 2000 projects.

Manpower Productivity Expert (MPE)

Launch MPE.

Options Access Options sub-menu. See below.


Options Sub-menu

Use this to

Automatic Item Evaluation

Turn Automatic Item Evaluation on and off. A check mark indicates the feature is turned on. See page XX446H631XX for feature description.

Custom Tasks

This command is reserved for future releases.

Preferences Access Preferences. See page XX447H51XX for details.

Window Menu

Use this to

Cascade View the Main Window contents in Cascade mode. See page XX448H31XX.

Tile View the Main Window contents in Tile mode. See page XX449H31XX.

Arrange Return all minimized windows to the bottom of the Main Window.

# XXX View opened window in the Main Window.

Help Menu

Use this to

Contents Access Aspen Icarus Help.

Documentation Access Docs.pdf, which links to pdf’s of all Aspen Icarus documentation. You must have Acrobat Reader to access.

Training Access Aspen Capital Cost Estimatortraining information on the web.

Product Support on the Web

Access support.aspentech.com.

About Access program information, version number, and copyright information.


Working with Project Scenarios This section explains how to save, delete, salvage, and unlock project scenarios.

Saving Project Scenarios To save a project scenario:

• Click on the toolbar or click Save on the File menu.

Aspen Capital Cost Estimator saves any changes.

To save the scenario with a new name: 1 Click Save As on the File menu.

Note: Save As is useful when studying alternatives.

Note: You can save scenarios to project directories other than the default one provided by Aspen Capital Cost Estimator. See “Preferences,” particularly the “Locations” subsection on page XX450H55XX, for instructions. 2 Specify a Project Name and Scenario Name and click OK.

Aspen Capital Cost Estimator saves the scenario as specified.


Deleting Project Scenarios You should delete project scenarios when they are no longer needed. Deleting old scenarios opens free disk space and makes working with scenarios easier.

To delete a project or scenario: 1 To delete a project scenario, right-click on the scenario within

the project directory and click Delete on the pop-up menu.

A dialog box asks you to confirm deletion.

Note: You can select in Preferences not to have this prompt appear (see page XX451H51XX).

2 Click Yes to delete the project scenario. -or- Click No to retain the project scenario.

Salvaging Project Scenarios If you exit Aspen Capital Cost Estimator abnormally without being able to save the current project scenario, you can salvage the project scenario from cached project information.


To salvage a project scenario: 1 Restart Aspen Capital Cost Estimator. A window appears

asking if you wish to save the cached information found in storage.

2 Click Yes. Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays the Salvage Project As dialog box.

3 Specify a project and scenario name.

You cannot overwrite the scenario being salvaged; you must specify a project and scenario name different from that of the original scenario. 4 Click OK.

Aspen Capital Cost Estimator creates the new scenario. Except in name, this project scenario will be identical to the scenario that was open when Aspen Capital Cost Estimator was abnormally exited. After creating the new scenario, Aspen Capital Cost Estimator asks if you wish to open it.

Unlocking Project Scenarios If Aspen Capital Cost Estimator crashes while you have a project scenario open, Aspen Capital Cost Estimator remembers that you


have the project scenario checked out. When you re-open Aspen Capital Cost Estimator, you will have to unlock the project scenario before opening it.

Anyone trying to open a locked project is denied access and provided with a message that states the time the project scenario was checked out, the user name of the person who checked it out, and the computer on which it was checked out.

A project can only be unlocked by the user who checked it out or by an administrator.

To unlock a project scenario: 1 Right-click the project scenario in the Palette. 2 On the menu that appears, click Unlock.

You can now open the project scenario as you normally would.

Copying Project Directories Within a project directory, Aspen Capital Cost Estimator creates an independent folder for each project and also creates, within a project folder, an independent folder for each project scenario. This makes it easy to move project scenario files from one


computer to another on the same network. Simply copy and paste the folder in Windows Explorer.

You can also copy an entire project directory with multiple project and project scenario folders. Doing so creates an identical set of folders and files in the new location.

See “Preferences,” particularly the “Locations” subsection on page XX452H55XX, for information on adding project directories and setting a new default project directory.

Preferences The settings in Preferences let you specify how Aspen Capital Cost Estimator will act each time it is used.

To access Preferences: 1 Click Options on the Tools menu, and then click

Preferences on the sub-menu.

Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays the Preference dialog box.


2 Click To do this

OK Save changes and close the Preferences.

Apply Save changes without closing Preferences.

Cancel Close Preferences without saving changes. (Clicking Apply and then immediately clicking Cancel would have the same effect as clicking OK.)

General In the General tab view, you can select the following:

Prompts - Select which prompts appear.

Close Project – prompt to save any changes when closing project.

Overwrite Project – prompt to confirm overwriting project that has the same name as the one being created.

Delete Project – prompt to confirm deletion of project.

Delete Area – prompt to confirm deletion of area.

Delete Component – prompt to confirm deletion of component.


Cancel Component Edit – prompt to save changes when you click Cancel after editing a Component Specifications form.

Delete Library – prompt to confirm deletion of a specifications library.

Delete Report Group – prompt to confirm deletion of a report group. • Evaluation

Display results after evaluation - mark to have Aspen Capital Cost Estimator open a detailed results report after you run an evaluation.

Scan for Errors before evaluation – mark to have Aspen Capital Cost Estimator scan for errors before evaluation. • Item Report

Select which type of report you wish to display when generating an Item Report.

HTML Item Report – mark to display the HTML Item Report, like the one shown on page XX453H630XX, in the Main Window.

Capital Cost Report – mark to display the Capital Cost Report in Icarus Editor.

Reporter Report – mark to display the Single Component Summary, exported from Aspen Icarus Reporter, in the Main Window. • Display

Save Window States – mark to have Aspen Capital Cost Estimator save the position of Project Explorer, the Main Window, the Palette, and the Properties Window, as well as selected columns on the List view. Unmark to have Aspen Capital Cost Estimator open with the default interface arrangement (shown on page XX454H28XX).

Display Options Choice Dialog on Aspen Capital Cost Estimator Startup – mark to have Aspen Capital Cost Estimator ask you at startup whether to use Aspen Process Economic Analyzer in the Aspen Capital Cost Estimator environment.

Show Report Group in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator – mark to display report groups. For more information on report groups, see page XX455H282XX.


Forms The Forms tab view provides options related to Component Specification and Installation Bulk forms.

Display P&I Installation Bulks in Grid – mark to have Aspen Capital Cost Estimator display all items on the Installation Bulk specification forms for Pipe and Instrumentation. If you unmark the checkbox, Aspen Capital Cost Estimator lets you select, when opening the form, the items to include.

Use OK Button in Installation Bulks Form to Go to Main Component Form – mark to have Aspen Capital Cost Estimator return you to the main Component Specifications form when you click OK at an Installation Bulks form. Otherwise, clicking OK simply closes the Component specifications.

Save Component When Switching to Different Installation Bulk or Main Component Form – mark to have Aspen Capital Cost Estimator save the Component specifications when you switch to a different form on the Component’s Options menu.

Backup The Backup tab view lets you select when backups are to be performed. You can select both options.

Automatic Task Backup – mark to have Aspen Capital Cost Estimator perform a backup before executing major tasks, such as a project evaluation.

Timed Backup (Interval, in minutes) – mark to have Aspen Capital Cost Estimator perform a backup at a specified interval. Specify the interval in the box provided.

You can also select to either have Aspen Capital Cost Estimator overwrite the project backups or create unique backups.

Overwrite Project Backups – mark to have Aspen Capital Cost Estimator overwrite the previous backup every time the program performs a backup.

Unique Project Backups – mark to have Aspen Capital Cost Estimator retain previous backups by creating a unique backup each time. Depending on the frequency of backups (see task and timed backup options above), selecting Unique Project Backups could result in large amounts of disk space being consumed by backups.


Process The Process tab view provides options for importing from an external project.

Import Connected Streams – mark to include connected streams when importing an external project.

Import Installation Bulks – mark to include installation bulks when importing an external project.

The Process tab view also provides options for unsupported simulator models and custom models.

Map Unsupported Models To Quoted Cost Item – mark to have Aspen Capital Cost Estimator map, by default, unsupported simulator models to quoted cost items.

“Unsupported Models” refer to models not listed in the Project Component Map Specifications dialog box shown on page XX456H162XX. Aspen Capital Cost Estimator does not recognize them and, therefore, cannot map them to Icarus project components. If this option is left unmarked, Aspen Capital Cost Estimator will not map unsupported models. As a result, a unit operation could appear disconnected in the Process Flow Diagram (PFD).

Quoted cost items are not project components, but act as place markers to ensure that unit operations remain connected in the PFD.

Note: Marking this option will not affect the mapping of supported simulator models. If a simulator model is listed in the Project Component Map Specification dialog box, then the specified mapping will be used. Further, if a simulator model is listed and has no default mapping (that is, Current Map List section is blank), then it is assumed that the user does not want to map such simulator models to any Icarus project components.

For example, if this option is marked, a USER unit operation in Aspen Plus can be mapped to a quoted cost item if this option is marked. This ensures that the unit operation remains connected in the PFD.

Activate Custom Model – mark to activate the Custom Model tool explained on pages XX457H312XX through XX458H319XX.

Use Automatic Mapping Selection when Available (Beta feature) – Mark to use the Mapping Selection feature explained in the section on "Default and Simulator Data" Mapping.


Locations In the Locations tab view, you can select: • Project Directories

Add/remove alternate project directories and set the default project directory. See “Adding Project Directories” on page XX459H56XX for instructions. • Other Location Specifications

To specify the location of various specification files and data: 1 Click an item in the list to display its description and location. 2 Click the Browse button to select a new location.

Notes: • In some cases the description warns against changing the

location. • Make sure to create the IP and MET subfolder structure when

changing the source locations for library files that are units dependent (for example, Basis for Capital Cost, EML, UML, Custom Piping Specs, and so on).


Adding Project Directories Aspen Capital Cost Estimator comes set up with two project directories:

...\AspenTech\Economic Evaluation V7.1\Data\My Econ_Project Projects

...\AspenTech\Economic Evaluation V7.1\Data\Archives_Econ_Project

These directories, by default,are the sole choices of project directory when opening or saving a new project, as well as the only directories displayed on the Palette’s Projects view.

In the Locations tab view, however, you can enter alternate project directories, which will then appear on the Palette’s Projects view and as choices when opening and saving projects. You can also select an alternate project directory as the default.

To add a project directory: 1 Click Add.


The Browse for Folder dialog box appears.

2 Click the folder you want to add as an alternate directory;

then click OK.

Aspen Capital Cost Estimator adds the directory to the Alternate Project Directories list.


3 To set an alternate project directory as the default, click it; then click Set Default.

Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays a prompt asking you to confirm the change. Click Yes to set the new default.

If the old default location is not on the list of alternate project directories, Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays another prompt asking if you wish to add it to the list.

Note: Adding the old default directory to the alternate project directory list lets you easily revert to it. 3 Click Yes or No. 4 Click OK to save the changes to Preferences.

Before the added project directory appears on the Create New Project dialog box and elsewhere, you must either:

• Restart Aspen Capital Cost Estimator.

-or-

• Right-click on the current project in the Palette and click refresh on the pop-up menu.

Changing Location Specifications You can modify the location specification of any of the specification files.

For example, to change the location of the Standard basis file: 1 Click StandardBasisRefDir. 2 Use the Browse button below to select another location. 3 After each change, click Apply to save your change.


Note: If you are using more than one Icarus tool, remember to repeat the above steps for other systems (Aspen Process Economic Analyzer, Aspen In-Plant Cost Estimator, and so on.). Caution: Before performing the steps mentioned above, copy the system defaults (library folder structure) to the “myStd_Basis_[System]” folder. System Defaults: Economic Evaluation V7.1\Data\StdBasis_Aspen Capital Cost Estimator\Ip\Default.d0* Economic Evaluation V7.1\Data\StdBasis_Aspen Capital Cost Estimator\Met\Default.d0* Should Resemble: CoABC\myStdBasis_Aspen Process Economic Analyzer\Ip\Default.d0* CoABC\myStdBasis_Aspen Process Economic Analyzer\Met\Default.d0*

Logging The Logging tab view is reserved for future releases, in which it will be used to help clients with Technical Support issues. It is not currently activated.

Schedule In the Schedule tab view, you can specify your Primavera user name.

The Schedule tab view also contains the Schedule Administrator Tool for registering users and access rights in cases where Aspen In-Plant Cost Estimator and the scheduling program run on a network. This tool should only be used by a network administrator.

Unzipping Files After Upgrading to Newer Versions of Aspen Capital Cost Estimator Sometimes when you upgrade to a newer version (for example, to a service pack) of Aspen Capital Cost Estimator, you will find your files zipped into two files with the extensions: • .izp


• .szp There are two zip files per scenario:

• XXX.IZP (containing the main database of the project) • XXX.SZP (containing reports, results, projid files, and so on)

You use the executable icziputil.exe, which is supplied with your Aspen Capital Cost Estimator application, to unzip these files.

To unzip your files using the executable icziputil.exe: 1 Ensure that the executable icziputil.exe is in the \Program

Files\AspenTech\Aspen Icarus x.x\Program\Sys directory.

2 Open a command prompt (Start | Run | Cmd); then press ENTER.

3 Change directories to the \Program Files\AspenTech\Aspen Icarus x.x\Program\Sys folder where you copied the icziputil.exe file.

4 To unzip a .szp or .izp file, use the following command:

icziputil /u [Zip file path] [Destination path]

For example:

icziputil /u "d:\saved\project\sim_met\proii.szp" "d:\temp\sim_met\unzipped"

2 Defining the Project Basis 61

2 Defining the Project Basis

The Project Basis defines specifications that pertain to the overall project scenario. These specifications influence the design and cost estimate by defining system defaults and environmental variables.

Project Basis Specifications are accessed from the Project Basis view in Project Explorer.

Notes: • A red arrow on an icon indicates that you can right-click on

the item to access a pop-up menu. • In a pipeline project, specifications marked with a

double-asterisk (**) do NOT apply.

62 2 Defining the Project Basis

This chapter describes the different Project Basis specifications, as well as how to customize specification libraries.

Project Properties Project Properties are initially specified when creating a new project.

To access project properties: • In the main Project Basis folder, right-click Project

Properties; then click Edit.



You cannot edit Project Name, Scenario Name, or Units of Measure; they can only be specified when creating a new project.

You can edit the following:

Project Description: The description entered here appears as the Project Description on the Project Summary spreadsheet and as the Brief Description on the Executive Summary spreadsheet. All scenarios under the project share the project description. The description can be up to 500 characters in length and can be comprised of letters, numbers, and punctuation.

Remarks: Any remarks entered will appear immediately after the Title Page of evaluation reports in Icarus Editor. Remarks can be up to 6,000 characters in length and can be comprised of letters, numbers, and punctuation. Remarks might include, for example, the intended purpose of the estimate, executive summary of results, or an explanation of assumptions.

General Project Data General Project Data is initially specified when creating a project.

To access General Project Data: 1 Right-click General Project Data in the main Project Basis

folder.


2 On the menu that appears, click Edit.

The Standard Basis Input File Specifications form appears.

You cannot edit Units of Measure, Country Base, or Currency Symbol; these can only be specified when creating a new project.

You can edit the following:

Currency Conversion Rate: The number of currency units per one country base currency unit. This is for when you are using a currency other than that of the country base.

Project Title: Appears as the project title on reports in Aspen Icarus Reporter and Icarus Editor, and also appears as the Scenario Description on the Project Summary spreadsheet.

Estimate Class: Appears on the Title Page in Icarus Editor. Intended to indicate the purpose of specifications (for example, budget).

Job Number: Appears on the Title Page in Icarus Editor.

Prepared By: Appears at the top of reports generated by Aspen Icarus Reporter and on the Title Page in Icarus Editor.


Estimate Date: Appears immediately under the project title at the top of the Title Page in Icarus Editor. Reports generated by Aspen Icarus Reporter also include an Estimate Date; however, the Estimate Date shown in Aspen Icarus Reporter is the date on which the project evaluation was run.

Basis for Capital Costs The Basis for Capital Costs folder includes: • Units of measure customization. • General mechanical design rules for equipment, piping, civil,

steel, instrumentation, electrical, insulation, and paint. • Contingency and miscellaneous project costs. • Escalation indices for material and labor costs. • Engineering workforce specifications by phase, discipline, and

task. • Construction workforce wage rates and productivities, for

both the overall project and by craft and workweek definition. • Code of Account (COA) re-definitions, additions and

allocations. • Indexing of material costs and man-hours by COA. • Equipment rental items, durations, and rates.

Input Units of Measure Customization Input Units of Measure Customization lets you customize the units of measure that appear on specification forms.

Input Units of Measure Customization can only be accessed from outside of the project in the Palette’s Libraries view. It does not appear in the Project Explorer’s Project Basis view.

To customize input units of measure: 1 With no project open, expand the Basis for Capital Costs

folder in the Palette’s Libraries view. Expand the appropriate units of measure basis folder – Inch-Pound or Metric. Right-click on the specifications file that will contain the customized units of measure and click Modify.


Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays the Basis for Capital Costs library in Project Explorer.

2 In the Units of Measure Customization folder, right-click

Input; then ,on the menu that appears, click Edit.

The Input Units of Measure Specifications dialog box appears.


3 If, for example, you want to use CM/H (centimeters per hour) instead of M/H (meters per hour) to specify conveyor belt speed in your metric-basis project, click Velocity and Flow Rate and then click Modify.

4 On the Velocity and Flow Rate Units form, enter “CM/H” as the new unit name for M/H. Then enter the conversion factor between the two units in the Conversion field. In this example, the conversion factor between the two units is 100 because: 100 CM/H = 1 M/H.

5 Click OK to accept the modifications and return to the

previous dialog box. 6 When finished modifying input units of measure, click Close.

Output (Reports) Units of Measure Customization Output (Reports) Units of Measure Customization lets you customize the units of measure that appear on Capital Costs and other reports.

To customize output units of measure:

1 Right-click Output (Reports) Units of Measure Customization in the Basis for Capital Costs folder in Project


Explorer’s Project Basis view, and then click Edit on the pop-up menu.

The Output Units of Measure dialog box appears.

2 You can change the basis for all output units of measure by

selecting a different basis in the Unit of Measure Basis section; however, note that this voids all previous customizations.

To customize only individual units, such as velocity and flow rate units, select the unit type and click Modify. Then, for each unit you wish to change, enter the new unit name and the conversion factor (between the old and new units).

Note: In this example, centimeters per hour (CM/H) replaces meters per hour (M/H). A conversion factor of 100 has been entered because 100 CM/H = 1 M/H.


For example, if you want to use CM/H (centimeters per hour) instead of M/H (meters per hour) to specify conveyor belt speed in your metric-basis project, enter “CM/H” as the new unit name for M/H. Then, enter the conversion factor between the two units in the Conversion field. In this example, the conversion factor between the two units is 100 because 100 CM/H = 1 M/H.

3 Click OK to accept the modifications and return to the previous dialog box. When finished modifying output units of measure, click Close.

Design Basis

Design Basis defines the general mechanical design rules for the entire project. Aspen Capital Cost Estimator uses built-in, industry-standard design procedures for the preparation of mechanical designs. The standards used include ASME (American Standards), BS5500 (British Standards), or JIS (Japanese Standards), corresponding to the selected country base. DIN (German Standards) is also available.


Design Basis influences the way Aspen Capital Cost Estimator evaluates all components of the facility (for example, equipment and bulk items — materials, manpower and indirects) and lets you define custom pipe specifications.

Aspen Capital Cost Estimator uses default values if Design Basis information is not specified. The default values depend upon the selected country base.

You can make one set of Design Basis selections and then override those selections for a particular area. See “Defining Area Specifications” on page XX460H284XX for instructions.

Design Basis specifications are divided into the following categories: • Equipment Specs

Equipment design specifications, including design code for pressure vessels, size limits for shop fab equipment, maximum diameter of vessels fabricated using pipe, maximum horizontal deflection of vessels as a percentage of vessel height, when to apply vessel stress relief (always, never, or when required by code), whether to use welded or seamless tubes for heat exchangers and reboilers, percent of the rotating equipment cost for spare parts, and which equipment to use for heavy lifting (gin poles or cranes).

• Piping Specs

General: Design specifications for all piping.

Material: Design specifications for specific piping material. The information entered here lets you redefine default specifications for any system material. For example, if you define a material and later select that material when defining installation piping for a component, your material specifications are used instead of the system default specifications.

Custom: Custom piping specifications. These specifications may consist of your company’s standard piping specifications or simply the most commonly used specifications for pipe on the current project.

To use custom piping, you have to first select a piping spec file to open.

To do so: 1 In the Piping Specs folder, right-click Custom; then click

Select on the pop-up menu.


Aspen Capital Cost Estimator provides two custom pipe specs files to help you get started: CARBONST.DAT and DEFAULT.DAT. 2 Click the file you want; then click OK. To edit your custom pipe spec file: 1 In the Piping Specs folder, right-click Custom; then click

edit on the pop-up menu.

The External Custom Pipe Specs dialog box appears.

The External Custom Pipe Specs dialog box has three options, shown below:

o Remarks o Units of Measure o Specifications


Remarks dialog box

Units of Measure dialog box


Specifications dialog box

2 On the External Custom Pipe Specs dialog box, click the

dialog box you want to modify; then click Modify. 3 When you have finished modifying your custom piping

spec, on the External Custom Pipe Specs dialog box, click Close.

(Refer to the flowcharts in Icarus Reference, Chapter 18, for information on developing various aspects of piping.)

Click New on the Customer Piping Specs Manager to add a custom pipe specification. You can have a maximum of 100 custom piping specs per project and 600 in one file.

After creating a custom piping spec, you must export it to the library, giving it your new name.

To export the file to the library:


1 In the Piping Specs folder, right-click Custom; then click Export to Library on the pop-up menu.

The Duplicate Custom Piping Specs file based on PIPESPEC dialog box appears.

2 In the File Name field, type a file name for this piping

spec. You can also add a description of the piping spec in the File Description field.

3 Click OK.

A dialog box appears confirming that you have successfully added your newly-created piping spec to the library.

• Civil/Steel Specs

Civil and Steel design specifications, including wind data, seismic data, comprehensive strength, concrete ready-mix costs, concrete overpour percentage, rebar type and cost, seal slab thickness, number of formwork reuses, concrete type (standard, higher grade, or chemical-resistant), structure analysis type, unit cost and percent of purchased backfill when used in place of excavated soil, excavation slope ratio, and steel finish type (painted or galvanized).

• Instrumentation Specs

Instrumentation design specifications, including instrumentation type (electronic or pneumatic) and specifications for instrument transmission and thermocouple transmission: control valve type, control valve positioner, control valve position switch, temperature element type, flow element type, instrument transmitter type, distance from


component to junction box, whether to exclude air regulators if low pressure air is available, control valve center type (analog, digital, or none), and whether to have a conventional 4-20 mA wired system or a digital Fieldbus system.

Unlike a 4-20 mA system in which each instrument in the field requires its own set of wires to run to the local junction box and back to the control center, a Fieldbus system allows multiple instruments to share one set of cables. The Fieldbus systems are designed based on the distances involved (cable length), number of field instruments, instrument type, and power requirements.

If you select to use a Fieldbus system, also select, in the Connection Type box, the type of bricks and cable termination. Select “SC” for spring clamp connections. Select “ST” for screw terminal bricks and terminations. Both “SC” and “ST” use standard instrument cable. Select “MP” for a system designed with cable that is pre-cut and molded with pluggable terminations (and bricks with pluggable terminals). “MP” does not require installation hours to connect “pig-tail” terminations – the cables snap onto the bricks. An “MP” implementation requires the purchase of one pluggable device gland per instrument.

In an explosion-proof area, the Fieldbus system will consist of bricks and power supply units that are rated for intrinsically safe applications (I.S.-rated non-pluggable components by Hawke International). You can also, if using a Fieldbus system, select to include Fieldbus short-circuit protection for each “spur” in the Fieldbus segments. For 3-drop bricks, the short-circuit protection units are purchased separately; for all bricks of larger size, short-circuit protection is incorporated within the brick itself (if selected).

You can override these project-level instrumentation specs for a particular area when defining an area (see page XX461H284XX). For example, you can select to use a Fieldbus system in the Design Basis, but then make an exception for one area by selecting the conventional 4-20 mA wired system in the area’s instrumentation specs. However, Fieldbus short-circuit protection can only be defined at the project-level, using the Design Basis instrumentation specs.

• Electrical Specs

Electrical design specifications, including power supply frequency, class and division or zone, whether to use 3- or 4-


wire distribution system, voltage levels, wire specifications at the different voltage levels, and cable placement.

• Insulation Specs

Insulation design specifications, including thickness schedule, minimum temperature for hot insulation, equipment insulation type, equipment insulation jacket type, fire resistance rating for fireproofing on skirts, equipment fireproofing type, whether to include fireproofing on the outside or both sides of skirts, steel fire resistance fireproof rating, and steel fireproofing type, coverage, and installation (field or remote shop).

• Paint Specs

Paint design specifications, including number of primer coats, number of finish coats, and whether painting is performed in field shop or remote shop.

To edit Design Basis specifications: 1 Right-click on the specification category that you want to

define, and then click Edit on the pop-up menu.

Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays a specifications form for the selected category in the Main Window.


2 Enter the Design Basis specifications for the selected category.

3 Click OK to add the specifications to the project and close the specifications form.

Contingency and Miscellaneous Project Costs Contingency and Miscellaneous Project Costs include material contingency (as a percentage of each contract cost) and miscellaneous special charges for royalties, licenses, land, and so on

To define Contingency and Miscellaneous Project Costs: 1 In the Basis for Capital Costs folder, right-click on

Contingency and Misc. Project Costs and then click Edit on the pop-up menu.

Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays the cost specifications in the Main Window.


2 Enter the cost specifications. 3 Click OK to add the specifications to the project and close the

specifications form.

Escalation Escalation provides the ability to incorporate the effects of the constantly changing local and world economies. The Escalation feature lets you specify escalation indices for the following material and labor cost categories: • General materials • Design engineering • Construction manpower • Construction management

To define escalation: 1 Right-click on Escalation in the Basis for Capital Costs

folder; then click Edit.

Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays the Escalation Specs dialog box in the Main Window.


2 In the Escalation Method field, you can choose one of two

ways for reporting escalated costs:

Click to

SPREAD Define escalation to be included in all reported costs.

ACCUM Define escalation to be segregated from all costs and to be accumulated (into each of the four categories above) for summary reporting, and with costs to be reported at a user-defined condition.

Note: The system base indices are published in Icarus Reference. All user-entered costs (quoted cost items, quoted equipment costs, library items, material/labor lump sum additions, project indirects, and so on) are assumed to be valid at the user base time point. This may be a corporate-standard time point chosen as a basis for all projects.

Three indices are used to develop escalated costs: o System Base Indices (SBI): System-defined indices

that represent costs inherent to the particular version of the system.

o User Base Indices (UBI): User-entered indices that reference user-entered cost values. All system-developed costs (developed at SBI) are adjusted to UBI by multiplying the ratio (UBI/SBI).

o Escalation Indices (EI): User-entered indices that escalate all costs (both user-entered and system-generated) from the user base (UBI) to some other


point in time. This is done by multiplying all costs by the ratio (EI/UBI).

3 Enter or revise your specifications. 4 Click OK to apply your specifications to the project and close

the specifications form.

Engineering Workforce Aspen Capital Cost Estimator lets you define up to nine engineering workforces. For each engineering workforce, you can specify: • a percentage adjustment to the base (default) wage rates by

engineering phase. • the exact wage rate of any discipline, replacing the base wage

rate (as well as any percentage adjustments to the base).

Icarus Reference, Chapter 31, lists engineering disciplines and their base wage rates. The disciplines are grouped by phase and assigned numbers.

In addition to specifying engineering wage rates, you can specify: • engineering hours (by phase or discipline) and • engineering costs (either as lump sums or as percentages of

total costs)

Once defined, an engineering workforce can be linked to one or more contractors. If no workforce is specified, contractors use the default engineering workforce.

Engineering Phase

To define an engineering workforce by phase: 1 In the Engineering Workforce sub-folder, right-click By

Phase; then on the menu that appears, click Edit.


The Engineering Phase Info dialog box appears in the Main Window.

In defining a workforce, use one item column per engineering phase. A single item column (Item 1) is provided. Add more

columns using the Add button . 2 Specify the engineering workforce number. 3 Select an engineering phase. The choices are:

* All phases

B Basic engineering

D Detail engineering

P Procurement

H Home office construction services

F Field office supervision

S Startup, commissioning


E Engineering management

C Construction management

Phases E and C are for multi-contract projects only. 4 To replace system-calculated hours and/or costs for the

selected phase, enter engineering hours and/or engineering costs.

5 To increase or decrease wages for all disciplines under the selected phase, enter the percentage of the base wage rate. For example, entering “200” would double the wage rates; entering “50” would cut wage rates in half.

6 If desired, enter the payroll burden, indirects, and expenses for the selected phase, either as lump sums or as percentages of the total manpower cost.

If you want to define additional phases, click Add and complete the process (steps 2 through 6).

Note: In the form pictured here, Items 1 and 2 each define a phase for Engineering Workforce Number 1. Item 1 defines Basic Engineering (B). It sets the manhours at five percent over those calculated by the system (expressed as 105% of the calculated hours). It sets wages for all disciplines under Basic Engineering at ten percent above the base (expressed as 110% of the base wage rate). Item 2 defines Detailed Engineering, setting the wages for all disciplines under Detailed Engineering (D) at five percent below the base (expressed as 95% of the base wage rate).


7 Click OK to include the entered information in the project specifications and close the specifications form.

Engineering Discipline Defining an engineering workforce by discipline lets you replace base (default) wage rates and/or system-calculated hours.

To define an engineering workforce by discipline: 1 In the Engineering Workforce sub-folder, right-click on By

Discipline and click Edit on the pop-up.

Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays the Engineering Discipline Info dialog box in the Main Window.


A single item column defines up to four disciplines under a single phase. One item column (Item 1) is provided. Add more columns

using the Add button . 2 Enter an engineering workforce number. 3 Select an engineering phase. 4 Enter the number of an engineering discipline under the

selected phase. A list of discipline numbers and wage rates, grouped by phase, is provided in Chapter 34 of your Icarus Reference.

5 To replace the base wage rate for this discipline, as well as any adjustments to the base wage rate made on the Engineering Phase Info form, enter a new discipline wage rate.

6 To replace or adjust the system-calculated hours for this discipline, either enter discipline hours or enter a percentage adjustment.

7 Space is provided for defining up to three more disciplines under this phase. To define beyond three additional disciplines or to define disciplines under another phase, click Add and repeat the process (steps 2 through 7).

Note: Item 1 defines two disciplines under Basic Engineering (phase B) for Engineering Workforce Number 1. It does the following: Sets Engineering Workforce Number 1‘s wage rate for process engineering (discipline number 02) performed in the Basic Engineering phase at $42.00 and increases by ten percent the system-calculated hours for this discipline. Sets Engineering Workforce Number 1‘s wage rate for instrument design (discipline number 04) performed in the Basic Engineering phase at $39.20.


8 When you are finished, click OK to save the specifications and

close the form.

Drawing Types and Counts Aspen Capital Cost Estimator lets you account for additional drawings that may need to be produced during the Basic Engineering and Detailed Engineering phases.

To add a drawing type: 1 In the Engineering Workforce sub-folder, right-click on

Drawing Types and click Edit on the pop-up.

Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays the Drawing Type Info dialog box in the Main window.


2 Select either Basic or Detailed as the engineering phase. 3 Enter either an existing drawing number (see Icarus

Reference, Chapter 31, for drawing types and numbers) or enter a new drawing number in the range of 91-99.

4 Enter the title of the new drawing to be used in reports. 5 If you entered a new drawing number, select a drawing class

account. For example, select P (piping account) for a piping model drawing.

6 If you entered a new drawing number, select a drawing class discipline. For example, select 4 (model building) for a piping model drawing.

7 If you entered a new drawing number, enter the total manhours required to produce the drawing.

8 Click OK to save specifications and close the form.

To specify quantity of a drawing type: 1 In the Engineering Workforce sub-folder, right-click on

Drawing Count and click Edit on the pop-up.


Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays the Drawing Count Info form in the Main window.

2 Select either Basic or Detailed as the engineering phase. 3 Enter a drawing number. 4 Enter the number of the contractor to which the drawing is

assigned. 5 Use the Action Code field to select whether to ADD to the

calculated number of drawings, ADD new drawings (number 91-99), or CHANGE the calculated number of drawings.

Note: The CHANGE option is not allowed for drawing numbers 91-99.

6 Depending on whether you chose ADD or CHANGE as the Action Code, enter the number of drawings to add to the system-calculated quantity or the number with which to replace the system-calculated quantity. If you selected CHANGE, you have the option to instead enter a percentage adjustment in the Percent of Calculated Drawings field.

7 To change manhours to reflect the changed drawing count, select “A” in the Labor Adjustment Selection field.

If you want to adjust the count of a system developed drawing and also want to change engineering manhours to reflect the changed drawing count, DO NOT use the Action code ADD; always use the Action code CHANGE and Percent of calculated drawings for adjustments.

8 Click OK to save the specifications and close the form.


Construction Workforce Aspen Capital Cost Estimator lets you define construction workforces, which you can then link to contractors (see page XX462H118XX). For each construction workforce, you can specify wage rates (globally or by craft), workweek, productivities, overtime, and crew mixes. You can also make modifications to craft names, which apply to all construction workforces.

If no construction workforce is defined, contractors use the default construction workforce.

General Rates The General Wage Rates information defines wage rates, productivities, workweek, and overtime for all crafts in a construction workforce. To access, right-click on General Wage Rates in the Construction Workforce subfolder, and then click Edit.


Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays the Wage General Info specifications form in the Main window.

In the column labeled Item 1, you can define your first construction workforce. To define additional construction workforces, click Add.

Descriptions of the specifications follow.

Field Description

Construction workforce number

Number representing the workforce being defined.

Number of shifts Number of shifts used during construction. If any premium pay is involved with second and third shift work (beyond overtime pay), such premium should be indicated by a properly averaged craft rate per shift.

Productivity adjustment

Specifies whether to use multi-shift /workweek adjustments or not.

Indirects If wage rates are to be treated as all-inclusive, the indirects may be deleted for this workforce by specifying “-”. Selecting an all-in rate suppresses all construction indirects: fringes, burdens, small tools, construction rental equipment, and so on

All Crafts Percent of Base


Field Description

Workforce reference base

Enter B for system base

Wage Rate percent of base

Wage rates for all crafts as a percentage of reference base wage rates.

Productivity percent of base

Productivities for all crafts as a percentage of reference base wage rates.

All Crafts Fixed Rates

This input may be used to globally set the wage rates and productivities of all crafts in this workforce to fixed values. Wage rate all crafts

Specifies the fixed wage rate (in the project currency) for all crafts in the workforce. See discussion in Icarus Reference.

Productivity all crafts

Specifies the fixed productivity value for all crafts in this workforce. See discussion in Icarus Reference. If no value is specified, the system defaults to 100%.

Work week per shift

Refer to the description of workforces in Icarus Reference for the effect of changing the work week and number of shifts upon productivity and job duration. The standard workweek plus overtime must not exceed 84 hours per week per shift.

Standard work week

Specifies number of standard hours per week per man per shift.

Overtime Specifies number of overtime hours per week per man per shift.

Overtime rate percent standard

Specifies overtime pay expressed as a percentage of standard pay (for example, time and one half = 150%).

General Craft Wages

The general craft wages are for crafts that could appear in most crews and whose productivities and/or wage rates are dependent on the type of crew. Helper wage rate

UK Base only. Specifies wage rate for craft help as a fixed rate to be used in all crews.

Helper wage percent craft rate

UK Base only. Specifies the wage rate for craft help as a percent of the principal craft in the crew. This value must be less than 100%.

Foreman wage rate

Specifies the wage rate for foremen as a fixed rate to be used in all crews. Default: 110% of rate of highest paid craft in crew.

Foreman wage Specifies the wage rate for foreman as a percent


Field Description

percent craft rate of the highest paid craft in crew. This value must be greater than or equal to 100%. Default: 110% of rate of highest paid craft in crew.

Craft Rates Craft Rates set the wage rate and productivity individually for each craft.

To access: 1 Right-click on Craft Rates in the Construction Workforce

subfolder. 2 On the menu that appears, click Edit.

Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays the Wage Rate Info specifications form in the Main Window.

To add a new item: • Click Add.

Use these fields to set the wage rate and productivity individually for each craft in a workforce.

Field Description

Construction workforce number

Number representing the construction workforce being defined.

Craft wages/prod. Wage rates and productivities may be assigned to individual crafts. Those crafts not referenced are assigned wage rates and productivities specified in General Wage Rate or the system default values.

Craft code Identifies the craft to which the following wage rate and productivity apply.

The craft code must be an existing system craft code.

Wage rate/mh Specifies the wage rate (in the project


Field Description

currency) for this craft for standard hours.

Productivity Specifies the productivity of this craft as a percentage of the system’s base. (See discussion in Icarus Reference.)

Crew Mixes Use the Crew Mixes specifications form to allocate a percentage of man-hours from one craft to another for the purpose of modifying crew mixes.

To modify crew mixes: 1 Right-click on Crew Mixes in the Construction Workforce


Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays the Wage Mixture Info form in the Main window.

For each item, you can make up to seven different re-allocations of man-hours. To add a new item: Click Add. 3 Enter the number of the Construction Workforce to which the

modification applies. 4 In the From Craft Code column, enter the craft code of the

craft that will lose man-hours.

Note: See Icarus Reference, Chapter 30, for craft codes. 5 In the To Craft Code column, enter the craft code of the

craft that will gain man-hours. 6 In the Craft Transfer Percent column, enter percentage of

man-hours to be re-allocated.


7 Click OK to save the modifications and close the form. -or- Click Cancel to close the form without saving modifications.

Craft Names Aspen Capital Cost Estimator lets you modify the default craft names, which are listed in Chapter 30 of Icarus Reference.

To modify craft names: 1 Right-click on Craft Names in the Construction Workforce


Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays the Wage Name Info form in the Main window.

For each item, you can make up to three name changes. To add a new item, click Add. 3 In the Craft Code column, enter the craft code of the craft

you are re-naming. Craft Codes are listed in Icarus Reference, Chapter 30.

4 In the Craft Name column, enter the craft’s new name. 5 Click OK to save the modifications and close the form.

Code of Accounts Aspen Capital Cost Estimator contains a base set of 3-digit Code of Accounts (COA) to which costs and man-hours are allocated. See Icarus Reference, Chapter 34, for a detailed Icarus COA list. Aspen Capital Cost Estimator lets you add your own COA’s and re-allocate costs from Icarus COA’s to your new COA’s. When you completely re-define your COA’s, you must also define and allocate all indirect COA’s.

First, you must select the COA file.


To select a COA file: 1 Right-click on Code of Accounts in the Basis for Capital

Costs folder, and then click Select on the pop-up menu.

Aspen Capital Cost Estimator provides the file named DEFAULT. After selecting this file, you can modify it and save it as another file. You can then have multiple COA sets from which to choose.

2 Select the file and click OK.

Adding a COA Set and Allocating Costs The following instructions provide an example COA set for you to add. The instructions will then show you how to allocate material and labor costs to the new COA set.

To add a COA set: 1 Right-click on Code of Accounts in the Basis for Capital

Costs folder, and then click Edit from the pop-up menu.


The Modify COA Set dialog box appears.

2 Click Insert in the Account Definitions section. 3 In the Account Definition dialog box, enter an account

number, select a type, and enter a description (all in upper-case).

6 Click OK to add this COA. Then, repeat this step for each new

COA in the set.

Example set: COA Type Description 1000 EQ ALL CATEGORY A EQUIPMENT 2000 EQ ALL CATEGORY B EQUIPMENT 3000 P ALL PIPING 4000 C ALL CIVIL 5000 ST ALL STEEL 6000 I ALL INSTRUMENTATION


7000 E ALL ELECTRICAL 8000 IN ALL INSULATION 9000 PT ALL PAINT

To re-allocate costs from Icarus COA’s to your new COA’s: 1 At the Modify COA Set dialog box, click Insert in the

Account Allocations section. 2 In the Account Allocation dialog box, enter an Icarus COA

or range of Icarus COA’s (using the From and To fields) and then enter the new COA to which you want to allocate the Icarus COA’s material and labor.

Entering a COA only in the Material field, as shown above, will allocate both material and labor to the COA entered in the Material field. You could allocate material to one COA and labor to another.

3 Click OK when you are finished making the entry, and then continue to allocate each Icarus COA or range of Icarus COA’s to one of the new COA’s.

Example set: From To Material 100 199 1000 200 299 2000 300 399 3000 400 499 4000 500 599 5000 600 699 6000 700 799 7000


800 899 8000 900 999 9000

When you are finished, the Modify COA Set dialog box should look as follows:

Specifying Exceptions to Account Allocations After you have defined the account allocations, you may choose to specify exceptions to these new allocations.

Example: We have allocated the costs of all piping — Icarus COA’s 300-399 — to COA 3000. However, we wish to allocate the material costs of 6-8 INCH 304P Pipe to a new account, COA 3201, and we wish to allocate the labor costs of 6-8 INCH 304P Pipe to another new account, COA 3202.

To specify the exceptions in the above example: 1 First, create COA 3201, type P, with the description MATL SS

PIPE 6-18 INCH and create COA 3202, type P, with the description MATL SS PIPE 6-18 INCH.

2 Identify in Icarus Reference, Chapter 34, “Code of Accounts,” which range of Icarus COA’s to allocate to 3201 and 3202. In this case, it is COA’s 320 to 327, representing stainless steel pipe.

3 Click Insert in the Account allocations section


4 Enter “320” in the From field and “327” in the To field. Enter “3201” in the Material field and enter “3202” in the Labor field.

5 Click on the Exceptions checkbox to activate the lower portion of the dialog box. Enter “304P” as the Material.

Note: Icarus Reference, Chapter 28, “Material Selections,” provides the symbols for stainless steel and other materials. Many stainless steels are available. This example is limited to 304P for brevity. 6 In the From Size field, enter “6.” In the To Size field, enter

“18.” 7 Make sure that the I/P check box is selected.

Note: COA Modifier and Subtype let you be more specific about the items you want allocated to a new COA. They are described in Icarus Reference, Chapter 35, “Database Relations”.

8 Click OK. This moves all material costs for all 6-18 INCH 304P

pipe, fittings, and valves to COA 3201 and all labor costs for these items to COA 3202.

9 When you are finished, review the Account Allocation order to see that the accounts are in the correct order. Then click OK to save your work and exit the COA Sets Manager.

Indexing The Material and Man-hour specification forms in the Indexing folder let you manipulate the material and/or man-hour costs for process equipment and installation bulks. You can


also adjust these indexes by location by using the Location specification form.

For example, you could specify to increase the material costs associated with a type of process equipment.

Indexing is used to tailor Aspen Capital Cost Estimator to mimic your work methods and costs. If your equipment costs for a category are consistently offset from Aspen Capital Cost Estimator’s values, use Indexing to correct that.

When calibrating a new cost basis, you can update an existing Project Level Indexing file into a new one. In this case the old and new Project Level Indexing will not be different but will be direct replacements.

Material, Manhour, and Location indices are externalized to a single external file. You can select an external indexing file at the project level, edit it, and use the local file in a project.

At the area level, you can edit the indexing, but you cannot choose another external indexing file. The evaluation engine uses indices from the external file for project evaluation.

Adjusting Indexes

To adjust the Material or Man-hour index: 1 Right-click Material or Man-hour and click Edit.


2 To adjust the index for all equipment or for all of one of the

installation bulks, enter the index value in the box provided. For example, entering “200” in the Equipment box will double the material costs for all items under the equipment account group.

To adjust the index for a sub-category, click the arrow-button in the box. This accesses a similar form listing sub-categories corresponding to the Code of Accounts (see Icarus Reference, Chapter 34, for a complete list). Adjustments to a sub-category over-ride adjustments to the account-group. 3 Click OK to close the form and apply changes.

To adjust by location: 1 Right-click on Location and click Edit.

2 Type the location description.


3 Type the Code of Account (COA) to indicate the start of the COA range, or click the red arrow; then click Select by the subcategory on the COA Subcategory Selection window.

The Equipment COA Selection dialog box appears.

4 Click Select again by the COA.


The COA is entered on the form. 5 Do the same to indicate the end of the COA range. 6 Type the amount to escalate material costs and/or the

amount to escalate man-hour costs. 7 To escalate another range, click Add. 8 Click OK to close the form and apply changes.

Editing an Index file inside a project

To edit an Index inside a project: 1 In Project Basis view, right-click Indexing. 2 Click Select.

The Indexing dialog box appears with three options (Material, Man Hour, and Location.)

3 Click the type of index you want to edit; then click Modify. 4 Edit the index; then click OK.


Deleting an Index File 1 In Project Basis view, right-click Indexing. 2 Click Select.

A list of the available index files appears.

3 Click the type of index you want to delete; then click OK. The Index file is loaded. 4 In Project Basis view, right-click Indexing. 5 Click Remove Selection.

A warning message appears telling you that the specifications file will be deleted. 6 If you want to remove the Index file you selected, click Yes.

Adding Modified Index Files to the Library

To add a modified index file to the library: 1 In Project Basis view, right-click Indexing. 2 Click Select.

The Indexing dialog box appears with three options (Material, Man Hour, and Location.)


3 Click the type of index you want to edit; then click Modify. 4 Edit the index; then click OK. 5 In Project Basis view, right-click Indexing. 6 On the menu that appears, click Export to Library.

A warning message telling you that the current COA specifications must also be exported appears. 7 Click OK.

The Duplicate Code of Accounts file based on Indexing dialog box appears.

8 On the Duplicate Code of Accounts file based on

Indexing dialog box, type a file name (required) and description (optional) for the new file.

9 Click OK.

A message appears indicating the new indexing file was successfully created in the Library. The new indexing file appears in the Palette window under Indexing.


Modifying an empty Indexing file outside the project 1 Launch Aspen Capital Cost Estimator without any project

open. 2 In Palette view, click the Libraries tab. 3 On the Libraries tab, expand the Indexing Library folder. 4 Double-click EMPTY to open the Indexing dialog box.

The Indexing dialog box appears displaying four options.

5 Right-click COA file; on the menu that appears, click Modify.

The Select a Code of Account File dialog box appears. 6 In the Code of Account Files list, click DEFAULT COA file as

the Indexing COA. 7 In the Indexing dialog box that appears, click one of the

following: o Material o Man Hour o Location

All indices are initialized to 100%. You can modify the indices to your specifications. 8 When you have modified the index or indices, save the

external file.

Equipment Rental Aspen Capital Cost Estimator automatically develops rental equipment durations and costs based on your project work


items. You may adjust or delete these items and/or add your own to more accurately reflect the project.

Adjusting and Deleting System Items

To adjust or delete system equipment rental items: 1 In the Basis for Capital Costs folder, right-click on

Equipment Rental, then, on the menu that appears, click Edit on the pop-up menu.

Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays the Equipment Rental Info specifications form in the Main Window. A column for the first rental item, labeled Item 1, is provided. If you need to add a column, click Add.

2 Enter an item description and rental equipment number. See Icarus Reference, Chapter 32, for a complete list of construction equipment and associated equipment numbers.

3 Click a Rental Action Code.

Click to

ADD Add days to the rental item’s Rental Days Required. You cannot use this option to adjust Monthly Rental Rate.

CHANGE Replace the rental item’s Rental Days Required and/or the Monthly Rental Rate.

DELETE Delete the rental item.

Note: To change an existing item’s rental rate, you must select CHANGE. 4 In the Rental Days Required field, depending on the action

code, either enter the number of days to add (action code is ADD) or the total number of days (action code is CHANGE).

5 If you’ve selected the CHANGE action code, you can enter a new rate in the Monthly Rate field or leave it blank to use the system’s default rate.

You cannot adjust an existing item’s monthly rate using the ADD action code.


Here, the number of days required for Item 1, DUMP TRUCK, is being changed to 5, and its monthly rate is being changed to $6,500. Two days are being added to the days required for Item 2, CRANE.

6 Click OK to save the specifications and close the specifications form.

Entering New Rental Items Aspen Capital Cost Estimator provides empty slots in every equipment class for user-entered equipment items. Any that you enter are added to those that Aspen Capital Cost Estimator develops based on your project work items.

To enter a new rental item: 1 In the Basis for Capital Costs folder, right-click on

Equipment Rental and then click Edit on the pop-up menu. Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays the equipment rental specifications form in the Main Window. A column for the first rental item, labeled Item 1, is provided. If you need to add a column, click Add.

2 Enter an item description. The first 20 characters will appear in the Description column on the Equipment Rental Summary report. The next 16 characters will appear in the size column on the Equipment Rental Summary report.

Note: The Equipment Rental Summary report is not available for Aspen Capital Cost Estimator. However, while the detail description will not appear in any report at this time, the cost of the item will be included in the equipment rental cost total provided on the Project Indirect Summary report. 3 Enter an equipment number. Numbers 1-20 are for the

equipment class AUTOMOTIVE. All other numbers will share


the equipment class of the equipment number before it. For example, an item assigned equipment number 79 would be classified EARTHMOVING because that is the equipment class of equipment number 78. Each equipment class includes unused numbers for user-entries. Refer to Icarus Reference, Chapter 32, for a complete list of construction equipment and associated equipment numbers.

4 Click Add as the Rental Action Code. 5 Enter the Rental Days Required. 6 Enter the Monthly Rate. 7 Click OK to save the specifications and close the specifications

form.

Systems Use the features of the Systems tree diagrams to define, track, and revise power distribution and process control networks.

Power Distribution The Power Distribution tree diagram lets you define the electrical configuration and loads in areas and process control centers.

You can specify: • the quantity and size of transmission line(s) • main and unit substation(s) • the degree of redundancy • the type and method of placement of distribution cable

The Power Distribution specifications work in conjunction with the electrical specifications at the project and area levels.

Most users define the distribution configuration (for example, which main substation is to feed which “downstream” unit substation) and cable placement. Aspen Capital Cost Estimator then sizes the items to satisfy the start-up and running electrical loads (drivers, lighting, tracing, and so on) always heading “upstream.”


To define power distribution: 1 In the Systems subfolder, right-click on Power Distribution

and then click Edit on the pop-up.

Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays the Power Distribution tree in the Main window.

New projects include one default main substation feeding a default unit substation. The main substation is assumed to be an existing one, so no electrical bulk quantities will be generated for it. If the electrical bulk quantities are required in the estimate, you should change the input parameters for this default main substation. All newly added and imported areas, and newly added process control items, are automatically linked to the default unit substation. 2 Use the tree diagram to define the power distribution

network. A description of the tree diagram actions follows.

Adding Power Distribution Items Power distribution items include: • Transmission lines • Main substations • Unit substations

Power distribution items are sized and cost estimated based on information provided with the project design basis, power distribution specifications, area specifications, and the list of equipment and bulk items requiring electrical power.

To add a power distribution item: 1 Select an item in the tree diagram.

The added power distribution item is added to the tree diagram under the select item.


To add Do this

Transmission line Select the “Project” item.

Main substation Select the “Project” or a transmission line item.

Unit substation Select the “Project,” a transmission line, a main substation, or a unit substation item.

2 Right-click on the item and, depending on the item selected, click:

Add Transmission Line

–or–

Add Main Substation

–or–

Add Unit Substation

A dialog box appears in which to enter a name for the item.

3 Enter a name and click OK.

Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays the specifications form for the new item.

4 Enter the specifications; then click OK.


Adding Links to Areas You can link a unit substation to an area (or multiple areas), making it the power source for load centers in the specified area(s).

To add a link to an area: 1 Right-click on the unit substation in the tree diagram and click

Link Area on the pop-up menu.

Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays the Link to Area dialog box.

2 Select an unlinked area and click OK.

On the tree diagram, the linked area is shown under the unit substation.

Adding Links to Control Systems You can link a unit substation to a process control system (or multiple systems).

To add a link to a process control system: 1 Right-click on the unit substation and click Link Control

System on the pop-up menu. 2 Select an unlinked control system and click OK.

On the tree diagram, the linked control system is shown under the unit substation.


To unlink a control system: • Right-click on the control system in the tree diagram; then

click Unlink on the pop-up menu.

Unlinking The Unlink command lets you disconnect an area or process control item from a unit substation:

To unlink an area from a process control item: • In the tree diagram, right-click on the area you want to

delete; then, on the menu that appears, click Unlink.

Deleting Power Distribution Items Should power distribution network specifications for the project change, or when you want to explore alternatives, it may be necessary to delete previously defined power distribution items (transmission lines, main substations, unit substations).

To delete a power distribution item: 1 In the tree diagram, right-click on the item you want to

delete. 2 Click Delete. Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays a confirmation dialog box.

3 Click Yes to confirm the deletion.

Process Control If you do not enter Process Control specifications, Aspen Capital Cost Estimator assumes that process control is provided to all areas by a default digital control system consisting of a digital control center reporting to an operator center. The control and operator centers are automatically sized to meet requirements.


You can define a process control network using the Process Control tree diagram. The tree diagram items represent the process control network, consisting of: • Operator centers (digital only) • Control centers (digital or analog) • Programmable Logic Control (PLC) Centers • Specialty (SPC) centers

Use the tree diagram to define the network from the top down. Reporting to the “Project” item, you may add operator centers, control centers, or PLCs. Control centers may report to operator centers. Digital, analog, and PLC control centers may be mixed within the same project.

When a project estimate is run, Aspen Capital Cost Estimator sizes all process control items and reports their sizes, ratings, and installation details at the end of the report for the last area. Details on field instrumentation and final control elements with their associated air supply details are reported on a component basis. Details for area junction boxes, cable trays, and so on are reported on an area basis.

To define process control: 1 In the Systems folder, right-click Process Control; then, on

the menu that appears, click Edit The Process Control tree diagram appears, displaying the process control network.

2 Use the tree diagram to define the desired process control

network and its reporting structure. A description of the tree diagram actions follows.

Adding Process Control Items

Process control items include: • Operator centers


• Control centers • PLC centers. • Specialty centers

To add a process control item: 1 Select an item in the tree diagram. The new process control

item will be placed under the selected item.

To add Do this

Operator center Select the “Project” item.

Control center Select the “Project” item (for analog or digital) or an operator center item (for digital).

PLC center Select the “Project” item or operator center.

Specialty center Select the “Project” item or operator center.

2 Right-click on the item and, depending on the item being added, click one of the following on the pop-up menu: o Add Operator Center o Add Control Center o Add PLC Center o Add SPC Center (Specialty center)

A dialog box appears in which to enter a name for the item.

3 Type the name of the item and click OK.

The item is added to the tree diagram. 4 To edit the item’s specifications, right-click on the item and

click Edit on the pop-up menu.


5 Click OK to save the specifications.

Adding Links to Areas

You can link control centers, PLC centers, and SPC centers to areas. A center serves instrumentation within the area(s) to which it is linked.

To add a link to an area: 1 Right-click the item in the tree diagram; then, on the menu

that appears, Link Area. Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays the Link to Area dialog box.

2 Click an unlinked area; then click OK.


On the tree diagram, the linked area is shown under the selected process control item.

Unlinking

The Unlink option lets you disconnect an area from a process control item.

To unlink an area from a process control item: 1 In the tree diagram, right-click the area you want to delink. 2 On the menu that appears, click Unlink.

Deleting Process Control Items

As the specifications for the project scenario change, or when you want to explore alternatives, it may be necessary to delete process control items (operator centers, control centers, PLC centers, and SPC centers).

To delete a process control item: 1 In the tree diagram, right-click the item you want to delete. 2 Click Delete.

Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays a confirmation dialog box.

3 Click Yes to confirm deletion.

Contracts The tree diagrams in the Contracts folder let you define responsibility and assign scope of effort to contractors for engineering, procurement, and construction. There are two tree-diagrams:


• Contractors: Use to specify each contractor’s indirect cost structure and establish the responsibility of one contractor to another for cost reporting. In addition, engineering and construction workforce characteristics can be assigned to each contractor.

• Scope: Use to specify sets of contractors and assign scope of work to each contractor in each set.

Contractors To access the Contractors tree diagram: • In the Contracts subfolder, right-click Contractors; then, on

the menu that appears, click Edit.

Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays the Contractors tree diagram in the Main window.

Aspen Capital Cost Estimator comes set up with one default contractor with the name Owner.

From the pop-up menu accessed by right-clicking on an item in the tree diagram, you can: • Add contractors • Link contractors to workforces • Edit contractor definitions • Delete contractors • Close the tree diagram

Descriptions of these actions follow.


Adding a Contractor

To add a contractor: 1 In the tree diagram, right-click Owner; then, on the menu

that appears, click Add Contractor.

Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays the Add a New Contractor dialog box.

2 Type the name of the contractor and click OK.

Adding Links to Workforces

Workforces are defined in the Project Basis view’s Engineering Workforce folder (page XX463H80XX) and the Construction Workforce folder (page XX464H88XX). Once you have defined workforces, you can link contractors to them.

To link a contractor to a workforce: 1 Right-click on the contractor in the tree diagram and,

depending on the type of workforce you wish to add, click:

Link to Constr. Work Force

–or–

Link to Engg. Work Force

Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays a dialog box listing workforces by number.


2 Click the number representing the desired workforce and

click OK.

In the tree diagram, the workforce appears under the contractor.

Unlinking

The Unlink command lets you disconnect a workforce from a contractor.

To unlink a workforce from a contractor: • Right-click on the workforce in the tree diagram and click

Unlink on the pop-up menu.

Editing Contractor Definitions

To edit a contractor definition: 1 Right-click the contractor in the tree diagram; then, on the

menu that appears, click Edit.


2 Type or revise specifications on the Contract Definition dialog box.

3 Click OK to save and close.

Deleting a Contractor

To delete a contractor: 1 Right-click the item in the tree diagram; then, on the menu

that appears, click Delete.


You are prompted to confirm deletion of the contractor from workforce link.

2 Click Yes.

Scope Use the Scope tree diagram to specify contractor sets and assign scope of work to each contractor in each set.

To access the Scope tree diagram: • In the Contracts subfolder, right-click Scope; then click

Edit.

Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays the tree diagram in the Main window.

Note: All areas (whether added or imported), power distribution items, and process control items are automatically linked to the default contract set until otherwise specified.


Adding Contractor Sets A contractor set (Conset) is a subset of all contractors defined in a project. A contractor joins a Conset when it is assigned responsibility for categories of work.

To add a Conset: 1 Right-click Project in the tree diagram; then, on the menu

that appears, click Add Conset.


Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays the Contract Scope specifications form.

2 Use the Scope Description field to describe the responsibilities for the Conset (for example, All Engineering, Above Ground Mechanical, Substations).

3 To assign a contractor to a category of work, click the drop-down arrow in the category field and select a contractor number.

4 Click OK to apply the specifications to the project and close the specifications form. The newly added Conset will appear in the tree diagram.

Adding Links

The Link commands allow you to assign each contractor set responsibility for the scope of work in a segment of the project.

To link an item to a contractor set: 1 Right-click a Conset in the tree diagram and click one of the

following commands on the pop-up menu that appears:

Click To do this

Link Area Link a previously defined area to the selected contractor set.

Link to Power Distribution Link a previously defined power distribution item to the selected contractor set.

Link to Process Control Link a previously defined process control item to the selected contractor set.


2 A dialog box appears corresponding to the selected link command. The following dialog box appears if you select the Link to Process Control command.

Note: All areas, power distribution items, and process control items are automatically linked to the default Conset until otherwise specified; therefore, you may first have to unlink items from the default Conset in order to make them available. See “Unlinking” on page XX465H124XX for instructions. 3 Click OK to link the selected item to the Conset.

The item appears under the Conset on the tree diagram. In the tree diagram shown below, the process control item named “Monomer CTL (CTL 2)” is linked to the Conset named Substations (Conset Number 4).

Unlinking

The Unlink command lets you remove responsibility for the scope of work in a segment of the project.

To unlink an item from a Conset: • Right-click a linked item in the tree diagram; then, on the

menu that appears, and click Unlink.

The item no longer appears under the Conset and is now available to be linked to another Conset.


Editing Contractor Sets

The Edit command lets you assign responsibility for engineering, purchasing materials, and installation to previously defined contractors for the selected contractor set (Conset).

To edit a Conset: 1 Right-click on a Conset in the tree diagram; then, on the

menu that appears, click Edit.

The Conset Specifications dialog box appears.

2 Select a specification.

Select to

Engineering Assign responsibility for engineering tasks.

Purchase materials Assign responsibility for purchasing on an account-by-account basis.

If you select Purchase Materials, skip to Step 6.

Installation Define responsibility for installation of all field material on an account-by-account basis. Construction equipment rental appropriate for each work item is automatically assigned to the installation contractor.

If you select Installation, skip to Step 6.

Exceptions Specify exceptions to scope by Code of Account (COA) or COA range.

If you select Exceptions, skip to Step 10.

If you selected Engineering: 3 Click Modify to assign responsibility for engineering.

The Contract Scope Form appears. 4 Enter the specifications. 5 Click OK to apply your specifications to the project and return

to the Conset Specifications dialog box.


If you selected Purchase Materials or Installation: 6 Click Modify to assign responsibility for the selected task.

A form appears listing categories of materials to be purchased or installed (depending upon your selection).

7 Click the arrow on a material category field to select the

contractor who will be responsible for purchasing/installing this category of material in this Conset.

8 Click OK to apply the specifications to the project and return to the Conset Specifications dialog box.

9 Click Close to close the dialog box.

If you selected Exceptions: 10 Click Modify to assign exceptions.

The Contract Scope Exception dialog box appears.

One blank item column is provided. To add an item column, click Add.


11 Enter the Code of Account (COA) or COA range for which the exception applies.

12 Enter the number of the contractor responsible for this COA or COA range.

13 In the Exception Type field, select whether the contractor is responsible for purchase (PURC) or installation (INSTL) of this COA or COA range.

14 Click OK to apply the exceptions and close the form.

Deleting Contractor Sets The Delete command lets you delete previously defined contractor sets (Consets).

Note: Consets can only be deleted if no items are linked to the contractor set. Any linked items must first be unlinked.

To delete a Conset: • Right-click the Conset in the tree diagram; then, on the menu

that appears, click Delete.

Importing old Standard basis files 1 Open your Aspen Capital Cost Estimator Software. 2 Go to the Libraries tab. 3 Click Basis for Capital Costs. 4 Right-click either Inch-Pound or Metric. 5 Click IMPORT.

The dialog that appears defaults to looking for the ICARUS 2000 specs file. 6 Browse to the specs file you want to import. 7 Click the specs file to import.

Your ICARUS 2000 template (standard basis file) is now in the new Aspen Capital Cost Estimator system.


Customer External Files When certain specifications, such as pipe insulation thickness, are not entered by the user, Aspen In-Plant Cost Estimator refers to ASCII format files to make the appropriate selection. These files are accessible in the Palette’s Libraries view. There, in the Customer External Files library, these files are divided into subfolders that correspond to the categories in Project Explorer’s Customer External Files folder. When no project is open, you can create in the Palette a duplicate of a default or template file, assigning it a different name (see page XX466H215XX for instructions). You can then open the file (stored at AspenTech/Economic Evaluation V7.1/Data, unless location is changed in Preferences) in any ASCII text editor and customize the rules and specifications. (Refer to Icarus Reference when customizing files. Chapter 23 of Icarus Reference provides instructions on how to customize an insulation specs file.)

To use a customer external file, you will need to select it in Project Explorer. Otherwise, Aspen In-Plant Cost Estimator uses the default file.

To select a file: 1 Right-click the category. 2 On the menu that appears, click Edit.

A selection dialog box appears.

3 Click the file you want to use.


4 Click OK.

Project Execution Schedule Settings Aspen Capital Cost Estimator generates a CPM barchart planning schedule based on the scope of work defined for the project. The project schedule includes dates and durations for the following: • Design engineering • Procurement • Delivery of materials and equipment • Site development • Construction • Start-up and commissioning

The construction schedule is integrated with the cost estimate to provide a basis for the schedule-dependent costs such as equipment rental requirements, field supervision, and construction management.

Adjusting Schedule and Barcharts

To adjust schedule and barcharts: 1 In the Project Execution Schedule Settings subfolder,

right-click on Adjust Schedule and Barcharts and click Edit on the pop-up menu.


The Schedule Adjustments specifications dialog box appears in the Main Window.

2 In the Start Engineering Phase field, select whether to

start engineering with the Detailed Engineering or Basic Engineering.

3 Specify starting dates for engineering and construction (required to generate barchart schedule reports).

4 Specify percent adjustments to the system-generated schedule for engineering, delivery of equipment and plant bulk items, and construction manpower activities.

5 Specify total construction duration in weeks. Construction includes sitework, civil, and mechanical erection.

6 Specify up to five equipment classes for which to include separate procurement/installation activity bars (see Icarus Reference, Chapter 36, Equipment Fabricate/Ship Items, for a list of equipment classes). See the next subsection for instructions on setting delivery times for equipment classes.

7 If desired, change the symbols used for printing elements of the barchart.


8 Click OK to save the schedule and barchart adjustments and close the specifications form. -or- Click Cancel to close the form without saving changes.

Setting Delivery Times for Equipment Classes

To set vendor fabrication and shipping times for equipment class: 1 In the Project Execution Schedule Settings subfolder,

right-click on Equipment Class Delivery Times and click Edit.

The Schedule Equipment Classes specifications form appears in the Main Window.

2 For each equipment class, specify the number of weeks

needed to fabricate and ship equipment after vendor data approval.

3 Click OK to save the specifications and close the form. -or- Click Cancel to close the form without saving changes.


Scheduling Individual Project Components You can specify up to five project components to appear with separate procurement and installation activity bars in the barchart. For each specified component, you can set vendor fabrication and shipping time.

To schedule project components: 1 In the Project Execution Schedule Settings subfolder,

right-click on Equipment Item Delivery Times and click Edit.

The Schedule Equipment Items specifications form appears in the Main window.

2 Enter the tag number of the project component for which to include a separate activity bar in the barchart.

3 Enter the number of weeks required for the vendor to fabricate and ship the project component.

4 Repeat this process (steps 2 and 3) to schedule up to five project components.



Adding Bar Chart Items You can define up to four custom-designed bars. For example, you might define specific bars for funding approval and permits. (These bars have no effect on the calculated construction duration.)

To add bar chart items: 1 In the Project Execution Schedule Settings subfolder,

right-click on Add Barchart Items; then click Edit.

The Schedule Bar Items specifications form appears in the Main Window.

Note: A blank column is included for Item 1. To add an additional item, click Add.

2 Enter a description for the activity bar being added. 3 Specify a start and finish date for the activity. 4 Select a bar position: top of barchart (T), basic engineering

(B), detailed engineering (D), procurement (P), sitework (S), construction (C), end of barchart (E).

5 To add another bar, click Add and repeat steps 2-4. You can have a maximum of four user-defined bars.



IPS Project Schedule Settings Note: IPS Project Schedule Settings are only included in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator if you are licensed to use Aspen Icarus Project Scheduler (IPS).

If you are licensed to use Aspen Icarus Project Scheduler (IPS) and you selected at startup to use IPS in the Aspen Capital Cost Estimator environment, the IPS Project Schedule Settings folder is included in the Project Explorer’s Basis view.

Using these settings, you can make adjustments to the Primavera Enterprise schedules produced by Aspen Capital Cost Estimator.

Using Aspen Icarus Project Scheduler (IPS) in the Aspen Capital Cost Estimator Environment At Startup, select the Aspen Icarus Project Scheduler check box in the Options dialog box. This option is not selected by default.


Note: If the Options dialog box does not appear at Startup, open Preferences (Tools | Options | Preferences). On the General tab, mark the Display Options Choice Dialog on Aspen Capital Cost Estimator Startup box.

As a result of selecting to use Aspen IPS within Aspen Capital Cost Estimator, an additional folder for IPS Project Schedule Settings appears in Project Explorer’s Project Basis view.

Note: Double-asterisks (**) indicate that the specifications do not apply to pipeline projects.

Changes made to the IPS Project Schedule Settings will be reflected in the scheduling reports generated for display in Primavera. The following are descriptions of the settings.

Schedule Appearance Adjustments

Title

To enter a project schedule title to replace the system-generated title: 1 Right-click on Title and click Edit. 2 Enter a title, up to 60 characters.


3 Click Apply.

Description Modification - Engineering

To modify an engineering activity description: 1 Right-click on Engineering and click Edit on the pop-up

menu.

If you have not previously entered a description modification, there should be one blank column (Item 1). If it has already been filled-in, click Add to add a new column in which to enter a modification. 2 Select an activity or group of activities for which the

description modification is to be made. This is done by specifying all or part of the Activity Number.

The parts of the Activity Number are broken up into the fields under ACTIVITY NUMBER. Activity Numbers, which are listed on pages XX467H677XX through XX468H716XX in Appendix A, have 10 characters. If you want to modify a group of activities, you can enter


“wildcard” asterisks in some fields. At least one of the fields (besides the two preset fields) must contain numbers.

Note: See Appendix A for a list of Activity Numbers. • Preset engineering field 1

The first three characters of the Activity Number are fixed and the same for all activities. They are always “000”.

• Engineering phase The fourth character of the Activity Number indicates the major engineering phase: 0 – Basic engineering phase 1 – Detail engineering phase 2 – Procurement phase To select all phases, enter an asterisk (*).

• Engineering contractor number The fifth and sixth characters of the Activity Number indicate the engineering contract number. For fixed project-level activities, these characters will be “00”. The engineering contract number is determined based on your specifications for contractors under Basis for Capital Costs in the Project Basis (see page XX469H117XX). It must be a number between 01 and 40. If all engineering contractor numbers are to be selected, enter two asterisks (**).

• Account group number

Exception: Where applicable, the seventh and ninth characters of the Activity Number indicate the process equipment class (01-26). Equipment classes are defined in Appendix C.

The seventh character of the Activity Number indicates the account group number. It is derived from the first character of the Code of Accounts. 0, 1, 2 – Equipment or general 3 – Piping 4 – Civil 5 – Steelwork 6 – Instrumentation 7 – Electrical 8 – Insulation 9 – Painting


If all account groups are to be selected for modification, enter one asterisk (*). • Preset engineering field 2

The eighth character of the Activity Number is fixed and the same for all activities. It is always “0”.

• Sequence in account group number The ninth and tenth numbers provide sequential grouping within the major hierarchy of the first eight characters. If all numbers within a sequence group are to be selected, enter two asterisks (**).

Note: where applicable, the seventh and ninth characters of the Activity Number indicate the process equipment class (01-26). Equipment classes are defined on page XX470H725XX.

3 In the Description and tag mod. Option field, select whether to modify both the description and the tag (default), only the description, or only the tag.

4 If you are modifying the activity description, enter the new description in the Engg. activity description field (up to 32 characters).

5 If you are modifying the tag, enter the new tag in the Tag field (up to 12 characters). It will be used in place of the tag (if any) provided by the system. The tag may be used as a continuation of the description.

6 To modify another activity description, click Add. A new column will appear. Repeat the process for the other activity description.

7 Click Apply when done. 8 Click Cancel to close the form.


Description Modification – Construction

To modify a construction activity description: 1 Right-click on Construction and click Edit on the pop-up

menu.

If you have not previously entered a description modification, there should be one blank item column (Item 1). If it has already been filled-in, click Add to add a new item column in which to enter a modification. 2 Select an activity or group of activities for which the


The Activity Number is broken up into the fields under ACTIVITY NUMBER. Construction Activity Numbers, which are listed in Appendix B, have 10 characters. If you want to modify a group of activities, you can enter “wildcard” asterisks in some fields. However, at least one of the fields must contain numbers. o Area number

The first and second characters of the Activity Number indicate the Area number, 01 through 90, or other project-level items, such as substations, control panel and power transmission lines, which always use 91. If activities from all Areas are to be selected, enter two asterisks (**).

o Identification number


The third through fifth characters contain the user-specified reference number from the specifications form for equipment items and plant bulks. For substations, the fourth and fifth characters contain the substation reference number (01-99) specified by the user or, if not specified, the System default reference number of 00. If all reference numbers are to be selected, enter three asterisks (***).

Note: See Appendix D for the Equipment Code definitions. o Equipment type

The sixth and seventh characters contain the Equipment Code. See Appendix D, page XX471H727XX, for Equipment Code definitions. All other activities have a fixed identifier in positions six and seven of the activity number, as listed in Activity Numbering Conventions table on page XX472H718XX. Enter two asterisks (**) if all Equipment Type numbers are to be selected.

Note: The construction activities are listed, beginning on page XX473H718XX (in Appendix B), by the last three characters of the Activity Number. These last three characters form the account group number and account code.

o Account group number

The eighth character, the account group number, refers to the type of work performed in the activity. The account group number combined with the account code (in the field below), form the three-character code by which the construction and site development activities are listed beginning on page XX474H717XX (Appendix B). If all account group numbers are to be selected, enter an asterisk (*).

o Account code

Enter the ninth and tenth digits of the Activity Code for the activities to be selected for modification (that is,, excluding the first character, which is the Account Group number, above). If all Activity Codes are to be selected, enter two asterisks (**).

o Contractor number

The eleventh and twelfth characters are the contractor numbers. If all contractors are to be selected, enter two asterisks (**)



4 If you are modifying the activity description, enter the new description in the Constr. activity description field (up to 32 characters).



7 Click Apply when done.

Schedule Adjustments by Duration The activity duration and construction crew size are interrelated, such that an adjustment to the duration will cause an inversely proportional adjustment to the activity crew size, and vice versa. You may specify either a duration adjustment, a maximum crew size, a minimum crew size, or all three. If a conflict occurs, the crew size adjustment will override the duration adjustment.

If not adjusted, durations are calculated for each activity based on the type of activity and associated direct construction man-hours.

Crew Size You can adjust the system activity durations by entering minimum/maximum crew sizes for various construction activities within each account group.


To adjust crew size: 1 Right-click on Crew Size and click Edit on the pop-up menu.

2 Specify minimum and maximum crew sizes; then click Apply.

Crafts The Craft Adjustments form lets you modify the system-defined crafts. The craft code and craft description may be completely replaced by a user-defined code and description.

In addition, the maximum craft pool sizes may be modified as required. Modifying the craft pool sizes will affect the activity durations and the overall job durations.

To adjust a craft: 1 Right-click on Crafts and click Edit on the pop-up menu. 2 Select the craft to be adjusted by entering the System craft

code. See Icarus Reference, Chapter 30, for lists of craft codes by Country Base.

3 Enter a numeric (01-99) User craft code to substitute for the preceding System craft code.


Note: If you specify a craft code already in use (that is,, a system craft code or a previously added user craft code), Aspen Capital Cost Estimator will combine all pool sizes and resource requirements for the specified craft code and the existing code.

4 Enter a description for the craft in the User craft description field, up to 20 characters.

5 Enter the number of men in the user craft pool or enter an adjustment relative to the system craft pool size. The system craft pool size is calculated based on the system craft man--hours and schedule duration.

6 Enter a 4-character user craft symbol. If nothing is entered, the system craft symbol is used.

7 To enter another adjustment, click Add. This adds another

column where you can repeat the process. 8 When done, click Apply.

Durations You can use to the specification forms for engineering, construction, and procurement durations to adjust the durations by percentage. • Engineering

o Engineering Duration Adjustments You can enter a percentage adjustment to the durations calculated by the system for Basic Engineering, Detail Engineering, and Procurement.

o Client Review Period You can use the Basic engineering review period field to set the duration of Activity 0000003013, “CLIENT


APPROVAL-ESTIM&SCHED”. Since all Detail Engineering activities are preceded, directly or indirectly, by this activity, you may impose a delay of any duration on the continuation of engineering activity. This effectively breaks up the work flow to simulate, for example, budget approval delay.

• Construction

You can enter a percentage adjustment to the durations calculated by the system for nine different construction activities. Any change in activity duration will cause a corresponding change in activity resource (crew).

• Procurement

For each equipment group, you may enter the number of weeks needed to fabricate and ship the equipment to the site after vendor data approval.


If you make no adjustment, Aspen Capital Cost Estimator uses the following durations:

Equipment Group Duration

Vessels 24 weeks

Towers 36 weeks

Storage Tanks 32 weeks

Pumps 22 weeks

Compressors 50 weeks

Turbines 50 weeks

Heat Exchangers 32 weeks

Boilers 55 weeks

Furnaces 40 weeks

Air Coolers 28 weeks

Package Refrigeration 44 weeks

Generators 26 weeks

Air Dryers 24 weeks

Conveyors 28 weeks

Mills 45 weeks

Fans 16 weeks

Elevators 26 weeks

Motors 16 weeks

Dust Collectors 30 weeks

Filters 16 weeks

Centrifuges 40 weeks

Mixers 16 weeks

Cooling Towers 32 weeks

Miscellaneous 26 weeks


Equipment

Package Items 36 weeks

Packings and Linings 20 weeks

Schedule Adjustments by Activity and Logic

Logic Modification Aspen Capital Cost Estimator provides sequencing logic, varying with the activities present, for all engineering and construction activities, except as follows: • Where logical relationships cannot be predicted for

system-designed activities, such as project site development. • Where logical relationships cannot be predicted because the

activity is user-specified. • Where a logical chain of activities has been substantially

broken by deletion of activities.

The Logic Modification forms provide the means to either add relationships between successor and predecessor activities not provided by the Aspen Capital Cost Estimator logic or to modify the Aspen Capital Cost Estimator logic by adding and deleting relationships. Separate forms are provided for engineering and construction sections of the network. When adding relationships, a particular relationship type may be specified. However, when deleting relationships, all relationships between the specified activities are deleted, regardless of relationship type.

For engineering activities, only engineering predecessors are allowed. For construction activities, engineering and construction predecessors are allowed.


To add or delete an engineering relationship: 1 Right-click Engineering; then click Edit to display the Logic

Modification form for engineering.

2 In the Add/delete logic option field, select + or – to

indicate whether you are adding or deleting a relationship. 3 Select a successor activity, or group of activities, for which

logic modifications are to be made. This is done by specifying all or part of the Activity Number.

The parts of the Activity Number are broken up into the fields under SUCCESSOR ACTIVITY. Activity Numbers, which are listed on pages XX475H677XX through XX476H716XX (in Appendix A), have 10 characters. If you want to modify a group of activities, you can enter “wildcard” asterisks in some fields. At least one of the fields (besides the two preset fields) must contain numbers.

Note: See Appendix A for a list of Activity Numbers. • Preset engineering field 1



• Engineering phase

The fourth character of the Activity Number indicates the major engineering phase:

0 – Basic engineering phase

1 – Detail engineering phase

2 – Procurement phase

To select all phases, enter an asterisk (*). • Engineering contractor number

The fifth and sixth characters of the Activity Number indicate the engineering contract number. For fixed project-level activities, these characters will be “00”. The engineering contract number is determined based on your specifications for contractors under Basis for Capital Costs in the Project Basis (see page XX477H117XX). It must be a number between 01 and 40. If all engineering contractor numbers are to be selected, enter two asterisks (**).

• Account group number

Exception: where applicable, the seventh and ninth characters of the Activity Number indicate the process equipment class (01-26). Equipment classes are defined in Appendix C, page XX478H725XX.

The seventh character of the Activity Number indicates the account group number. It is derived from the first character of the Code of Accounts.

0, 1, 2 – Equipment or general

3 – Piping

4 – Civil

5 – Steelwork

6 – Instrumentation

7 – Electrical

8 – Insulation

9 – Painting

If all account groups are to be selected for modification, enter one asterisk (*).

o Preset engineering field 2



o Sequence in account group number

The ninth and tenth numbers provide sequential grouping within the major hierarchy of the first eight characters. If all numbers within a sequence group are to be selected, enter two asterisks (**).

Note: where applicable, the seventh and ninth characters of the Activity Number indicate the process equipment class (01-26). Equipment classes are defined in Appendix C, page XX479H725XX.

4 Select an activity, or group of activities, to be added or deleted as predecessor(s) to the specified Successor. Use the fields under PREDESSOR – ENGG. ACTIVITY to select an activity the same way you selected a successor activity.

5 In the Relationship type field, select the specific type of logical sequence to use when adding relationships:

A – Finish-to-Start (default)

S – Start-to-Start

F – Finish-to-Finish

Finish-to-Start (A) and Start-to-Start (S) relationships use the Predecessor’s work week to calculate calendar lag between activities. Finish-to-Finish (F) relationships use the successor’s work week.

The Relationship Type field is not used by the system when deleting relationships; all relationships between the specified activities will be deleted, regardless of relationship type.

6 Enter the Lag time, in whole working days, associated with the relationship type to be added. The default is 0 days.

7 Click Apply. 8 To add or delete another relationship, click Add and repeat

the process.

To add or delete a construction relationship:

Note: Enter either an engineering or a construction predecessor, not both.

1 Right-click on Construction and click Edit on the pop-up menu.


2 In the Add/delete logic option field, select + or – to indicate whether you are adding or deleting a relationship.

3 Select a successor construction activity, or group of activities, for which logic modifications are to be made. This is done by specifying all or part of the Activity Number.

The Activity Number is broken up into the fields under SUCCESSOR ACTIVITY. Construction Activity Numbers, which are listed in Appendix B, have 10 characters. If you want to modify a group of activities, you can enter “wildcard” asterisks in some fields. However, at least one of the fields must contain numbers. o Area number





Note: See Appendix D, page XX480H727XX, for the Equipment Code definitions.

o Equipment type


Note: The construction activities are listed in Appendix B by the last three characters of the Activity Number. These last three characters form the account group number and account code.


The eighth character, the account group number, refers to the type of work performed in the activity. The account group number combined with the account code (in the field below), form the three-character code by which the construction and site development activities are listed beginning on page XX483H717XX (Appendix B). If all account group numbers are to be selected, enter an asterisk (*).

o Account code

Enter the ninth and tenth characters of the Activity Code for the activities to be selected for modification (that is,, excluding the first character, which is the Account Group number, above). If all Activity Codes are to be selected, enter two asterisks (**).


o Contractor number

The eleventh and twelfth characters are the contractor numbers. If all contractors are to be selected, enter two asterisks (**).

4 You can select either an engineering or a construction activity, or group of activities, to be added or deleted as predecessor(s) to the specified Successor. This is done by entering all or part of an engineering or construction Activity Number.

5 In the Relationship type field, select the specific type of logical sequence to use when adding relationships: A – Finish-to-Start (default) S – Start-to-Start F – Finish-to-Finish

Finish-to-Start (A) and Start-to-Start (S) relationships use the Predecessor’s work week to calculate calendar lag between activities.

Finish-to-Finish (F) relationships use the successor’s work week. The Relationship Type field is not used by the system when deleting relationships; all relationships between the specified activities will be deleted, regardless of relationship type.


7 Click Apply. 8 To add or delete another relationship, click Add and repeat

the process.

Activity Modification The Activity Modification forms for engineering and construction allow you to modify the coding of activities. Activities may be combined within a common activity number or deleted entirely.

Activities can be combined by changing an activity number to another existing number. Specify all or part of an existing activity number, then all or part of the other activity number that will replace it. Icarus Project Scheduler (IPS) will sort the activities into numerical order, merging all identically numbered activities, including the craft resources.


Activities can be deleted by selecting an activity and then entering asterisks instead of the number of a modified activity.

To modify engineering activities: 1 Right-click on Engineering and click Edit on the pop-up

menu.

2 Select a source activity. This is done by specifying all or part

of the Engineering Activity Number.

The parts of the Engineering Activity Number are broken up into the fields under SOURCE ACTIVITY. Engineering Activity Numbers, which are listed in Appendix A, have 10 characters. If you want to modify a group of activities, you can enter “wildcard” asterisks in some fields. At least one of the fields (besides the two preset fields) must contain numbers.

Note: See Appendix A for a list of Engineering Activity Numbers. o Preset engineering field 1


o Engineering phase



0 – Basic engineering phase

1 – Detail engineering phase

2 – Procurement phase

To select all phases, enter an asterisk (*). o Engineering contractor number

The fifth and sixth characters of the Activity Number indicate the engineering contract number. For fixed project-level activities, these characters will be “00”. The engineering contract number is determined based on your specifications for contractors under Basis for Capital Costs in the Project Basis (see page XX484H117XX). It must be a number between 01 and 40. If all engineering contractor numbers are to be selected, enter two asterisks (**).


Exception: Where applicable, the seventh and ninth characters of the Activity Number indicate the process equipment class (01-26). Equipment classes are defined in Appendix C, page XX485H725XX.

The seventh character of the Activity Number indicates the account group number. It is derived from the first character of the Code of Accounts.

0, 1, 2 – Equipment or general

3 – Piping

4 – Civil

5 – Steelwork

6 – Instrumentation

7 – Electrical

8 – Insulation

9 – Painting


o Preset engineering field 2



o Sequence in account group number

The ninth and tenth numbers provide sequential grouping within the major hierarchy of the first eight characters. If all numbers within a sequence group are to be selected, enter two asterisks (**).

Note: where applicable, the seventh and ninth characters of the Activity Number indicate the process equipment class (01-26). Equipment classes are defined in Appendix C, page XX486H725XX.

3 In the fields under MODIFIED ACTIVITY, specify the changes that are to be made to the source activity.

4 Click Apply. 5 To modify another activity, click Add and repeat the process.

To modify construction activities: 1 Right-click on Construction and click Edit on the pop-up

menu.

2 Select a source activity. This is done by specifying all or part

of the Construction Activity Number.


The Construction Activity Number is broken up into the fields under ACTIVITY NUMBER. Construction Activity Numbers, which are listed in Appendix B, have 10 characters. If you want to modify a group of activities, you can enter “wildcard” asterisks in some fields. However, at least one of the fields must contain numbers. o Area number




Note: See Appendix D, page XX487H727XX, for the Equipment Code definitions.

o Equipment type


Note: The construction activities are listed in Appendix B by the last three characters of the Activity Number. These last three characters form the account group number and account code.


The eighth character, the account group number, refers to the type of work performed in the activity. The account group number combined with the account code (in the field below), form the three-character code by which the construction and site development activities are listed


beginning on page XX490H717XX (Appendix B). If all account group numbers are to be selected, enter an asterisk (*).

o Account code

Enter the tenth and eleventh characters of the Activity Code for the activities to be selected for modification (that is,, excluding the first character, which is the Account Group number, above). If all Activity Codes are to be selected, enter two asterisks (**).

o Contractor number

The eleventh and twelfth characters are the contractor numbers. If all contractors are to be selected, enter two asterisks (**).


4 Click Apply. 5 To modify another activity, click Add and repeat the process.

Primavera Information

To edit Primavera information: 1 Right-click on Project manager information in the

Primavera information folder and click Edit on the pop-up menu.

2 You can specify the following information: o User name o Password


o Database name

Name of Primavera database where Aspen IPS data will be loaded (for example, pmdb).

o Remote or local host server

Indicates mode of operation, remote server (RMT) or local machine (LCL).

o Enterprise project structure ID

Project structure ID for Primavera Enterprise. If nothing is entered, the Aspen Capital Cost Estimator project name will be used.

o Enterprise project structure name

Project structure name for Primavera Enterprise. If nothing is entered, the Aspen Capital Cost Estimator project name will be used.

o Enterprise project manager name

Name of manager (OBS) responsible for Primavera Enterprise. If nothing is entered, the Aspen Capital Cost Estimator project name will be used.

o Enterprise project WBS name

Work Breakdown structure name for Primavera Enterprise. If nothing is entered, the Aspen Capital Cost Estimator project name will be used.

3 Click Apply to save changes.

Process Design Note: Process Design specifications are only included in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator if you are licensed to use Aspen Icarus Process Evaluator (Aspen Process Economic Analyzer) or Aspen Decision Analyzer. If you are licensed, you can select at startup to use Aspen Process Economic Analyzer or Analyzer in the Aspen Capital Cost Estimator environment.

The Process Design specifications are used in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator projects that contain a simulator input. These specs allow Aspen Capital Cost Estimator to map simulator models into Icarus project components. For example, a distillation column model in a simulator may be mapped to a combination of equipment such as a double diameter tower, an air-cooler (for a condenser), a horizontal tank (for a reflux drum), a general service pump (for a reflux pump) and a thermosiphon reboiler.


The Process Design Specifications indicate the default settings that the system uses for mapping all models of the same class. These specs can be customized in files and used in many projects.

Simulator Type and Simulator File Name Simulator Type and Simulator File Name are described under Loading Simulation Data on page X491H239X.

Simulator Units of Measure Mapping Specs The Simulator Units of Measure Mapping Specs are used in mapping simulator units to Aspen Capital Cost Estimator units, serving as the cross-reference. To access, right-click on Simulator Units of Measure Mapping Specs in the Project Basis view’s Process Design folder.

The Units of Measure Specification dialog box appears.

Note: Each simulator cross-reference UOM file contains a basis (which may be METRIC or I-P). The basis indicates the Aspen Process Economic Analyzer base units set to which simulator units will be converted.


The left side of the screen displays the simulation output units. The right side of the screen displays the corresponding Aspen Capital Cost Estimator units. The conversion factors between the two units are entered in the lower-center section of the screen.

Aspen Capital Cost Estimator provides a set of common simulator units and their conversions to Aspen Capital Cost Estimator units. You can modify and/or add units to these files.

Specifying the Mapping for a Simulator Unit

To specify the mapping for a simulator unit: 1 Select the simulation unit from the Units Used list in the

Simulation Output section. In the example below, the simulation unit is CM/HR (Centimeters/Hour).

2 Select the appropriate units category from Units Category list in the Aspen Capital Cost Estimator section. In the example below, the units category is Velocity.

3 Select the appropriate Aspen Capital Cost Estimator unit from Units list in the Aspen Capital Cost Estimator section. In the example below, the Aspen Capital Cost Estimator unit is M/H (Meters/Hour).

4 Enter the conversion factor between the two units (the simulation unit and the Aspen Capital Cost Estimator unit) in


the Conversion Factor box. In the example below, the conversion factor between the two units is 100 because: 100 CM/HR = 1 M/H

Note: If an equivalent Aspen Process Economic Analyzer unit is not found, select Miscellaneous as the Units Category and map the simulator unit to Other in the Units window.

5 Click Save to save the mapping. When a unit has been

mapped and saved, a green box appears next to the simulation unit. A yellow box indicates the unit is not mapped.

Deleting a Mapping To delete a mapping, select the simulator unit and then click Delete.

Removing a Unit To remove a particular unit from the simulation units list, first select the unit and then click Remove.

Adding a Unit To add a new unit to the list, enter the new unit symbol in the New Units to Add box in the Simulation Output section and click Add. Changes will not affect existing project components.


Changing Existing Components To change existing components, you should unsize the item or unmap the items and then re-map and re-size.

Once all of the units have been specified, click OK to store and save the specifications.

It is critical that all simulator units of measure be mapped into Aspen Capital Cost Estimator units. When the simulator output is loaded, Aspen Capital Cost Estimator identifies all units of measure in the file. Any units not mapped in the project’s current simulator cross-reference UOM specification are automatically added to the list and you are alerted to the need to define the mapping and re-load the file.

You must correct this in order to continue without problems. Complete the steps above to specify the mapping for a simulator unit. Scroll through the Units Used list for any yellow-tagged units. Map all these, save the file, and re-load the simulator data.

Project Component Map Specifications The Project Component Map Specifications dialog box contains a list of models for the selected simulator and a list of the corresponding Icarus project components to which the simulator models will map.

To access: 1 Right-click on Project Component Map Specifications in

the Project Basis view’s Process Design folder. 2 On the menu that appears, click Edit.


Models that are mapped in the current file are marked with an asterisk (*). If no asterisk is present, then that model will not generate any project components when loaded, mapped, and sized. 3 Exclude simulator models from the mapping process by

selecting the simulator item and then clicking Delete All Mappings.

You can select a simulator item and review the mapping(s) for that item. To change one of the mappings, select an item in the Current Map List, click Delete One Mapping, and then create a new mapping.

To create a new mapping, click New Mapping and then select an appropriate Icarus project component.

For simulator column models, an additional specification can be made. Since a column may be mapped to multiple pieces of equipment, Aspen Capital Cost Estimator requires an identification for each of these mappings. Refer to Mapping Simulator Models in Chapter 4 for tower/column configuration mapping identifications.


Note: You can select in Preferences to have Aspen Capital Cost Estimator map unsupported simulator models (that is,, models not included in the list of simulator models on the Project Component Map Specifications dialog box) to quoted cost items. See page XX492H54XX for instructions.

Default Simulator Mapping Specs The following tables list models that are mapped to Aspen Capital Cost Estimator project components. Models that are not supported can be mapped to a quoted item if you mark “Map Unsupported Models To Quoted Cost Item” in Preferences (Process tab).

AspenTech’s Aspen Plus Map Specs

Model Name

Model Description Aspen Capital Cost Estimator Default

CCD Countercurrent decanter Rotary drum filter

CFUGE Centrifuge filter Centrifuge SOLID-BOWL

COMPR Compressor/turbine Centrifugal gas compressor / Gas turbine with combustion chamber

CRUSHER Solids crusher Jaw crusher

CYCLONE Solid-gas cyclone Cyclone Dust collector

DECANTER Liquid-liquid decanter Vertical vessel – process

DISTL Shortcut distillation rating Single-diameter trayed tower

DSTWU Shortcut distillation design Single-diameter trayed tower

ESP Electrostatic precipitator Low voltage electrical precipitator

FABFL Baghouse filter Cloth bay baghouse

FILTER Continuous rotary vacuum Rotary drum filter

FLASH2 Two-outlet flash Vertical vessel – process

FLASH3 Three-outlet flash Vertical vessel – process

FSPLIT Stream splitter

HEATER Heater/cooler Floating head heat exchanger

HEATX Two-stream heat exchanger Floating head heat exchanger

HYCYC Solid-liquid hydrocyclone Water only cyclones - mineral

PUMP Pump/hydraulic turbine Centrifugal single or multi-stage pump

RADFRAC Rigorous fractionation Single-diameter trayed tower (column)

Floating head heat exchanger (condenser)

U-tube reboiler (reboiler)

Horizontal drum (accumulator)

Centrifugal single or multi-stage pump (reflux pump)


PETROFAC Consists of 42 configurations. It has been confirmed that the following can be mapped to Aspen Capital Cost Estimator:

PREFLIF- preflash block with furnace, zero pumparounds and zero sidestrippers.

CDUIOF – crude block with furnace, three pumparounds and three sidestrippers.

CDU 3 – vacuum block with two pumparounds and two sidestrippers.

Single-diameter trayed tower (column)





Furnace block

RBATCH Batch reactor Agitated Tank – enclosed, jacketed

RCSTR Continuous stirred tank Agitated Tank – enclosed, reactor jacketed

REQUIL Equilibrium reactor Agitated Tank – enclosed, jacketed

RGIBBS Equilibrium reactor-gibbs Agitated Tank – enclosed, energy jacketed minimization

RPLUG Plug-flow reactor Single diameter packed tower

RSTOIC Stoichiometer reactor Agitated Tank – enclosed, jacketed

RYIELD Yield reactor Agitated Tank – enclosed, jacketed

SCFRAC Short-cut distillation Single-diameter trayed tower

SCREEN Wet or dry screen separator Vibrating system

SWASH Single-stage solids washer Rotary drum filter

VSCRUB Venturi scrubber Washer dust collector

AspenTech’s Aspen Plus Map Specs

Model Name

Model Description Aspen Capital Cost Estimator Default

CCD Countercurrent decanter Rotary drum filter

CFUGE Centrifuge filter Centrifuge SOLID-BOWL

COMPR Compressor/turbine Centrifugal gas compressor / Gas turbine with combustion chamber

CRUSHER Solids crusher Jaw crusher

CYCLONE Solid-gas cyclone Cyclone Dust collector

DECANTER Liquid-liquid decanter Vertical vessel – process

DISTL Shortcut distillation rating Single-diameter trayed tower

DSTWU Shortcut distillation design Single-diameter trayed tower

ESP Electrostatic precipitator Low voltage electrical precipitator

FABFL Baghouse filter Cloth bay baghouse

FILTER Continuous rotary vacuum Rotary drum filter

FLASH2 Two-outlet flash Vertical vessel – process

FLASH3 Three-outlet flash Vertical vessel – process

FSPLIT Stream splitter



HEATX Two-stream heat exchanger Floating head heat exchanger

HYCYC Solid-liquid hydrocyclone Water only cyclones - mineral

PUMP Pump/hydraulic turbine Centrifugal single or multi-stage pump

RADFRAC Rigorous fractionation Single-diameter trayed tower (column)





PETROFAC Consists of 42 configurations. It has been confirmed that the following can be mapped to Aspen Capital Cost Estimator:

PREFLIF- preflash block with furnace, zero pumparounds and zero sidestrippers.

CDUIOF – crude block with furnace, three pumparounds and three sidestrippers.

CDU 3 – vacuum block with two pumparounds and two sidestrippers.

Single-diameter trayed tower (column)





Furnace block

RBATCH Batch reactor Agitated Tank – enclosed, jacketed

RCSTR Continuous stirred tank Agitated Tank – enclosed, reactor jacketed

REQUIL Equilibrium reactor Agitated Tank – enclosed, jacketed

RGIBBS Equilibrium reactor-gibbs Agitated Tank – enclosed, energy jacketed minimization

RPLUG Plug-flow reactor Single diameter packed tower

RSTOIC Stoichiometer reactor Agitated Tank – enclosed, jacketed

RYIELD Yield reactor Agitated Tank – enclosed, jacketed

SCFRAC Short-cut distillation Single-diameter trayed tower

SCREEN Wet or dry screen separator Vibrating system

SWASH Single-stage solids washer Rotary drum filter

VSCRUB Venturi scrubber Washer dust collector

ChemCAD V Map Specs

Model Model Description Aspen Capital Cost Estimator Default

BAGH Baghouse filter Cloth bay baghouse dust collector

COMP Adiabatic (isentropic) or polytopic Compression

Centrifugal Axial Gas Compressor

CFUG Basket centrifugal filter Atmospheric suspended basket centrifuge

CRYS Crystallizer or melting by cooling/heating

Batch vacuum crystallizer


CSED Solid-wall basket centrifuge separating solids from liq slurry

Solid bowl centrifuge

CYCL Gas-solid cyclone separator Cyclone dust collector

DRYE Dryer Direct rotary dryer

EREA Equilibrium reactor Agitated tank reactor

ESPT Electrostatic precipitator Low voltage electrical precipitator

FIRE Fired heater Floating head heat exchanger

FLAS Multipurpose flash Vertical cylindrical vessel

FLTR Vacuum or constant-pressure filter

Rotary disk filter

GIBS Gibbs reactor Agitated tank reactor

HCYC Hydrocyclone Water cyclone (separation equipment)

HTXR Heat exchanger Floating head heat exchanger

KREA Kinetic reactor (plug flow or continuous stirred tank reactors)

Agitated tank reactor

LLVF Vapor/liquid/liquid flash Vertical cylindrical vessel

MIXE Stream mixer (flash calculation at output pressure)

Vertical cylindrical vessel

PUMP Liquid pump (to increase pressure of liquid stream)

Centrifugal pump

REAC Stoichiometric reactor Agitated tank reactor

SCDS Simultaneous correction rigorous fractionation (single column)

Single diameter trayed tower





SCRE Screen Single deck rectangular vibrating screen

TOWR Inside/out rigorous fractionation (single column)

Single diameter trayed tower





WASH Washer Washer dust collector

Hysim Map Specs

Model Name Model Description Aspen Capital Cost Estimator Default

BAG FILTER Baghouse filter Dust collector cloth bay


COLUMN Distillation column Single-diameter trayed tower





COMPRESSOR Compressor Centrifugal gas compressor

CSTR Continuous stirred-tank

Agitated Tank - enclosed, jacketed

CYCLONE Gas-solid separator Cyclone dust collector

EXPANDER Expander Gas turbine

FILTER Rotary drum filter Rotary drum filter


HEATEX Simple heat exchanger

Floating head heat exchanger

HYDROCYCLONE Solid-liquid hydrocyclone

Water only cyclones - mineral separation

PIPING Pipeline

PLUG Plug-flow reactor Single-diameter packed tower and others

PUMP Pump Centrifugal single or multi-stage pump

RATEHEATEX Rigorous heat exchanger


REQUI Equilibrium reactor Agitated Tank - enclosed, jacketed

RGIBBS Gibbs-energy reactor Agitated Tank - enclosed, jacketed

RSTOIC Stoichiometric reactor

Agitated Tank - enclosed, jacketed

SOLIDSEP Solids separator Cyclone dust collector

HYSYS Map Specs


AIR COOLER Air cooler Air cooler, free-standing or rack-mounted.

BAG FILTER Baghouse filter Dust collector cloth bay

COLUMN Distillation column Single-diameter trayed tower


CSTR Continuous stirred-tank

Agitated Tank – enclosed, jacketed

CYCLONE Gas-solid separator Cyclone dust collector


FILTER Rotary drum filter Rotary drum filter

HEATER Heater/Cooler Floating head heat exchanger

HEATX Simple heat exchanger


HYDROCYCLONE Solid-liquid hydrocyclone

Water only cyclones – mineral separation

PLUG Plug-flow reactor Single-diameter packed tower and others



REQUI Equilibrium reactor Agitated Tank – enclosed, jacketed

RGIBBS Gibbs-energy reactor Agitated Tank – enclosed, jacketed

RSTOIC Stoichiometric reactor Agitated Tank – enclosed, jacketed

SOLIDSEP Solids separator Cyclone dust collector

SimSci’s Pro/II Map Specs


CENTRIFUGE Centrifuge Solid bowl centrifuge

COLUMN UNITS Distillation column

Single-diameter trayed tower






CRYSTAL Crystalizer Oslo growth type crystalizer

CSTR Continuous stirred tank Agitated Tank - enclosed, jacketed

DECANTER Countercurrent decanter Rotary drum filter

DEPRESSURE Non-steady-state depressure

Vertical vessel - process

DRYER Solids dryer Atmospheric tray dryer


FLASH FLASH Vertical vessel - process

HEATEX Simple heat exchanger Floating head heat exchanger

PLUG Plug-flow reactor Single diameter packed tower


REACTOR Reactor Agitated Tank - enclosed, jacketed

RIGHTEX Rigorous heat exchanger Floating head heat exchanger

ROTDRUM Rotary drum filter Rotary drum filter

SHORTCUT Distillation column Single-diameter trayed tower

Design Criteria After the simulator model is loaded into Aspen Capital Cost Estimator, mapping and sizing of the items can be performed. If an item is already sized inside the simulator, the sizing parameters are automatically brought into Aspen Capital Cost Estimator and used.


Items not sized by the simulator can be sized following the instructions in Chapter 6. In addition to process information obtained from the simulator, certain design specifications may be required before sizing can be accomplished.

Aspen Capital Cost Estimator’s Sizing Expert uses design values based on the user-defined field values on specification forms in the Design Criteria sub-folder. The values on these forms provide the basis for developing design specifications from operating conditions for all equipment to be sized.

You can enter design conditions (design pressure and temperature) for all equipment (using the Common form) and also enter design conditions for types of equipment. (Conditions entered on the equipment type forms override those on the Common form).

Common Design pressure and temperature entered on the Common specifications form applies to all equipment except equipment for which you have separately specified these design conditions. • Design Pressure

Click on the Design Pressure field to open the Design Pressure Specifications form. The specifications form lets you specify rules for calculating the design pressure based on the range in which the operating pressure falls. The design pressure is calculated from the operating pressure using the formula shown on the form. You can modify the pressure limit (upper and lower limit) as well as parameters A and B.


Note: In earlier versions of Aspen Process Economic Analyzer, the Design Pressure – Multiplier field was used. This field has now been replaced by the Design Pressure Specifications form. If projects created using these earlier versions are opened, then the parameters A and B are automatically adjusted based on the multiplier value specified. This ensures that old projects can be carried over using the same design criteria.

• Design Temperature

Click on the Design Temperature field to open the Design Temperature Specifications form. The specifications form lets you specify rules for calculating the design temperature based on the range in which the operating temperature falls. The design pressure is calculated from the operating temperature using the formula shown on the form. You can modify the temperature ranges (upper and lower limit) as well as parameters A and B.


Note: In earlier versions of Aspen Process Economic Analyzer, the Design Temperature - Increase field was used. This field has now been replaced by the Design Temperature Specifications form. If projects created using these earlier versions are opened, then the parameters A and B are automatically adjusted based on the multiplier value specified.

Pumps In addition to entering design pressure and temperature (see instructions under Common, page XX493H170XX), you can enter the following design criteria for pumps: • Pump Overdesign Factor

The pump overdesign factor is used by Aspen Capital Cost Estimator to increase the volumetric throughput of the pump and the power requirement of the pump. The total volumetric flow rate calculated from the simulator information is multiplied by the value provided in this field to estimate the design flow rate for the equipment.

For example: o Operation flow rate: 250 GPM o Pump overdesign factor: 1.1 o Calculated design capacity: 250 X 1.1 = 275 GPM

Compressors In addition to entering design pressure and temperature (see instructions under Common, page XX494H170XX), you can enter the following design criteria for compressors: • Driver Type

Specifies the driver type used for compressors. The default value is None. The selections are NONE, GAS ENGINE, MOTOR, TURBINE.

Heat Exchangers Using TEAMS detailed Heat Exchanger costing for Icarus cost estimation of TEAM Heat Exchangers.


To use TEAMS for heat exchange sizing: 1 In your project, add a TEMA shell and tube heat exchanger to

the main area. 2 Enter values to all the required fields (boxes with red and

yellow highlight) 3 Enter values for the following Material of Construction fields:

o Tube material o Shell material o Tube sheet material o Channel material

4 Click the arrow next to the Size button.

5 Click Launch TEAMS for sizing.

The Icarus window will be hidden and in a couple of seconds, Icarus project evaluation dialog will appear

After the evaluation is over – in a second or two - a message box saying The TEAMS GUI will now be launched appears.

6 Click OK to launch the TEAMS GUI.


The TEAMS GUI appears.

7 In the TEAMS GUI, specify the details of the heat exchanger. 8 When you have specified the details of the heat exchanger,

click Run | Run TEAMS | Calculations + Cost Estimate.

A program status dialog box will pop up during the TEAMS run. 9 After TEAMS has finished calculations, close the program

status dialog box.


10 Close the TEAMS GUI by clicking File | Close.

After the TEAMS GUI closes, the Icarus window reappears. 11 Evaluate the heat exchanger to import TEAMS design values

into the Icarus item report.

In addition to entering design pressure and temperature (see instructions under Common, page XX495H170XX), you can enter the following design criteria for heat exchangers: • Launch MUSE

MUSE™ performs detailed simulation of multi-stream plate-fin heat exchangers made from brazed aluminum, stainless steel or titanium.

A valid MUSE version 3.3 license is required to use this feature.

Select “Yes” to launch MUSE during interactive sizing of plate fin heat exchangers. Select “No” to run MUSE in the silent mode.

• Furnace Fractional Efficiency

The furnace duty obtained from the simulator is the absorbed duty. Total fired duty is obtained by dividing the absorbed duty by fractional efficiency. This value should be <1.0.

• Fuel Heating Value

The Lower Heating Value (LHV) used to estimate the fuel consumption by fired furnaces.

• Air Cooler Inlet Temperature

This field represents the default value that shall be used as the inlet air temperature in the case of Air Coolers.

• Air Cooler Exit Temperature

Air Cooler Exit Temperature is used when estimating the surface area of air cooled heat exchangers. The value given in this field is used as the exit temperature for the air cooler.

If the field is empty or has value of 0.0, then the Sizing Expert assigns the exit air temperature value to be 10.0 DEG F greater than the inlet air temperature.

For example, if the Air Cooler Inlet Temperature is 77.0 DEG F and you do not enter the Air Cooler Exit Temperature, Aspen Capital Cost Estimator uses 87.0 DEG F as the default value.

• Apply 2/3 Rule for Design Pressure


In the design of shell and tube heat exchangers, design engineers sometimes apply the 2/3rd rule in calculating the design pressure. As per ASME heat exchanger code, if the design pressure of the lower-pressure side (either tube or shell) is at least 2/3rd the design pressure on the high-pressure side, then overpressure in the high-pressure side will not result in rupture in the lower-pressure side (provided relief devices have been properly sized).

When specified, the 2/3 rule will increase the design pressure of the low pressure side to at least 67% of the design pressure of the high pressure side, even when the operating pressure on the low pressure side could result in a lower design pressure as per the Design Pressure field.

• Heat Exchanger Area Minimum Overdesign Factor

The calculated heat transfer area is multiplied by the value given in the field.

The mechanical design is performed for the final heat transfer area.

For example: o Calculated surface area = 1000 SF o Heat Exchanger Area Minimum Overdesign Factor = 1.1 o Surface area used for mechanical design: 1000 X 1.1 =

1100 SF

Note that the final surface area in general is greater than the calculated value because of mechanical considerations.

Towers In addition to entering design pressure and temperature (see instructions under Common, page XX496H170XX), you can enter the following design criteria on the Towers form (applies to all towers): • Bottom Sump Height (For Trayed and Packed Towers)

For both trayed and packed towers, extra height in addition to that required for separation is provided at the bottom for liquid level and reboiler return.

The value in this field is added to the calculated height of the tower.

• R/R-Minimum (For SHORTCUT model in Pro/II)


The SimSci simulator shortcut distillation model calculates the number of theoretical stages required for different ratios of operating reflux ratio (R) to minimum reflux ratio (R-Minimum).

The number of stages should be available in the simulator report for the ratio chosen.

• Vapor Disengagement Height (For Trayed and Packed Towers)

For both trayed and packed towers, extra height in addition to that required for separation is provided at the top for vapor disengagement before passing to the condenser.

The value in this field is added to the calculated height of the tower.

Packed Towers In addition to entering design pressure and temperature (see instructions under Common, page XX497H170XX), you can enter the following design criteria for packed towers: • Packing Type

Two types of packings, random and structured, are used in packed towers. The type of packing affects the flood point pressure drop estimation and the packing efficiency (HETP) value.

The value in this field is used by the Sizing Expert in the calculation of the tower diameter and height.

• Packing Factor for Packings Packing factor is used in the Kister and Gill correlation to estimate pressure drop at the flood point. Once the pressure drop is known, the flood velocity is calculated using the latest versions of the generalized pressure drop correlation (GPDC) charts for both the random and structured packings.

• Packed Tower Derating Factor With certain systems, traditional flooding equations consistently predict higher flood points than those actually experienced. To allow for such discrepancies, an empirical derating factor (< 1.0) is applied. The derating factor is multiplied by the predicted flood vapor load or liquid load obtained from the traditional equation to obtain the actual or derated flood load for the given system.

The derating factors are often vaguely related to the foaming tendency of the system. The higher the foaming tendency, the lower the derating factor.

If you do not enter a value, Aspen Capital Cost Estimator uses 1.0 as the derating factor.

• Packed Tower Flooding Factor


Packed towers are usually designed for 70 to 80 percent of the flood point velocity. This allows a sufficient margin for uncertainties associated with the flood point concept and prediction and to keep the design point away from the region at which efficiency rapidly diminishes (just below the flood point).

The Sizing Expert uses the default value specified if the user-provided value is not available.

• HETP The concept of HETP (height equivalent of a theoretical plate) enables comparison of efficiency between packed and plate columns. Because there are only a few variables that significantly affect HETP and due to the unreliability of even the best mass transfer models, rules of thumb for HETP successfully compete with the mass transfer models.

For the packing types available in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator (given in the Icarus Reference), Aspen Capital Cost Estimator estimates the HETP value based on the packing shape, dimensions and type of material. If a user-provided value is available, then the Sizing Expert uses the value in the above field for calculating the height of the packed tower.

• Packed Section Height The value represents the height of each packed section and is used in the design of packed towers to estimate the number of packed sections.

• Surface Area Per Unit Volume

Higher specific surface areas (surface area per unit volume) increases vapor-liquid contact area and therefore, efficiency. For structured packings, Aspen Capital Cost Estimator determines this value empirically and uses it in estimating HETP if you have not already specified an HETP value.

A default value of 75 SF/CF is used in the absence of a user-entered value.

Trayed Towers In addition to entering design pressure and temperature (see instructions under Common, page XX498H170XX), you can enter the following design criteria for trayed towers: • Trayed Tower Flooding Factor

Flooding is the condition where pressure drop across a tray is sufficient to cause the dynamic liquid head to be equivalent to the tray spacing plus the weir height. At this point, the liquid backup in the downcomer is just at the point of overflowing the weir on the plate above. When this happens, the column fills with a foamy liquid and becomes inoperable.

The flood factor is the fractional velocity approach to flooding, that is,, (Actual Vapor Velocity)/(Vapor velocity at the point of flooding).

The Sizing Expert uses the default value specified if the user-provided value is not available.

• Foaming Tendency


Vapor disengagement is easy in non-foaming, low-pressure systems. However, vapor disengagement from downcomer liquid in foaming systems is difficult as the liquid hangs on to the entrained vapor. Sufficient residence time must be provided in the downcomer to allow adequate disengagement of vapor from the descending liquid. Industrial practice has created a guideline for the mum downcomer velocity of clear liquids based on their foaming tendency.

The following values for the downcomer liquid velocity are used based on the choice for the above field.

Downcomer Liquid Velocity, (FPS)

Tray Spacing, INCHES

Foaming Tendency

18 24 30

Low 0.4 – 0.5 0.5 – 0.6 0.6 – 0.7

Moderate 0.3 – 0.4 0.4 – 0.5 0.5 - 0.6 High 0.2 – 0.25 0.2 – 0.25 0.2 - 0.3 With certain systems, traditional flooding equations consistently predict higher flood points than those actually experienced. To allow for such discrepancies, an empirical derating factor (< 1.0) is applied. The derating factor is multiplied by the predicted flood vapor load or liquid load obtained from the traditional equation to obtain the actual or derated flood load for the given system.

The trayed derating factors are often related to the foaming tendency of the system. The higher the foaming tendency, the lower the derating factor. If the user-specified value is not available, a derating factor is selected based on the value of foaming tendency.

The default value for foaming tendency is Moderate.

• Trayed Tower Derating Factor With certain systems, traditional flooding equations consistently predict higher flood points than those actually experienced. To allow for such a discrepancy, an empirical derating factor (< 1.0) is applied. The derating factor is multiplied by the predicted flood vapor load or liquid load obtained from the traditional equation to obtain the actual or derated flood load for the given system.

The derating factors are often vaguely related to the foaming tendency of the system. The higher the foaming tendency, the lower the derating factor.

If the user-provided value is not available, or the value 0.0 is entered in the field, then the derating factor is selected based on the foaming tendency of the liquids in the column.

• Relative Volatility of Key Components The number of theoretical stages for a trayed tower is obtained from the simulator report. The actual number of trays is calculated by using the tray efficiency value provided by the user in the design criteria file.

However, if the field is empty or has a 0.0 value, the tray efficiency for the separation is estimated by using the correlation of relative volatility of


key components with tray efficiency. The O’Connell correlation is used to estimate the overall tray efficiency.

• Tray Efficiency Overall column efficiency is defined by:

E_oc = N_t/ N_a

where:

N_t = Number of theoretical stages required for the separation minus the sum of theoretical stages provided by the reboiler, condenser, and intermediate heat exchangers.

N_a = Number of actual trays in the column.

Several empirical correlations are available in the literature. Also, rigorous theoretical predictions based on gas and liquid film resistances are available to assist in predicting the tray efficiency.

If the user specification is not available for the field, then the value is estimated using empirical correlations from the literature.

Configurations Towers Use this form to specify design criteria for tower configurations.

Vessels In addition to entering design pressure and temperature (see instructions under Common, page XX499H170XX), you can enter the following design criteria on the Vessels form (applies to all process vessels): • Residence Time

The amount of liquid holdup in the vessel is estimated by the liquid volumetric flow through a vessel in a specified amount of time. The vessel volume divided by volumetric flow rate is defined as the residence time for the vessel.

For example: − Liquid flow through the vessel: 100 CFM − Residence time: 5 MIN − Calculated liquid volume in the vessel: 100 CFM X 5 = 500 CF.

• Process Vessel Height to Diameter Ratio (For Vertical and Horizontal Vessel Design)

Aspen Capital Cost Estimator defaults for this field are used if the field is empty or has the value of “0.0.” The Aspen Capital Cost Estimator defaults depend on the operating conditions for the vessel. Based on the operating pressure of the vessel obtained from the simulator report, the following values are used:

Pressure (PSIA) Process Vessel Height to Diameter Ratio 0 – 250 3 250 – 500 4


> 500 5 For example: − Vessel operation pressure: <250 PSIA − Diameter: 6 FEET − Calculated vessel height: 6 X 3 = 18 FEET

Residence time overrides Process Vessel Height to Diameter Ratio.

• Minimum Vessel Diameter

The Minimum Vessel Diameter field is used if the vessel diameter calculated by the sizing routines is less than this value.

• Vapor/Liquid Separator Sizing Method

When sizing vertical and horizontal vapor liquid separators, Aspen Capital Cost Estimator computes the maximum allowable vapor velocity using the method selected in this field. − Liquid Entrainment Method:

This is an empirical correlation developed by Watkins and is a function of vapor and liquid densities, and the parameter Kv, which itself is a polynomial function of vapor and liquid flows and densities.

− Particle size separation method: This method estimates the disengagement velocity of the liquid droplet in the continuous vapor phase. The design velocity is determined as a percentage of the disengagement velocity.

• Average Liquid Particle Diameter (For particle size separation method)

This field specifies the default average liquid droplet diameter. This value is used in the design of horizontal and vertical vessels by the particle size separation method (which can be selected in the Vapor/Liquid Separator Sizing Method field right above this field).

• Design Factor Multiplier for Disengagement Velocity (For particle size separation method)

This field is used in the calculation of the maximum allowable design velocity, which is a percentage of the disengagement velocity.

For example: − Disengagement velocity : 10 FEET/SECOND − Design factor multiplier for disengagement velocity: 0.5 − Maximum allowable design velocity: 10 X 0.5 = 5 FEET/SECOND

• Separation Factor (For liquid entrainment method) In the liquid entrainment method, the separation factor is used to determine the maximum allowable vapor velocity. The separation factor is either entered by the user in this field or computed by Aspen Capital Cost Estimator using the relation described in the vessel sizing design procedure.


Agitated Vessels In addition to entering design pressure and temperature (see instructions under Common, page XX500H170XX), you can enter the following design criteria for agitated vessels: • Agitator Type

The various types of agitators that can be chosen for design are described in the Icarus Reference. The type of agitator selected determines the default driver power and impeller speed. This is used to estimate the agitation requirements in tanks.

Storage Vessels In addition to entering design pressure and temperature (see instructions under Common, page XX501H170XX), you can enter the following design criteria for storage vessels: • Number of Holding Days

Storage vessel sizing is determined by estimating the volume of liquid required for a certain period of operation. Aspen Capital Cost Estimator uses this field to determine the liquid volume stored in the vessel.

For example: − Inlet flow rate: 500 CF per day. − Number of holding days: 30 (specified by user). − Liquid volume inside the storage vessel: 500 X 30 = 1,500 CF.

• Holding Hours in a Day Storage vessel sizing is determined by estimating the volume of liquid required for a certain period of operation. Aspen Capital Cost Estimator uses this field to determine the liquid volume required per day.

For example: − Inlet flow rate: 500 CFH. − Holding Hours in a Day: 24 (specified by user). − Final volume per day : 500 X 24 = 12,000 CF/day.

• Storage Vessel Height to Diameter Ratio

Once the volume of the storage vessel is determined based on the process fluid flow rate and design conditions, the actual dimensions (height and diameter) of the equipment must be estimated. You can specify the dimensional requirements of the equipment using this field.

A default is used if the field is empty or has value 0.0. The default depends on the operating conditions for the vessel.

• Vapor Free Space (% of Total Storage Vessel Volume)

A percent volume of the sized vessel in excess of the required liquid volume.


Horizontal Vessels In addition to entering design pressure and temperature (see instructions under Common, page XX502H170XX), you can enter the following design criteria for horizontal vessels: • Vapor Area /Cross-Sectional Area

Once Aspen Capital Cost Estimator calculates the maximum vapor velocity, the velocity and flow rate are used to determine the vapor space required. The vapor space is then divided by the vapor area /cross-sectional area to get the total required cross-sectional area.

The process vessel height to diameter ratio overrides this field.

• Separation Factor Multiplier For horizontal vessels, the separation factor is normally higher under similar operating conditions than for vertical vessels. Therefore, the calculated separation factor is multiplied by the separation factor multiplier.

• Minimum Boot Length When horizontal vessels are used for three phase separations, the heavy second liquid phase is removed in the drip leg situated at the bottom of the vessel.

• Minimum Boot Diameter This field represents diameter of the boot leg which is designed to remove the heavy second liquid.

• Boot Leg Liquid Velocity The bootleg cross-sectional area is estimated using the liquid velocity field specified in this field and the process vessel height to diameter ratio.

Vertical Vessels In addition to entering design pressure and temperature (see instructions under Common, page XX503H170XX), you can enter the following design criteria for vertical vessels: • Minimum Disengagement Height

This is the height from the liquid level to the mist eliminator.

• Minimum Height Above the Mist Eliminator Used in the calculation of the total vessel height.

• Height of Mist Eliminator Height of mist eliminator section.

• Minimum Ht. Btw Low and High Liquid Level Taps The liquid level based on residence time should meet this minimum specification. (Field is at bottom of form, not in Vertical Vessels section.)

• Ht. Btw Inlet Nozzle and High Liquid Level Tap


Represents the height between the inlet nozzle (center line) and the high liquid level tap. (Field is at bottom of form, not in Vertical Vessels section.)

• Ht. Btw Low Liquid Level Tap and Tangent Line Represents the height between the low liquid level tap and the tangent line. (Field is at bottom of form, not in Vertical Vessels section.)

Miscellaneous • Vibrating Screen Feed Material

This field specifies the solid material type used by solids handling equipment. The material type affects the screen unit capacity which is defined as the amount of solids (TPH) flowing through one square foot of screen cloth based on material, having 6 to 8% moisture, screen cloth having 50% or more open area; 85% screen efficiency.

Based on the choice made for this field and the screen opening size, the screen unit capacity is estimated.

The following choices are available for this field: − Sand and Gravel − Limestone/Crushed Stones − Coal − Cinders − Coke − Wood

• Cyclone Inlet Linear Velocity In case of cyclones, the sizing program assumes a default linear velocity of 150 FPS. You can enter a different velocity here.

Configurations Flash Use this form to specify design criteria for flash configurations.

Utility Specifications Most chemical processes require heating or cooling process utility fluids to operate. The choice of which utilities to use often plays an important role in determining the total project cost, since the utility type affects heat transfer equipment sizing. In addition, utility costs form an important part of the operating costs of the plant.

In the design of heat exchangers and reboilers, Aspen Capital Cost Estimator permits you to select appropriate process utility fluids for the application. You can select utility fluids from those already available in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator or create your own based on utility fluid classes allowed by Aspen Capital Cost Estimator. Once the utility resource for the equipment is selected


(either by you or the Sizing Expert), Aspen Capital Cost Estimator creates a utility process stream for the equipment. The utility stream information includes the amount of utility used by the equipment. During the operating cost evaluation, Aspen Capital Cost Estimator processes all the utility streams connected to the equipment to determine the utility cost for every utility resource used in the project.

You can override these selections by a combination of disabling/enabling appropriate utilities and re-mapping and re-sizing the equipment items. Alternately, you can specify the desired utility in the interactive Sizing Expert. This method is available even if the utility has been disabled.

To modify or create a utility stream: 1 Right-click on Utility Specifications in the Project Basis

view’s Process Design folder, and then click Edit on the pop-up menu.

The Develop Utility Specifications dialog box appears.


Aspen Capital Cost Estimator provides 11 default utility streams resources:

Cooling Water

High Temp Heating Oil *

Low Temp Heating Oil **

Refrigerant – Ethane

Refrigerant - Ethylene

Refrigerant - Freon 12

Refrigerant - Propane

Refrigerant - Propylene

Steam @165 PSI

Steam @100 PSI

Steam @400 PSI

* High temperature heating oil has the properties of DOWTHERM A.

** Low temperature heating oil has the properties of DOWTHERM E. 2 To modify an existing utility stream, highlight it on the Modify

Existing Stream list and click Modify.

To create a new utility stream: 1 Click Create in the Option section. 2 In the Create New Utility Stream section, type the name

and select one of the following fluid classes:

High Temp Heating Oil *

Low Temp Heating Oil **

Refrigerant – Ethane

Refrigerant – Ethylene

Refrigerant – Freon 12

Refrigerant – Propane

Refrigerant – Propylene

Refrigerant 50 Utility

Steam

Water


* High temperature heating oil has the properties of DOWTHERM A.

** Low temperature heating oil has the properties of DOWTHERM E. 3 Click Create. 4 Enter or modify the specifications on the Utility

Specifications form.

The form contains the following fields: − Description:

Describes the utility fluid resource in the sizing report generated by Aspen Capital Cost Estimator. Also, the field value is used to represent the utility fluid usage and its related cost on the Project Summary investment analysis spreadsheet (PROJSUM.ICS).

− Fluid: Determines the type of utility fluid described by the current specification. The fluid class is used to determine the heat transfer coefficient, fouling tendency and related thermal and transport properties used by Sizing Expert.

− Design Temperature Specifies the temperature, which will be considered in the estimation of the design temperature for the process equipment carrying the utility fluid.

− Design Pressure: Specifies the pressure, which will be considered in the estimation of the design pressure for the process equipment carrying the utility fluid.

− Inlet temperature: Provides the inlet temperature for the utility fluid.

− Exit temperature: Provides the exit temperature condition for the utility fluid.

− Pressure: Provides the operating pressure for the utility fluid.

− Energy transfer per unit mass:


Specifies the amount of energy provided or removed by the utility fluid over the specified temperature range. The value in this field is used to estimate the amount of utility required for the given process conditions.

− Unit Cost: Provides the cost value used to estimate the utility cost for the project.

− Unit Cost Units: Provides the units for the value provided in the unit cost field. When you specify a new utility fluid resource, all the information on the specification form must be provided; otherwise, the Sizing Expert will not be able to use the utility fluid resource properly. Using the utility specification form, you can specify a maximum of 20 utility fluids. If different utility fluid resource was used by simulation, then it is added to the utility resource in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator.

− Utility type: Describes the usage of the utility fluid. Select either Heat source or Heat sink.

5 Click OK when done entering the utility specifications.

Investment Analysis Note: Investment Analysis specifications are only included in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator if you are licensed to use Aspen Icarus Process Evaluator (Aspen Process Economic Analyzer) or Aspen Decision Analyzer. If you select at startup to use one of these in the Aspen Capital Cost Estimator environment, the Investment Analysis specifications appear in the Project Basis view.

Investment Parameters To specify parameters required for investment analysis: 1 Right-click on Investment Parameters in the Project Basis

view’s Investment Analysis folder. 2 On the menu that appears, click Edit.

Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays the Investment Parameters in the Main Window.


A description of the parameters follows.

General Investment Parameters • Period Description

This field lets you enter text indicating the name/description of a period. The period is defined in “Number of Weeks per Period.” The period description is used in the display of some of the results in the spreadsheets.

• Number of Weeks per Period The period used for investment analysis is defined in terms of number of weeks.

• Number of Periods for Analysis The number of periods to include in the cashflow and other project totals and calculations.

• Tax Rate


The tax rate for investment analysis, in terms of percent per period, is used to calculate the percentage of earnings before taxes that must be paid to the government.

• Desired Rate of Return The desired rate of return, in percent per period, for the investment.

• Economic Life of Project This field indicates the length of time in terms of periods over which capital costs will be depreciated.

• Salvage Value (Percent of Initial Capital Cost) This number indicates the approximate worth of capital costs at the end of the Economic Life of Project. The number is expressed as a percent of initial capital cost.

• Depreciation Method There are four depreciation methods allowed in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator. The description of each follows: − Straight Line

The straight line method is used most commonly. In this method, the Salvage Value is subtracted from the Total Project Cost. This result is then divided by the Economic Life of Project, so that the project is depreciated evenly over its economic life.

− Sum of the Digits When this method is used, the Depreciation Expense decreases during each period of the Economic Life of Project. Therefore, the highest value for the depreciation occurs in the first period and decreases every period thereafter. The sum of the digits multiplier is n/((N(N+1))/2), where N is the Economic amount is the Total Project Cost less its Salvage Value. For the duration of the project’s economic life, this factor is multiplied by the depreciable amount.

− Double Declining (Balance) When this method is used, the project is depreciated in geometric increments. The multiplier for the first period is 2/N, where N is the Economic Life of Project. For the second period the depreciation rate, D2, is (1-D1)D1 where D1 is 2/N. For the third period, the depreciation rate, D3, is (1-D1)D2. For the fourth period, the depreciation rate is (1-D1)D3. These factors are multiplied by the Total Project Cost. This process (multiplying the factor by the capital cost) continues until the Straight Line Method produces a higher value for the depreciation. When the Straight Line Method produces a higher value, this higher value is used for the remaining depreciation calculations.

− Accelerated Cost Recovery System (ACRS) The ACRS approach assumes that operations begin during the second half of the first period and stop during the first half of the last period. Therefore, as a result of the two half-periods (one at the beginning and one at the end of the operating cycle), it takes 6 periods to depreciate a project which has an Economic Life of 5 periods. The ACRS adapts the Double Declining Balance Method to the half-life system. The depreciation rate for the first period, D1, is 2/N, where N is the Economic Life of Project. However, the half-life convention reduces this factor to 1/N. For the second period the depreciation rate,


D2, is D1(1-1/ N). For the third period the depreciation rate, D3, is D1(1-1/N-D2). This process (multiplying the factor by the Total Project Cost continues until the Straight Line Method produces a higher value for the depreciation. When the Straight Line Method produces a higher value, this higher value is used for the remaining depreciation calculations.

Escalation Parameters • Project Capital Escalation

This number indicates the rate at which project capital expenses may increase expressed in percent per period. If the addition of Engineer-Procure-Construct (EPC) period and start-up period is greater than one whole period, Project Capital Escalation is used to escalate the capital expenses for periods beyond the first period.

• Products Escalation This is the rate at which the sales revenue from products of the facility are to be escalated (increased) in terms of percent per period.

• Raw Material Escalation This is the rate at which the raw material costs of the facility are to be escalated (increased) in terms of percent per period.

• Operating and Maintenance Labor Escalation This is the rate at which the operating and maintenance costs of the facility are to be escalated (increased) in terms of percent per period. The operating labor costs include operators per shift and supervisory costs.

• Utilities Escalation User-entered percentages reflecting the anticipated utility price increase each period.

Project Capital Parameter • Working Capital Percentage

The working capital expressed as a percentage of total capital expense per period indicates the amount required to operate the facility until the revenue from product sales is sufficient to cover costs. It includes current assets such as cash, accounts receivable and inventories. When the facility starts producing revenue, this cost item can be covered by the product sales.

Operating Costs Parameters • Operating Supplies

This field indicates the cost of miscellaneous items that are required in order to run the plant in terms of cost per period.

• Laboratory Charges This is a cost per period indicating the cost of having product analyzed each period.


• Operating Charges This includes operating supplies and laboratory charges. It is specified as a percentage of the operating labor costs. (If you specify a value for either “Operating Supplies” or “Laboratory Charges”, the system will add the two entered values and calculate the percentage of Operating Labor Costs. (This is done for compatibility with earlier releases of the system.)

• Plant Overhead This field consists of charges during production for services, facilities, payroll overhead, and so on This number is specified as a percent of operating labor and maintenance costs. This number should not be used for the construction of the facility, only for operation after start-up.

• G and A Expenses This represents general and administrative costs incurred during production such as administrative salaries/expenses, R&D, product distribution and sales costs. Specify this number as a percentage of subtotal operating costs.

Facility Operation Parameters • Facility Type

This field defines the facility type. The following types are currently available: − Chemical Processing Facility − Food Processing Facility − Oil Refining Facility − Petrochemical Processing Facility − Pharmaceutical Facility − Pulp and/or Paper Processing Facility − Specialty Chemical Processing Facility (A specialty chemical is defined

as a chemical which is produced in low quantity and has a usually high price per unit.)

The type of facility affects the number of operators/shift and maintenance costs of facility equipment.

• Operating Mode This refers to the operating mode of the facility. The available options are: − Continuous Processing - 24 Hours/Day − Continuous Processing - Less than 24 Hours/Day − Batch Processing - 24 Hours/Day − Batch Processing - 1 Batch per Shift − Batch Processing - More than 1 Batch per Shift − Intermittent Processing - 24 Hours/Day − Intermittent Processing - Less than 24 Hours/Day

The operating mode of the facility affects the number of operators/shift and maintenance costs of facility equipment.

• Length of Start-up Period


After the facility has been constructed (that is,, gone through engineering, procurement and construction), the plant must go through the owner’s start-up period until it starts producing the product to be sold. This period is referred to as Length of Start-up Period in weeks and is added into the EPC duration.

• Operating Hours per Period This field refers to the number of hours per period that the plant will be operating.

• Process Fluids Process Fluids indicate the types of fluids involved in the process. The selection affects operating and maintenance costs. The selections are: − Liquids − Liquids and Gases − Liquids and Solids − Liquids, Gases, and Solids − Gases − Gases and Solids − Solids

Operating Unit Costs To specify operating unit costs, right-click on Operating Unit Costs in the Project Basis view’s Investment Analysis folder, and then click Edit on the pop-up menu.

Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays the Operating Unit Costs in the Main Window.


The Operating Unit Cost form specifies Labor Unit Costs and non-heat transfer Utility Unit Costs.

Labor Unit Costs are given for Operators and Supervisors. The total cost of operating labor is calculated by: 1 Determining the total number of operators and supervisors

necessary to run the facility for a certain number of hours. 2 Adjusting that number for the number of hours the facility

operates per period. 3 Multiplying that number by the respective Labor Unit Costs

and adding them together.

Labor Unit Costs • Operator

The loaded wage rate paid for operating the facility in terms of the cost per operator per hour. Operator labor includes labor that is associated with operating the facility.

• Supervisor The loaded wage rate paid for supervision in terms of the cost per supervisor per hour. Supervision includes all labor associated with overseeing personnel who operate the facility.

• Utility Unit Costs The non-heat transfer utility unit costs are also specified in this file as “over the fence” costs. Utilities used for process heating and cooling are given in the Utility Specifications File.

• Electricity The unit cost per KWH of electricity used for the facility.

• Potable Water The potable water unit cost per MMGAL or MB used for the plant.

• Fuel The fuel unit cost per MMBTH or MEGAWH used for the plant.

• Instrument Air The instrument air unit cost per KCF or MB.

Raw Material Specifications An investment analysis conducted on any process needs to provide an accurate figure for total project expenditure. Since operating costs are usually a large part of this cost, it is important to accurately account for all raw materials consumed in the process.


Aspen Capital Cost Estimator lets you identify simulator streams as raw materials for the process.

The raw material costs will be directly placed in the PROJSUM.ICS spreadsheet for use in cash flow analyses.

To develop raw material specifications: 1 Right-click on Raw Material Specifications in the Project

Basis view’s Investment Analysis folder, and then click Edit on the pop-up menu.

The Develop Raw Material Specifications dialog box appears.

2 In the Option group, click Create. 3 In the Create New Stream group, type a name for the

stream. 4 Select the Basis (Mass, Volume, or Energy) and the Phase

(Solid, Liquid, or Gas) for the stream. 5 Click Create.

The Raw Material Specifications dialog box appears.


6 The following input information is required in order to

estimate the raw material costs during the evaluation of the operating costs for the project: Process Stream (or “none” if user-defined); Rate (do not specify a rate if a process stream is selected); and Cost Per Unit. In addition to the above minimum information, you have to specify certain field values for the raw material fluid program to estimate the raw material rate necessary for the cost estimate.

If you specify “none” in the Process Stream field, then the value for the Rate field must be specified in the appropriate units. If you specify a process stream, then the program determines the raw material rate in the desired Specification Basis and units.

You can specify a maximum of 150 raw material streams.

The Raw Material Specifications form contains the following fields: − Description

The value you provide in this field will be used to describe the raw material in the Project Summary investment analyses spreadsheet (PROJSUM.ICS)

− Specification Basis This field describes the raw material properties from the following list:

Mass, Gas

Mass, Liquid

Mass, Solid

Volume, Gas

Volume, Liquid

Volume, Solid

Energy − Process Stream

This field provides a list of fluid streams present in the current project. You can select any stream to represent the raw material. Also, there is a provision in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator for you to provide actual value for the raw material rate if none of the process streams


represent the raw materials for the project. In this case, you must specify the field value as “none.”

− Rate This field gives the total rate of raw materials consumed for the process in the desired rate units. When a new raw material fluid is specified, Aspen Capital Cost Estimator checks whether enough information has been specified to estimate the raw material cost.

• Rate Units This field describes the flow rate units for the current raw material. The choices available for the field vary with the selection made for Specification Basis and your choice of Base UOM:

Specification Basis I-P METRIC

Mass, Gas LB/H

KLB/H

MLB/H

TPH

KG/H

MEGAG/H

TON/H

Mass, Liquid LB/H

KLB/H

MLB/H

TPH

KG/H

MEGAG/H

TON/H

Mass, Solid LB/H

KLB/H

MLB/H

TPH

KG/H

MEGAG/H

TON/H

Volume, Gas GPH

MMGAL/H

CFH

KCFH

M3/H

L/S

Volume, Liquid GPH

MMGAL/H

CFH

KCFH

M3/H

L/S

Volume, Solid GPH

MMGAL/H

CFH

KCFH

M3/H

L/S

Energy BTU/H

MMBTU/H

MEGAW

CAL/H

W

KW

• Unit Cost


This field provides the cost value per unit mass, volume or energy used to estimate the raw material cost for the project.

7 When you are done entering raw material specifications, click OK. The new stream appears in the Existing Stream list on the Develop Raw Materials Specifications dialog box. You can enter a maximum of 150 raw material streams using this dialog box. When done, click Close.

Product Specifications An investment analysis conducted on any process needs to include an accurate figure for the project’s total revenue. In order to do so, it is very important to accurately account for all the products obtained from the process.

Aspen Capital Cost Estimator lets you identify simulation streams as product materials for the process. Once the simulation stream is defined, Aspen Capital Cost Estimator determines the necessary amount of product materials generated based on the information provided in the product material specification file.

The product material costs are directly placed in the PROJSUM.ICS spreadsheet, where they are used for further cashflow analyses.

To develop product specifications: 1 Right-click Product Specifications in the Project Basis

view’s Investment Analysis folder, and then click Edit on the pop-up menu.

The Develop Product Specifications dialog box appears.


2 In the Option group, click Create. 3 Enter a new stream name, select a basis and phase; then

click Create.

The Product Specifications dialog box appears.

4 The following input information is needed for Aspen Capital

Cost Estimator to estimate the product material costs during the evaluation of the operating costs for the project: − Description

The value specified in this field is used to describe the product material fluid in the investment analyses spreadsheet (PROJSUM.ICS).

− Specification Basis This field describes the product material properties from the following list:

Mass, Gas

Mass, Liquid

Mass, Solid


Volume, Gas

Volume, Liquid

Volume, Solid

Energy − Process Stream

This field provides a list of streams present in the current project. You can select any of the streams to represent the product material. Also, there is a provision in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator for providing an actual value for the product material rate if none of the process streams represent the product materials for the project. In this case, you must specify the field value as “none.”

− Rate This field defines the total rate of product materials obtained for the process in the desired rate units. Do not enter a value if you have specified a process stream. When a new product material is specified, Aspen Capital Cost Estimator checks whether the minimum information necessary to estimate the product material cost has been specified. The following minimum information must be present before Aspen Capital Cost Estimator can proceed with the estimate.

− Rate Units This field describes the flow rate units for the current product material. The choices available for the field vary with the selection made for Specification Basis and your choice of Base UOM:


Mass, Gas LB/H

KLB/H

MLB/H

TPH

KG/H

MEGAG/H

TON/H

Mass, Liquid LB/H

KLB/H

MLB/H

TPH

KG/H

MEGAG/H

TON/H

Mass, Solid LB/H

KLB/H

MLB/H

TPH

KG/H

MEGAG/H

TON/H

Volume, Gas GPH

MMGAL/H

CFH

KCFH

M3/H

L/S



Volume, Liquid GPH

MMGAL/H

CFH

KCFH

M3/H

L/S

Volume, Solid GPH

MMGAL/H

CFH

KCFH

M3/H

L/S

Energy BTU/H

MMBTU/H

MEGAW

CAL/H

W

KW

Unit Cost

The field provides the cost value used to estimate the product material cost for the project. 5 When you are done entering product specifications, click OK.

The new stream appears in the Existing Stream list on the Develop Product Specifications dialog box. You can enter a maximum of 150 product material streams using this dialog box. When done, click Close.

Developing Streams After opening a project, new streams can be developed. You have the option to develop completely new streams or use an existing stream as a base. When an existing stream is used as a base, the new stream can be either copied from the existing stream (Absolute Basis mode) or copied from and linked dynamically to the existing stream (Relative Basis mode).

To develop streams, right-click on Streams in the Project Basis view’s main folder (at the bottom), and then click Edit on the pop-up menu.


The Develop Streams dialog box appears.

Viewing or Modifying an Existing Stream To view or modify an existing stream, select the stream on the Modify tab view. You may need to use the scrollbar(s) to locate a stream if a large number of streams exist in the project. With the desired stream highlighted, click Modify to have the stream information displayed in a specifications form.


The functions of the six buttons on the Develop Stream specifications form are explained below:

Click To do this:

OK Perform a check on the information currently present in the Develop Stream specifications form to ensure that all information needed to specify the stream is completed. Aspen Capital Cost Estimator generates error messages indicating missing data.

Generate estimates for any specifications not entered.

Save the information in the Develop Stream specifications form. The Develop Stream specifications form closes and the Develop Streams dialog box re-appears.

Apply Same as clicking OK, but does not exit the Develop Stream specifications form. This lets you review the estimates and revise the data.

Update Same as clicking Apply, except that if the Primary Fluid Component, the Temperature, and/or the Pressure were changed, then all the physical properties of the stream will be estimated using these new values.

Cancel Exit the Develop Stream specifications form without making checks and does not save or change any information in the database.

Reset Reset the information in the Develop Stream specifications form to the values previously saved into the database. Any changes have been made since opening the form will be lost.

Mixture Define a stream as a mixture. Opens the Mixture Information dialog box discussed below.

Most Develop Stream specifications need no further explanation. Those that do are described below. • Primary Fluid Component

One of the most important specifications in this form is Primary Fluid Component, which is classifies the chemical components of a stream. The


fluid selected here is used as the basis for any properties that are unavailable and need to be estimated to complete the specifications for the stream. The available general fluid classifications are:

Alcohol Medium Hydrocarbon Liquid

Aromatic Liquid Miscellaneous Inorganic Liquid

Halogenated Gas Miscellaneous Organic Gas

Heavy Hydrocarbon Liquid Organic Acid

Hydrocarbon Gas Very Heavy Hydrocarbon Liquid

Inorganic Gas Solid

Light Hydrocarbon Liquid

The following pure components are also available for selection as the Primary Fluid Component of a stream:

Acetic Acid Glycerol Phosphoric Acid Ammonia Hydrogen Propane Argon Isopropyl Alcohol Propanol Carbon Monoxide Methane Propylene Carbon Dioxide Methanol Steam Ethane N-Butanol Sulfuric Acid Ethanol Nitric Acid Toluene Ethyl Benzene Nitrogen Water Ethylene Oxygen

If the Primary Fluid Component is specified, the other needed information will be filled in with default values. This feature is only apparent when no temperature or pressure is entered into the Develop Stream specifications form and the Primary Fluid Component is changed. After changing the Primary Fluid Component, either press Enter or click on another field and the default values will be loaded. If either the pressure or temperature value is changed from the default value, clicking OK , Apply, or Update will estimate the properties at the new condition(s).

• Base Stream The Base Stream field contains the name of the stream on which the displayed stream was based. This cannot be changed.

If the name begins with the character “$”, the stream was created using Absolute Basis and the stream name following this character is that of the parent stream. A stream created using Absolute Basis uses the data from the parent stream; however, if the parent steam’s data changes afterward, the Absolute Basis stream is not updated.

If the value begins with the character “@”, the stream was created using the Relative Basis and the stream name following this character is that of the parent stream. A stream created using Relative Basis is updated when its parent stream’s data changes.

• Description Select information from the menu to describe the particular stream. For example, you can indicate the source component of the stream (for example, From Pump P-103) or tag it with one of the available utility stream names.


• Mass Flow The Mass Flow fields are used to determine the phase of the stream. For instance, if the stream has only Liquid Mass Flow specified, the stream is totally liquid; therefore, it will have no vapor properties estimated for it. The reverse is true for a case with only a Vapor Mass Flow specified. For cases with both types of flow, all properties will be estimated and the Primary Fluid Component will belong to the phase of the largest mass flow.

Note: Aspen Capital Cost Estimator automatically calculates Total Mass Flow from the individual mass flow values.

• Density The Density fields are required information. Thus, if a particular phase has a mass flow rate specified, then the corresponding density must also be specified. Clicking Update will estimate any required Density fields based on the flow rate, except in the case of Solid Mass Density. It is recommended that you enter a Liquid Mass Density if one is available.

Mixture Specs Dialog Box Clicking Mixture on the Develop Stream specifications form accesses the Mixture Specs dialog box.

Note: After you click Apply, Aspen Process Economic Analyzer normalizes the Fraction values to total a sum of one. The values shown to the right would change into the values shown on the next page.

The mixture information specified in this dialog box is used to estimate properties as a mixture of the specified composition. If no mixture information is present, the stream is assumed to be pure Primary Fluid Component. The fraction information can be


entered on either a Mass or Mole Fraction Basis, as specified in the Fraction Basis section.

The Cancel and Reset buttons behave in a similar manner as their respective buttons on the Develop Stream specifications form.

The OK and Apply buttons also behave in a similar manner as their respective buttons on the Develop Stream specifications form, except the checking is different. Here, a check is made to ensure that the fractions have a total sum of one. If not, the values are normalized to give a total sum of one, as indicated below.

The check also combines duplicate entries into one entry by combining the two fraction specifications.

After the check is done, the components are sorted in order of decreasing fractional amount, as shown above. When you click OK, Aspen Capital Cost Estimator loads into the specifications form the name of the fluid with the highest fraction and the properties of the mixture generated from the contributions of the individual components.

Estimation of Utility Usage and Resulting Costs in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator Utility usage estimation is based on the stream information. All the streams that are present in the project are taken into consideration for the estimation of the utility usage for the project. This includes all utility streams, user-defined streams, simulator streams, and pre-map Streams. The Description field


on the Develop Stream spreadsheet can be used to designate streams as utilities. If the Description field for a stream exactly matches (exact text characters and spaces) the Description field for any utility resource as given on the Utility Specifications spreadsheet, then that stream is included in the utility usage calculation. If you change the description of any of the simulator or pre-map streams, then the new description you provided is used for this calculation.

Also, stream connectivity information is used to identify the nature of the stream. If the stream is being generated then it is considered to be revenue for the project, and if it is being consumed it is considered an expense. ( Note: Streams that are connected at both ends to process equipments are ignored in estimating the utility usage costs. Also, utility streams that have a zero unit cost do not show up in the final report.)

User-defined streams that are not connected to any equipment (do not show up in the PFD) are considered as input streams, that is,, consumption.

System-generated utility streams are included in the utility usage calculation as long as they are connected to equipment. A case where they would be disconnected would be if you manually disconnect these streams or if the equipment to which these streams are connected is deleted.

Stream Connectivity Process streams are “connected” to project components in a real way. You can see this in the Process Flow Diagram (PFD), which you can display after loading and mapping simulator blocks. Each stream has a Source end and a Sink end. The Source end connects to an Outlet port on a component and the Sink end to an Inlet as depicted below:


In the PFD view, when you Edit Connectivity (see page X504H274X) for the Sink end of a stream and move the cursor over a component, only Inlet port(s) turn green, thereby indicating their availability for making a connection to a Sink end.

The same concept also carries into the Interactive Sizing form (see page XX505H328XX). Only streams whose Sink ends are not connected are listed in the pulldown for any Inlet. This explains why the Inlet and Outlet pulldowns will include different streams.

Since the connectivity in the PFD and the Interactive Sizing form are two ways of looking at the same information, Aspen Capital Cost Estimator tracks your changes and synchronizes them in both views. Thus, if you change the connectivity in one view, Aspen Capital Cost Estimator automatically changes it in the other view.

When you first map and size components, the streams in the simulator will be connected to the project components and the underlying process conditions of those streams are available for further use. For example, you may create new streams based on the properties of any stream, connected or not, then use these new streams as Sources/Sinks for connecting new components (you might do this to set up spares). You may also add a New Mapping to an item already mapped and the newly mapped and sized item utilizes the underlying stream properties.

Creating A New Stream Streams can be created from scratch or by using a base stream.

To create a stream from scratch: 1 Go to the Create tab view on the Develop Streams dialog

box. Without selecting a stream from the Base Streams list, click Create. (The Basis selection will not matter.) The Create Stream dialog box appears.


2 Enter a name for the new stream in the Create Stream dialog box. This name must not be the same as any existing streams in the project. Click OK.

The Develop Stream specifications form appears.

Note: See page XX506H203XX for descriptions of the buttons and fields on this form.

3 Type values for the new stream. See page XX507H203XX for descriptions of the different fields. When done, click OK.

To create a stream based on an existing stream: 1 On the Create tab view on the Develop Streams dialog box,

click the stream to be used as the base.


2 Select the Basis mode. o If the Basis mode is Relative, the data from the

two streams will be linked so that when the base stream is changed the new stream will inherit these changes.

o If the Basis mode is Absolute, the data from the base stream is copied to the new stream at the time the new stream is created. Changes in a base stream will not affect a new stream created via Absolute basis.

3 Click Create.

The Create Stream dialog box appears.

4 On the Create Stream dialog box Stream Name field, type a

name for the new stream. This name must not be the same as any existing streams in the project.

5 Click OK.

Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays the specifications form for the newly created stream. The data is that of the Base Stream.


Data appears gray (dimmed) to indicate that it is relative to a referenced Base Stream.

Note: See page XX508H203XX and XX509H203XX for descriptions of the buttons and fields on this form.

Even in a Relative Stream, you can override any value with a manual entry. If you do so, the text turns black, indicating that that value is absolute and therefore no longer references a Base Stream. 6 Make modifications to the data; then click OK.

Deleting a Stream To delete a stream: 1 On the Delete tab view, click the stream to be deleted. You

may need to use the scrollbars to locate a stream if a large number of streams exist in the currently opened project.

Note: Only user-added streams and streams added by the Sizing Expert as utilities can be deleted.


2 Click Delete.

A dialog box will appear asking for confirmation of the delete action. 3 Click OK to delete the stream.

– or –

Click Cancel to retain the stream.

Specification Libraries The default specifications are derived from files that you can access, when outside of a project, from the Palette’s Libraries view.

When you create a project scenario, Aspen Capital Cost Estimator selects the specification files to use based upon the selected units of measure basis. However, you can right-click on any of the Project Basis specification that have corresponding libraries in the Palette, click Select on the pop-up menu, and


select a different file from which to derive the default specifications.

Customizing Specification Libraries When no project is open, you can create your own specification files or edit existing files. Then, when in a project, you can select your specification files. For example, if you frequently created project scenarios that used the same design basis, you could create a Basis for Capital Costs specification file with those design basis specifications. Then you could just select this file, instead of entering the specifications every time.

If, after making modifications to your libraries, you wish to revert to the original libraries, you can copy or import the copy of the installed libraries provided in the following folder:

…\AspenTech\Economic Evaluation V7.1\Program\Sys\Libraries

Creating a File

To create a specification file: 1 With no project open, go to the Libraries tab view in the

Palette, and expand the desired specification category. 2 Except for Code of Accounts, right-click on the units of

measure basis folder – Inch-Pound or Metric. For Code of Accounts, right-click on the Code of Accounts folder.

3 On the menu that appears, click New.

The New [Specification Category] dialog box appears.


3 Type a file name and, if desired, a file description. 4 Click OK.

Aspen Capital Cost Estimator creates the file and displays the specifications in a separate window. 5 Edit the specifications just as in a project. 6 When you are done, close the specifications window. If a

library file is open, you cannot access another library file or open a project.

See page XX510H217XX for instructions on selecting the newly created file for use in a project.

Modifying a File

To modify an existing specification file: 1 In the Palette (Libraries view), right-click the specification

file. 2 On the menu that appears, click Modify.


Importing a File You can import specification files from elsewhere on your computer or network.

To import a file: 1 In the Palette (Libraries view), expand the library to which

you wish to import a file. 2 Except for Code of Accounts, right-click on the units of

measure basis folder – Inch-Pound or Metric. For Code of Accounts, right-click on the Code of Accounts folder.

3 On the menu that appears, click Import.

4 In the Select a File for Import dialog box, locate the file

and then click Open.

The file is copied to the appropriate sub-folder.

Duplicating a File To duplicate a file:


1 In the Palette (Libraries view), right-click on the file you want to duplicate.

2 On the menu that appears, click Duplicate.

3 Type a file name and description (optional) for the new file.

3 Click OK.

Aspen Capital Cost Estimator creates the file and displays the specifications in a separate window. 4 Edit the specifications just as in a project. 5 When you are done, close the specifications window. If a

library file is open, you cannot access another library file or open a project.

See below for instructions on selecting the newly created file for use in a project.


Deleting a File To delete a specification file: • In the Palette (Libraries view), right-click on the file to be

deleted, and then click Delete on the pop-up menu.

Note: You cannot delete files named Default, only modify them.

Selecting Specification File for Use in a Project After creating a new specification file, you still need to select it in Project Explorer for Aspen Capital Cost Estimator to use its specifications.

To select a specification file: 1 Open the project scenario in which you wish to use the file. 2 In Project Explorer (Project Basis view), right-click on the

appropriate specification category. 3 On the menu that appears, click Select.

Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays a dialog box listing the files available for the selected category.


4 Select a new file from which to derive default specifications; then click OK.

Changing File Directory Location If you decide to store specification library files in a directory other than the default, move the default files to the new location and recreate the same sub-folder arrangement. Otherwise, Icarus will generate an error when you point to the new location.

Instrument Field Hook-Up Customization When you include a component with an instrumentation loop in your project, Aspen Capital Cost Estimator accounts for instrument field hook-up in the project’s direct costs and includes the parts for the instrument field hook-up on the Direct Costs – Overall Installation Details report.

The defaults are detailed in two ASCII files: • Sample_Inasmbly.dat • Sample_Inparts.dat

These two files are stored in the UserData folder.


To customize the instrument field hook-ups: 1 Open and modify these files in Wordpad or any other ASCII

text editor. 2 Save the files as Inasmbly.dat and Inparts.dat.

The Sample_Inasmbly.dat file is shown below.

There are extensive instructions for use provided toward the top of the scrollable document. Be sure to read these carefully before modifying. The editor must not introduce non-printing characters other than a space or CR/LF, that is,, no tabs are allowed.

The field hook-up assembly data is organized into the following columns: • LOOP SYMBOL: Symbol that describes the sensor loop. • DESCRIPTION: Place for comments; does not affect usage. • PART NO.: A reference to the part number in Inparts.dat file

for the part used in this assembly. • QTY: Quantity of this part to include in this assembly.

FG: Flag identifying this part as Piping or Instrumentation. The Piping parts are drawn from items in Inparts.dat with IDs of 1,000 or less. Their material of construction matches the material on the process side (component or pipe). These parts are the


ones eliminated when you turn off the process connection when defining modifications to a loop. The Instrumentation parts are drawn from the remaining items in Inparts.dat, which includes specifications for their materials of construction.

Note: When you create/edit an InAsmbly.Dat file, and you are specifying a loop, you have the option to set the FLAG column field to A instead of the default which is blank (Or P). For loops that you've created an A version of, the system expects you to also have defined a primary (default) version. Then by selecting A instead of P in the project (at the design basis on the loop) you can cause it to pick your A version instead of the usual selection of P. Important: The A vs. P choice is not about selecting the internal default or the Instrument Assembly.Dat loop definition. It is about choosing between two loop definitions in the selected Instrument Assembly.Dat file, of you've picked one. • NOTE: Additional place for comments; does not affect usage.

By changing the part types and quantities for each, you change the results developed for the field hook-ups.

You can: • delete the parts of a hook-up • revise each line • add parts to a particular field hook-up from Inparts.dat


The Sample_Inparts.dat file is shown below:

There are extensive instructions for use provided toward the top of the scrollable document. Please read these carefully before modifying the file, with the same limitations as described above.

The field hook-up assembly parts are organized into the following columns: • ID: A unique, four-digit part number. This shows up as the

PART No. in Inasmbly.dat. • COA: A valid Icarus instrumentation Code of Account (COA).

You should use an Icarus COA even if you plan to redefine the COA sets (see Icarus Reference, Chapter 34, “Code of Accounts”).

• QT: Quantity- must be set to 1. • UT: Unit of measure. • DIA I/P: Diameter (if applicable) in Inch-Pound (IP) units.

This is included in the line item details print out to identify the item.

• DIA MET: Same as above, but for Metric. • DESCRIPTION: Name for the line item to print in the details

section of reports.


• MATL: One of the valid Icarus materials of construction listed in the file.

• BCOST (USD): Material cost of the part in USD for the YEAR indicated in the file. This will be automatically converted to the currency of the project. The currency units are not important- the USD symbol here is for reference purposes only. You may change the symbol and/or enter your own cost values. However, it is critical that you enter the conversions between this currency and the four country currencies known to Icarus. That is done using the four CURCONs listed in the file.

• MH: Installation man-hours per indicated quantity (for example, per LF or M, EA, etc).

• CREW: Select one of the available Icarus instrumentation crews to perform the work.

• YEAR: The system will automatically escalate the user-entered material cost (see above, under BCOST) to the base year for the version of Aspen Capital Cost Estimator that is running the estimate.

For example, if a cost is specified as being valid in 2002, and you are running a First Quarter 2004 (1Q ’04) version of the system, then the cost in this file will be escalated to 1Q ‘04 before appearing in any report. It is important to note that the escalation index used is specific for the instrumentation account. This usually differs from the global system base indices listed in the Icarus Reference. The Release Notes provided with each cost release details the year-to-year changes by major account.

Using the Plot Plan Layout Tool

Workflow for Plot Plan Layout Tool:

1 Open an Aspen Capital Cost Estimator project. Add areas and equipment in each area according to your project scope. If you want the system to calculate area size for any area, keep the length and width fields of that area blank. For structural areas, specify number of levels/floors. The system will not calculate area sizes for MODULE type areas; you must specify the area dimensions. For equipment on structure, you must specify the floor/level number of the structure on the


equipment form as the location of equipment on the structure.

2 On the main tool bar, click Run | Evaluate Project for cost evaluation of the project. For areas without specifications of lengths and widths, the system will calculate lengths and widths from the equipment dimensions in the respective areas.

3 On the main tool bar, click Run | Export/Import From/To Basic Engineering to launch an Aspen Basic Engineering application. The Aspen Capital Cost Estimator application is put to sleep, and the costing interface to Aspen Basic Engineering is launched. All area dimensions and equipment footprints are exported to Aspen Basic Engineering.

4 Open the drawing editor and create a new plot plan document.

5 On the plot plan, place a scale symbol; the default scale is 100, but you can change the scale.

Labels and a piperack symbol are available in the Aspen Basic Engineering plot plan drawing. No other symbols are available. All the exported equipment, open steel/concrete structure, building and area symbols are seen under the stockpile, in the plot plan tab. No other symbols (other than exported components, labels, and pipe rack) can be placed on the drawing. All areas and components may be placed in one drawing.

6 For a new project, all areas and equipment will be displayed in the Stockpile of Aspen Basic Engineering. Move areas and equipment from stockpile to the main drawing area. For an existing project with equipment and areas placed in the plot plan drawing, all old areas and equipment will be placed in the proper locations of the drawing area.

7 In the Plot Plan interface, all equipment in a single area must reside in the area. You can move areas in the main drawing area, but you can move equipment inside its parent area only. You cannot move any equipment from its parent area to other areas. No new equipment can be added to the plot plan other than those imported from Aspen Capital Cost Estimator.

Equipment can be placed one above the other in an open steel structure, but then only the topmost equipment will be visible. All equipment located one above other or at different


elevations in an open steel structure need to be differentiated by user specified elevation parameter (level or floor number).

8 Place all the areas and the equipment in each area in the desired locations (X, Y coordinate) of the Plot Plan area.

9 Close the Plot Plan interface in Aspen Basic Engineering. Area coordinates (bottom left corner X, Y) with respect to Plot Plan datum (0,0 coordinate of Plot Plan) and equipment coordinates (X, Y, Z) with respect to parent area coordinates (bottom left corner) will be passed to Aspen Capital Cost Estimator interface. Area sizes will be passed to Aspen Capital Cost Estimator from Aspen Basic Engineering.

10 On the main tool bar, click Run | Interconnect Piping Lines to connect piping lines between equipment.

11 Evaluate the project cost. All lengths for interconnected piping lines will be calculated using the relative equipment locations and the lines not connected will inherit default lengths from the system volumetric model. The connected piping line length will be derived from: (a) a function of the design parameters of equipment and (b) the coordinates of the equipment. This length will be divided equally between the equipment if they are in the same area. For equipment in different areas, the system assumes that the connected equipment piping line will run to the respective shortest area boundary and will be on a pipe rack along the boundary of the areas. The length along the pipe rack will be divided equally between the equipment. In addition, each line on a piece of equipment will have a height coordinate where it joins to the equipment nozzle (available internally) so that the vertical run length of piping can be calculated.

3 Loading and Mapping Simulation Data 225

3 Loading and Mapping Simulation Data

Note: Simulation data can be used in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator only if you are licensed to use Aspen Icarus Process Evaluator (Aspen Process Economic Analyzer) or Aspen Decision Analyzer. If you are licensed, you can select at startup to use Aspen Process Economic Analyzer or Analyzer in the Aspen Capital Cost Estimator environment.

Overview If the process you wish to evaluate in Aspen Process Economic Analyzer is based on a simulator file report from a process simulator software program, the first step, after creating a project scenario and defining the Design Basis, is to load and map simulation data.

Aspen Process Economic Analyzer supports reports from the following simulators: • AspenTech’s AspenPlus Version 12.1 • Chemstations’ ChemCAD for Windows Version 5.3.2 • Hyprotech’s HYSIM Version STD/C.271 • Hyprotech’s HYSYS Version 2.4.1 • SimSci’s PRO/II with PROVISION Version 5.61 • Pacific Simulation’s WINGEMS 2.0 • WinSim’s DESIGN II for Windows Version 8.17

226 3 Loading and Mapping Simulation Data

Preparing Simulation Reports For Aspen Process Economic Analyzer to load the simulation data, an appropriate ASCII output report needs to be generated from the simulator. Most simulators describe the various steps needed to generate ASCII reports. This section provides additional procedures to generate reports in an Analyzer-compatible format.

The procedures provided here start with the default report generation options. If changes have been made from the default report generation options, then it may be necessary to change them back to the default settings for creating an output report for Aspen Process Economic Analyzer.

AspenPlus Report Generation AspenPlus provides a template containing the property sets that a project needs in order to generate an output report for Aspen Process Economic Analyzer.

Note: If you use the template, the following component specification, if entered in AspenPlus, must be re-entered in Aspen Process Economic Analyzer:

Block - CCD

STAGE EFFICIENCY

To use the template: 1 Open the project in AspenPlus. 2 On the File menu, click Import. 3 Navigate to:

Program Files\AspenTech\Economic Evaluation V7.1\Program\Load

Note: This is the default path; it may differ depending on where you installed Aspen Icarus. 4 Depending on the simulation units of measure, select the

appropriate simulator directory (for example, AspenPlus) and then the corresponding template (.apt) file.


To create the required property steps in Aspen Plus without using a template: 1 On the Data menu, click Properties. This will open the data

browser to the property specifications. 2 In the data browser tree structure, open the folder Prop-Sets

located in the Properties folder. 3 Click New to create a new property set. 4 Type a name for the property set or use the default name. 5 Click OK. 6 In the Substream field, select All. 7 Scroll down the list of available properties, clicking those you

wish to select. To start the scroll window, click in a physical properties cell:

o MASSVFRA o MASSSFRA o MASSFLMX o VOLFLMX o MASSFLOW o TEMP o PRES o MWMX

The specifications for this property set are complete as indicated by the check mark displayed on the tree view of the data browser. 8 Click the Prop-Sets folder. You will see the property set you

just created in the object manager and the status should be Input Complete.

9 Create the second property set by once again clicking New. 10 Type a name for the property set or use the default name. 11 Click OK. 12 Click the Qualifiers tab. 13 In the Phase cell, click Total. 14 Click the Properties tab. 15 In the Substream field, click ALL. 16 Now click the Units cell corresponding to the CPMX property

and pick either of the following units: o KJ/KG-K

-or-


o BTU/LB-R

The specifications for this property set are complete. 17 Click the Prop-Sets folder. The newly created property set

will appear in the object manager with an input complete status.

18 Create the final property set needed by Aspen Process Economic Analyzer by clicking New.

19 Type a name for the property set, or use the default name. 20 Click OK. 21 Click the Qualifiers tab. 22 In the Phase cell, click Vapor. 23 Click the Properties tab. 24 Select the following properties for this property set:

o VOLFLMX o MASSFLMX o KMX o MUMX o CPMX o MWMX

25 Now click the Units cell corresponding to the CPMX property and pick either of the following units:

o KJ/KG-K

-or- o BTU/LB-R

The creation of property sets is complete.

Now these property sets must be specified for use in the generation of a report.

To specify these property sets for use in report generation: 1 If the Setup folder is not already expanded, expand it by

clicking on the plus sign next to the folder symbol. 2 Click Report Options. 3 Click the Stream tab. 4 Click the Property Sets button. 5 Move the three property sets you just created to the

Selected property sets box.


6 Click the > button to move them to the Selected property sets box.

7 Click Close.

The specifications required for loading an AspenPlus report file are now complete. You can close the data browser window.

After running the simulation, you must create an output report.

To create an output report: 1 On the File menu, click Export. 2 In the Save As dialog box, use the drop-down menu to select

Report Files (*.rep) or XML files (*.xml). 3 Type a file name or accept the default value. 4 Click Save. This will create the ASCII report file needed to

load into Aspen Process Economic Analyzer with the name given above.

Note: The order on any of the tower models must be set to TOP-DOWN in order for the tray information to get loaded into Aspen Process Economic Analyzer correctly. This is the default setting.

Aspen Plus Utilities

If a unit operation block has a utility specified, the utility resource specifications and usage data will be transferred into Aspen Process Economic Analyzer. After loading the simulator data, a preference screen will appear. Specify any missing data for the Aspen Plus utilities in order for the Aspen Plus utility to be properly handled. The Aspen Plus utilities will appear as new utility resources. The appropriate project components will use the specified utility resource, based on the Aspen Plus utility used in the simulation.

A message box will appear if utility resources are modified or deleted from the Aspen Plus simulation prior to a reload of data into Aspen Process Economic Analyzer. You can choose to delete the old imported Aspen Plus utility resources in Aspen Process Economic Analyzer, or just add/update existing imported utilities in Aspen Plus.


AspenPlus – Aspen Process Economic Analyzer Simulator link A link from AspenPlus to Aspen Process Economic Analyzer lets you load changes into Aspen Process Economic Analyzer when simulation settings are changed in AspenPlus.

To load process simulator data through the Aspen Icarus link into a new Aspen Process Economic Analyzer project scenario: 1 Run the simulation in AspenPlus. 2 On the File menu, click Send To and click Aspen Icarus.

When the prompt appears, the Aspen Process Economic Analyzer project name will be designated to be the name of the simulation file from AspenPlus. AspenPlus will designate the scenario name. If the scenario name is changed, any future attempts to run the link for the same project will result in a new Aspen Process Economic Analyzer project being created. It is recommended that the scenario name designated by AspenPlus be left as it is for maximum usability. 3 Click OK.

The Project Properties dialog box appears. 4 Specify the Project Description, Remarks, and the Units of

Measure. 5 Click OK.

The Input Units of Measure Specifications dialog box appears. 6 Verify the Input Units of Measure Specifications; then click

OK.

The General Project Data dialog box appears. 7 Verify the General Project Data; then click OK.

Aspen Process Economic Analyzer displays a prompt to load the Simulator Data. 8 Click OK.

If the simulation has specified units that are undefined, a prompt will appear to do so. Define all AspenPlus units with those available in Aspen Process Economic Analyzer.


To load process simulator data through the Aspen Icarus link into an existing project scenario: 1 Run the simulation in AspenPlus 2 On the File menu, click Send To and click Aspen Icarus.

Aspen Process Economic Analyzer displays a prompt to load simulator data. 3 Click OK.

Because all other project basis settings have been specified, mapping and sizing can be performed at this time.

ChemCAD Report Generation These instructions apply to both ChemCAD for Windows, Version 5.3.2, and for previous versions of ChemCAD. The specifications are the same for all versions. 1 On the main menu, on the Output menu, click Report.

Note: In ChemCAD for Windows, just click the Output menu from the menu bar. 2 Specify the following for report options: • Select Streams • Print All Streams: Y

Note: Check box in ChemCAD for Windows • Select Unit Operations • Print All Unit Operations: Y

Note: Check box in ChemCAD for Windows. • Stream Properties 3 Select or deselect the following stream properties as indicated

below:

Property Select De-Select

OVERALL PROPERTIES

Mass flow rate X

Mole flow rate X

Temperature X

Pressure X

Mole Vap frac X

Enthalpy X

Molecular wt. X

Total act.dens X


Property Select De-Select

VAPOR PROPERTIES

Mass flow rate X

Mole flow rate X

Molecular wt. X

Vap. Act. Dens X

Vap. Viscosity X

Vap. Cp X

Vap. Thrm. Cond X

Liq. Surf. Tens. X

LIQUID PROPERTIES

Mole flow rate X

Molecular wt. X

Liq. act. Dens X

Liq. Viscosity X

Liq. Cp X

Liq. Thrm. Cond. X

SOLID PROPERTIES*

Mass flow rate X

Molecular wt. X

Density X

PSD X

DISTILLATION OPTIONS

Tray profile X

Tray properties X

Tray sizing X

Packed column sizing X

TRAY COMPOSITIONS

Mass flow rate X

* Solid properties are located on Page 2 of Stream Properties in ChemCAD for Windows.

The component mass flow rates for individual streams must be included in the output report. 4 Navigate to the Stream Flowrate/Composition menu

under the Reports/Output menu. 5 Pick Mass Flowrate.

If you want Aspen Process Economic Analyzer to use tray sizing information from the simulator, then you must include the appropriate sizing information.


6 To do this, go to Distillation Summaries under the Reports/Output menu; then select the appropriate sizing section (packed or trayed).

7 After the completion of all these specifications, generate the output report by selecting Calculate and Give Results. This should generate an output report. You can rename it if you wish. This is the file to be used as input for Aspen Process Economic Analyzer.

HYSIM Report Generation 1 Copy the following .spc files from the

\Program\Load\Hysim directory to your HYSIM working directory before generating output inside the simulator.

• MIXER.SPC • TEE.SPC • HTXRATE.SPC • BALANCE.SPC • CALC.SPC • MASSBAL.SPC • MOLEBAL.SPC

For all other operations, use the default .spc files provided by Hyprotech. 2 For HYSIM version 386|C2.12 or earlier, copy the stream

format file STRSUM.FMT located in the /Aspen Process Economic Analyzer/Docs directory of your HYSIM working directory. If you have HYSIM version STD:C2.63 and above, copy the stream format file STRSUM2.FMT located in the /Aspen Process Economic Analyzer/Docs directory to your HYSIM working directory and rename it STRSUM.FMT. You must either delete or rename the existing STRSUM.FMT file to perform this.

The output report generated from HYSIM should contain operation output (defined as spec_sheet in HYSIM) and the complete stream summary. Both of these outputs must be saved under the same file name. The information is appended to the file and does not get overwritten.

To generate the operation output and stream summary (Required): 1 Load the desired project inside HYSIM (*.sim).


o operation output o stream summary

2 On the main menu, click Print. 3 On the print option, click File; then press Enter. 4 Select the same file (file_name) as above; then press

Enter. 5 Click the Print option; then press Enter. 6 Select the Stream option; then press Enter. 7 Inside the Stream option, select Summary; then press

Enter. 8 The list of streams present in the current project is displayed.

Click the <-> option for all the streams to be written in file_name.

The procedure creates the required report (file_name), which can be loaded into Aspen Process Economic Analyzer and used for project evaluation.

If sizing operations are performed inside the simulator and you want the information to be carried over to Aspen Process Economic Analyzer, the following steps must be performed in addition to the above procedure: 1 Load the desired project inside HYSIM (*.sim).

sizing summary 2 On the main menu, click Size. 3 Inside the size option, choose the unit operation desired;

then press Enter. 4 Select the particular equipment (for example, col-101) ; then

press Enter. 5 Select auto_section or user_section; then press Enter. 6 After the sizing calculations are performed, select Print. 7 Select File; then press Enter. 8 Select the same file name (file_name) ; then press Enter. 9 Click Summary; then press Enter.

Important: • The operation names and stream names can not contain the

following characters:

+, -, *, or spaces • The ASCII report has to be created in the default units

specified by HYSIM for the ENGLISH and the SI modes of


operation. You can run a simulation in any simulator-provided units. However, prior to creating the report file, you must convert the units to the default specifications provided by HYSIM.

• During the sizing procedure for the column operation, if user_section is chosen, care should be taken to check that the stage numbers are not repeated in the different sections of the same column operation. The following two examples demonstrate the correct and incorrect specifications.

Correct Incorrect

user_section_1 : (start stage) 1 user_section_1 : (start stage) 1

(end stage) 10 (end stage) 10

user_section_2: (start stage) 11 user_section_2 : (start stage) 3

(end stage) 15 (end stage) 15

• The user_section name should not contain the following

characters:

+, -, * • The report format should be such that the width of the report

should be less than or equal to 4 streams wide. This can be accomplished from the format option provided in HYSIM.

• Stream summary should follow the operation output in the report, that is, the order should be maintained.

HYSYS Report Generation Aspen Process Economic Analyzer’s External Simulation Import Tool imports HYSYS simulator data into Icarus database files, which you can then load into Aspen Process Economic Analyzer.

To import HYSYS simulation data for loading into Aspen Process Economic Analyzer: 1 On the Tools menu, click External Simulation Import

Tool.


The Simulator Link dialog box appears.

2 Click the Browse button for the Simulator File field.

3 Select the process simulator project you created; then click

Open. 4 Click the Browse button for the Export File field. The Export

File will contain the exported simulation results data from the selected HYSYS project. Do not include any file extensions for this file. The import tool will automatically assign a d01 extension to this file.

5 Select the location and enter the file name you want to be

used to contain the exported data. You can also select an existing file.

6 Click Save.


7 On the Tools menu, click Connect. HYSYS will automatically start with the selected project.

The following figure shows the file Cheplant.hsc in the HYSYS interface.

8 Click Export on the Simulator Link dialog box to start the

process of exporting the simulation data from the selected HYSYS project into the Export File.

Once finished, you will see five files with the name you gave to the Export File. These files contain the exported data.

Note: These files should always go together, in case you want to copy them to another location.

D:\test\cheplantn.d01 Icarus database file

D:\test\cheplantn.d02

D:\test\cheplantn.d03

D:\test\cheplantn.d04 9 On the Simulator Link dialog box, click Disconnect. The

tool will close HYSYS. If you want to keep HYSYS running and make changes to your simulation, you can use the Export Again button to export the data again into the Export File.

10 Exit the import tool. 11 Start Aspen Process Economic Analyzer and create a new

project. 12 Select Hyprotech’s HYSYS as the Simulator Type. 13 When selecting the simulator report file, select the Export

File (the file with the extension .d01) created using the import tool


14 To load, map, and size this project, continue as described in this guide.

SimSci’s PRO/II with PROVISION Report Generation Two methods can be used for generating reports from PRO/II with PROVISION. • You can change the input keyword file (*.inp) to include the

required print options using keywords for those using PRO/II directly

-or- • You can change the print options from within the PROVISION

user interface.

For either method, the operation names and stream names should not contain the following characters: • + • *

Note: When specifying sidestrippers, each sidestripper must be identified by a unique four-character name. Currently, sidestrippers are not always identified by their full user-given names in PRO/II with PROVISION report files. Sometimes, they are identified by only the first four characters of the user-given names. Therefore, to properly load sidestripper information into Aspen Process Economic Analyzer, sidestripper Unit identifiers (UID’s) must be used, which are only four characters long.

To prepare the SimSci report in PROVISION: 1 On the Input menu, select Problem Description. Make sure

that the Problem Identifier field is not blank; something must be entered.

2 On the Output menu, select Report Format. 3 On the Report Format menu, select Miscellaneous Data. 4 Set the Report Width field to 80 Columns (the PROVISION

default value). 5 On the Report Format menu, select Stream Properties. 6 Select Molar Flowrate and Weight Fraction. 7 On the Report Format menu select Unit Operations. 8 For each column unit operation:


A On the Unit Operations list, select Column.

B Click the Print Options button while unit is highlighted. C Select Molar Basis from the Column Summary list. D From their respective column print options window, select:

o Molecular Weights o Actual Densities o Actual Volumetric Flowrates o Transport Properties o Flowing Enthalpies o Standard Liquid Densities

E Click OK. F Repeat for each remaining COLUMN unit operation in list.

Note: See the note in the KEYWORD section regarding COLUMN sidestripper’s UID’s. 9 Click Close to finish. 10 Use the default options for remaining unit operations.

Using Keywords

For General Print Options, use the following keywords:

Print INPUT = ALL

STREAM = ALL

RATE = M

WIDTH = 80

For COLUMN operations, use the following keyword:

Print PROPTABLES = PART or ALL

Loading Simulation Data The following loading procedure translates the specified process simulator report file into Aspen Process Economic Analyzer.

To load process simulator data: 1 In Project Explorer, Project Basis view, right-click

Simulator Type in the Process Design folder; then click Edit.


The Select Simulator Type dialog box appears.

2 Select one type from the list; then click OK.

Aspen Process Economic Analyzer displays a message saying what the new simulator type is.

3 Click OK. 4 In the Process Design folder, Right-click Simulator File

Name; then click Edit.

The Open dialog box appears, showing all simulator files in the Report folder. You can browse other drives and folders as well.


5 Select a file; then click Open.

Note: The List view now displays the pathname of the selected simulator file when you select Simulator File Name in Project Explorer. 6 Do one of the following:


-or- • On the Run menu, click Load Data.

A confirmation window appears.

7 Click Yes.

Aspen Process Economic Analyzer loads the simulator data.

When the loading of the data is finished, the Process view of Project Explorer is populated with simulator areas and simulator blocks.


Viewing Data Derived from Simulator

To access simulator-derived data (read-only): 1 Right-click a block, and on the menu that appears, click

Modify.

2 Click Cancel to close.


Working with Block Flow Diagrams Aspen Process Economic Analyzer automatically generates a Block Flow Diagram (BFD) from a loaded simulator report. Providing a graphical representation of the process, the BFD displays computational blocks and their connections.

The blocks in the diagram correspond to tree items displayed in the Project Explorer’s Process view. Color-coding of the blocks in both the Process view and the BFD agree; mapped items are displayed green and unmapped items are displayed yellow.

Displaying the Block Flow Diagram To display the Block Flow Diagram: • On the View menu, click Block Flow Diagram.


The BFD appears in the Main Window.

Note: A block can be moved by clicking on the center of the block and dragging it to the desired location. Doing so will also move the streams connected to the block. If the simulator data is reloaded, the block and stream locations will be regenerated by Aspen Process Economic Analyzer.

In addition to the blocks displayed in the Process view, the BFD displays streams, direction of stream flows, inlets, and outlets.

The commands on the View menu change when the BFD is active. (See Block Flow Diagram View Menu on page X511H243X more information.)

The Drag & Find Feature There is a quick and easy way to find a block on the BFD.

Drag the block from the Project Explorer’s Process view and drop it anywhere in the BFD. The part of the BFD displayed changes so that the block you want to find appears in the upper-left corner of the Main Window.


Drag a block from Project Explorer (Process view) to the BFD

Aspen Process Economic Analyzer finds the block on the diagram

Accessing Commands in the Block Flow Diagram Right-clicking on blocks in the BFD accesses the same commands available when you right-click a block in Project Explorer’s Process view.

Block commands

Clicking View accesses simulator-derived data (read-only), as shown on page XX512H242XX.

The Map command and Delete Mappings command are explained in the next section, Mapping Simulator Items to Icarus


Project Components, starting on page XX513H249XX. Alteration of mapping will alter the blocks' color based on its status.

Stream commands

You can double-click a stream to access the Develop Stream specifications form. This form is explained on page XX514H203XX.

Zooming You can use the Zoom In and Zoom Out buttons to increase or decrease the magnification by degrees:

You can also select an exact magnification by using the Zoom dialog box.

To use the Zoom dialog box: 1 On the View menu, click Zoom.

The Zoom dialog box appears.

2 Click the desired magnification, or click Custom and type a

percentage between 10 and 1,000. 3 Click OK to change magnification and close the dialog box.

-or-

Click Cancel to close the dialog box without changing magnification.

The Zoom dialog box also has two options that affect printing:

Fit into one page

Mark this box to have Aspen Process Economic Analyzer re-size the BFD to fit onto one page when printed. This automatically selects the next option, What-You-See-Is-What-You-Get, since


the screen image will reflect the size required to fit on one printed page.

What-You-See-Is-What-You-Get (WYSIWYG)

When WYSIWYG is cleared, zooming in or out will only affect the magnification factor on the screen, while the printer always prints at 100%. However, if WYSIWYG is selected, the magnification factor on the printer will be changed so that the printed image will have the same size as the image appearing on the screen.

BlockFlow Diagram View Menu

The View menu contains some options that are only displayed when the Block Flow Diagram is active

Use this to

Toolbar View or hide the toolbar. See page XX515H41XX for descriptions of toolbar buttons.

Status Bar View or hide the status bar. See page XX516H28XX for description of the status bar.


Project Explorer View or hide Project Explorer. See page XX517H29XX for description of Project Explorer.

Palette View or hide the Palette. See page XX518H35XX for description of the Palette

Properties Window View or hide the Properties Window. See page XX519H38XX for a description of the Properties Window.

Workbook Mode Turn Workbook Mode on and off. See page XX520H31XX for an explanation of Workbook Mode.

Capital Costs View Launch Aspen Icarus Reporter for interactive reports (on-screen, HTML, or Excel) or Icarus Editor for evaluation reports (.ccp). The Project Evaluation needs to have already been run. See page XX521H574XX and page XX522H564XX for details.

Investment Analysis View Display Investment Analysis spreadsheets. See Reviewing Investment Analysis on page XX523H605XX for instructions.

Block Flow Diagram Display Block Flow Diagram of the loaded simulator data.

Process Flow Diagram Display Process Flow Diagram. This command is not active until you have mapped the simulator items.

Streams List Display a read-only list of all simulator-derived stream properties in a spreadsheet. You can customize some of the features of the spreadsheet (which stream properties to display, whether to display names of the properties, and the display style of the property values) by editing the stream list template file:

...\Economic Evaluation V7.1\Data\ICS\strlist.fil

Grid Visible View or hide grid lines.

Snap to Grid Move blocks in increments corresponding to the grid lines when dragging to new location.

Show Page Bounds View or hide page separation lines. When displayed, you can see where page breaks will be when printing.

Ports Visible View or hide ports in the Process Flow Diagram. Does not apply to Block Flow Diagram.

Zoom Access Zoom dialog box. See page XX524H246XX.


Mapping Simulator Items to Icarus Project Components Mapping is the process of converting each simulator block (that is, model or unit operation) into one or more Icarus project components.

To map simulator items: 1 If you want to map all items, access the Map dialog box by

doing one of the following:


-or- • On the Run menu, click Map Items.

2 If you want to map a single block or all blocks in an area, do one of the following: • In Process view, right-click a block or area; then click

Map on the menu that appears. -or- • In the Block Flow Diagram, right-click a block then click

Map on the menu that appears.


The Map dialog box appears.

Note: If you clicked the Map button on the toolbar or clicked Map Items on the Run menu, only the Map All Items check box is available in the Source section. If you clicked Map on a pop-up menu, both Map Selected Item(s) – the default choice – and Map All Items are available.

Select the desired mapping options.

Option Description

Source

Map Selected Item(s) Map the selected simulator block or the simulator blocks in the selected simulator area. This option is available only if you selected Map from a pop-up menu.

Map All Items Map all simulator items in the project.

Basis

Last Mapping Map a block according to the last time it was mapped. This option retains only the type of Icarus project component(s) to which the block was last mapped.

Default Use the Component Map Specs file for the basis.

Default and Simulator Data

Use the Component Map Specs file for the basis, but override the mapping using specific data in the simulator. For example, if you select this option and a reboiler type is specified in the simulator report, an equivalent reboiler type will be used in the mapping.

Further, if the "Preferences>Process>Use Automatic Mapping Selection when Available" was selected, then additional engineering rules of thumb will be used for a selected category of equipments (for example, pumps, compressors, and heat exchangers) to come up the


Option Description

mapping recommendations. (Note: Currently this mode is active only when blocks are mapped one at a time.)

Users are encouraged to review these recommendations and either accept them or select a different equipment type based on their knowledge of their processes and practices.

Options

Size Icarus Project Component(s)

Size the mapped Icarus project component(s).

If you are mapping a single item to a single component that can be sized using the interactive Sizing Expert (see list on page X525H339X), the Interactive Sizing form will appear after mapping.

Otherwise, Aspen Process Economic Analyzer uses its automatic sizing.

Although the Sizing Expert is unavailable when sizing multiple components, you can still use it later (assuming the component is one of those that can be sized interactively). Just right-click on the mapped component and click Re-Size on the pop-up menu.

Note: See Chapter 6 for instructions on using the Sizing Expert.

3 Click OK. The Project Component Map Preview dialog box appears.

Note: All simulator items are displayed because Map all Items was selected at the previous dialog box. Those components being mapped have asterisks next to them.


If you selected Map Selected Item(s) on the Map dialog box, the Simulator Items list displays just the selected simulator block(s). If you selected Map all Items, the Simulator Items list displays all simulator blocks.

The Current Map List displays any components that are already mapped to the simulator block highlighted on the Simulation List.

The Configuration option box is active only for blocks representing column models. (In the sample project, Block B7 represents a column model.)

You must use the arrow scroll buttons to see all ten possible configurations. Selecting a configuration type automatically fills in the Current Map List with the components required for that configuration type. See Tower Configurations on page X526H259X for more information. 4 Click New Mapping to map a block highlighted on the

Simulator Items list to an Icarus project component.

If the simulator block represents a column model that does not yet have all its required mappings, the Select a Suffix dialog box appears, listing the types of components (indicated by suffixes that appear at the end of Item Descriptions on the List view) that still need to be mapped to the block.

Note: See Tower Configurations on page X527H259X for more information.


Suffix To indicate

bottoms split bottoms splitter

bot exchanger bottoms exchanger

bottoms pump bottoms pump

Cond condenser for the tower

cond acc condenser accumulator

ovhd exchanger Overhead exchanger

Overhead split Overhead splitter

ovhd pump Overhead pump

precooler first heat exchanger in “split” configuration”

Reb reboiler for the tower

reflux pump reflux pump

Tower main tower

Trim second heat exchanger in “split” configuration”

Other user-selectable.

spray cond Spray condenser

spray cond exit pump Pump for recirculating the spray condenser exit

sc tot recycle splitter Splitter in Spray Condenser Configuration that generates the total recycle stream

sc cooler Heat exchanger in the Spray Condenser Configuration that cools the entire total recycle stream

sc tot recycle trim splitter Trim splitter in Spray Condenser Configuration 2 (page X528H266X)

sc trim Heat exchanger in the Spray Condenser Configuration that cools the entire total recycle stream

5 Select a suffix; then click OK.


The Icarus Project Component Selection dialog box appears.

6 Select a component.

The Project Component Map Preview dialog box now displays the component category's item symbol (for example, AG) and the component type (for example, DIRECT) in the Current Map List. More component details are displayed in the Icarus Project Component Description section.


By default, the Component Name field contains the block name. You may want to modify it to be more descriptive and to distinguish the component from others to which the block has also been mapped. This can be as simple as adding a descriptor at the end.

Each component mapped from the block must have a unique name; if another component already has the default component name, Aspen Process Economic Analyzer prompts you to enter a unique name after you select another component. 7 Click OK to complete the mapping.

If you selected to size the mapped component(s), Aspen Process Economic Analyzer also performs automatic sizing or, in cases in which a single item is being mapped to a single component for which interactive sizing is available, the Interactive Sizing form appears. See Chapter 6, Sizing Project Components, for information on this feature. With the block now mapped, the List view displays the components mapped from the simulator block.

Component Status You may notice a "?" in the Status column of a project component mapped from the simulator block. This indicates that


there are still specifications that need to be entered for the component. To enter the specifications, right-click on the component and click Modify Item on the pop-up menu. Entering specifications in the required fields will change the status to OK. Required fields are indicated by color-coding explained on page XX529H291XX, under Entering Component Specifications.

If you do not enter the specifications and the "?" remains in the Status column, the item will not be included in the project evaluation and will have "0" cost associated with it. It will not cause SCAN messages.

Deleting Mappings

To delete mappings: • Right-click in the simulator area or simulator block in Process

view; then, on the menu that appears, click Delete.

Tower Configurations Because a column can be mapped to multiple pieces of equipment, Aspen Process Economic Analyzer requires that you select a tower configuration on the Project Component Map Preview dialog box.


You can select from among ten possible configurations: • Standard – Single • Standard – Total • Standard – Total w/Circ. • Standard – Split • Standard – Split Total • Standard – Split Total w/Circ. • Full – Single • Full – Single w.Circ. • Full – Split • Full – Split w/Circ.

This term means

Single Tower has one condenser.

Split Tower has multiple condensers.

Total the reflux pump handles the total outlet liquid flow from the accumulator. In such configurations, the splitting into a reflux and overhead liquid product occurs after the reflux pump.

Circ. there is a pump between the bottoms splitter and the reboiler giving a forced circulation configuration around the reboiler.

Note: Full configurations include the following equipment not found in Standard configurations: • overhead pump • overhead product heat exchanger • bottoms product pump • bottoms product heat exchanger

Based on the tower configuration selected, Aspen Process Economic Analyzer automatically creates a model for each tower block and then maps the model to an Icarus project component. In addition, you can specify how the condenser requirements should be split between the Precooler and the Trim cooler on the Design Criteria specifications form.

If subcooling is present, the precooler will completely condense the overhead vapor and the trim cooler will perform the subcooling; the split specification on the Design Criteria specifications form will be ignored when subcooling is present.


The following figures display the ten possible configurations. The default item description suffixes (see page XX530H253XX) are used to identify the configuration parts, each of which is mapped to an Icarus project component.


Figure 1: Standard – Single

Figure 2: Standard Total


Figure 3: Standard Total w/Circ


Figure 4: Standard Split

Figure 5: Standard Split Total


Figure 6: Standard Split Total w/Circ.

Figure 7: Full – Single


Figure 8: Full – Single w/Circ.

Figure 9: Full – Split


Figure 10: Full – Split w/Circ.


Figure 11: Spray Condenser Configuration 1 w/Circ.

Note: Flow rate of the Spray Cond Total Recycle (SCTR) stream is calculated using Ratio of Recycle to (Ovhdliqprod + Reflux) Flowrates = mSCTR / (mOVH LIQ PROD+ mREFLUX). Ratio of Recycle to (Ovhdliqprod + Reflux) Flowrates is an input specified in the Design Criteria.

mSCTR = mass flow rate of the SCTR stream.

mOVH LIQ PROD = mass flow rate of the Overhead Liquid Product stream.

mREFLUX = mass flow rate of the Reflux stream.


Figure 12: Spray Condenser Configuration 2 w/Circ.

The duty for the SC COOLER and SC TRIM exchangers are calculated using

Ratio of SC Trim Duty to Overall Duty = QSCTRIM / QCONDENSER

QCONDENSER = QSCTRIM + QSCCOOLER

where:

Ratio of SC Trim Duty to Overall Duty is an input specified in the Design Criteria QSCTRIM = Spray Condenser Cooler Duty

QSCCOOLER = Spray Condenser Trim Duty

QCONDENSER = Total Overhead Condenser Duty, obtained from Simulator Data

Then the temperatures of the streams exiting the Spray Condenser Cooler and Spray Condenser Trim exchangers are calculated using:

a Q = mCpDeltaT calculation.


Flow rate of the streams exiting the SC Tot Recycle Trim Splitter are determined using:

SC Trim Splitter Flow Split Ratio = mSCRTSEx1 / mSCCEx

mSCCEx = (mSCRTSEx1 + mSCRTSEx2)

SC Trim Splitter Flow Split Ratio is an input specified in the Design Criteria mSCCE = mass flow rate of the SC Cooler Exit Stream

mSCRTSEx1 = mass flow rate of the SC Rcy Trim Splitter Ex1 Stream

(this is the one that subsequently goes through the SC TRIM exchanger) mSCRTSEx2 = mass flow rate of the SC Rcy Trim Splitter Ex2

Stream

Sizing Selection This section outlines the workflow of the sizing selection feature available in Aspen Icarus Process Evaluator. Sizing selection is a mechanism that lets you pre-define and/or define sizing rules for project components. Specifically, you can set rules on equipment models or specific project components to be sized with one or more custom models.

Project Sizing Selection Typically, you load data from a simulation and then choose to map the simulator unit operations. In the mapping screen that appears, there is a check box to Review Sizing Selection. If selected (the default is based on the Tools | Options | Preferences | Process | Sizing selection on the item-size menu), the sizing selection appears.

You select any custom model for sizing the project components listed. • If an item is selected, the sizing preview screen appears

during a size or re-size performed on one or more project component(s).


• If an item is not selected, the mapping preview screen does not appear for editing during these steps, but the sizing selection specifications is applied to the selected project component(s).

Figure 13: Mapping with option to review sizing selection

If selected, you will see the Sizing Selection preview after the mapping preview screen for a chance to edit how the project components are sized (see Figure 14).

Figure 14: Sizing Selection preview for specified project components

You can specify the sizing routines (System Sizing and custom models) for each project component (created by mapping from a


simulator or manual creation) that will be applied during the size-all step.

If a custom model is specified in the current sizing list for a project component, the project component will be sized in the order shown in the Current Sizing List (see Figure 14). Any custom models listed will be sized using the custom model tool automatically without any user-interaction required. After sizing is complete, the system returns to a ready-state for you to perform additional project tasks.

For Global Sizing Selection information, see page XX531H334XX.

Specifying Additional Components Icarus project components can be added to areas mapped from a simulator report. However, these project components must initially be added in a user-added area. You can later rearrange the components in Project Explorer’s Project view, drag components from a user-added area to an area mapped from the simulator report.

Follow the instructions for adding a project component on page XX532H286XX.

If the component you add is process equipment, Aspen Process Economic Analyzer adds an icon representing the new equipment item in the upper left-hand corner of the Process Flow Diagram (PFD). The next section, Working with Process Flow Diagrams, includes instructions (under “Editing Connectivity” on page XX533H274XX) for connecting an added component to a stream in PFD view.

Working with Process Flow Diagrams Process Flow Diagrams (PFD) provide graphical representations of Icarus process equipment mapped from simulator blocks and the interconnecting streams. You can edit the layout and connectivity of the mapped items from PFD view. You can also add streams. Aspen Process Economic Analyzer provides intelligent port selection, so that when drawing a stream you see


the candidate ports highlighted in green as the mouse is moved over them.

To access PFD view: 1 On the View menu, click Process Flow Diagram.

2 Use the Drag-and-Find feature to locate any equipment item

on the PFD. 3 Drag an equipment item from Project Explorer (Project view)

and drop it on the PFD.

The icon in the PFD that corresponds to the selected equipment will be positioned in the upper left-hand corner (regardless of magnification).

Editing the Layout

To change the position of an item: • Use your mouse to drag the item to its new position.

Aspen Process Economic Analyzer reroutes any streams connected to the item.

To change the route of a stream: • Click the stream; then drag the stream to straighten it or to

create an elbow-bend.


Note: If you eventually select Reroute All Streams on the Run menu, Aspen Process Economic Analyzer chooses the most logical routes for all streams.

Process Flow Diagram View Menu

Note: The View menu contains some options that are displayed only when the Block Flow Diagram is active.

Use this to

Toolbar View or hide the toolbar. See page XX534H41XX for descriptions of toolbar buttons.

Status Bar View or hide the status bar. See page XX535H28XX for a description of the status bar.

Project Explorer View or hide Project Explorer. See page XX536H29XX for a description of Project Explorer.


Palette View or hide the Palette. See page XX537H35XX for a description of the Palette.

Properties Window View or hide the Properties window. See page XX538H38XX for a description of the Properties window.

Workbook Mode Turn Workbook Mode on and off. See page XX539H31XX for an explanation of Workbook Mode.

Capital Costs View Launch Aspen Icarus Reporter for interactive reports (on-screen, HTML, or Excel) or Icarus Editor for evaluation reports (.ccp). The Project Evaluation needs to have already been run. See page XX540H574XX and page XX541H564XX for details.

Investment Analysis View Display Investment Analysis spreadsheets. See Reviewing Investment Analysis on page XX542H605XX for instructions.

Block Flow Diagram Display Block Flow Diagram of the loaded simulator data.

Process Flow Diagram Display Process Flow Diagram. This command is not active until you have mapped the simulator items.

Streams List Display a read-only list of all simulator-derived stream properties in a spreadsheet. You can customize some of the features of the spreadsheet (which stream properties to display, whether to display names of the properties, and the display style of the property values) by editing the stream list template file:

...\Economic Evaluation V7.1\Data\ICS\strlist.fil

Grid Settings Access Grid Properties dialog box, where you can set the grid increments and select to view or hide grid lines.

Snap to Grid Move blocks in increments corresponding to the grid lines when dragging to new location.

Show Page Bounds View or hide page separation lines. When displayed, you can see where page breaks will be when printing.

Ports Visible View or hide ports.

Zoom Access Zoom tool. This is the same as in the Block Flow


Diagram (see page XX543H246XX).

Add Stream Access the Develop Streams dialog box. See Adding A Stream, page XX544H276XX, for details.

Draw Disconnected Stream Access the Disconnected Streams dialog box. See “Drawing a Disconnected Stream,” page XX545H279XX, for details.

Edit Connectivity Activate the Edit Connectivity feature. See “Editing Connectivity,” page XX546H274XX, for details.

Setting Grid Properties You can select to display grids of any increments. In addition, you can select the color of the grids and whether to be in Snap to Grid mode.

To set grid properties: 1 On the View menu, click Grid Settings. The Grid Properties dialog box appears.

2 Set the Across and Down grid increments in the

Increments section. Specify in the Units section whether the specified increments are in inches or centimeters.

3 Select the Snap to Grid check box to turn on Snap to Grid mode. When you drag a block in this mode, the block’s bounding outline moves in increments corresponding to the grid.

4 Click Color to select a grid color. 5 Finally, in the Visibility section, click whether to show or hide

the grid.


6 Click OK to apply the settings.

Editing Connectivity The Edit Connectivity feature lets you make changes to the layout of items in the PFD. Because this involves connecting and disconnecting streams to ports, the Ports Visible option should be on, as it is by default.

If the ports are not visible, click the Ports Visible button .

Connecting a Stream to Different Inlet Port To connect a stream to a different inlet port: 1 Do one of the following:

• On the toolbar, click the Edit Connectivity button

-or- • On the View menu, click Edit Connectivity.

2 Place the cursor over the end of the stream you want to connect to a different inlet port.

The cursor becomes an arrow.

3 Click the end of the stream.

The cursor now appears as a crosshairs. 4 Move the cursor to another inlet port.

When the cursor is in close proximity to a component, the component's available inlet ports display green.


5 Click the new inlet port.

Connecting an Added Project Component to a Stream Project components that you add to the project appear in the upper left-hand corner of the PFD and are not connected to any streams.

To connect an added project component to a stream: 1 Do one of the following:

• On the toolbar, click the Edit Connectivity button

-or- • On the View menu, click Edit Connectivity.

2 Place the cursor over the added project component that you wish to insert into an existing stream.

The cursor becomes a hand.

3 Click the component.

A bounding outline, representing the component, appears around the cursor.


4 Move the cursor over a stream. Click when you have placed

the cursor over the desired stream.

Aspen Process Economic Analyzer disconnects the Sink end of the stream from the inlet port on the current component, then automatically re-connects it to the inlet port on the inserted component.

Aspen Process Economic Analyzer also creates a new stream, which appears white and has properties relative to the initial stream. Aspen Process Economic Analyzer connects the Source end of this new stream to the outlet port of the inserted item and the Sink and to the inlet port of the original.

The added item can now be sized manually or using the Size Item option, which either automatically sizes the item or, if interactive sizing is available, accesses the Sizing Expert. The Sizing Expert, explained in Chapter 6, will utilize the newly connected streams.

Adding a Stream From PFD view, you can create a new stream and specify its connectivity. The process of developing streams is explained in detail under Developing Streams, page XX547H201XX.

To add a stream: 1 Do one of the following:


• On the toolbar, click the Add Stream button .

-or- • On the View menu, click Add Stream.


2 Do one of the following:

• To create a stream from scratch, click Create and proceed to Step 3.

-or- • To create a stream based on an existing stream, in the

Base Stream section, click the existing stream; and then click a Basis: o Absolute If the Basis Mode is Absolute, the data

from the base stream is copied to the new stream at the time the new stream is created. If the data of the base stream is altered at any time after this point, the data of the new stream remains unchanged.

o Relative If the Basis Mode is Relative, the new stream’s data is dynamically linked to that of the stream on which it’s based. This means that alterations to the data of the base stream immediately affect the new stream.

3 Click Create.



4 Type a name in the Stream Name field; then click OK.

The Develop Streams specifications dialog box appears. 5 Make any desired modifications; then click OK. 6 Move the cursor, which appears as a square, to an outlet

port.

Aspen Process Economic Analyzer provides intelligent port selection, highlighting the candidate ports in green.

7 Click when you have placed the cursor over the desired outlet

port. 8 Move the cursor, which now appears as crosshairs, to an inlet

port. 9 Click when you have placed the cursor over the desired inlet

port.


Drawing a Disconnected Stream

To draw a disconnected stream: 1 Do one of the following:

• On the toolbar, click the Draw Disconnected Stream

button .

-or- • On the View menu, click Draw Disconnected Stream.

The Disconnected Streams dialog box appears.

2 Click a stream; then click OK. 3 Draw the stream as described in the previous instructions for

Adding a Stream.

Working with Streams Right-clicking on a stream accesses a pop-up menu with the following commands.

Use this to

Modify Access the Develop Stream dialog box listing the stream’s


specifications, which you can modify.

Disconnect Erase the stream from the screen and store it, so that you can select it when using the Draw Disconnected Stream feature (see page XX548H279XX).

Reconnect Source Reconnect the stream to a new outlet port.

Reconnect Sink Reconnect the stream to a new inlet port.

Delete Delete the stream.

4 Defining Report Groups, Areas, and Project Components 281

4 Defining Report Groups, Areas, and Project Components

When developing a Aspen Capital Cost Estimator project, you can add project components to areas in Project Explorer’s Project view. Project components are the pieces of the process plant (or mill) that, when linked together, complete a process. Components are categorized as follows:

Note: See Icarus Reference for information on individual components.

Category To define

Process Equipment Equipment for gas, liquids and solids handling and off-site/packaged systems.

Plant Bulks Material commodities that service a section of the plant or the whole plant. Plant bulks are divided into categories: Piping, Civil, Steel, Instrumentation, Electrical, Insulation and Paint.

Site Development Modifications that must be done to the site. Site development items are divided into categories: Demolition, Drainage, Earthwork, Fencing, Landscaping, Roads-Slabs-Paving, Piling and Railroads.

Buildings Civil structures directly involved in the process or for off-site use.

Quoted Equipment A way to enter special equipment not found in Process Equipment above.

Unit Cost Library Items from a Unit Cost Library. See Chapter 7.

Equipment Model Library Items from an Equipment Model Library. See Chapter 7.

282 4 Defining Report Groups, Areas, and Project Components

Adding a Report Group Areas in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator are divided into report groups. Some reports summarize costs by report group. A report group is a user-defined category that can contain any number of areas.

Note: Show Report Group in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator must be marked in Preferences, General tab view, to see report groups displayed in Project Explorer. This Preferences option is marked by default. (See page XX549H51XX for information on Preferences.)

New projects include one default report group, with the name Main Area. You can rename the report group by right-clicking and clicking Rename Report Group on the pop-up menu.

To add a report group: 1 Right-click Main Project and, on the pop-up menu, click Add

Report Group.

Aspen Capital Cost Estimator adds a report group with the default name New Report Group. 2 Right-click on New Report Group and click Rename Report

Group. 3 Type a name for the report group and press enter.

To delete a report group: • Right-click the report group; then click Delete Report

Group.


Adding an Area To add an area: 1 In Project Explorer’s Project view, right-click a Report Group

folder; then click Add Area on the pop-up menu.

The Area Information dialog box appears.

2 Define the area, including name, type, and dimensions.

The area type determines the default area specifications. For example, Aspen Capital Cost Estimator generates an open steel structure for the area type OPEN, but does not generate one for the area type EXOPEN. See page 36-4 of Icarus Reference for details on which specifications Aspen Capital Cost Estimator generates for each area type.

You do not have to use all the default area specifications. The following section explains how to define area specifications. 3 Click OK.

Project Explorer now displays the new area.


Copying a Report Area over another Report Area To copy a Report Area over another Report Area: 1. Right-click on a Report Group (for example, Battery limit). 2. Click Copy All. 3. Right-click the report group you want to replace. 4. Click Copy specs. 5. Right-click project node. 6. Click Paste.

The target Report Area now contains the same information as the source Report Area.

Defining Area Specifications You can define mechanical design and cost basis specifications for the newly added area. You can define or modify area specifications in two ways: • using the Project view • using the Spreadsheet view

Method 1: Defining area specifications using Project View

To define area specifications using Project view: 1 Right-click on the area in Project Explorer’s Project view and

then click Modify on the pop-up menu.


Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays the Area Specifications dialog box.

2 Select the specification category you want to define:

Select To do this

Area Title Info Change the area title.

Area Equipment, Piping, Civil, Steel, Instrumentation, Electrical, Insulation and Paint

Define standards and procedures applying to this area only. Overrides specifications entered at the project level for this area only.

Area Specs Define area’s type, dimensions, and average high/low ambient temperatures.

Area Modules Define module type (default is SKID: flat base structural module); beam, column, and bracing options; structure costs; shipping costs; and impact loads.

Material Index Info Adjust area’s system-generated material costs by a percentage. Overrides specifications entered at the project level for this area only.

Man Hour Index Info Adjust area’s system-generated man-hours by a percentage. Overrides specifications entered at the project level for this area only.

3 Click Modify to access the selected area specifications.

The Area Equipment Specs dialog box appears.


4 Enter area specifications and click OK.

Method 2: Defining area specifications using Spreadsheet View

To define or modify area specifications using Spreadsheet view: 1 On the main menu bar, click View | Spreadsheet View |

Areas.

The Areas spreadsheet view appears. 2 On the Areas spreadsheet view, click Options. 3 On the menu that appears, select the specification category

you want to define/modify.

Select To do this

Area Title Info Change the area title.

Area Equipment, Piping, Civil, Steel, Instrumentation, Electrical, Insulation and Paint

Define standards and procedures applying to this area only. Overrides specifications entered at the project level for this area only.

Area Specs Define area’s type, dimensions, and average high/low ambient temperatures.

Area Modules Define module type (default is SKID: flat base structural module); beam, column, and bracing options; structure costs; shipping costs; and impact loads.

Material Index Info Adjust area’s system-generated material costs by a percentage. Overrides specifications entered at the project level for this area only.

Man Hour Index Info Adjust area’s system-generated man-hours by a percentage. Overrides specifications entered at the project level for this area only.

4 On the spreadsheet, make your modifications. 5 When you are satisfied with your modifications, click Apply.


6 Click OK.

Your modifications are made in the project.

Note: You cannot use this feature if a component specs form is open that would let you edit data that would also be editable in the spreadsheet view.

Adding and Defining Pipeline Areas If you selected Allow Pipeline Areas when creating the project (see page XX550H24XX), there will be a default report group with the name Pipeline Area. You can rename the report group by right-clicking and clicking Rename Report Group on the pop-up menu. The default report group contains one area called Pipeline Area.

To add a pipeline area: 1 Right-click on the pipeline report group and click Add

Pipeline Area.

The Pipeline Area specifications form appears.

2 Select a pipeline title, fluid type (oil, gas, or water; default is oil), main-line length (used for productivity adjustment in


various work items), whether to have double-jointed piping (default is double-jointed for pipe diameter equal to or greater than 20 IN [500 MM]), length of delivered pipe section (default is 80 FT [24 M] if double-jointed and 40 FT [12 M] if not double-jointed), and internal lining type (fusion-bonded epoxy, cement, or none; default is none).

3 Click OK.

You can now add pipeline segments to the area. 4 When adding a component (explained in next section), click

Plant Bulks | Piping. Pipeline segments are at the bottom of the list of piping plant bulks.

To edit a pipeline area: • Right-click the pipeline area; then click Modify.

Adding a Project Component Aspen Capital Cost Estimator provides two methods for adding a project component: • Drag-and-drop

Drag a component from the Palette to an area on Project Explorer’s Project view and enter an item description. This adds the component to the area without displaying the Component Specifications form; the specifications are left to be entered at your convenience.

• Pop-up menu

Right-click on an area and click Add Project Component from the pop-up menu, then select a component from the Project Component Selection dialog box and enter an item description. This adds the component and also displays the Component Specifications form, where you can complete the component definition right away.

Method 1: Dragging a Component from the Palette

To add a component using the drag-and-drop method: 1 With the Palette (Components view) and Project Explorer

(Project view) displayed, drag a component from the components list to an area on the Project Explorer.


Note: The Recent Items folder in the Components view stores the last 10 project component selections. 2 To drag, click on the component and hold down the mouse

button, move the cursor until over an area, and release the mouse button.

The New Component Information dialog box appears.

3 Enter an item description (required) and User Tag Number

(optional), and then click OK.

The component is added. Project Explorer displays a block for the component under the selected area. The List view displays general information. You may notice a question mark (?) in the Status column on the List view. This indicates that there are still


specifications that need to be entered for the component. To enter the specifications, follow the instructions under “Entering Component Specifications” on page XX551H291XX.

Method 2: Using the Pop-up Menu

To add a component using the pop-up menu: 1 In Project Explorer, Project view, right-click on a

non-simulator area and click Add Project Component on the pop-up menu.

The Project Component Selection dialog box appears.


2 Enter the Project Component Name. 3 Highlight the category to which the desired equipment

belongs (process equipment, plant bulks, site development, buildings, quoted equipment) and click OK.

Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays a list of sub-categories. Continue to narrow down the selection to a specific component. Then click OK.

The component is added to the area.

The Component Specifications form is automatically displayed. You can either complete the definition of the equipment item now or later.

Entering Component Specifications After adding a component, you still need to enter at least some component specifications to complete the component’s definition. Many component specifications have default values used when no value is entered, but most component specifications require further input. If a component added still has any specifications requiring input, a question mark (?) appears in the status column of the List view for that component.

You do not have to enter specifications immediately upon adding a component; you may wish to wait until more information about a project becomes available.

As more information about a project becomes available, you may also wish to modify previously entered component specifications. The following instructions apply as well to modifying previously entered specifications.

To enter or modify component specifications: 1 If the Component Specifications form is not already displayed

in the Main Window, display the form by right-clicking on the component and clicking Modify Item on the pop-up menu. You can right-click on the component in either Project Explorer (Project view) or List view (Area level)

Double-clicking on the component will also display the Specifications form.


Color coding • Red Border: An entry must be made in the field. All

specifications forms have at least one required entry field. • Green Borders and Thick Gray Borders: An entry must be

made in either the field with the thick gray border or in the two fields with the green borders. The field with the thick gray borders and the fields with the green borders are mutually exclusive. In the form pictured to the right, either the pump size must be selected or the fluid head and liquid flow rate must be entered. The Properties Window notes this in the Description. Enter the specifications.

Note: While on either the component or installation bulks specifications form, you can quickly determine the net effect of

all your changes by clicking the Evaluate button and reviewing the resulting report. See page XX552HXXXX553HXXXX554H630XX for more information. To define installation bulks for the component, click the Options drop-down and

select the type of bulks to define.


See “Defining Installation Bulks” on page X555H293XX for a complete description of installation bulks. 2 After defining the component and installation bulks, save the

specifications form by clicking OK.

Defining Installation Bulks Installation bulks are items directly associated with the component being defined and are used to complete the installation of the item, for example, a foundation for a vessel. The difference between an installation bulk and a plant bulk is that an installation bulk is associated with a component, whereas a plant bulk services the whole plant or mill.

Installation bulks may be defined when entering or modifying equipment or plant bulk specifications.

To access installation bulk specifications: 1 Display the Component Specifications form. 2 Click the down-arrow on the Options button.


Note: An asterisk (*) next to an installation bulk indicates that it has been edited. On the menu pictured below, asterisks indicate that the Pipe - Item Details and Civil installation bulks have been edited.

3 Click the type of installation bulks you wish to view or define.

Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays the specifications form for the selected installation bulk items. See the subsections that follow for descriptions of the different types of installation bulks. 4 When you are done defining the installation bulk, save your

changes in either of two ways, depending on what you intend to do next:

o If you want to continue modifying this component’s installation bulks or component specifications, click Apply to save the changes. You can now select either Project Component or another type of installation bulks from the Options menu.

o If you are done making changes to the installation bulks and to the component specifications, click OK to save the changes and close the specifications window.


Mat’l/Man-hours Adjustments Using Mat’l/Man-hours Adjustments, you can specify percent adjustments of system-calculated values as follows:

Category Percent adjustment for

Equipment Material cost (COA 100-299)

Setting Man-hours (COA 100-299)

Piping Material costs and/or man-hours (COA 300-399)

Civil Material costs and/or man-hours (COA 400-499)

Steel Material costs and/or man-hours (COA 500-599)

Instrumentation Material costs and/or man-hours (COA 600-699)

Electrical Material costs and/or man-hours (COA 700-799)

Insulation Material costs and/or man-hours (COA 800-899)

Paint Material costs and/or man-hours. (COA 900-999)

These adjustments compound material and man-hour indexing applied to the same COA’s. User-entered material costs and man-hours (entered using either Quoted Equipment or Mat’l/Man-hours % Additions) are not affected by these adjustments.

The Special Options section at the bottom of the Mat’l/Man-hour Adjustments form allows you specify that the component is a spare, supplied by owner, or existing. Aspen Capital Cost Estimator adjusts the component costs accordingly. In addition, the Special Options section lets you select demolition (that is,, dismantlement) of the component and its installation bulks.

To demolish a component item: 1 Click Mat’l/Man-hours Adjustments on the Options menu

of the Component Specifications form. 2 Scroll down to the Special Options section and, from the

Installation Option scroll list, select DEML.


For example, selecting the demolition (DEML) option causes the following changes to the component: • Material costs are set to zero. • Man-hours and labor costs are charged to demolition COAs

(for example, 109, 309, 409, and so on.) • Piping and civil man-hours are down-adjusted: • Shop fab man-hours are removed from piping man-hours. • Civil formwork/bracing man-hours are removed. 3 Go back through the Mat’l/Man-hour Adjustments form and

make the proper adjustments to account for the relative difficulty of demolition versus new build.

For example, if you know unsetting the component is 15% easier than initially setting it, then enter 85% in the Setting labor adjustment field. 4 Save your changes in either of two ways, depending on what

you intend to do next: o If you want to continue modifying this component’s

installation bulk or component specifications, click Apply to save the changes to the Mat’l/Man-hour Adjustments. You can now select either Project


Component or another installation bulk from the Options menu.

o If you are done making changes to the installation bulks and to the component specifications, click OK to save the changes and close the specifications window.

Mat’l/Man-hours Additions Using Mat’l/Man-hours Additions, you can add lump sum material costs and/or man-hours to a specified COA. All additions are reported “as is.” Additions are neither indexed nor adjusted by Mat’l/Man-hours Adjustments. Up to 20 additions may be defined per component.

Example: in the Mat’l/Man-hour Additions form for the CLAD TECHNOCAL STORAGE TANK component, 20 labor hours have been added to COA 304 and 30 labor hours have been added to COA 604.

Pipe – General Specs Use Pipe – General Specs to define the rules for developing all installation piping on the selected component. You can use many fields to define general piping specifications, such as: • Material • Pressure • Temperature • Installation - above or below grade • Fluid or electric tracing • Flange class and type • Stress relief


• Insulation type • Insulation jacket type • Paint treatment

Note: In Aspen Kbase Version 2004.2, under General Piping specs, there was a field called fitting spec filename to use to select the fitting spec filename to use for the project. In newer Kbase and Aspen Capital Cost Estimator versions, the fitting specification is moved a Customer External file. To access this file: 1 Right-click the Fitting external file. 2 Click Select. A selection dialog box appears in which you can select which external fitting specs file to use.

Pipe – Item Details Use Pipe – Item Details to specify individual runs of piping and associated fittings, tracing, paint and insulation. The line is developed using the rules defined in Pipe – General Specs unless they are re-defined with Pipe – Item Details. Up to 40 lines may be defined/adjusted for each component.

Note: To reduce the time required to retrieve data when multiple items have been added, select in Preferences to not display all items. If Display P&I Installation Items is unmarked on the Preference dialog box (General tab view), selecting Pipe – Item Details will display a dialog box from which you can select the item you wish to edit or select to add a new item. See page XX556H51XX for instructions on entering Preferences.

The component starts with piping depicted in the Piping and Instrumentation Drawings manual. You can also display the component’s piping and instrumentation drawing by clicking the

P&ID button on the Component Specifications form. It displays the piping you are adjusting on the Pipe Details Installation Bulk form.

You can revise the pipe volumetric model for a component line-by-line. Specifications on the Pipe – Item Details Installation Bulk form override the project, area- and component-level specifications that otherwise determine the design of all lines of pipe. For example, area dimensions determine the lengths of


lines generated by volumetric models, except those lines for which you enter a specific length.

The Piping Volumetric Model field offers the following options: • “blank” - Specified pipe only, no volume. model

This option should rarely be used. It is a rapid way to discard the complete piping model for this item; however, in addition to discarding all of the automatically generated lines of pipe, this also discards all the associated drains/vents and pipe-associated instrumentation. The system now generates only piping, drains/vents and on-/in-line instrumentation for those lines that you subsequently define. Once you have used this option, the other options below cannot be used because the model is already discarded. If you subsequently re-create a line that the volumetric model would have automatically created, the associated on-/in-line instrumentation is automatically “re-created.”

• A - Add line to pipe volumetric model

This option is used to add a new line of pipe to a component. The number of the new line must be higher than any other automatically created or user-defined line. For example, if a component generates lines 1 to 6, then an added line may have the number 7 to 40. The area dimensions will have no effect on the length of these lines. It is not necessary to add


line numbers in numeric order; however, they will be generated and reported in numeric order. To associate instrumentation with a new line, specify that a sensor or control element location is this line number. Line 40 is reserved for drains/vents.

• C - Change lines on pipe volumetric model

This is a commonly used option. It is used to modify automatically generated lines of pipe; user-specified lines are not changed. The line is generated exactly at it would have been in the absence of your specifications, except for the items which you change. You may use this to change only the metallurgy, diameter or length of a run, or only the valves and fittings (including setting the quantity to 0) or any combination of these.

• D - Delete line on pipe volumetric model

This option deletes a single line of automatically generated pipe and its associated drains/vents and instrumentation.

• R - Replace line on pipe volumetric model

This option replaces the automatically generated line completely with the exact line that you specify. If you do not define something for this line, you do not get it. For example, if you specify a line of fixed length containing no valves or fittings, then you only get the straight-run of pipe.

To make more than one specification for Pipe – Item Details:

• Click the Add button .

This adds an item specs column to this form.

To delete any unwanted or unused column(s): 1 Click any cell in that column (or drag for a range of columns).

2 Click the Delete button .

Note: Incompletely specified columns must be either completed or deleted before saving.

Duct Duct installation bulk items specify individual runs of process ductwork and associated fittings and insulation. Up to five duct


lines may be specified for each component. Use the same methods described for multiple lines of pipe.

Civil Civil installation bulk items specify bulk excavation and up to three different foundation types/sizes. The available foundation types are listed in the Icarus Reference.

From the specified foundation types and volumes, Aspen Capital Cost Estimator calculates: • Excavation and backfill • Form work (plywood/backup lumber with reuse) • Rebar • Sand mat (or ring wall foundation types only) • Grout • Anchor bolts/embedments

Steel The Steel installation bulk specifies the following: • Ladders • Stairs • Platforms

In addition, up to three different steel items may be specified.

Instrumentation Instrument installation bulk items specify individual instrumentation loops or parts of loops with associated sensors, transmitters and signal cabling. Up to 50 loops may be defined for each component.

Note: To reduce the time required to retrieve data when multiple instrument items have been added, select in Preferences to not display all items. If Display P&I Installation Items is unmarked on the Preference dialog box (General tab view), selecting Instrumentation will display a dialog box from which you can select the item you wish to edit or select to add a new item. See page XX557H51XX for instructions on accessing and entering Preferences.


The component starts with instrumentation depicted in the Piping and Instrumentation Drawings manual. You can also display the component’s piping and instrumentation drawing by

clicking the P&ID button on the Component Specifications form. It displays the instrumentation you are adjusting on the Instrumentation Installation Bulk form.

You can revise the instrument volumetric model for a component loop-by-loop. Specifications entered on the Instrumentation Installation Bulk form override the project-, area- and component-level specifications that otherwise determine the design of all instrument loops.

The Instrument Volumetric Model field offers the following options: • “blank” - Specified loop only, no volume. model

This option should rarely be used; it is a rapid way to discard the complete instrument model for this item. The system now generates instrumentation for those loops that you subsequently define. To define new loops, you continue to use this “blank” option for each successive loop. Once you have used this option, the other options below cannot be used because the model is already discarded.

• A - Add loop to instr. volum. model

This option is used to add a new loop to a component. The number of the new loop must be higher than any other


automatically created or user-defined loop. It is not necessary to add loop numbers in numeric order; however, they will be generated and reported in numeric order. For example, if a component generates loops 1 to 6, then an added loop may have the number 7 to 50.

• D - Delete loop on instr. volum. model

This option deletes a single loop, including sensor, transmitter, cable, control center connections and final control element.

• R - Replace loop on instr. volum. model

This option replaces the automatically generated loop completely with the exact loop that you specify. If you do not define something for this loop, or you selectively delete a part, you do not get it. For example, if you specify a sensor and transmitter only, then you only get the signal generated and sent to the control center.

• “+” - Append to previous loop w/same no.

This option is used to append extra sensors or control valves to the immediately preceding, user-defined loop (you must also correctly specify the loop number of the preceding loop). It may not be used to append items to automatically generated loops; to do this, you should first use the replace option to redefine the loop, then use the “+” option. Whether you are appending a sensor or control element, you should make entries for both the sensor and control valve locations.

To define more than one adjustment: • Use the same methods described earlier for Pipe – Item

Details (page XX558H300XX).

Instrument Loop Adjustment On the Instrumentation Installation Bulk form, there are eight Loop Modification fields, which allow you to remove different elements of the instrument loop from the project. Select “-” from the drop-down menu to remove an element.

Two of the elements, sensor and control valve, can also be specified as quoted (“Q”) or vendor-provided (“V”) equipment. When either “Q” or “V” is selected, the system includes installation manhours for the element but not material costs.


Deleting the process connection removes all of the instrument piping.

The indicating signal and control signal runs are reported together, so removing one would decrease the amount of cable and supports by half.

The following diagram shows how the eight adjustable loop elements fit into the loop design:

Notes: (A) Junction boxes can be found under PLANT BULKS, INSTRUMENTATION, JUNC-BOX. (B) Multi-core runs can be found under PLANT BULKS, INSTRUMENTATION, ELECTRONIC SIGNAL WIRE. You can specify it with or without the junction box. (C) Control centers can be found under PLANT BULKS, INSTRUMENTATION, MULTIFUNCTION CONTROLLERS (electronic) or PLANT BULKS, INSTRUMENTATION, INSTRUMENT PANEL – ANALOG (pneumatic).


Electrical The Electrical installation bulk specifies local equipment lighting, control wiring and power/cable and motor starters for up to three different types of electrical loads.

Insulation The Insulation installation bulk specifies insulation and fireproofing for component and installation bulk steel. For components, the insulation type, jacket type, thickness and area may be specified. For component and steel fireproofing, type, rating and area may be specified.

Paint The Paint installation bulk specifies surface preparation and painting of component and installation bulk steel. Paint for pipe is specified under piping. Entry field specifications include: • Size of area to be painted • Number of prime and final coats • Percent of painted area to be sandblasted • Galvanizing (for steel)


Importing Areas and Components Aspen Capital Cost Estimator lets you import entire areas or individual components from other project scenarios. You can select in Tools| Options | Preferences | Process whether to also include installation bulks and/or connected streams (see Chapter 1. Getting Started.Preferences.Process). By default, installation bulks are included and connected streams are not.

To import an area or component: 1 In the Palette’s Projects view, double click on the project

scenario from which you wish to import.

This displays the project areas in the scenario. 2 Expand an area folder to display the components in it.

• To import a component:

o Drag the component to the desired area in Project Explorer, Project view.

Aspen Capital Cost Estimator adds the component to the area.

• To import an area and its components: o Drag the area to Main Project in Project Explorer.

Aspen Capital Cost Estimator adds the area and its components.

• To import all the components in an area to an existing area in the current project scenario:


o Drag the area from the Palette to the desired area in Project Explorer.

Aspen Capital Cost Estimator adds the components to the area without creating a new area.

Importing an Entire Scenario As well as allowing you to import individual areas or components, Aspen Capital Cost Estimator lets you import an entire scenario using a drag-and-drop operation. This imports all the areas and components in the selected scenario. You can select in Tools | Options | Preferences | Process whether to also include installation bulks and/or connected streams (see Chapter 1. Getting Started.Preferences.Process). By default, installation bulks are included and connected streams are not.

To import an entire scenario: 1 Have Project Explorer’s Project view open, since you will drag

the scenario there. 2 Click on the scenario in the Palette’s Projects view.

3 Drag the scenario from the Palette to Project Explorer’s

Project view.

Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays a confirmation window.

Note: You can only import scenarios that have the same units of measure as the current scenario. If the units of measure are not the same, a dialog box will inform you of this when you try to import.


4 Click Yes.

The areas and components of the selected scenario are imported.

Copying Components The Copy command copies a selected component and all of its associated installation bulks. This is useful if you want to add a component that is similar to an existing item. The item can be copied and modified with less effort than creating a new item.

Remember to change the Item Description when copying components to distinguish the copy from the original.

To copy and paste a component: 1 Right-click the component in either Project Explorer or the

List window (at area level, so that components are listed), and then click Copy on the pop-up menu.

You can also copy multiple components at once: select the desired components on the list window, right-click on one of the components, and click Copy on the pop-up menu. 2 Right-click on the area to which you want to add the

component(s) and click Paste on the pop-up menu.

The component is added to the area.

Note: If the area contains a component with the same name as the one being pasted, Aspen Capital Cost Estimator changes the new component’s name so that “#1#” appears at the beginning.

Cut and Paste If you want to delete (cut) a component from one area and add (paste) it in another area, use the same procedure as above, except click Cut instead of Copy on the pop-up menu.


Drag and Drop You can also move a component from one area to another by dragging it.

Modifying Components You can modify the following components using Spreadsheet View: • Vessels • Towers • Heat Exchangers • Pumps

To modify a component using Spreadsheet View: 1 On the main menu bar, click View | Spreadsheet View |

<the type of component to modify>.

The <the type of component to modify> spreadsheet view appears. 2 On the <the type of component to modify>spreadsheet

view, click Options. 3 On the menu that appears, click the option you want to

modify. 4 On the spreadsheet, make your modifications. 5 When you are satisfied with your modifications, click Apply. 6 Click OK.

Your modifications are made in the project.

Note: You cannot use this feature if a component specs form is open that would let you edit data that would also be editable in the spreadsheet view.

Copying Areas Aspen Capital Cost Estimator's Area Cut-and-Paste operations let you: • Create a new Report Group with the same Area and

Components as an existing Report Group


• Replace an Area and its components with another Area and its components

To create a new Report Group with the same Area and Components as an existing Report Group: 1 On the Project View tab, right click Main Project. 2 On the menu that appears, click Add Report Group.

A Report Group named New Report Group appears on the tree. 3 Right-click New Report Group; then click Rename Report

Group. 4 Type the new name for the Report Group; then click ENTER. 5 Right-click the area you want to copy to the new Report

Group. 6 On the menu that appears, click Copy Specs. 7 Right-click the new Report Group. 8 On the menu that appears, click Paste.

The area and its components are copied into the new Report Group.

To replace an Area and Components with another Area and Components: 1 On the Project View tab, right-click the area you want to

copy. 2 On the menu that appears, click Copy Specs. 3 Right-click the area you want to overwrite with the copied

area information. 4 On the menu that appears, click Paste. 5 A warning message appears, telling you that performing this

action may overwrite some data. If you are sure you want to overwrite the area with the copied area information, click Yes.

The target Area and its components are replaced with the data from the source Area and the source Area's components.

Deleting Components The Delete command removes a component and all associated installation bulks from the project.


To delete a component: 1 Right-click on the component in either Project Explorer or the

List view and click Delete on the pop-up menu.

A confirmation dialog box appears.

Note: You can select in Preferences not to have this prompt appear (see page XX559H51XX). 2 Click Yes to delete the component or click No to retain the

component.

You can also delete multiple components at one time: select the components on the list window, right-click on one of the components, and click Delete on the pop-up menu.

Re-numbering Components After deleting components, you may wish to re-number the remaining components so that the numbering contains no gaps and reflects the order in which components were added.

For example, if you add components A, B, C, D, and E in that order, the automatically generated Order Numbers would be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, respectively (the Order Number appears on the List view). If you then delete components B and C and re-number, components A, D, and E would have Order Numbers 1, 2, 3, respectively. The order in which they were created would still determine the Order Numbers.

To re-number components: 1 On the Run menu, click Re-number. 2 On the menu that appears, click Project Components.

Deleting Areas The Delete Area command removes the selected area and all of its components.


To delete an area: 1. Right-click on the area in Project Explorer and click Delete Area on the

pop-up menu.


Note: You can select in Preferences not to have this prompt appear (see page XX560H51XX). 3 Click Yes to delete the area.

-or-

Click No to retain the area.

Re-numbering Areas Areas have reference numbers that are internally stored and then used by the Evaluation Engine. They are not visible in the current version of Aspen Capital Cost Estimator. Just as with components, re-numbering is intended to close gaps in the numbering after deletion.

To re-number areas: 1 On the Run menu, click Re-number. 2 On the sub-menu that appears,. click Project Areas.

Using the Custom Model Tool Aspen Process Economic Analyzer’s Custom Model tool lets you base component specifications on formulas or fixed data stored in Excel. Use the tool to send a component’s specification values, connection stream values, and specified bulk information (pipe-item details, material and man-hour adjustments) to an Aspen-designed Excel workbook, where you can enter new specification values based on your own data or formulas. Then, use the tool to send the new data back to Aspen Capital Cost Estimator.

For instance, you could use the Custom Model tool to calculate a pump driver power based on a flow rate and pump head or to


calculate project component costs using your own custom method in Excel.

The specifications rules remain stored in Excel, so that you can change the specifications in Aspen Process Economic Analyzer and then revert back to the Excel specifications by re-running the tool (if the values are fixed). Once the tool has been used with a project component, Aspen Process Economic Analyzer associates the customized project component with the last Excel spreadsheet used. Running the tool at the project level updates all components for which the tool has already been run.

The tool provides template files for mixers and pumps, as well as a general template to use as the starting point for creating files for other components. However, for components other than pumps and mixers, you must first copy the general template file (or use Save As) and enter the slot names for the component specifications you wish to input, as explained below.

To use the Custom Model tool on a project component:

Note: Before using this tool, you must select the Activate Custom Model option on the Process tab in Preferences. See page X561H51X for information on accessing Preferences. 1 In Project Explorer, Project view, right-click the pump or

mixer component that you wish to customize. 2 On the menu that appears, click Custom Model.


The User Custom Model dialog box appears. It displays the name of the project, scenario, and project component selected for the operation. It also displays available Microsoft Excel (.xls) template files.

3 Click the Excel template file that you have created for the

selected project component. 4 Click Run.

Excel displays the workbook, with tabs for: • Input • Custom Rules • Output

The Input worksheet displays the original Icarus system values from Aspen Capital Cost Estimator. • Item information is provided at the top of the worksheet. The

item information is from the Component Specifications form.

• Stream information, if available, is shown toward the bottom. • Below the stream information is information on the

installation bulks for Material and Man-hour Adjustments and Pipe Item Detail.


The Custom Rules worksheet is provided for storing any data that you may wish to use in the output formulas.

Input specs have been placed on the Custom Rules along with sample alterations for the following: • Mixer with three inlet streams and one exit stream • Pump with connection streams, material and man-hour

adjustments • Pipe item details

The Output worksheet displays the same component specification slots as on the Input worksheet. However, you can customize the values on the Output worksheet.


The values are in the same column-row position as on the Input worksheet, so that you can easily reference the Input data when entering formulas.

You send the entries on the Output worksheet to Aspen Process Economic Analyzer by clicking Apply or OK on the Custom Model tool.

The following include customized values based on the sample alterations on the Custom Rules worksheet: • Mixer with three inlet streams and one exit stream • Pump with connection streams, material and man-hour

adjustments • Pipe item details

These customizations have been entered solely for example purposes. 5 Enter new specifications on the Output worksheet. For

example, if you want to double the Input flow rate value provided on Row 10, Column C, enter the following formula:

=Input!C10*2

6 Go to the Custom Model tool; then click OK to send the output to Aspen Process Economic Analyzer and close the tool.

When you display the specifications form of the component, you will see the values from the Output worksheet.


Creating a Template

To create a template for a component: 1 Open GeneralModelTemplate.xls; then save it as another

file. The folder in which you store Custom Model files is specified on the Locations tab in Preferences (APICustomModelDir). The default is:

AspenTech\ Economic Evaluation V7.1\Program\API Custom Models

2 Starting on Row 6, Column B for item information, enter the slot names for the specifications that you want to have sent from Aspen Process Economic Analyzer when the file is run for a component.

Slot names for every equipment and plant bulk item are provided in Icarus Technology Object Definitions (API.pdf). For example, to have the tool send Shell Design Temperature to Excel when the file is run for Fixed Tube Heat Exchangers, you would need to enter CPDesignTemperatureShell. 3 For connection stream information, enter slot names starting

on Row 43, Column B. 4 For material and man-hour adjustments, enter slot names

starting on row 70, column B. 5 For the pipe-item details, enter slot names starting on row

101, column B.


Running the Custom Model Tool at Project-Level for Batch Update The batch update process for the Custom Model can be done one of two ways. • The first method is for a batch update of custom model

operations performed on project components that are already linked to a custom model template.

• The second method is for a batch update of all selected components.

After using the Custom Model tool for any number of components, you can continue to experiment with different specifications and easily revert back to the custom specifications by running the tool at the project level. Simply right-click Main Project or Project Area in Project Explorer’s Project view; then click Custom Model.

If more than one project component has been selected for the custom model (for example, multi-selection, area selection, project selection), a message box will appear asking you to specify the mode of operation.

If you click Yes, you will be able to specify a custom model template and all of the selected project components will be processed with the one chosen template.

If you click No, only project components with a link to a custom model template will be processed with their associated template.


Note: the output will be based on the values in the Output workbook in Excel. If the Output workbook contains formulas based on input, changes in input since originally running the Custom Model will affect the output when the Custom Model is re-run.

This re-runs all custom models stored in the Custom Model tool.

320 5 Sizing Project Components

5 Sizing Project Components

Note: Sizing is only available in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator if you are licensed to use Aspen Icarus Process Evaluator (Aspen Process Economic Analyzer) or Aspen Decision Analyzer and you select at startup to use one of them in the Aspen Capital Cost Estimator environment.

Overview

Sizing for Project Components Mapped from Simulator Items Operating conditions for the project components mapped from simulator models are obtained from the information loaded into Aspen Capital Cost Estimator from the simulator report. Any Design Data in the simulator report is also loaded and used during sizing. The information consists of a unit operation model and the streams connected to it.

You can size a mapped project component in either of two ways: • Right-click the component in Project Explorer and click Size

Item on the pop-up menu.

5 Sizing Project Components 321

• Click the Size button on the Component Specifications

form:

Interactive Sizing Expert For the following components, Aspen Capital Cost Estimator provides the Interactive Sizing form that lets you adjust sizing specifications. The Interactive Sizing form appears when you size the component. Heat Exchangers DHE FIXED-T-S DHE FLOAT-HEAD DHE U-TUBE DRB KETTLE DRB THERMOSIPH DRB U-TUBE

Compressors DCP CENTRIF DCP GEN-SERV DGC CENTRIF DGC CENTRIF-IG DGC RECIP-MOTR EGC RECIP-GAS DCP ANSI DCP ANSI-PLAST DCP API 610 DCP API 610-IL DCP CANNED DCP TURBINE DCP PULP STOCK DCP NAG DRIVE

Pumps DCP ANSI


DCP ANSI-PLAST DCP API 610 DCP API 610-IL DCP CANNED DCP TURBINE DCP PULP STOCK DCP NAG DRIVE

Vessels DHT HORIZ-DRUM DVT CYLINDER DVT SPHERE DVT SPHEROID DVT STORAGE

If interactive sizing is not available, Aspen Capital Cost Estimator sizes the item automatically using the simulator data.

Sizing for Project Components Not Mapped from Simulator Items Project components not mapped from simulator items can be sized if they are connected to streams. See “Creating Streams to Connect to Components” on page XX562H323XX for instructions on creating inlet and outlet streams. If the component is one of those for which interactive sizing is available (see list on page X563H339X), the Interactive Sizing form is displayed during sizing. See “Using the Interactive Sizing Form” for instructions on connecting a component to streams during sizing.

If sizing is not available for a component, the Size option is unavailable.

Resizing Project Components If the process conditions associated with a component change, then use the Re-Size command on the project component pop-up menu to update all equipment sizing information.


The Re-Size command will clear all the previous sizing results and then size the equipment based on the current process conditions (those that you have entered and those available from the currently loaded simulator file). Therefore, if the component being re-sized is one of those for which interactive sizing is available, the Interactive Sizing form that appears is blank.

If you would like to keep some of your component specifications (that is,, not have them replaced by those calculated by the Sizing Expert), do not use the Re-size command. Instead, use the Size command or the Size button to access the Interactive Sizing form with current specifications retained, rather than cleared. Then, clear all fields except those you want to retain and click OK to execute sizing. Aspen Capital Cost Estimator will re-calculate only the blank fields.

Creating Streams to Connect to Equipment Items For most components, the interactive Sizing Expert requires selection of an inlet stream (that is, a stream carrying fluid to the equipment item) and an outlet stream (that is, a stream carrying fluid from the equipment item).

The set of instructions below show how to create streams to connect to an item. In the example, inlet and outlet streams are created to carry 49 DEF F water to a heat exchanger and an outlet stream is created to carry 200 DEG F water from the heat exchanger. In the example used in the set of instructions following these, a heat exchanger is sized to heat water from 40 DEG F to 200 DEG F, using the streams created in the first examples.


To create an inlet stream and an outlet stream: 1 In Project Explorer’s Project Basis view, right-click

Streams; then click Edit.


2 On the Develop Streams dialog box, click the Create tab. 3 In the Streams tree structure, click User. Leave the Basis

as Absolute, since you are creating a completely new process stream.

4 Click Create.



5 On the Create Stream dialog box, enter a stream name,

such as Process-IN. 6 Click OK. 7 On the Develop Stream specifications form, specify:

o a primary fluid component o temperature o pressure o liquid mass flow

Example: • In the Primary Fluid Component field, click and click

Water. • In the Temperature (DEG F) field, enter 40. • In the Pressure (PSIA) field, enter 90. • In the Liquid Mass Flow (LB/H) field, enter 50,000.

8 Click Apply.

Aspen Capital Cost Estimator fills in the rest of the fields in the Liquid Information section.


9 Click OK to return to the Develop Streams dialog box,

where you now need to create an outlet stream. 10 In the tree structure, click User. Notice that the inlet stream

that you just created is now displayed under User.

11 Click that stream and, in the Basis group, click Relative. The

new outlet stream will be based upon the inlet stream. 12 On the Create Stream dialog box, enter a stream name,

such as Process-OUT.


13 Click OK.

The Develop Stream specifications form appears. Specifications that appear gray are the same as those of the base stream. Any modifications made will appear black.

14 Enter an outlet stream temperature that corresponds to

temperature to which the heat exchanger will be heating the fluid. In the example above, the temperature has been entered as 200 DEG F and the pressure has been entered as 80 PSIA. The other specifications are the same as the base stream’s.

15 Click OK to apply the changes and return to the Develop Streams dialog box, which you can now close.


Using the Interactive Sizing Form With the necessary streams created, you are ready to perform sizing.

To size an equipment item: 1 Add an equipment item for which interactive sizing is

available (see list below) and display the Component Specifications form. If you are following the example, add a floating head shell and tube exchanger. (See page XX564H286XX for instructions on adding components.)

It is not necessary to enter any values on the specifications form before starting the Sizing Expert. However, all applicable sizing parameters that are entered in the component specifications


form will be carried over automatically to the sizing expert and used in calculations. 2 Click the Size button.

The Interactive Sizing form appears.

Note: In order for the Sizing Expert to run, you must select process fluid streams (one at Inlet and one at Outlet conditions) for at least one side (hot or cold side). Any other data you provide (for example,, Duty, Overall heat transfer coefficient, LMTD, and so on) helps the Expert do its job better, but is not necessary.

3 Click on the Hot Inlet Stream field and then click to

access a drop-down list that includes all utility resources and user-created streams.

Note: “fluid” refers to liquid or gas.


4 If you are heating a fluid, as in the example, select a utility resource to use as the heating source. The tables on the following page provide definitions of the utility resources. To heat a fluid from 40 DEG F to 200 DEG F, as in the example, the utility Steam @100PSI-Aspen Process Economic Analyzer UTILITY is appropriate.

-or- If you are cooling a fluid, select the stream carrying the fluid to be cooled.

Utility Resources If you specify a utility resource as a stream, the Sizing Expert will estimate the actual utility rate required for the heat transfer and use this rate to create utility streams as though they were user-specified. The utility stream names are prefixed by “ICU” and are present under the Utility category in the Develop Streams dialog box. These utility streams differ from utility resources in that they have an actual flow rate whereas a resource is a “reservoir” that can provide utility streams at any required flow rate.

Default Utility Resources Available for I-P Projects

Inlet temperature

(DEG F)

Exit temperature

(DEG F)

Operating Pressure

(PSIA) Utility type

Steam @100PSI 327 327 100 Heat source



Low Temp Heating Oil 600 550 25 Heat source


Default Utility Resources Available for I-P Projects

Inlet temperature

(DEG F)

Exit temperature

(DEG F)

Operating Pressure

(PSIA) Utility type

High Temp Heating Oil 725 675 25 Heat source

Refrigerant – Freon 12 -21 -21 15.5 Heat sink

Refrigerant – Ethylene -150 -150 15.5 Heat sink

Refrigerant – Ethane -130 -130 15.5 Heat sink


-50 -50 15.5 Heat sink

Refrigerant – Propane -40 -40 15.5 Heat sink Cooling Water 95 75 50 Heat sink

Default Utility Resources Available for METRIC Projects

Inlet temperature

(DEG C)

Exit temperature

(DEG C)

Operating Pressure

(KPA) Utility type

Steam @2760KPA 229.2 229.2 2760 Heat source

Steam @1135KPA 184 184 1135 Heat source

Steam @690KPA 164 164 690 Heat source

Low Temp Heating Oil 315 287 2523 Heat source

High Temp Heating Oil 385 357 2523 Heat source

Refrigerant – Freon 12 -29.8 -29.8 105 Heat sink

Refrigerant – Ethylene -101 -101 105 Heat sink

Refrigerant – Ethane -90 -90 105 Heat sink


-45 -45 105 Heat sink

Refrigerant – Propane -40 -40 105 Heat sink

Cooling Water 35 24 105 Heat sink


5 Click on the Hot Outlet Stream field and then click to access the drop-down list of utility resources and user-created streams.

6 If you are heating a fluid, select again the utility to use as the heating source. -or- If you are cooling a fluid, select the stream carrying the cooled fluid from the exchanger.

7 Click on the Cold Inlet Stream field and then click to access the drop-down list of utility resources and user-created streams.

8 If you are heating a fluid, select the stream carrying the fluid to be heated.

9 A If you are following the example, select the Process-IN stream that you created in the previous set of instructions (see “Creating Streams,” pages XX565H323XX through XX566H327XX).

B If you are cooling a fluid, select a heat sink utility to use as a cooling medium. Click on the Cold Outlet Stream field and then click to access the drop-down

list of utility resources and user-created streams.

If you are heating a fluid, select the stream carrying the heated fluid from the exchanger.

If you are following the example, select the Process-OUT stream that you created in the previous set of instructions (see “Creating Streams,” pages XX567H323XX through XX568H327XX).

If you are cooling a fluid, select again the heat sink utility to use as the cooling medium. Click Apply. Aspen Capital Cost Estimator fills in the other fields on the

Interactive Sizing form.


Note: results are not transferred to the Component Specifications form until you click OK and the sizing is successfully completed (that is,, without generating error messages). 10 Click OK.

Aspen Capital Cost Estimator provides a message informing you of the overdesign factor.

11 Click OK to accept this message.

The values obtained from Interactive Sizing now appear on the Component Specifications form.


12 Click OK to save.

You can now run an item evaluation and see the values generated by the Sizing Expert in the item report.

Global Sizing Selection You can define and/or select a sizing selection library to pre-define the sizing selection for a project scenario. For each type of component, you can specify custom models that will be applied in the sizing phase. These rules can also be modified on a component-by-component basis when working on a specific project scenario. For example, if you want to have all DCP CENTRIF based equipment models within a project scenario sized with a specific custom model, you can edit or create a


Sizing Selection library (see Figure 1) to be used. These libraries must be edited/created outside of a project.

Figure 1: Library tab in palette

To edit the library: 1 Double-click the library name (for example, my sizing).

The Sizing Selection dialog box appears. 2 To view or edit the sizing selection, click on the equipment

model. All equipment models default to “System Sizing” (see Figure 2).


Figure 2: Sizing Selection dialog box

3 To add or remove a custom model to the sizing selection list, click New Sizing; then click your choice on the list of available custom models (see Figure 3).

Figure 3: Add new sizing with custom model

The current sizing list for the equipment model is order dependent (see Figure 4).


Figure 4: Current Sizing List with System sizing and two custom models

Once this library has been specified, it must be selected in the project (see Figure 5).

Figure 5: Selecting the Sizing Selection library for a project scenario

Sizing Areas The Area sizing feature in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator develops length and width of an area from the equipment in the area. When actual area dimensions are not available, you can get a better estimate of area length and width from the system when these parameters are not specified in the area specs form.

The system calculated area length and width is used in the design of all area bulks. You can use the system calculated area parameters as the area specs.

To have Aspen Capital Cost Estimator calculate the area: 1 Open the Aspen Capital Cost Estimator project. 2 Modify an area spec by right-clicking the area; then, on the

menu that appears, clicking Modify. 3 Click Specification | Area Specs; then, on the menu that

appears, click Modify. 4 Clear the values for Area length and Area width. 5 Click OK; then click Close. 6 Evaluate the project.

In the report, the system-calculated length and width for each area appear in: • AREA BULK REPORT • AREA DATA SHEET


To specify the area yourself: 1 Open the Aspen Capital Cost Estimator project. 2 Modify an area spec by right-clicking the area; then, on the

menu that appears, clicking Modify. 3 Click Specification | Area Specs; then, on the menu that

appears, click Modify. 4 Enter values for Area length and Area width. 5 Click Area Piping; then enter data for the piping envelope. 6 Click Area Electrical; then enter data for Distance

equipment to panel/DB. 7 Click OK; then click Close. 8 Evaluate the project.

In the report, the system-calculated length and width for each area appear in: • AREA BULK REPORT • AREA DATA SHEET

To Develop Area Utility Piping and Pipe Racks – system calculated area length and width: 1 Open the Aspen Capital Cost Estimator project. 2 Modify an area spec by right-clicking the area; then, on the

menu that appears, clicking Modify. 3 Click Specification | Area Piping; then, on the menu that

appears, click Modify. 4 Clear the data in the Utility length parameter (0) and

Utility stations (-) fields. 5 Click OK. 6 Click Area Steel; then, on the menu that appears, click

Modify. 7 Clear the data in the Pipe rack length (0) field; then click

OK. 8 Close the Area Specification menu. 9 Evaluate the project.

Some areas generate utility headers, utility stations. and pipe rack bulks. This information appears in: • AREA BULK REPORT


Sizing Requirements, Calculations, and Defaults Certain types of components have minimum input requirements for sizing. Those requirements are provided in the following sections, along with explanations of how the sizing is calculated for different component types.

Air Coolers

Minimum Input Requirements • Inlet Stream • Exit Stream

Sizing Procedure The air cooler thermal and detailed mechanical design equations are given below:

For thermal design: Q = U*A*MTD

MTD = f*LMTD

For mechanical design: A = pi*D_tube*N_tubeRows*N_tubesPerRow* Tube_length

where: Q = Heat Duty

U = Heat transfer coefficient

A = Bare tube surface area

MTD = Mean Temperature difference

LMTD = Log mean temperature difference, based on purely countercurrent flow

f = Temperature correction factor

N_bays = Number of bays

N_tube_rows = Number of tube rows

N_tubesPerRow = Number of tubes per row (takes into account the presence of a fan shaft)

Tube_length = Length of tubes


The process fluid properties (temperature, pressure, and specific heat capacity) are assumed to be constant throughout the air cooler and are estimated as the mean of the inlet and outlet stream properties. The required heat duty is calculated from the inlet and outlet process stream conditions if it is not specified.

The process fluid stream temperatures, inlet and exit, are used along with the temperatures specified for the air stream (Design Criteria specifications) to calculate the LMTD. The temperature correction factor is then used to calculate the MTD.

If the process fluid temperatures and air temperatures are appropriate, meaning that there is no temperature crossover and the temperature approach at the ends is reasonable, then the surface area required for the given heat duty is estimated using the thermal design equation. The air flow rate needed to realize this heat duty is then calculated using the specified ambient and outlet air conditions.

An iterative algorithm has been developed to size the air cooler. The sizing routine calculates the heat duty that can be realized using the specified tube bundle geometry (bay width, number of tube rows, and tube length). It assumes defaults for parameters that you have not specified. If the computed heat duty is larger than the heat duty actually required, the iterative procedure terminates. The tube bundle arrangement used represents the specification of the air cooler selected. If the calculated heat duty does not meet the required heat duty then a bigger air cooler is chosen (that is, parameter values are increased) and the above procedure is repeated. The iterative procedure terminates either when a tube bundle geometry that can meet the heat duty requirements is found, or when even the largest available air cooler does not meet the process requirements.

Air-side heat transfer coefficients are calculated using the relations that take into account the tube bundle geometry.

The work of Young, Briggs, and Robinson, as summarized in [6] is being used to evaluate the heat transfer and pressure drop of air across the tube bundle. The pressure drop thus calculated is used in estimating the fan power required. The number of fans required is calculated based on the aspect ratio (tube length/bay width). For any aspect ratio of up to 1.5, only one fan is selected.

Defaults Tube pitch = 2.5 INCHES

Tube thickness = 0.125 INCHES


Bay width = 4 ft to 20 ft

Tube rows = 3 to 6

Maximum Tube length

= 3*Bay width

Inlet air temperature (from Design Criteria specifications)

Outlet air temperature (from Design Criteria specifications)

Agitated Tanks

Minimum Input Requirements • Inlet stream • Exit stream

Sizing Procedure The capacity of the agitated tank is determined by the following equation: C = Q * (T_r / 60.0)

where: C = Capacity , CF

Q = Liquid volumetric flowrate, CFH

T_r = Liquid residence time, MINUTES

The diameter of the agitated tank is determined using L/D and geometry: C = (π/4) * D^2 * L

where: D = Diameter of vessel, FEET

L = Fluid height, FEET

Vessel height is obtained by the following: H = L + h_d

where: H = Vessel height, FEET


h_d = Vapor disengagement height, FEET

Design parameters are based on the current Design Criteria specifications if available: Length/Diameter Ratio: Default

= 3

Vapor disengagement height: Default

= 1 FEET

Agitator type: Default = ANCHOR

Driver type: Default = STD

Impeller type: Default = T6FB

Operating pressure is obtained from the simulator report. If the report does not have a value, then the pressure of the inlet stream having the maximum value is chosen as the operating pressure.

The operating pressure is used to obtain the L/D ratio (if user specification is absent).

If P <= 250 PSIA, then L/D = 3 If 250 < P <= 500 PSIA, then L/D = 4 If P > 500 PSIA, then L/D = 5

where: P = Pressure, PSI

L = Fluid height, FEET

D = Diameter of vessel, FEET

The project component must have at least one process stream connected to the inlet and exit. Also, since the sizing procedure is based on the liquid holding period, at least one of the streams should have liquid phase.

The design pressure and temperature are based on the operating pressure and temperature as modified by your entries on the Design Criteria specifications form.

Compressors

Minimum Input Requirements • Inlet and Exit stream information


• Driver Power (for Reciprocating Compressors)

Sizing Procedure The capacity requirement for the compressor is calculated from the inlet stream information. The inlet stream flow rate and density are used to estimate the total volumetric flow rate through the compressor.

The compression ratio (exit to inlet pressure) is obtained from the operating pressures of the inlet and exit stream.

The compressibility factor (inlet and exit) is based on user-specified information, if available, or estimated by the sizing expert based on the Primary Fluid Component.

The Icarus Evaluation Engine estimates the driver power if it is neither user-specified nor provided in the simulator report. The engine currently uses a mechanical efficiency of 100% to arrive at the brake horsepower. The brake horsepower, thus calculated, is compared against a table of available standard motor sizes. If the calculated brake horsepower is not found in the table, then the motor with the next higher horsepower is selected.

If the driver horsepower is either user-specified or provided in the simulator report, the engine uses this value. However for pricing the compressor, the table of available standard motor sizes is referred. If the specified horsepower is not found in the table, then the price of the motor with the next higher horsepower is used.

In the case of simulator inputs, different simulators provide information that may be slightly different. For instance, in the case of AspenPlus, the compressor calculations take into account any mechanical efficiency specified during the simulation run. So the “brake horsepower” reported in the case of AspenPlus already takes into account the mechanical efficiency. However, other simulators, such as SimSci (“Actual Work”); HYSIM and HYSYS (“Energy Required”), and ChemCAD ( “Actual Power”); do not account for mechanical efficiency. Keep this in mind and be aware of what has been accounted for in the simulation side when using simulator information as inputs.

Defaults Minimum inlet pressure for air compressors is 14.696 PSIA


Crushers

Minimum Input Requirement • Inlet and Exit stream information • Final product size.

Sizing Procedure The sizing expert estimates the solid flow rate from the inlet stream information. The crushing ratio (feed to product size) is set at 4.

Work index is the total energy in KWH/TONS, needed to reduce the feed to a size so that 80% of the product will pass through a 100 micron screen. The sizing expert in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator assumes a default value of 13.81 for the material work index.

The total driver power required for the crusher is calculated using material work index and the value of the product size.

The following equation is used to estimate the driver power: P = 1.46 (T_m) (W_i) ( 1/(d_p ^ 0.5) - 1/(d_r ^0.5))

where: P = Driver power, HP

T_m = Crusher capacity, TPM

W_i = Material work index

d_p = Product size, FEET

d_r = Feed size, FEET

Defaults • Material Work Index: 13.8 KWh/ton • Size Reduction Ratio: 4

Crystallizers

Minimum Information Required Inlet and Exit Stream information


Additional Information Final Product size

Sizing Procedure The sizing program calculates the crystallizer capacity based on the inlet and exit stream information.

Default value of 0.83 MM is used as final product size if the user-specified value is not available from the simulator report.

In addition, the following defaults values are used for the design parameters: Growth rate

= 0.36 MM/H

The residence time in hours for a batch crystallizer is determined by the following relation: Residence time = d_p / (3 * R_g

where: d_p = Product size, MM

R_g = Growth rate, MM/H

Based on the minimum and maximum values for the required fields in the component specification form, the number of additional crystallizers are estimated.

Dryers

Minimum Input Requirement Inlet and Exit stream information

Sizing Procedure The sizing program calculates the dryer capacity based on the total evaporation rate for the drying process. For tray and drum dryers, an average depth of 2.25 FEET is used to determine the total dryer requirements. For vacuum and jacketed rotary vacuum dryers, the dryer capacity is determined by obtaining value of the drying time and the average percentage utilization of the dryer capacity.


The system defaults are as follows: Drying time

= 0.75 HOUR

Average percentage utilization

= 25

The number of additional items required for the given drying operation is determined from the knowledge-based engine in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator, which analyzes minimum and maximum values for the required fields in the specification form.

Dust Collectors

Minimum Input Requirement Inlet and Exit stream information

Sizing Procedure The sizing program estimates the vapor volume flowing through the dust collector using the exit stream information available from the simulator report.

In case of cyclones, the sizing program assumes a default linear velocity of 150 FPS. The height to width ratio is fixed at 2.5.

Using the above defaults, the volumetric rate through the separator is obtained using Zenz correlation represented by the following equation: Q = 2.5 (D ^ 2) V / 16

where: Q = Vapor volumetric rate, CFS

D = Cyclone separator diameter, FEET

V = Linear velocity, FPS

In case of baghouse dust collectors, the sizing program uses Nylon as the default filter cloth material to determine the air to media ratio which then determines the diameter of the separator.


Air to media ratio is the flow rate of air (at 70 DEG F) in CFM. The default ratio results in a pressure drop of 0.5 INCHES of water when passed through 1 SF of clean fabric.

The sizing program uses a default air to media ratio of 10 CFM.

The minimum and maximum values of the required field(s) shown in the component specification form are used to determine the number of identical equipment items.

Filters

Minimum Input Requirement • Inlet stream • Exit stream

Sizing Procedure The sizing program calculates the total amount of filtration product rate based on the exit stream information. Based on the type of filter selected, the average dimension of the filter equipment is selected and the filter size is then optimized for the given operation such that the dimensions selected for the equipment are within the minimum and maximum values as specified by the knowledge-based engine.

In case of batch filtration, a default batch time of 0.25 HOUR is used. In case of plate and frame filters, default value of cake thickness of 0.3 FEET is used.

In the case of continuous operation, the cycle time default is 0.08 HOUR. Based on the actual capacity requirement and the maximum and minimum sizes provided by the knowledge-based engine, the number of identical items is determined.

Heat Exchangers The heat exchanger sizing program estimates the heat transfer area required for the given operating conditions. The model also performs detail estimation of the number of tubes, tube length, and other internal components of the heat exchanger based on either user-defined specifications (from the process simulator report or the Design Criteria specifications form) or system defaults.


Minimum Input Requirements Inlet and Exit Process Stream Information

Sizing Procedure The process stream(s) are classified into various categories. The Primary Fluid Component class that you specify for the process fluid(s) flowing through the heat exchanger is used to estimate the following design parameters: • Latent heats (vaporization and condensation) • Fouling resistance • Specific heat capacity of the fluid • Liquid film resistance • Overall heat transfer coefficient

Duty requirement for the heat exchanger is either directly obtained from the simulator report or estimated based on the inlet and exit process stream information for the process model. In case the fluid undergoes phase change, a boiling point temperature, Tb, is estimated that would lie between the inlet and exit stream temperature. The estimated Tb is then used in the calculation of the sensible and latent heats based on the Primary Fluid Component. The sensible heat of any solids present in the stream is also accounted for in the duty calculation.

In estimating the design pressure on shell and tube heat exchangers, the 2/3rd Rule is applied if it has been selected on the Design Criteria specifications form (see page XX569H169XX).

If only the process fluid conditions are specified by the simulator model, the heat exchanger sizing program determines the appropriate utility from the list of utilities that you specify using the Utility Specifications accessed from Project Basis view (see page XX570H184XX). If multiple utilities are available for heat transfer, then the sizing expert uses the utility fluid with a temperature approach closest to the process fluid. This minimizes the heat transfer losses. However, a minimum of 1 degree Fahrenheit difference in the final temperature of the process fluid and the utility fluid must exist for the utility fluid to be selected for the process. If an appropriate utility fluid is not available for the heat transfer process, the heat exchanger sizing program will terminate without estimating the heat exchanger size requirements.


The mean temperature difference (MTD) is estimated based on the fluid temperature for both the shell and the tube side. It also depends on the flow configuration for shell and tube heat exchangers, which is specified by the number of shell and tube passes. For reasons of compactness of equipment, the paths of both fluids may require several reversals in direction. Mean temperature differences in such cases can be obtained by applying a factor (called the F-factor) to the terminal temperature difference. The logarithmic mean temperature difference (based on purely counter current flow) is multiplied by the F-factor to obtain the mean temperature difference.

If the temperatures are not properly entered then appropriate warning messages are displayed. In such cases it recommended that you check the inlet and outlet temperatures of the shell and tube side streams and verify that they are realistic.

The overall heat transfer coefficient is either directly obtained from the simulator report or evaluated based on the shell and tube fluid properties (film resistance, fouling tendency present for the various processes in the system database).

The heat exchanger sizing program determines the position of the fluids in the shell and tube heat exchanger. The position depends on both the process and utility fluid class.

If duty is provided by the simulator report, then you can override the value only through interactive sizing.

The final heat transfer area is obtained by multiplying the heat transfer area, calculated based on the duty required, with the Heat Exchanger Minimum Overdesign Factor. If you do not specify an overdesign factor then the default value is used from the Design Criteria specifications.

If the duty generates a surface area less than minimum required for practical design, the item report will give the appropriate warning message.

FLOAT HEAD or U-TUBE heat exchangers have an even number of tube passes. If you enter an odd number for the number of tube passes for any of these heat exchanger types, Aspen Capital Cost Estimator generates warning messages.

The shell and tube design pressure and temperature are based on the maximum operating conditions of the fluid flowing through the shell and tube respectively. The Design Criteria specifications form lets you change them according to individual project requirements.


Heat Exchanger Internals The final heat transfer area is determined by the actual number of tubes chosen for the equipment. The least surface area of the combination of numbered tubes and shells is changed for final design.

A default tube length of 20 FEET is used for calculating the number of tubes.

System default values for tube diameter, tube thickness, tube pitch and baffle distances are used if user specifications are not available.

General Information The utility requirement is estimated only when the system determines the utility fluid. If both shell and tube side fluid stream information is specified in the simulator report, then the system assumes that both of the fluid streams are process streams and that no utility fluid is expended.

Presently, the model defaults are used for determining the material of construction.

For shell and tube heat exchangers, if the heat transfer surface area calculated by the sizing program is greater than the largest heat exchanger designed by the design and cost engine, then the heat exchanger is divided into multiple shells with identical configurations. The capital cost estimation is then calculated based on the complete heat exchanger.

Note: When mapping a rigorous heat exchanger model (HXRIG) from SimSci, the number of shells in parallel is used to determine the number of shells in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator. For Aspen Capital Cost Estimator, the maximum number of shells in series is 1.

Double Pipe Heat Exchanger The sizing program in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator estimates the total surface area required for the given duty. During the capital cost estimation, detailed design for the heat exchanger is developed based on the values for tube length and number of tubes per shell obtained from the simulator report or from the user.


Fin Tube Heat Exchanger The sizing program estimates the total surface area required for the given duty. During the capital cost estimation, detailed design for the heat exchanger is developed based on the tube length and number of fins per tube obtained either from the simulator report or from the user.

Spiral Plate Heat Exchanger The sizing program estimates the total surface area required for the given duty. During the capital cost estimation, detailed design for the heat exchanger is developed based on the tube length and number of fins per tube obtained either from the simulator report or from the user.

Pumps

Minimum Input Requirements Inlet and Exit stream information

Sizing Procedure The sizing program calculates the total capacity requirements for the selected pump based on the total flow rate of the inlet fluid stream(s) obtained from the simulator.

Flow Rate/Capacity Pump flow rate is obtained from the simulator information. If the information does not exist, then pump flow rate is calculated based on the stream flow rates. The stream is assumed to be completely liquid phase and no check is made for presence of vapor phase.

The pump flow rate obtained from the simulator information is multiplied by the pump overdesign factor, also referred as the capacity over-design factor, present in the Design Criteria specifications file.


Pump% Efficiency Pump efficiency is directly obtained from the simulator. If the value is not present in the simulator report, then the default value of 70% is used.

Pump Overdesign You can modify the pump overdesign factor either on the Design Criteria specifications form or the Interactive Sizing form. Modifying the overdesign factor using the Design Criteria specifications form (page XX571H169XX) will applies the new factor to all the pumps in the project. Modifying the overdesign factor for a pump using the Interactive Sizing form (page XX572H328XX) applies the factor only to that particular pump. This lets you either specify the factor for all pumps or specify the factor individually for each pump.

Driver Power If you specify a driver power in the component specification form then this value is used. If the user does not provide the value then it is calculated by the cost engine. The Icarus Evaluation Engine calculates the hydraulic horsepower based on the capacity, viscosity and head, and then uses the pump efficiency to estimate the brake horsepower. The brake horsepower is compared against a set of standard available motor sizes to estimate the pump driver power.

If multiple inlet streams are present, the minimum value of pressure is used for determining the operating pressure of the equipment.

Defaults (if they are not obtained from the simulators): • Operating pressure: 14.696 PSIA • Operating temperature: 77 DEG F

Calculating Pump Head The total head developed by the pump is composed of the difference between the static, pressure, and velocity heads. Additionally, friction at the suction and discharge sides would also contribute to some head loss. The pump head is calculated using the following relation:


Head, FEET

= h_d – h_s

where: H = total pump head, FEET

h_d = discharge head, FEET

h_s = suction head, FEET

Assumptions: • No friction losses at the entrance and exit. • No static head on suction and discharge sides. • Velocity heads are not included in estimating the suction and

discharge heads.

Head in feet is estimated by the following relations: Head, FEET

= (Pressure, PSIA) * (2.31)/(Fluid specific gravity)

The specific gravity of the fluid is based on inlet streams conditions. The discharge pressure for the pump is based on the maximum value for the exit stream(s). The suction pressure is based on the minimum value for the inlet streams(s).

Screens

Minimum Input Requirement • Inlet stream information • Screen opening size (or average product size)

Sizing Procedure The sizing program determines the capacity of the screen based on the inlet flow rate estimated from the stream information.

The screen opening size is used to determine the final product size.

The feed material for the vibrating screen is obtained from the Design Criteria specifications. The following choices are available: • Sand and Gravel • Limestone/Crushed Stones • Coal • Cinders • Coke


• Wood

The material type affects the screen unit capacity which is defined as the amount of solid (in tons per hour) flowing through one square foot of screen cloth based on material, having 6 to 8% moisture, screen cloth having 50% or more open area; 85% screen efficiency.

Based on the material selected and the screen opening size, the screen unit capacity is chosen. Further, the sizing program assumes that five layers of particles are present on the screen. The surface area required for the vibrating screen is obtained.

Based on the maximum and minimum values specified by the knowledge base for the screen capacity, additional items required by the operations are determined.

Towers

Minimum Input Requirements • Stage temperature, pressure, flowrates • Number of stages • Inlet stream • Exit stream

Sizing Procedure The distillation column sizing module can be used to size the following Icarus process equipment: • DDT TRAYED • DDT PACKED • TW TRAYED • TW PACKED • DC HE TW

The following simulator models can be used to generate the necessary process information required for successfully executing the application:

Simulator Models used

AspenPlus ABSBR, DISTWU, DISTL, RADFRAC

HYSIM/HYSYS COLUMN

Pro/II COLUMN, IO, SURE, CHEMDIST, SHORTCUT


Loading Column Model from Simulator In Aspen Capital Cost Estimator, the rigorous column unit operations loaded from the simulator report (that is, COLUMN UNITS model in PRO/II) are developed in great detail, including all pieces attached to the main column unit.

Typically, the simulator model develops stage information for the main tower and duties for an associated condenser and reboiler. These duties are used along with the specified fluid conditions available from the stage information tables to generate all of the input specifications required for the equipment.

Sidestrippers and pumparounds are separated from the main tower if necessary during the loading process after all the relevant information is collected for the models. Once the report is loaded, these units are treated as separate simulator models which can be mapped and sized independently of the main tower design.

Sidestrippers Sidestrippers attached to tower models are separated from the main tower model during the loading process. Sidestrippers load information from the same tables in the report from which the main tower information is discerned.

For example, the typical information loaded for sidestrippers in Pro/II are: SIDESTRIPPER ABC COLUMN SUMMARY —————— NET FLOW RATES —————— HEATER TRAY TEMP PRESSURE LIQUID VAPOR FEED PRODUCT DUTIES DEG C KPA KG-MOL/HR M*KJ/HR ————— ————— ———————— —————— —————— ————— ——————— ——————— 1/ 10 200.3 600.50 22. 20.0L 8.5V 2/ 11 202.2 601.53 7.8 5.0V 20.1L SIDESTRIPPER ABC TYPE STREAM PHASE FROM TO LIQUID FLOW RATES HEAT RATES TRAY TRAY FRAC KG-MOL/HR M*KJ/HR ————— —————— —————— ————— ——— —————— —————————— ——————————— FEED ABCDRW LIQUID 10 1.0000 23.00 1.3216 FEED ABCSTM VAPOR 11 .0000 5.55 .2785 PROD ABCSRVP VAPOR 10 8.46 .5325 PROD ABCPRD LIQUID 11 20.09 1.0678

Information is obtained for the sidestrippers in the same manner as for the main tower unit (Refer to information for obtaining process data for main tower unit).


Pumparounds The inlet and outlet fluid conditions for pumparounds are obtained from the stage information to which the unit is connected. Additionally, the duty associated with each pumparound is loaded into the unit. This unit is then separated during the loading process and is treated as an independent simulator model which can be mapped and sized on its own.

For example, the information required by pumparound units in PRO/II are obtained from the following part of the column report: COLUMN SUMMARY ————— NET FLOW RATES ————— HEATER TRAY TEMP PRESSURE LIQUID VAPOR FEED PRODUCT DUTIES DEG F PSIG LB-MOL/HR MM BTU/HR ———— ————— ———————— —————— ————— ————— ——————— ————————— . . . 40R 355.9 33.00 5618.9 4301.4L 94.6551 PUMPAROUNDS TRAY TEMP, DEG F LIQUID FRACTION ——————————— RATES ——————————— FROM TO FROM TO FROM TO LB-MOL/HR M LB/HR STD BBL/HR —— —— —————— ————— —————— ————— ————————— ———————— —————————— 40 40 355.9 416.1 1.0000 .4108 7273.09 995.238 3569.48

Mapping the Tower Model Typically, column models in simulators do not include the ancillary equipment attached to the main tower. For example, a tower unit may really consist of the following equipment: • Main tower • Overhead condenser • Condenser accumulator • Overhead split • Reflux pump • Overhead pump • Overhead product sub-cooler • Reboiler • Bottoms split • Bottoms product pump • Bottoms product heat exchanger

Both overhead and bottoms split are process stream splitters and therefore do not represent any project component. In Aspen Capital Cost Estimator, during mapping and sizing process, they are typically mapped as a quoted cost item with zero cost.


In addition, the equipment design could involve splitting the units into more than one actual piece for reasons of economy. For example, in many applications, condensers are split into a precooler (which is typically an air cooler but also can be any other type of heat exchanger) and a trim cooler (typically a shell and tube heat exchanger).

Tower models (such as RADFRAC model in AspenPlus, COLUMN UNIT in PRO/II and COLUMN in HYSIM/HYSYS) can be mapped into any of the following ten Aspen Capital Cost Estimator configurations: • Standard - Single or Standard - Total

o Tower o Condenser o Condenser accumulator o Overhead split o Reflux pump o Bottoms split o Reboiler.

• Full - Single o Tower o Condenser o Condenser accumulator o Overhead split o Reflux pump o Overhead pump o Overhead product heat exchanger o Bottoms split o Reboiler o Bottoms product pump o Bottoms product heat exchanger

• Standard - Split or Standard – Split Total o Tower o Precooler o Trimcooler o Condenser accumulator o Overhead split o Reflux pump o Bottoms split


o Reboiler • Full - Split

o Tower o Precooler o Trimcoooler o Condenser accumulator o Overhead split o Reflux pump o Overhead pump o Overhead product heat exchanger o Bottoms split o Reboiler o Bottoms product pump o Bottoms product heat exchanger

• Standard - Total w/Circ. o Tower o Condenser o Condenser accumulator o Overhead split o Reflux pump o Bottoms split o Reboiler o Circulation pump

• Full - Single w/Circ. o Tower o Condenser o Condenser accumulator o Overhead split o Reflux pump o Overhead pump o Overhead product heat exchanger o Bottoms split o Reboiler o Bottoms product pump o Bottoms product heat exchanger o Circulation pump

• Standard – Split Total w/Circ.


o Tower o Precooler o Trimcooler o Condenser accumulator o Overhead split o Reflux pump o Bottoms split o Reboiler o Circulation pump

• Full - Split w/Circ. o Tower o Precooler o Trimcoooler o Condenser accumulator o Overhead split o Reflux pump o Overhead pump o Overhead product heat exchanger o Bottoms split o Reboiler o Bottoms product pump o Bottoms product heat exchanger o Circulation pump

Refer to Tower Configurations in Chapter 4 for detailed flow diagrams.

These configurations should be regarded as the “maximum” model with all potentialities satisfied The components actually developed depend upon the process conditions. For example, if the main tower model does not have a condenser and a reboiler, then only the tower model is mapped.

If the overhead product is cooler than the temperature of the fluid from the condenser outlet, then an overhead exchanger is mapped.

A bottoms product exchanger is mapped only when the bottoms product stream has a different temperature from the temperature of the bottom stage of the tower.


In the case of split models, where the condenser duty is split into precooler and trimcooler duties, the ratio of the duty split is obtained from the Design Criteria specifications form. The overhead vapor stream flowing to the precooler is assumed to be at dew point if the condensation temperature is not provided.

Loading Tower Input Information From the tower results in the report, the tables consisting of stage temperatures, stage pressures, stage molar vapor flow rates and stage molar liquid flow rates are loaded in the mapping process.

For example, in the case of AspenPlus, the following tables in the RADFRAC block are loaded by Aspen Capital Cost Estimator in the mapping process:

Table 1: Stage temperature and Stage Pressures are loaded (Column 1 and 2) ENTHALPY STAGE TEMP. PRESSURE BTU/LBMOL HEAT DUTY F PSI LIQUID VAPOR BTU/HR 1 149.27 20.000 -0.12156E+06 -42602. -.23509+08 2 223.45 22.000 -0.11895E+06 -87138. 3 227.79 22.100 -0.11909E+06 -92519. 4 230.39 22.200 -0.11918E+06 -95701. 5 232.06 22.300 -0.11925E+06 -97662. 6 233.25 22.400 -0.11931E+06 -98970. 7 234.18 22.500 -0.11935E+06 -99924. 8 234.98 22.600 -0.11939E+06 -0.10068E+06 9 235.72 22.700 -0.11942E+06 -0.10135E+06 10 236.74 22.800 -0.11941E+06 -0.10196E+06 45802+08

Table 2: Stage molar liquid flowrates and Stage molar vapor flowrates are loaded. (Column 1 and 2) STAGE FLOW RATE FEED RATE PRODUCT RATE LBMOL/HR LBMOL/HR LBMOL/HR LIQUID VAPOR LIQUID VAPOR MIXED LIQUID VAPOR 1 1239. 430.0 .57657-01 430.0000 2 0.2571E+05 1669. .24001+05 3 0.2586E+05 2140. 4 0.2595E+05 2286. 5 0.2602E+05 2380. 6 0.2606E+05 2444. 7 0.2610E+05 2493. 8 0.2614E+05 2532. 9 0.2617E+05 2568. 10 0.2357E+05 2604. .23571+05

Inlet and exit streams (and their stage numbers) are loaded in the mapping step.


For example, in the case of a RADFRAC model for AspenPlus, the following portion of the report is loaded in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator: INLETS7 STAGE 2 OUTLETS - 8 STAGE 1 9 STAGE 10

When sizing information is present in the report, the mapping program loads all the relevant information present in the sizing sections.

For example, in the case of a RADFRAC model for AspenPlus, the following portion of the sizing report is loaded in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator for every section: Case : Tray tower sizing section STARTING STAGE NUMBER 2 ENDING STAGE NUMBER 29 TRAY SPECIFICATIONS — — — — — — — — — TRAY TYPE SIEVE TRAY SPACING METER 0.60960 ***** SIZING RESULTS @ STAGE WITH MAXIMUM DIAMETER ***** COLUMN DIAMETER METER 4.00228 Case : Packed tower sizing section STARTING STAGE NUMBER 2 ENDING STAGE NUMBER 9 PACKING SPECIFICATIONS — — — — — — — — — — — PACKING TYPE BERL-SADDLE HETP FT 2.00000 PACKING HEIGHT FT 16.0000

Determining Tower Process Conditions • Operating Temperature

The maximum temperature value for all the stages (given by column 1) is used as the operating temperature for the tower.

• Operating Pressure

The maximum pressure value for all the stages (given by column 2) is used as the operating pressure for the tower.

• Minimum Operating Pressure

The minimum pressure value for all the stages (given by column 2) is used as the minimum operating pressure for the tower.

• Design Pressure


The maximum value from the stage pressure profile is used for calculating the design pressure of the tower (that is, after applying the user-defined-design value from the design criteria file). When stage pressures are not available, the maximum value of pressure from all the inlet streams is used.

• Design Temperature

The maximum value from the stage temperature profile is used for calculating the design temperature of the tower (that is, after applying the user-defined design value from the design criteria file). When stage temperatures are not available, the maximum value of temperature from all the inlet streams is used.

• Number of Stages

The number of theoretical stages is provided by the number of rows in Table 1. The final number is determined by taking into account condenser and reboiler (if they are provided). Also, the number of stages is affected by the reboiler type depending on whether the reboiler simulated in the report is kettle or thermosiphon.

For example, in the case of RADFRAC model for AspenPlus, consider the following table:

STAGE TEMP. PRESSURE BTU/LBMOL HEAT DUTY F PSI LIQUID VAPOR BTU/HR 1 149.27 20.000 -0.12156E+06 -42602. -.23509+08 2 223.45 22.000 -0.11895E+06 -87138. 3 227.79 22.100 -0.11909E+06 -92519. 4 230.39 22.200 -0.11918E+06 -95701. 5 232.06 22.300 -0.11925E+06 -97662. 6 233.25 22.400 -0.11931E+06 -98970. 7 234.18 22.500 -0.11935E+06 -99924. 8 234.98 22.600 -0.11939E+06 -0.10068E+06 9 235.72 22.700 -0.11942E+06 -0.10135E+06 10 236.74 22.800 -0.11941E+06 -0.10196E+06 .45802+08

If the reboiler is kettle, then the number of theoretical stages is eight.

If the reboiler is thermosiphon (reboiler type is obtained from simulator), then the number of theoretical stages is nine.

• Liquid Density

Density of liquid flowing inside the column is estimated from the density of the inlet streams and the exit streams. If liquid density cannot be obtained from the streams, the density of water is used as default.

• Vapor Density

Density of vapor flowing inside the column is estimated from the density of the inlet streams and the exit streams. If vapor density cannot be obtained from the streams, the vapor density is estimated based on gas law. The vapor density is estimated at the minimum operating pressure and operating temperature.

• Average Molecular Weight of Vapor Inside Tower


Average vapor molecular weight is estimated from the inlet and exit streams. The lowest molecular weight of the streams is assigned as the vapor molecular weight.

• Average Molecular Weight of Liquid Inside Tower

Average liquid molecular weight is the maximum molecular weight for the inlet and exit streams.

Sizing Procedure The sizing procedure varies depending on the type of internals desired and the simulator model used for the operation. The procedure described below gives a description of the actual steps used by the sizing module to estimate the sizes for the different types of trayed and packed towers.

Trayed Tower Sizing General Procedure (Followed for all tray internals): 2. The type (class) of the fluid in the column is used to estimate some of the

properties in designing the tray internals, such as surface tension, foaming tendency, deration factor if they are not specified in the simulation output report or on the Design Criteria specifications form.

You can specify the overall column tray efficiency in the Tray Efficiency box on the Design Criteria specifications form (see pages XX573H170XX). If the value is not provided, then it is estimated using Lockett’s modification of the O’Connell Correlation. This correlation is based on tests on actual plant columns and has been the standard of the industry.

The tray efficiency is used to calculate the actual number of stages required for the separation. EOC = 0.492 ( μL α) -0.245

where: EOC = efficiency, O’Connell Correlation

μL = viscosity of liquid, CPOISE

α = relative volatility of key component

A default value of 1.5 is used for the relative volatility of key components that you can modify on the Design Criteria specifications form. The liquid viscosity is either directly obtained from the report or estimated from the fluid classification. • Once the internal height of the column is estimated (based on

the actual number of trays), additional height for vapor


disengagement and liquid return is based on your Design Criteria specifications.

• In general, the number of stages provided by the simulator report represent the theoretical number of stages. However, if detailed design of the tower has been done by the simulator using tray efficiency, then the number of trays are actual trays. If Aspen Capital Cost Estimator finds that the number of trays are actual, then it uses the value to estimate the height and does not add any additional tray efficiency.

Using Tower Sizing Information When a simulator report provides sizing information, Aspen Capital Cost Estimator tries to use as much of the information as possible in the final design. When multiple sections are present in the report, the information used by Aspen Capital Cost Estimator depends on the equipment to which the model is mapped.

Single Diameter Trayed Tower (TW TRAYED)

If multiple sections are present with different diameters and tray spacings, then the largest values of the diameters and tray spacings are used for the actual design of the tower.

Double Diameter Trayed Tower (DTT TRAYED)

For double diameter trayed tower, the two largest diameters in the sectional report are used in the design. Once the tower is divided into two sections (based on diameter), the value of the tray spacing for each section is based on the stage numbers present in each section. The largest values of tray spacing for each section are used to estimate the tower height.

For example, for AspenPlus, assume the following sizing information is obtained from the report after completing the loading process.

Section 1: Diameter = 5 FEET

Tray Spacing = 24 INCHES

Stages = 2 to 4




Stages = 5 to 7



Stages = 8 to 10

The sizing program will design a double diameter tower with the following dimensions: Top Section Diameter

= 6 FEET

Top Section Tray Spacing

= 30 INCHES

Top Section Stages = 2 to 7

Bottom Section Diameter

= 8 FEET

Bottom Section Tray Spacing

= 18 INCHES

Bottom Section Stages

= 8 to 10

The program estimates the cross sectional area for each stage. Then, the maximum value is used to design the single diameter tower. In case of double diameter tower, the program estimates the diameter for the bottom section and the top section based on the cross sectional area estimated for each stage.

Sieve Tray Design The capacity factor, CSB, is evaluated based on the correlation developed for entrainment flooding by Kister and Haas. Jeronimo et. al correlation is used to estimate the clear liquid height in the spray regime. Strictly, the Jeronimo and Swistowski correlation predicts the clear liquid height at the transition from the froth to the spray regime. However, empirical evidence has shown that clear liquid height in the spray regime is much the same as clear liquid height at that transition.

The CSB estimated at the flooding point is used to evaluate the flooding vapor velocity.


The bubbling area is calculated based on flood velocity, the derating factor and the safety factor. (Column default design is 90% of flood.)

Downcomer liquid velocity is based on the foaming tendency of the fluid and tray spacing. Foaming tendency can be specified on the Design Criteria specifications form.

The downcomer cross-sectional area is based on the downcomer velocity and the maximum liquid flow inside the tower.

The total tower cross-sectional area is calculated by adding the bubbling area and the downcomer area.

The diameter of the tower is obtained from the cross-sectional area by rounding the area up to the next half foot. The minimum diameter for the tower is 1.5 FEET.

Valve Tray Design Valve tray sizing is based on the V-type Ballast trays produced by Glitsch. The system factors are estimated based on the fluid classification performed on the fluid flowing through the column. The tray diameter is evaluated for either single pass trays or two pass trays. It is based on 24 INCHES tray spacing and 80% of flood.

Bibliography “Distillation Design”, by Henry Z. Kister.

“Applied Process Design For Chemical And Petrochemical Plant”, Volumes 1 and 3, by Ernest E. Ludvig.

“Standard Handbook of Engineering Calculations”, by Tyler G. Hicks

“Chemical Engineers HandBook”, by Perry and Chilton, 6th Edition.

Bubble-Cap Tray Design The allowable vapor velocity and the corresponding diameter for bubble-cap trays have been represented by the Jersey Critical formula which corresponds to the work by Souder and Brown for column flooding.

( ) 21/0956.0 vLv KWD ρρ=


where: D = Diameter, FEET

Wv = vapor flow rate, LB/H

ρL = liquid density, LB/CF

ρv = vapor density, LB/CF

The factor K depends on the tray spacing as follows: Tray Spacing, INCHES 18 24 30 30+ K 3.4 4.2 4.7 5.0

Packed Tower Design Packed tower design is accomplished for both random and structured packings. The various types of packings supported by the system are described in the Icarus Reference.

Kister and Gill flood point correlation is used to estimate pressure drop at the flood point as a function of packing factor alone. ΔΡFL = .155 (Fp

0.7)

where: ΔΡFL = Pressure drop at flood point

Fp Packing factor

Note: You can provide the value for the packing factor on the Design Criteria specifications form. The system defaults are used for each of the different types of packings if you do not enter a value. Once this pressure drop is known, the flood velocity is calculated using the latest version of GPDC (Generalized Pressure Drop Correlation) charts for both random and structured packings.

HETP Prediction You can provide the HETP value on the Design Criteria specifications form. If the value is not specified, rules of thumb prediction reported in literature are used to predict the packed tower efficiency.

For random packing columns, the following rules are used for estimating HETP (FEET):


HETP = 1.5 dp

dp = Packing diameter, INCHES HETP > DT for DT < 2 FEET

For estimating the structured packing efficiency, the following rule of thumb is used: HETP, INCHES

= 1200 /ap + 4

ap = Packing surface area per unit volume, SF/CF

System Defaults The following system default values may be modified on the Design Criteria specifications form and Component Specifications form:

Trayed Tower Defaults Tray Type = Sieve

Tray Spacing = 24 inches

Flooding Factor = 80 %

Foaming Tendency = Moderate

Packed Tower Defaults Packing Type = Random

Packing Material = 1.0PPR

Specific area per unit volume for the packing

= 0.75 SF/CF

General Defaults Top vapor disengagement height

= 4 FEET

Bottom sump height = 6 FEET

SimSci’s SHORTCUT Column Operation In case of SHORTCUT column operation, the simulator provides only the minimum reflux ratio for the distillation process. To design the tower, the ratio of the operating reflux ratio and minimum reflux ratio has to be provided. The system uses the default value of 2.0 for the ratio. The ratio can be changed on the Design Criteria specifications form (see page XX574H170XX). If the


simulator report does not contain information (number of trays) for the operating reflux ratio, the tower sizing program returns to the system without performing sizing for the tower.

Vessels

Horizontal Vessels The following graphic shows a typical horizontal vessel.

The following design variables are specified on the Design Criteria specifications form: • Residence Time • Process Vessel Height to Diameter Ratio • Minimum Vessel Diameter • Vapor/Liquid Separator Sizing Method • Average Liquid Particle Diameter • Design factor multiplier for disengagement velocity • Separation Factor • Vapor area /cross sectional area • Separation Factor Multiplier • Minimum Boot Length (used in Horizontal Vessel Design) • Minimum Boot diameter • Boot Leg Liquid Velocity


Design Requirements The maximum number of exit streams is three; two of the streams can be liquid.

Calculating Diameter Vessel diameter is based on the maximum allowable vapor velocity inside the separator, to reduce the liquid entrainment in the vapor.

The following two methods are available in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator (chosen from the Design Criteria specifications) to obtain vapor velocity. • Liquid Entrainment Method • Particle size separation method.

Calculating Vapor Velocity

Liquid Entrainment Method

The maximum allowable vapor velocity, to reduce liquid entrainment is obtained as a function of liquid and vapor density and the Separation Factor, which itself is a polynomial function of vapor and liquid density and vapor and liquid flowrates. The polynomial equation was based on 5% of liquid entrained in the vapor and is valid for the range (defined below) of 0.006 to 5.0. Aspen Capital Cost Estimator lets you override the computed value of Separation Factor. W = l_mfr/v_mfr * sqrt (v_rho/l_rho)

X = ln (SF)

k_v = EXP(A + BX + CX^2 + DX^3 + EX^4)

K = k_v * k_vm

v_m = K * sqrt ((l_rho - v_rho)/v_rho)

where: l_mfr = Light Liquid Mass Flow rate

v_mfr = Vapor Mass Flow rate

l_rho = Light Liquid Density

v_rho = Vapor Density

K = System Factor

SF = Separation Factor

k_v = Polynomial Function of SF

k_vm = Separation Factor Multiplier

A = -1.877478097


B = -0.8145804597

C = -0.1870744085

D = -0.0145228667

E = -0.0010148518

The above relation for Separation Factor is valid for a “W”(SF) between 0.006 and 5.0. If “W” falls outside the range, the sizing program gives a warning message and the limiting value of W is used to estimate Separation Factor.

For example, if calculated value of W is 0.001, then the value used in the correlation is 0.006. If the calculated value of W is 10.0, then the value used in the correlation is 6.0.

Particle Size Separation Method

This method estimates the disengagement velocity of liquid bubble in the vapor space. The maximum allowable vapor velocity is determined as a percentage of the disengagement velocity.

Liquid drops falling in gases appear to be spherical up to a Reynolds number of 100. Large drops (greater than 0.3125 INCHES) will deform, with a resulting increase in drag, and in some cases shatter.

For estimating vapor velocity, the liquid bubbles are assumed to remain in spherical shape.

The terminal settling velocity can be obtained for different flow conditions.

For laminar flow (K < 3): v = g * (rho_l - rho_v) *(dp^ 2)/ (18.0 * mu_v)

and for turbulent region: v = 1.74 (g * dp * (rho_l - rho_v) / rho_v)^0.5

where: K = dp * (g * rho_v * (rho_l - rho_v)/ (mu_v^2) )^0.33

v = disengagement velocity

g = gravitational constan

rho_l = liquid density

rho_v = vapor density

dp = liquid bubble diameter

mu_v = gas viscosity (assumed to be 0.05 LB/FT/H)


The design velocity is then estimated by the following equation: v_m = v * f

where: v_m = disengagement velocity

f = design factor multiplier for disengagement velocity

v = disengagement

Calculating vessel cross-sectional area Vapor cross sectional area is estimated based on the vapor velocity and the vapor volumetric flow. The vapor cross sectional area is divided by the ratio of vapor area/cross sectional area to get the total required cross sectional area. v_csa = v_vol/v_m

t_csa = v_csa/r_vc

where: v_csa = Vapor area

v_vol = Vapor volumetric flow

r_vc = Vapor area/cross sectional area

t_csa = Vessel cross sectional area

Estimate Vessel diameter based on vapor flow: D_v = sqrt ((t_csa * 4) /π)

where: D_v = Vessel Diameter based on vapor flow

� = 3.14

Estimate vessel diameter based on liquid holdup volume and user-specified value of L/D ratio.

The maximum value of diameter calculated using vapor velocity and liquid holdup is used for final design.


Calculating Length Vessel liquid holdup volume is obtained based on the light liquid flowrate and the residence time. The vessel length is then calculated as given below: l_vol = l_vfr * r_t

L = (l_vol * 4) / (π * D^2 * (1 - r_vc))

where: l_vol = Liquid holdup volume

L = Length

l_vfr = Light liquid volumetric flowrate

r_t = Residence time

r_vc = r_vc

Checking L/D Ratio For all liquid vessels L/D is calculated as follows: If P <= 250 PSIA, then L/D= 3

If 250 < P <= 500 PSIA, then L/D = 4

If P > 500 PSIA, then L/D= 5

After estimating the length (L) and diameter (D) of the vessel, the ratio of L/D is compared with the Process Vessel Height to Diameter Ratio specified on the Design Criteria specifications form.

Estimating Boot Dimensions Boot dimensions will be estimated only if the exit streams contain a heavier liquid phase. Boot diameter is based on the heavier liquid phase volume and boot liquid velocity. Boot volume (bt_vol) = hl_vfr * r_t

Boot cross section area (bt_csa)

= bt_vol / hl_vel

Boot diameter (d) = sqrt (4.0 * bt_csa /π)

Boot length (l) = (bt_vol * 4)/(π * d^2)

where: hl_vfr = heavy liquid volumetric flow rate

hl_vel = heavy liquid velocity

l = boot length

d = boot diameter


Vertical Vessels The following graphic shows a typical vertical vessel.

The following design variables are specified on the Design Criteria specifications form: • Residence Time • Process Vessel Height to Diameter Ratio • Minimum Vessel Diameter • Vapor/Liquid Separator Sizing Method • Average liquid particle diameter • Design factor multiplier for disengagement velocity • Separation Factor


• Minimum Disengagement Height • Minimum height above the mist eliminator • Height of Mist Eliminator

Vessel diameter is calculated in the same manner as for horizontal vessels. The default value of Separation Factor Multiplier is available in the Design Criteria specifications.

Calculating Vessel Height Vessel liquid holdup volume is based on the light liquid flowrate and the residence time. The liquid height in the vessel is then calculated and the additional height is added to obtain the overall vessel height. l_vol = l_vfr * r_t

l_ht = (l_vol * 4) / (π * D^2)

h = LLLTap_ht + l_ht+ HLLTap_ht + d_ht + me_ht + mea_ht

where: l_vol = liquid holdup volume l_vfr = light liquid volumetric flowrate r_t = residence time l_ht = liquid height based on residence time LLLTap_ht = minimum height between low liquid level tap and

tangent line (design criteria) ddHLLTap_ht = height between inlet nozzle and high liquid level

tap (desig criteria) d_ht = disengagement height me_ht = mist eliminator height mea_ht = Height above the mist eliminator

If the calculated l_ht is less than the minimum height between the taps, specified in the design criteria, then the minimum height is used.

Checking L/D ratio

For all liquid

After estimating the length (L) and diameter (D) of the vessel, the ratio of L/D is compared with the Process Vessel Height to Diameter Ratio specified on the Design Criteria specifications form.

376 6 Piping and Instrumentation Models

6 Piping and Instrumentation Models

Overview Icarus provides hundreds of default piping and instrumentation drawings (P&ID’s), each associated with a process equipment item. If a process equipment item has a P&ID, the P&ID button is active on the Component Specifications form.

Using the P&ID Editor

Features of P&IDs • Functionality equivalent to Icarus 2000 added to Aspen

Capital Cost Estimator • Uses Intergraph RAD technology as drawing engine • Intelligent P&ID for single component only • Port based system with Piping, Electronic, Pneumatic,

Thermocouple and Process Connection ports • Piping and Process Connection ports are uni-directional;

others are bi-directional • Administrator mode for building components or user P&ID

models for system library • User mode selects system default models or alternate user

P&ID models • User can modify some characteristics of P&ID in a project

6 Piping and Instrumentation Models 377

• Uses Aspen Capital Cost Estimator line diameter and length calculations or user supplied calculations using Line Sizing Equation Editor

P&ID Modes You can work with P&IDs in two ways: • If you are not in a specific project, you are in Administrator

mode. Use Administrator mode to build components or to build user P&IDs for the System Library.

• If you are in a specific project, you are in User mode. In User mode, you can select system default models or user P&ID models. You can also modify some P&ID characteristics.

P&ID Layout and Structure

To access the P&ID user interface: 1 On the palette, click the Libraries tab.

2 On the Libraries tab, double-click the P&IDs icon .


The P&ID User Interface appears.

The left pane contains the User P&IDs. This is where you can create customized drawings and manage your library.

The right pane contains the System P&IDs. This is where you view the system PIDs.

In the User P&ID Libraries area, you can add • categories • files

You can create folders to organize your custom drawings. The system PIDs are organized by equipment type. You cannot add or remove PID files and folders cannot be added or removed from the system area, but you can customize a system drawing by copying and pasting or dragging and dropping into the Users PIDs area.

Each PID file can only be used for a specific equipment type, such as a horizontal tank. A file can be further limited to an application of that equipment type, such as Batch operations. You specify this when you initial create your initial PID.

To add a new category to the User P&ID Libraries area: 1 Right-click User P&ID Libraries. 2 On the menu that appears, click New | Category.

The rename dialog box appears. 3 In the rename dialog box, type the name for your new

category. 4 Click OK.

Your new category appears in under User P&ID Libraries.


To add a new User P&ID file: 1 Right-click User P&ID Libraries or the category under which

you want to insert the new file.. 2 On the menu that appears, click New | File. The New File dialog box appears.

3 On the New File dialog box, type:

o the Name for the P&ID file (required) o a Description of the P&ID file (optional)

Note: Each PID file can only be used for certain equipment types o the Item Symbol (type of equipment) this new drawing will

apply to (for example, VT). You can browse for the Item

Symbol by clicking the More button . o the Item Type (optional) to further restrict the drawing to

an individual application (for example, Storage only). You can browse for the Item Type by clicking the More button

.

Note: If you leave the Item Type field blank, the P&ID will apply to all applications of the selected Item Symbol (for example, all VTs). 4 When you are satisfied with the details of the new file,

• Click OK to insert the new file.

-or- • Click Cancel to abandon adding the new file.


Note: If you click OK in Step 4 above, this will be a blank drawing where you must draw the desired drawing.

To Delete (Remove) a User P&ID category or file: 1 Right-click the category or file you want to remove. 2 Click Remove.

Your category or file is removed.

The Aspen Capital Cost Estimator PID Layout: Radpfs Interface This second user interface is the Radpfs drawing tool. This application lets you view a PID and make changes to it.

The main area of the interface is the drawing area. The symbol menu is on the left side of the screen and the labels are at the bottom.

The drawing area contains the PID objects and the labels. The labels include: • PID title • number • date • company name

Use the toolbars at the top for: • drawing • zooming • labeling


• and so on

Note: You can remove the toolbars at the top to give you more drawing space.

Symbol Menu The symbol menu is where you can select objects to add to the drawing. These objects include: • equipment symbols • instrument bubbles • piping lines • valves and fittings

Symbol Menu – Details The illustrations below show the details of the Symbol menu.


Symbol menu categories

The Line types section of the Symbol menu includes: • Electronic • Pneumatic • Thermocouple • Process connections

When you select a line type in the Symbol menu, all of the ports of this type on the PID appear.

The Piping section of the Symbol menu contains all of the valves and fittings that have graphical representations. Here are some example Piping objects:

Under the Instrumentation heading of the Symbol menu you will find the control valves, which can be connected to piping lines and instrument bubbles to form loops. Here you will also find the instrument bubbles, which can be connected to equipment symbols or piping lines using process connections ports; the bubbles are connected to each other and control valves using electronic and pneumatic ports to form loops.

Here are some example Instrumentation objects:

The last two headings of the Symbol menu contain the equipment symbols: • Equipment contains the system default equipment symbols.


• Custom Equipment contains any customized equipment symbols.

Working with Ports The RadPfs PID editor is a port based system. Ports: • let you connect piping and instrumentation lines to objects in

your PID • appear on the PID as arrows • display the port name if the cursor is positioned over it

Port Properties Every port has the following properties: • Name • Type – A port can be connected only to another of the same

type o Piping o Process Connection o Electrical o Pneumatic o Thermocouple

• Direction o In o Out o Bi-directional

Making Ports Visible

To make ports visible: • On the Symbol menu, under Line Types, click the type of

line for which you want to make the ports visible.


For example, if you want to make the Piping ports visible on your drawing, under Line Types, click Piping.

The Piping ports are now visible, as shown below.

Forming Connections Using Ports

To use ports to form connections (or draw a line) on the drawing: 1 On the Symbol menu, click the port type you want. Ports of

that type are made visible.

2 In the drawing, left-click the port you want to use. A dotted

red line showing the link moves as you move the mouse.

3 Left-click another port of the type you are using. A line will be

drawn automatically between the two ports. You might use this technique for a branching pipe or instrument loops.


-or-

In the case of piping lines, drop the other end of the red dotted line onto a blank area on the drawing. This will also draw the line automatically, but it will represent a line coming from or traveling to an area outside of the drawing.

Editing P&IDs You can make changes to a PID in radpfs, such as: • adding piping lines • adding valves and fittings • adding instrumentation • adding labels • deleting objects

Adding Piping Lines Remember that at least one end of a line of pipe will be connected to a piping port on the equipment symbol or another line of pipe. The other end of the piping line can be • connected to a piping port or it can be • dropped onto white space to represent originating from or

traveling to a destination outside of the PID

The suggested order is to: 1 Add the line of pipe. 2 Supply a pipe number. 3 Add valves and fittings.

To add a piping line: 1 On the Symbol menu, click the Piping line type.


2 Click a port you want to use. As you move the mouse around the screen you will see a red dotted line.

3 Click to assign the other end of the line of pipe. A line will be

drawn automatically for you.

The next step is to supply a pipe number.

To supply a pipe number: 1 Right-click on the newly created piping line.

2 On the menu that appears, click Number Piping Line. 3 Type a pipe number for the piping line number. 4 Click OK. The next step is to add valves and fittings.

To add a valve or fitting: 1 In the left pane, expand Piping. 2 Click the name of the type of valve (or other fitting) you want

to add.

A graphical representation in the lower left pane. The example below is of a butterfly valve.

3 Click the location on the line of pipe where you want to add

the valve or fitting.

It is drawn and connected automatically.


To display the line number or the description on the PID: 1 Right-click on a line. 2 On the menu that appears, click:

o Display Piping Number o Display Piping description

To display more information about this line of pipe 1 Right-click the line of pipe. 2 On the menu that appears, click select View Piping

Properties. The Piping Line Properties dialog box appears.

• Use the Description field to change the description of this

line of pipe at the top of the screen. • Use the fields in the Fitting group to add valves and fittings

which do not have graphical representations, such as elbows or tee’s. You can see that the first two valves are grayed out


– these have graphical representations, so they must be added or deleted on the PID itself.

• Use the remainder of the fields to select fittings to add. • Use the fields in the Line Sizing group to specify line sizing

details. The Aspen Capital Cost Estimator PID system lets you write line sizing rules that calculate diameter and length relative to aspects of the component, such as volume or flow rate. See Line Sizing Tutorial, page XX575H401XX, for details about how to create a new rule. The Line Sizing area is where you can select a rule for use on this piping line.

The Temperature and Pressure Type fields are for: • gas compressors • double diameter towers • heat exchangers

Use these fields to tell the system where this line of pipe is connected to one of these pieces of equipment.

The Connect to equipment location field is used for nozzle sizing for vessels and towers only.

Adding Instrumentation Loops All instrumentation and control valves in the Aspen Capital Cost Estimator system are grouped as loops. If you are familiar with the Icarus system, especially the instrumentation installation bulks form, a helpful concept is that:

By selecting bubbles and editing the Instrumentation Properties, you provide the exact same information you would find in the Installation Bulk – Instrumentation screen.

The suggested workflow for adding an instrument loop is: • Add the desired bubbles to the PID. • Connect the loop together. • Provide a loop number.

The instrument bubbles are found in the Symbol Menu.

They are organized by location, then by process variable.

Location is important because it will affect the pieces of equipment generated in your estimate: for instance, if you choose a local control bubble only, you will not get a run of instrument cable from the field to the control center. Control


center bubbles will not have process connection ports, so choose bubbles which represent your process most accurately.

To add instrument bubbles and control valves to the PID:

Note: This example is a pressure loop with a control valve.

1 On the left pane, expand Instrumentation. 2 Click the instrumentation type you want to place. 3 Move the cursor into the drawing where you want to place the

instrumentation bubble; then click. The bubble is placed in the drawing.

4 Add the next instrumentation bubbles one by one. 5 Add a control valve (Instrumentation | Control Valves |

<name of control valve>) if necessary.

Next, the process connection ports are used to connect the local bubbles to the piping line or equipment symbol.


6 In the left pane, click Line Types | Process Connection to display the Process Connection ports so you can attach the bubble to a line of pipe.

A dotted red line appears when you move the cursor, showing you where the line will be drawn. 7 Click again where you want the line to connect. 8 In the left pane, click Line Types | Electronic to display the

Electronic ports so you can connect the rest of the loop.

9 Click an Electronic port.

A dotted red line appears when you move the cursor, showing you where the line will be drawn. 10 Click again where you want the line to connect. The line is connected. 11 Continue connecting bubbles and ports until the loop is

complete. 12 Right-click anywhere on the loop. 13 On the menu that appears, click Number Loop.


You can modify the loop, by: • removing parts of the loop from the estimate • adding a Back of Panel Option • changing instrument quantity • and so on

To modify the loop: 1 Right click the loop. 2 On the menu that appears, click View Loop Properties. The Loop Properties dialog box appears.


If you are familiar with the instrumentation installation bulk form, you will probably notice that this interface provides many of the same inputs.

The following inputs are unavailable, because they are determined graphically by the PID loop bubbles:

o Process Variable o Panel Action o Sensor Type o Instrument Location o Signal Type

3 Use the Loop Properties dialog box to customize: o Description: Loop name o Back of Panel Option o Quantity o Number of Solenoids o Loop Modifications

Remove specific pieces of the loop from the estimate

4 When you have finished customizing the loop, click OK.

Adding or Editing P&ID Labels Each PID has space at the bottom for: • title • number • date • company name

To add or edit P&ID labels: 1 At the bottom of the drawing, double click in the box you

want to edit.

The text in the box becomes red, indicating you can edit it. 2 Type your additions or edits. 3 Click anywhere else in the drawing.

Adding Miscellaneous Labels You can add miscellaneous labels throughout the PID.


To add a miscellaneous label: 1 On the Label toolbar, click the Label icon as shown below.

Note: If the Label toolbar is not visible, A Click View | Toolbars. B Select Label. C Click OK. 2 Click in the drawing where you want to place the label,

moving your cursor to make a box into which the label will go.

3 Type your label into the box. 4 Click anywhere else in the drawing.

Deleting Pipe, Instrumentation, and Valves

To delete any objects from your drawing: 1 Right-click the object you want to delete. 2 On the menu that appears, click Delete.

When deleting objects, one common situation that is created is a disconnected line of pipe because you delete a valve or fitting from the middle of it, as shown here.

After deleting a valve

To reconnect the line: 1 Delete one of the loose ends.


2 Right click the other loose end. 3 On the menu that appears, click Reconnect Source or

Reconnect Destination, depending on the direction of the pipe.

Line reconnected

Efficient PID Creation When you create a drawing from scratch, the recommended workflow is to add items in this order: 1 Equipment symbol 2 Lines of pipe 3 Pipe numbers 4 Valves and fittings 5 Instrument bubbles 6 Control valves 7 Instrument connections 8 Instrument loop numbers 9 Labels

AspenTech has found that efficiency is improved by positioning the objects in the drawing before using ports to form connections. This is because moving the objects into position before making all the connections saves readjustment effort later.


Cosmetic Tips You can adjust the position of any lines on your PID by dragging and dropping, as shown here.

When you move objects around, you may see that there are kinks in some lines.

To straighten kinked lines: 1 Right-click the line you want to straighten. 2 On the menu that appears, click Align.

You can move all objects on the PID, including line numbers, descriptions, and text boxes, by dragging and dropping.


Adjusting line intersection points

To adjust the position of connection points between two lines: 1 Position the mouse over the connection point. 2 When the arrow appears, click and hold to drag and drop the

connection up and down the line.

When you use branch or join ports to connect one piping line to another, the branch port is always on the top of the line, and the join port is on the bottom. Sometimes this isn’t what you want.

To reverse the connection: 1 Position the mouse over the connection point. 2 Click and drag to reverse the connection.

Radpfs toolbars The most often used toolbars are: • the Symbol menu • Label • Main • Draw

To add or delete toolbars: 1 On the main menu click View | Toolbars.


The Toolbars dialog box appears.

2 On the Toolbars dialog box, select or clear the check boxes

for the toolbars until you are satisfied. 3 Click OK.

You can shift toolbars around the screen (undock them), by dragging and dropping.

Zooming Use the Zoom icons on the Main toolbar to control your view of your drawing.

Use this icon to

Zoom Area highlight an area to zoom in on

Zoom In zoom in

Zoom Out zoom out

Fit fit the viewable area to the full drawing area

Pan move the drawing around in the drawing space


Custom Equipment Symbols In addition to using the system default equipment symbols, you can create custom symbols. You can: • customize the default symbols • import symbols • create your own symbols from scratch

Getting Started with Custom Equipment Symbols

To add a new symbol to the system: 1 Double-click a blank PID file to open Radpfs.

Note: You can find a blank file by expanding List of All P&ID Library Files in the center pane. 2 On the Main menu bar, click File | Add Custom Equipment

Model.

The Add Custom Model dialog box appears.

3 In the Enter model name field, type a name for the new

model. 4 If you want, in the Enter display name field, type a

description for the new model.


5 In the Select category field, tell the system where in the folder structure you want to keep this new symbol (this is where you will find it in the Symbol menu). We recommend adding new symbols to the Custom Equipment heading.

Note: On this interface you can create new subfolders by double clicking on the New category items.

Modifying a system equipment symbol

To modify a system equipment symbol: 1 Click File | Add custom equipment symbol. 2 Click File | Open. 3 In the /AspenTech/RADPFS

<version>/icons/AspenEQ/ directory, click a file. 4 Click the equipment symbol to highlight it. 5 Click Edit | Copy; then select Window | <your new

symbol file>. 6 Right-click; then click Paste. 7 Drag and drop the symbol to position the symbol in the

middle of the drawing area.

Now you add ports to the system equipment symbol.

When you are customizing a symbol, the Port menu is visible on the left-hand side of the Radpfs interface instead of the Symbol menu

To add a port: 8 Right-click a type in the Port menu; then click add port. 9 Give the port a descriptive name that indicates the intended

function of the port. 10 Select a type; then click OK. 11 You can now put this port into position by dragging and

dropping onto the equipment symbol. 12 Use right-click and rotate to adjust the orientation of the port. 13 Repeat steps 1 through 5 to add all the ports you think you’ll

need 14 Save the ports in the CustomEQ folder for use in future PIDs 15 Save the symbol file in the CustomEQ folder.

This new symbol will now be available for use in future drawings.


Importing an equipment symbol In addition to customizing an Icarus equipment symbol, you can import a symbol image from an outside drawing package, such as AutoCad or Microstation, and add ports to it.

To import a system equipment symbol: 1 Click File | Add custom equipment symbol. 2 Click File | Open. 3 Open an outside drawing instead of a symbol file from the

AspenEQ folder. 4 Left-click the equipment symbol and copy it. 5 Use the Window menu to switch back to the screen where you

are defining the customized symbol. 6 Right click and paste the symbol; drag and drop to position

the symbol in the middle of the drawing area.






need 13 Save the ports in the CustomEQ folder for use in future PIDs 14 Save the symbol file in the CustomEQ folder.

This imported symbol will now be available for use in future drawings.


Creating an equipment symbol from scratch The third option for creating new equipment symbols is to draw your own using the Microsoft drawings tools, found on the Draw toolbar.

To create a system equipment symbol from scratch: 1 Click File | Add custom equipment symbol. 2 Use the shapes in the drawing toolbar to create your symbol






need 9 Save the ports in the CustomEQ folder for use in future PIDs 10 Save the symbol file in /AspenTech/RADPFS

<version>/icons/CustomEQ/.

This new symbol will now be available for use in future drawings.

Line sizing Tutorial Instead of using the system default rules for calculating pipe length and diameter, you can write your own. You can use the Line Sizing Equation Editor to create new rules which size the pipe according to equipment properties such as: • volume • height • flow rate


To access the line sizing Equation Editor: • Without a project open, on the Libraries tab in the right pane

of the Aspen Capital Cost Estimator interface, double-click Line Sizing Equation.

The Equation Editor dialog box appears.

The main list box contains the equations which are part of the system at this time. When you are editing an individual equation, you will use the inputs at the bottom of the interface.

Line Sizing Equations

Each line sizing equation is either a rule for calculating the pipe length or diameter. Each equation: • is either a Length or Diameter rule (determines starting

letter L or a D) • has a reference number (example: 1001) • has a Descriptor line (example: D1001D) • has a Equation line (example: D1001E)

The first line in the definition of a rule is the Descriptor line. This contains the text description and the unit of measure basis.

The second line contains the equation itself.

Note: You can add as many comment lines as you want in the list box to describe an equation or section of equations.


In the example above, • the unit of measure basis is IP • the length is calculated as the Diameter of the equipment

component divided by 2 plus 10 feet

To create a new line sizing equation: 1 Without a project open, on the Libraries tab in the right pane

of the Aspen Capital Cost Estimator interface, click Line Sizing Equation.

The Equation Editor dialog box appears.

2 On the Equation Editor dialog box, click the Add button three times to add three more lines.

There are three steps to creating an Equation: Step 1: Add a comment or comments Step 2: Specify the Descriptor and Units of Measure Step 3: Specify the Equation itself

Step 1 To add a comment or comments: 1 Click the first of the newly-added lines to highlight it. 2 Click Edit. 3 In the Comment field, type any comments you want to

describe this equation/section.

4 Click Apply. Your comment appears in the main window.


Step 2: To specify the descriptor and Units of Measure: 1 Click the second of the newly-added lines to highlight it. 2 On the Card Type list, click Length or Diameter.

The other fields in the row are now available. 3 In the Ref. No. field, type a unique Reference Number. 4 On the Data Type list, click Descriptor. 5 In the Description field, type a text description for this

equation. 6 On the Units list, click the unit of measure basis for this

equation.

Note: The line sizing system has been constructed so that all quantities used in the equations are assumed to be in the selected unit of measure basis.

o An I-P equation will result in a length in feet or diameter in inches.

o A metric equation will calculate a length in meters or a diameter in mm’s.

o All variables used in the equation will also be calculated in terms of the selected unit of measure basis. For this reason your equations can be used by both Metric and I-P projects with equivalent results.

7 Click Apply.

Step 3: To specify the Equation itself: 1 Click the third of the newly-added lines to highlight it.

This line will contain the equation used to calculate the Length or Diameter of the piping line. 2 Create an equation using:

o real numbers o variables selected from the Symbols drop-down box o operator symbols from the Operators and

Operands area 3 When you are satisfied with your equation, click Apply.


4 Click Compile to add the new equation to your system. 5 If you are prompted as to whether to save your changes

before compiling, click Yes. 6 Click Close.

You can now use this new equation in any PID by selecting the equation in the Piping Line Properties screen – Length or Diameter drop-down boxes.

To open the default drawing for a component:

• Click the arrow of the P&ID button and, on the drop-down menu; then click Open Default.

This opens the drawing in the P&ID Editor, where you can print the drawing (File | Print) or send the drawing through electronic mail (File | Send).


You can use the P&ID Editor to make modifications to the drawing. Modifications affect only the active project.

You can also use the P&ID Editor to create your own P&ID’s and build a User P&ID Library. Then, when adding an equipment item in a project, you can select to use your custom P&ID instead of the default.

The following sections explain how to create custom P&ID’s and how to use them in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator.

Using Custom P&ID’s in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator There are several ways to use custom P&ID’s in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator: • Set a custom drawing as a component’s default P&ID. This

will make your custom drawing the component’s default P&ID in all future projects, until the default is reset.

• Attach a custom drawing to a single component added to a project.

• Set a custom drawing as a component’s default P&ID for only the active project.

Setting a Component’s Default P&ID You can make a custom drawing a component’s default P&ID. This must be done with no project open.


To set a component’s default P&ID: 1 In Aspen Capital Cost Estimator, with no project open, click

the Libraries tab in the Palette. 2 Double-click P&ID to open the P&ID Libraries. 3 Click the Components tab in the Palette. 4 Right-click on a component; then click Set Default P&ID on

the pop-up menu.

The Set Default P&ID dialog box appears.

This dialog box displays the name, location, and application type of the default drawings for the selected equipment item. The Location column shows Sys for system drawings and User for custom user drawings in the user folder. 5 Click the default P&ID you want to change out; then click

Default.


The Selection dialog box appears.

6 Click a P&ID file (it will display the complete path of the file

at the bottom of the dialog box); then click OK. 7 Click OK to close the Set Default P&ID dialog box.

Resetting the Default P&ID You can reset the default to the original system P&ID.

To reset a component’s default P&ID: 1 In Aspen Capital Cost Estimator, with no project open, click

the Libraries tab in the Palette. 2 Double-click P&ID to open the P&ID Libraries. 3 Click the Components tab in the Palette. 4 Right-click on the component. 5 On the menu that appears, click Set Default P&ID.


The Set Default P&ID dialog box appears.

6 Click the P&ID file you want to change out; then click Reset.

The original default file replaces the user-selected one. 7 Click OK.

Attaching a Custom P&ID to a Component You can attach a custom P&ID to a component: • when adding a component to a project • when modifying a previously added component

To attach a custom P&ID to a component: 1 On the Component Specifications form, click the P&ID

button’s drop-down arrow and click Select and Open Alternate.


2 On the Selection dialog box, click the custom drawing; then

click OK. 3 After the drawing is displayed, on the File menu click Exit

and click No in the Close dialog box for saving changes.

Setting a Component’s Default P&ID in Active Project Only To set the default P&ID for an active project: 1 Attach a P&ID file to the component (see above). 2 Click the P&ID button’s arrow; then click Set as Default on

the menu.

Default P&ID Options: Always FULL or Determined by User Options When you open the default P&ID for an equipment item the system will open the FULL model if this is an option. This behavior is independent of your input in the Piping and Instrument Design fields at the Project or Area levels. (The options for these fields are STD (standard) or FULL). If you prefer to have the system to check these inputs when selecting the default P&ID, you can change the behavior of the system by navigating to the following directory:


…/Program Files/Aspen Tech/Economic Evaluation V7.1/Program/Sys/Drawings/

The text file pnidcros.tbl determines this behavior.

To have the system to consider the STD or FULL input: 1 Delete the existing pnidcros.tbl file. 2 Copy STDorFULLpnidcros.tbl; then rename the new copy

pnidcros.tbl.

To revert to the default behavior (default is always FULL):

If you want to revert back to the default behavior (default is always “FULL”) repeat this process with the “ORIGINALpnidcros.tbl” file.

Working with Non-Graphic P&ID Data Inside a Aspen Capital Cost Estimator project, you can open a component form with piping and instrumentation data, then save that information as non-graphical P&ID in a P&ID library file.

You can also create non-graphical P&ID libraries outside a project from the Library tabs and save them in new or existing library files.

Saving Coimponent Information as Non-Graphical P&ID

To save component information as non-graphical P&ID: 1 Open a component form. 2 Add or modify piping and/or instrumentation data. 3 Save the information by clicking Apply. 4 On the toolbar, click the arrow to the right of Options. 5 On the menu that appears, click Non-graphical P&ID. 6 Click Save P&ID in a library.

A list of existing library files along with an option to create a new library file appears. 7 Either create a new library file, or click a library file on the

displayed list.


8 Specify a unique name for the P&ID and save it in the library file.

Note: P&ID information will be saved without diameter and length information for pipes.

Creating Non-Graphical P&ID Libraries Outside a Project

To create non-graphical P&ID libraries outside a project: 1 On the Library tab, click Non-graphical P&ID.

A list of existing library files appears. You can also or create a new library file folder. 2 Click the desired library file folder; then right-click. 3 On the menu that appears, click Create New. 4 On the dialog box that appears, type the P&ID name; then

click OK.

A window appears similar to component form, with options only for piping and instrumentation installation bulks. 5 Specify information for lines and loops; then save the P&ID

information in the library file.

You can also copy an existing P&ID in a library file, assign it a new name, modify it, then save in the same or different library file.

Importing External P&ID Data Generate project estimate by importing piping and instrumentation information from SPPID (Intergraph SmartPlant P&ID, an external P&ID drawing tool) in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator.

Importing of P&ID Drawings generated in Intergraph SmartPlant P&ID into Aspen Capital Cost Estimator comprises of two steps:

1. Export the P&ID Drawing to an XML file through the Use of TEF.

2. Import the XML file using the Aspen Capital Cost Estimator framework.


The import process generates piping and instrumentation installation bulk sets for all P&ID equipments in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator. No Graphical data is imported.

Open a new or existing Aspen Capital Cost Estimator project, and add equipment components to the new project.

Because the equipment data in a P&ID drawing is not sufficient to develop equipment components in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator, you must create the equipment components (present in P&ID drawings) in a Aspen Capital Cost Estimator project. Subsequently, the PID XML file is imported using the Import P&ID Drawing on the File menu.

Browse to the location where the exported XML files are stored, and select the appropriate exported XML File.


Upon selecting the XML File: • PID Data (Equipment, Lines, and Loops) are imported into a

Temporary Access Database. • A Preliminary Evaluation of the Project is performed to

generate Volumetric (or Installation) Bulk Pipe Lines. • A Mapping GUI is Launched: The GUI displays Equipment and

Lines from both the P&ID Drawing, and the Aspen Capital Cost Estimator Project.

• You are expected to map SPPID Equipment to Aspen Capital Cost Estimator Equipment, and SPPID Pipe line to Aspen Capital Cost Estimator Installation bulk pipe.

• Alternately, you can select Automap, and map equipment and lines by user tag and line tag.


Select the desired SPPID Equipment to map: • Details about the selected equipment appear in the lower text

area. • P&ID Lines connected to the Equipment are listed in the

P&ID Line list. • Aspen Capital Cost Estimator Equipment that are similar or

have the same tag are listed in the Aspen Capital Cost Estimator Equipment list.

• When you hover over any item on any list, a tooltip lists details about the item.

• Select the SPPID Equipment and an appropriate Aspen Capital Cost Estimator Equipment; then click the Map button.


Continue until all equipment are mapped to Aspen Capital Cost Estimator; then proceed to map the SPPID Lines to Aspen Capital Cost Estimator equipment or lines. • Select the desired SPPID line to map: • Details about the selected line appear in the lower text area


• When you hover over any line, a tooltip lists details about the line

• A PID Pipe Line can be mapped to Aspen Capital Cost Estimator Equipment or to an individual Aspen Capital Cost Estimator pipe line o Select a Aspen Capital Cost Estimator Equipment to map to o Select a Aspen Capital Cost Estimator line to map o Click the Map button

Note: You can choose to map one long SPPID line to two Aspen Capital Cost Estimator lines. In this case, fittings are partitioned between the two Aspen Capital Cost Estimator lines.

In the example given below, Line P-13802-4”-1S3984 is mapped to the centrifugal pump; if you wanted to map it to the centrifugal pump inlet, then the SPPID line can be mapped to DCP-2 Line 2.

Continue mapping SPPID lines to Aspen Capital Cost Estimator Equipment or Lines until all the interconnecting lines are mapped. If a single SPPID line is mapped to two Aspen Capital Cost Estimator lines, the fittings on the line are distributed to both lines of Aspen Capital Cost Estimator.

When All Equipment and Lines have been mapped, you can choose to do one of three things: • Save mapping and exit, for instance, to import more drawings

(the Aspen Capital Cost Estimator Project not yet updated with lines and loops)


• Update the Aspen Capital Cost Estimator project with line/fittings and loop/instrument data

• Cancel and quit the mapping GUI.

After all piping and equipment from one or more drawings have been imported and mapped, the project is updated. This results in piping and instrumentation installation bulk sets for all P&ID equipments in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator. No Graphical data is imported.

Interconnecting Volumetric P&ID Lines Connect pipelines between components in a Aspen Capital Cost Estimator project, estimate the project, and create piping line list report for connected lines with the same line tag.

Open a Aspen Capital Cost Estimator project Open a new or existing Aspen Capital Cost Estimator project, add equipment components to the new project.

Run Interconnect Piping Lines

To run interconnect piping lines: 1 On the main tool bar, click Run. 2 Click Interconnect Piping Lines to launch the GUI as shown

below:


The GUI displays five lists. All equipment and its associated pipelines in the project are displayed in two groups: • Connect From • Connect To

The first two lists display equipment and piping lines in the Connect From group.

The third list displays all connected lines.

The fourth and fifth lists display piping lines and equipment in the Connect To group.

3 On the list in the Connect From and Connect To groups,

click the desired equipment item.


The line lists will then display only the lines corresponding to the selected equipments. When the mouse hovers over an equipment or a line, the tooltip in the list provides additional information related to this item. The related additional information is also displayed in the bottom text area when clicking on an equipment or a line.

Connecting Piping Lines

To connect two lines: 1 Select the Auto Generate Line Tag check box, or, in the

Line Tag field, type a unique line tag. 2 In the Connect From line list, click a piping line. 3 In the Connect To line list, click the desired line. 4 Click Connect.

5 Repeat Steps 1-4 above to connect all the desired lines

between the equipment items.

Note: Use Filter to display all disconnected equipment or all disconnected lines.


Disconnecting Piping Lines

To disconnect all existing pipeline connections between all equipments: • Click Disconnect All.

All connected lines will be removed from middle list and will be displayed in the respective line list.

To disconnect a specific line between the two equipments: • In the middle list, click a line item; then click Disconnect.

Renaming a Line Tag

To rename a line tag: 1 On the Connecting list, click the desired item. 2 In Line Tag field, edit the line tag. 3 Click Rename Line Tag.


Saving All Connections and (optionally) Updating the Project

To save all the connections and update the project: • Click the Update Project.

To save all the connections without updating the project: • Click the Save Mapping & Exit.

All connections on the GUI are saved, but the project is not updated.

Getting the Connected Line List Report

To get the connected line list report: 1 Evaluate the above project. 2 Click View | Capital Cost View. The Select Report Type to View dialog box appears. 3 On the Select Report Type to View dialog box, click

Interactive Reports; then click OK

The reporter is active. 4 Click Excel reports.


5 Click Other reports | Discipline | Pipe: o Connected Line List

-or- o Model Line List

as shown below:

6 Click Run Report.

The report is shown below:

Connected Line List


Model Line List

Mapping Streams to Piping Lines Note: For Aspen Capital Cost Estimator with Aspen Process Economic Analyzer Overlay project, see the Aspen Process Economic Analyzer user guide (AspenProcessEconAnalyzerV7_0-Usr.pdf).

In an existing or new Aspen Process Economic Analyzer (or Aspen Capital Cost Estimator with Aspen Process Economic Analyzer Overlay) project, you can assign stream physical properties to lines in order to size the line diameter.

Importing 3D Piping and Structure Data Using the SmartPlant 3D–Aspen Icarus Interface

Overview The process of using the SmartPlant 3D–Aspen Icarus Interface is composed of two steps: 1 Exporting data from SmartPlant 3D using a reporting feature. 2 Importing data to create components in an Aspen Icarus

project.


Step 1: Exporting Data from SmartPlant 3D The goal of the first step is to create spreadsheet reports containing the data exported from SmartPlant 3D. SmartPlant 3D can generate three types of reports. • Pipe Rack data • Open Steel Structure data • Pipe Run data

To generate these reports: 1 On the SmartPlant 3D Tools menu, click Run Report.

The Run Report dialog box appears. 2 On the Run Report dialog box, on the Catalog Reports tab,

click the report that includes the desired data.


Pipe Racks:

Structure:


Pipe Runs:

3 In the File name field, type the output file name; then click

Run.

Step 2: Importing the data to Aspen Icarus The goal of the second step is to import the data in the spreadsheets generated in the first step into Aspen Icarus to generate components. During the import process, the spreadsheets being imported are broken into two types. • The Pipe Run and Pipe Fitting spreadsheets

• The Non-Pipe Runs spreadsheets:

o Pipe Rack spreadsheets o Steel Structure spreadsheets

Note: All the spreadsheets to be imported in one run must be in the same folder.

To import the spreadsheets generated in the first step, you follow these three steps: 1 Selecting the Non-Pipe Runs spreadsheets to import 2 Selecting the Pipe Run and Pipe Fitting spreadsheets to

import. 3 Loading the spreadsheets.


Step 1: Selecting the Pipe Runs and Fitting Spreadsheets to Import.

To select the Pipe Run and Pipe Fitting spreadsheets to import: 1 Open a project in Aspen Icarus with the desired basis of

design configured. 2 On the Aspen Capital Cost Estimator File menu, click Import

SP 3D.


The Add SP 3D Spread Sheets dialog box appears.

3 On the Non-Pipe Runs Sheets pane, click Add Sheet.

The Select Non-Pipe Run file dialog box appears.


4 On the Select Non-Pipe Run file dialog box, click a spreadsheet exported from SP 3D other than the Pipe Run and Pipe Fitting spreadsheets.

5 Repeat Step 4 above as many times as desired, typically once for Pipe Racks and once for Steel Structures.

Step 2: Selecting the Pipe Runs and Fitting Spreadsheets for Import Importing Pipe Run data requires has two steps. A Selecting the Pipe Run data B Selecting the Pipe Fitting data that goes with the Pipe Run

data selected.


Step A: Selecting the Pipe Run spreadsheet 1 On the Add SP 3D Spread Sheets dialog box, on the Pipe

Sheets with Fitting sheets pane, click Add Sheets.

The Pipe Runs file dialog box appears.

2 On the Pipe Runs file dialog box, click a Pipe Runs

spreadsheet.


Step B: Selecting the Pipe Fitting data The Select a Fitting file dialog box appears.

3 On the Select a Fitting file dialog box, click the

corresponding file. 4 Repeat the Add Sheets process as many times as necessary.


Step 3: Loading the Data 1 After selecting all the sheets to import, on the Add SP 3D

Spread Sheets dialog box, click OK.

The main Aspen Icarus interface is hidden and a progress dialog is displayed.

When the process is complete, the Aspen Icarus interface is re-displayed and the components imported have been created.

Known Issues

Slab Thickness An issue with the Export of slab thickness export exists – Integraph is working to resolve the issue.


Piping Design Pressure In Version 2004.2, an issue with the import of piping design pressure existsed. This is resolved in Icarus 2006 and subsequent versions. Because we expect the pipe schedule data to be exported, the design pressure data is not required for the evaluation.

7 Developing and Using Cost Libraries 435

7 Developing and Using Cost Libraries

Overview The Libraries view on the Palette arranges libraries in a tree-structure. Most of the libraries listed access project specifications (explained in Chapter 3). The Cost Libraries are unique, however, in that they comprise collections of particular cost items that you can add as project components. The cost libraries are customizable; you can add items to the libraries provided, as well as add your own libraries.

Aspen Capital Cost Estimator includes two types of cost libraries: • Equipment Model Library (EML) • Unit Cost Library (UCL)

Each library type may include one or more library files, which in turn may contain one or more library items, each representing a particular type of cost item.

Equipment Model Library (EML)

Note: If you are interested in accessing data as Unit Cost Libraries from Aspen Richardson's WinRace or another third party data source, see Accessing External Unit Cost Data in Chapter 6, Developing and Using Cost Libraries, in Aspen In-Plant Cost Estimator V7.1 User Guide (AspenInPlantCostEstimatorV7_0-Usr.pdf).

The EML is intended to store custom equipment items, for which you create component specification forms. In a project, you can

436 7 Developing and Using Cost Libraries

add an item from the EML as a component and fill out the form that you earlier created.

The library can store a generic equipment item that comes in discrete sizes, such as an extruder, or an equipment item that follows a continuous cost-capacity relationship such as linear, semi-log or log-log.

Unit Cost Library (UCL) The UCL is intended to store and retrieve direct costs and installation man-hours, which are based on a simple unit of measure (for example, the cost of a material item or installation man-hours per unit of area, per unit of length, per item, and so on). Costs can also be stored in a library for indirect items such as project management man-hours per month, crane rental (plant hire) on a daily, weekly, monthly basis, and so on

For one-of-a-kind cost items not worth storing in a library, the unit cost library may be used to create a dummy item for recall and modification in a project. The dummy item is stored in the library with as little data as possible. This can be retrieved and modified in as much detail as required whenever you need a one-time cost added into a project.

Developing and Using an Equipment Model Library (EML)

Creating an EML The instructions in this sub-section show you how to create an EML. The instructions in the sub-sections that follow this one, which show you how to add an item to an EML and then add the item to a project, use a single example that can be added either to an Inch-Pound EML that you created or to one of the two Inch-Pound EML’s provided.

To create an EML: 1. With no project open, go to the Palette’s Libraries tab view.

2. Expand Cost Libraries in the tree-structure; then expand Equipment Model Library.

The Cost Libraries are divided into Inch-Pound and Metric.


3 To create a library for use in projects with an Inch-Pound units of measure basis, as in the example used in these instructions, right-click on Inch-Pound, then on the menu that appears, click New.

The New Equipment Model Library dialog box appears.

4 Type a file name (required) for the EML and a brief

description (optional); then click OK.


An empty Library dialog box appears.

You can now add items to the new library.

Adding an Item to an EML The instructions below for defining and using an EML item follow a single example from item creation through the addition of the item to a project. Using the example provided will define the item in such a way that it automatically generates a foundation and/or electrical power supply bulks.

To add an item to an EML: 1 If you just added a library, the Library dialog box is

displayed, and you can skip to Step 2. If not, follow these steps:

2 Go to the Palette’s Libraries tab view. 3 Expand Cost Libraries, Equipment Libraries, and either

Inch-Pound or Metric. (If following the example provided, select Inch-Pound.)

4 Right-click on the library to which you want to add an item, and then click Modify on the pop-up menu.

5 Click Add on the Library dialog box. 6 Enter a Reference ID for the item in the Add Item dialog

box.

The one- to six-character alphanumeric Reference ID uniquely identifies the library item being added. The ID is used to sort


and search for library items. The first character must be a letter.

7 Click OK. 8 Enter the descriptive data for the item in the Develop

Equipment Model Library form. If following the example, enter the data exactly as shown below. Be sure to correctly enter the sizing parameters, CAPFLOW and PWRDRVR; Aspen Capital Cost Estimator knows to use GPM (or L/S for METRIC) and HP, respectively, for these parameters.


Note: Sizing method: the data is in the form of either a continuous curve (linear, log-log or semi-log) or a set of discrete tabular values. When an equipment model library item is retrieved into a project, the specified size for the project component is used to develop the appropriate cost, man-hours and weight from the library data.

9 Click OK to save your specifications.

The new item appears on the Library dialog box, which you can now close.

Adding an EML Item as a Project Component To add an EML item as a project component: 1 Open the project to which you want to add the EML item. For

the purposes of this example, you can use either an existing or newly created US/I-P based project.

2 In Project Explorer (Project view), right-click on the area in which to add the EML item, and then click Add Project Component on the pop-up menu.

3 On the Icarus Project Component Selection dialog box, specify a project component name for the item.

4 Click Equipment Model Library; then click OK. 5 On the Select an Equipment Model Library File dialog

box, click the EML to which you added the item.


6 Click OK.

7 At the Select an Equipment Model Library Item dialog

box, select the item you added and click OK.

8 Enter your specifications for the item at the Component

Specifications form, as shown below. Note that the Size parameters CAPFLOW and PWRDRVR are included on the form.


9 Click OK to apply and save the specifications.

The item will now be included in project evaluations.

Developing and Using a Unit Cost Library (UCL) The instructions below use as an example a library of asbestos abatement (ASBABT) costs and man-hours. This example has been selected because environmental remediation data is difficult to model, since costs and man-hours tend to vary greatly based on site conditions and project types. Items of a unique and/or variable nature are ideal for storing in a UCL.

The instructions take this example through the following stages: 1 creating a unit cost library 2 adding items to the library 3 adding a library item to a project as a component 4 forming an assembly in the project out of multiple UCL items

Creating a Unit Cost Library To create a unit cost library: 1 With no project open, go to the Palette’s Libraries tab view.

Expand Cost Libraries in the tree-structure, and then expand Unit Cost Library.


The libraries are divided into Inch-Pound and Metric. 2 To create a library for use in projects with an Inch-Pound

units of measure basis, as in the ASBABT example used in these instructions, right-click on Inch-Pound and click New on the pop-up menu.

3 In the New Unit Cost Library dialog box, type a file name

(required) for the UCL and a brief description (optional).

4 Click OK to create the new UCL.


An empty Library dialog box appears.

You can now add items to the new UCL.

Adding an Item to a UCL To add items to a UCL: 1 If you just added a library, the Library dialog box is

displayed, and you can skip to Step 2. If not, follow these steps:

A Go to the Palette’s Libraries tab view.

B Expand Cost Libraries, Unit Cost Libraries, and either Inch-Pound or Metric.

C Right-click on the library to which you want to add an item, and then click Modify on the pop-up menu.

2 Click Add on the Library dialog box. 3 Enter a Reference ID for the item in the Add Item dialog

box.

The one- to six-character alphanumeric Reference ID uniquely identifies the library item being added. The ID is used to sort and search for library items. The first character must be a letter.


4 Click OK. 5 In the Develop Unit Cost Library form, enter information for

the new item.

Note: Costs for the item will be allocated to the specified Code of Account (COA). See Icarus Reference Chapter 34 for COA definitions.

Aspen Capital Cost Estimator uses the Material Cost Per Unit and Labor Cost Per Unit to cost the item in an estimate. If Labor Hours Per Unit is specified and Labor Cost Per Unit is left blank, Aspen Capital Cost Estimator will calculate the labor cost using the project wage rates at the time of the estimate.

The Unit of Measure can be designated for “each” or by any appropriate unit (for example, “1000 SF”). Be sure to sufficiently describe the item so that you know what the unit costs include when the item is retrieved at some future date. The quantity is entered when the library item is retrieved into a project.

The Date and Source are for your reference and are not transferred into an estimate. 6 When done entering specifications for the item, click OK.


7 To add a set of items as in the ASBABT example, repeat the process (Steps 2-4) to add the following items in addition to the one shown in the previous graphic.

Reference No.

Item Description

Code of Account

Mat’l Cost Per Unit

Labor Cost Per Unit

Unit of Measure

Date of quotation

AAB200 Polyethylene Sheeting

800 .021 .004 SF 04APR01

AAB201 Duct Tape (300’ roll)

800 3.50 ROLL 04APR01

AAB202 Adhesive Spray (60’ / can)

800 6.00 CAN 04APR01

AAB300 Decontamination Shower

800 300.00 2 EACH 04APR01

AAB301 Neg Air Pressure System

800 300.00 2 EACH 04APR01

AAB400 Lighting Fixture Removal

800 .01 EACH 04APR01

After the above are added, the Library dialog box will appear as shown below.

8 When done adding items to the UCL, click close on the

Library dialog box.


Adding a UCL Item to a Project To add a single UCL item to a project: 1 Open the project to which you want to add the UCL item. To

add an item from the ASBABT library developed as an example in the previous instructions, you can open either an existing or newly created US/I-P based project.

2 In Project Explorer (Project view), right-click on the area in which to add the UCL item, and then click Add Project Component on the pop-up menu.

3 On the Icarus Project Component Selection dialog box, specify a project component name for the item.

4 Select Unit Cost Library and click OK. 5 At the Select a Unit Cost Library File dialog box, select the

UCL to which you added the item and click OK.


6 At the Select a Unit Cost Library Item dialog box, select the item you added and click OK.

7 On the Component Specifications form, click the Option

drop-down button and select Unit Cost Items.

Aspen Capital Cost Estimator retrieves the unit cost data you set up in Libraries.


8 You can now enter the quantity data and modify any of the

retrieved data. 9 Click OK to save the specifications and close the form.

Creating an Assembly of UCL Items This section shows how to add several items from the library to form an assembly. In the example, the items from the ASBABT library are added to form an Asbestos Abatement Area Preparation Assembly.

To create an assembly of UCL items in a project: 1 In Project Explorer (Project view), right-click on the area in

which to add the UCL item, and then click Add Project Component on the pop-up menu.

2 On the Icarus Project Component Selection dialog box, enter as the project component name a description of the assembly.


3 Click Unit cost library; then click OK. 4 On the Select a Unit Cost Library File dialog box, click the

UCL containing the first item to add to the assembly; then click OK.

5 On the Select a Unit Cost Library Item dialog box, click the

first item to add to the assembly; then click OK.


6 On the Component Specifications form, click the Options

drop-down button; then click Unit Cost Items.

7 Click Add.

8 On the Select a Unit Cost Library File dialog box, click the

UCL containing the next item to add to the assembly; then click OK.

9 On the Select a Unit Cost Library Item dialog box, click the

next item to add to the assembly; then click OK.


10 Repeat the process of adding items until the form contains

columns for all the items in the assembly.

11 After entering quantities for the items, click OK.

The assembly is listed as one project component on the Project Explorer (Project view) and the List view.

You can now run an evaluation on the item (see page XX576H562XX for instructions). An Item Report would summarize total costs and man-hours, as well as list each assembly item’s costs and man-hours.


Working with Cost Libraries Equipment model and unit cost libraries share the functions described in this section.

Copying a Library Item When adding a library item similar to one that already exists, it is easier to copy the existing library item and modify the necessary specifications.

To copy a library item: 1 Highlight a library item in the Library dialog box; then click

Copy. 2 Enter a Reference ID for the new item.

The one- to six-character alphanumeric Reference ID uniquely identifies the library item being added. The ID is used to sort and search for library items. The first character must be a letter.

3 Click OK.

Aspen Capital Cost Estimator adds the new item with all the same data as the original — only the Reference ID has changed.

Deleting a Library Item When a library item is no longer useful, it can be removed from the library file.

To delete a library item: 1 Highlight a library item in the Library dialog box and click

Delete.

A dialog box appears to confirm the delete. 2 Click Yes to delete the selected library item.

-or- Click No to retain the library item in the library file.

Escalating Library Costs Library items contain costs that change over time due to inflation. Escalating library costs bring the library costs up to date.


To escalate library costs: 1 Click Escalate on the Library dialog box. The Escalate Costs dialog box appears.

2 Enter the escalation specifications.

In this field type

New Base Date The date of escalation or the date at which the prices are current.

Material Escalation The amount by which to escalate material costs.

Labor Escalation The amount by which to escalate labor costs. Because EMLs only include setting man-hours, not labor costs, this field appears only when escalating unit cost libraries.

3 Click OK to escalate all library items in the library file.

Importing a Cost Library You can import UCL files, which have the extension “.LIB”, and EML files, which have the extension “.EML”, from elsewhere on your computer or network.

To import a cost library: 1 In the Palette (Libraries view), right-click the appropriate

Units of Measure basis (Inch-Pound or Metric).


2 Click Import.

The Select a File for Import dialog box appears.

3 In the Select a File for Import dialog box, click the file;

then click Open.

The file is now included in the Palette, and its items can be added as Aspen Capital Cost Estimator project components.

Duplicating a Cost Library To duplicate a cost library: 1 In the Palette (Libraries view), right-click the library you

wish to duplicate; then click Duplicate on the pop-up menu. 2 Enter a file name and description (optional) for the new

library.


Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays the Library dialog box for the new Library, which contains the same items as the original. You can add, modify, or delete the items without affecting the original.

Deleting a Cost Library To delete a cost library: 1 In the Palette (Libraries view), right-click the library to be

deleted. 2 On the menu that appears, click Delete.

8 Changing Plant Capacity and Location 457

8 Changing Plant Capacity and Location

Note: In order to have access to the features covered in this chapter, you must be licensed to use Aspen Decision Analyzer. You must also select at startup to use Analyzer in the Aspen Capital Cost Estimator environment.

Aspen’s Decision Analyzer technology lets you evaluate alternate plant capacities and locations.

When you change plant capacity, Analyzer re-sizes each project component to a desired plant capacity. Unique expert system rules, based on engineering principles, provide the basis for revising the size of every project component in the process facility that is implicated in stream flows, as well as the size of other plant facility components in the plant layout, including process and utility components inside battery limits (ISBL) and outside battery limits (OSBL), associated installation bulks, piping, cable runs, buildings, structures, pipe racks, and site improvements.

Changing Plant Capacity Changing the production capacity affects not only every stream flow, but the size, and in some cases, the number of project components. Decision Analyzer’s Analyzer Scale-up Module (ASM) automatically examines each element of a project, applies a set of scale-up rules unique to that element and recreates the entire plant description according to the new production capacity.

458 8 Changing Plant Capacity and Location

ASM contains hundreds of rules for each of the hundreds of Aspen Icarus project components. Rules are based on engineering principles for elements that are directly linked to production capacity. For other elements that are footprint oriented such as building and structures, rules based on heuristics are applied.

When the scaled project is evaluated, design quantities that are developed for the newly sized components are designed to meet the needs of a project. Further, revisions to P&IDs and similar user adjustments contained in the baseline project are also treated in the same way. The idea is to design a scaled project as it is intended to be built. This methodology eliminates the need for applying a factor to the baseline plant cost to scale it up or down. Given a new capacity, ASM recreates the entire plant.

The ASM process is automatic and rapid. ASM revises sizes of components to meet a revised capacity and the project evaluation engines do the difficult, time-consuming evaluation work. Users find ASM performs its re-sizing operation results to be similar to engineering design methods with the added benefit of much reduced time and resources. Further, equal confidence can be applied to evaluation results before and after using ASM as rules are discipline-based and the before and after evaluation processes are identical.

To change plant capacity: 1 Open your baseline project and save it under a new scenario

name that reflects the new capacity. This will ensure that your baseline project remains intact, separate and apart from your about-to-be scaled project.

2 On the Run menu, click Decision Analyzer or click the “A” button on the toolbar.


The Decision Analyzer dialog box appears.

3 Select the Change Plant Capacity by (5-600%) check box. 4 Type the desired percentage adjustment or select it using the

Up/Down arrow buttons. For example, if you need to revise the capacity by a value beyond 600% to 700%, scale your project twice. For this, the Evaluate Project check box should be cleared. Then you can split the desired 700% into two parts: first use 350%, and on completion, scale it again at 350%.

5 Click OK to initiate the Analyzer Scale-up Module. 6 Upon completion, save the scaled project.

Analyzer Scale-Up Module (ASM)

How ASM Works Scale-up of a project to a new production capacity is a two-step process.


1 The Aspen Scale-up Module is invoked. The ASM processor 1 analyzes each specification in your project 2 applies the appropriate scale-up rule 3 revises the specification to a new value 4 moves on to the next specification

You can follow the progress of this phase by noting the item names in the display at the bottom of your screen. 2 The project is evaluated. This phase performs the designs,

develops quantities, hours, costs, and so on, and prepares the basic set of reports for your project at the new capacity. On completion of this step, you can proceed to prepare special reports and perform other analyses on your newly scaled project.

Save the project after the scale-up operation.

Scale-Up Rule Set Analyzer contains rules for hundreds of components and cost elements that are based on (a) engineering design principles for scale-up of all process equipment, stream flows, etc and (b) heuristics for plant items that are based on footprint and plot plan. The current rule set in some instances modifies the number of items rather than change sizes, as in the simple example of trees along a fence line, where the number of trees would be revised rather than the size of each tree. In the current rule set, there is no automatic provision for increasing the number of project components.

Limiting Conditions

It is possible that on extreme capacity scale-ups, sizes of certain equipment or bulk items may surpass a system limiting value. In this case, an error condition would be issued. The user would then examine the scaled model for the particular item(s) and revise the size and number of out-of-range items accordingly, as an item in an error condition would be excluded from the estimate.

Scale-up Candidates

ASM rules apply to the following types of project information: • Area specs: distances, dimensions, cost per unit weight


• Project Component specs: specific rules based on item type and specification, typically size dimension, capacity, power and occasionally number of items

Note: Several sanitary process equipment items associated with batch food processing will not be scaled.

• Installation specs: quoted costs, hours and numeric specs for piping, duct, civil, steel, electrical, insulation, paint. Text-based sizes such as pipe schedule, wire size, etc. are symbolic and are not scaled.

• Project Component Quoted Cost: While ASM has rules for quoted cost, the ASM rule may not be the best for your type of item. Here, it’s better to apply a % Adjustment to the system’s estimated cost in an amount that will bring the estimated cost up to your quoted value. Then, on scaling, the new reported cost will be calculated by applying your % Adjustment to the estimated cost. Based on the scaled sizes.

• Quoted hours: based on item type • Quoted weight: based on item type • Stream flow rate: scaled to the new capacity

Scale-Up for Configuration Analysis Often, sections of a proposed facility may be required to consist of parallel trains, joining up to meet downstream units. Situations such as these are best handled by creating models of these sections at a standard capacity and then scaling desired sections to say 50% capacity. You would then import the various sections into an overall model, with multiple trains being imported as many times as required. The resulting model would then be evaluated for capital investment and process economics.

Analyzer Relocation Module (ARM) The Analyzer Relocation Module enables you to evaluate the impact of worldwide location on capital cost and a variety of other econometrics. Specifically, you can “relocate” a project from one basis to any one of 89 worldwide locations. You can choose to retain the location of your engineering workforce or choose any one of 89 worldwide locations.


When you need to evaluate a project that you might engineer and/or construct in a different city or country location, ARM will quickly and automatically revise your project parameters with those contained in its location knowledge base. The ARM knowledge base includes key location-dependent data and rules to properly convert your project from its starting basis to your selected location(s) using location dependent values for design parameters, engineering and construction work forces, cost of materials, and engineering, material and construction indirects. You can use ARM in combination with the Analyzer Scale-up Module (ASM) and Analyzer Economics Module (AEM) all in the same run or separately from the other modules.

Relocation Terminology • Baseline project: initial case, before executing ARM. • Relocated project: after ARM processing of the baseline

project. • Relocation: a process of evaluating an initially formulated

project (baseline project) to a new location (relocated project).

• Locations: a general location, characterized by a city and country name, which is used to represent a particular EPC function. The function may or may not be physically sited in that city.

• Engineering location: city and country name used to characterize the engineering workforce assigned to the project.

• Plant location: city and country name used to characterize the plant site.

Workflow The figure below shows the general work process. ARM specs, contained in the ARM rule set are applied to the user’s model. A description of the elements in the table is provided in the section following the Workflow.


How the Analyzer Plant Relocation Module (ARM) Works

Relocation Reports

For New Engineering and Plant Location

Baseline Reports

For Base Engineering and Plant Location

Relocated Project

Baseline

Project

ARM Specs

Project Specs

Project Contingency

Construction Hours

Construction Rates

Construction Cost

Construction Indirects

Construction Fee

Construction Contingency

Engineering Hours

Engineering Rates

Engineering Cost

Engineering Indirects

Engineering Contingency

Material

Cost

Materials Contingency

Materials Indirects

Material Quantities

Analyzer

Project Relocation

Module


1 Because ARM processing is automatic, it is wise to first save

your base project under a new scenario name in advance of running ARM. Use a scenario name that refers to the planned new capacity. This will ensure that your baseline project remains intact for further evaluations.

2 On the Run menu, click Decision Analyzer or click the A button on the button bar:

This will display the Decision Analyzer dialog box.

Note: ARM shares space with ASM and AEM and Evaluate Project on the four-part Decision Analyzer dialog box. 3 Select the Change Plant Location to check box. 4 Select the Plant Location from its pull-down list. 5 Select the Engineering Location from its pull-down list. 6 Use the remaining check boxes to select options to

o Enable escalation for Aspen Capital Cost Estimator projects.


o Retain your defined construction start date and duration. If unchecked, a new date will be developed on relocation.

Note that the last line on the Decision Analyzer dialog box displays three pieces of information: • plant location • currency name • currency symbol, in parentheses

This information is a reminder to users of the Analyzer Economics Module (AEM) who are interested in reporting costs in currency different from the plant location currency. For this, two entry slots are provided for an exchange rate and symbol. If AEM is not invoked, values so entered will not affect the reporting aspects of relocation aspects. In Figure 2, the user elected to run AEM. This would take place immediately after ARM completed the relocation process, described as follows.

Example: The illustration below is for a plant to be engineered in Rotterdam and constructed in Singapore. The currency of the plant location is displayed in the last wire-frame.


Relocating the Project 7 Once having completed the choices, click OK to run the

project. If you choose CANCEL, all choices will be ignored and control will return to the explorer view.

With your OK, Decision Analyzer’s relocation module automatically converts your base location project to the selected engineering and plant location. Your project then contains the results of the relocation, which you can review and modify.

To do this: 1 Click the Project Basis view and click the desired basis

category. 2 Open the associated form, review the data and modify the

data, as you desire. 3 When you are satisfied with the results, save the project,

ensuring that it is saved under a scenario name that describes the relocation and, most important, that your baseline project is not disturbed by the save.

4 Evaluate the project and review the results. 5 When you are satisfied, a final save will save the results.

ARM Knowledge Base The ARM knowledge base consists of approximately ten thousand location-specific data values plus rules that govern the way the location data will be applied to your baseline project. The ARM knowledge base is derived from a variety of qualified sources including: • Aspen Richardson international construction data: raw data

from this source (also used to prepare the Aspen Richardson International Cost Factor Manual) were analyzed and mapped into Icarus technology formats for use in ARM

• Proprietary sources • Practicing professionals, EPC and owner customers and

associates • Surveys • Technical publications that specialize in international

construction costs • Government sources: seismic, climate data and other location

data • Financial sources: exchange rates, etc.


• Aspen Icarus models: to blend and fill in sparse data areas

Five Bodies of Data

The ARM knowledge base consists of five bodies of data: • Location specs • Project specs • Engineering specs • Construction specs • Material Cost specs

Highlights of each component follow.

Location Specs ARM is formulated for 89 locations in 33 currencies. Locations listed below include the four Icarus country base locations. The locations are similar to those in the Aspen Richardson International Cost Factor Manual list.

Locations are organized and sorted by continental region, country and city. For Canadian and US locations, names include state, province or territory. Conventional short forms of country and city names are used for simplicity. • Regions - The number of locations for each region is listed in

Table 1. • City Locations outside the US are listed in Table 2 • US locations are listed in Table 3.

TABLE 1. List of Locations in Each Region

Region Number of locations

Africa 3

Asia 15

Australia 3

Canada 6

Central America 2

Europe 12

Middle East 6

South America 5

United States 37

All Locations 89

Non-US Locations 52


TABLE 2. List of Non-US Locations

Region City, Country Near

Africa El Hassania, Morocco Casablanca

Ibadan, Nigeria

Johannesburg, South Africa

Asia Beijing, China

Guangzhou, China

Shanghai, China

Bhopal, India New Delhi

Mumbai (Bombay), India

Jakarta, Indonesia

Kobe, Japan

Tokyo, Japan

Kuantan, Malaysia Kuala Lumpur

Manila, Philippines

Singapore, Singapore

Seoul, South Korea

Taipei, Taiwan

Samutprakam, Thailand Bangkok

Binh Duong, Vietnam Hanoi

Australia Melbourne, Australia

Perth, Australia

Sydney, Australia

Central America Guatemala City, Guatemala

Mexico City, Mexico

Canada Calgary, Canada

Montreal, Canada

Toronto, Canada

Vancouver, Canada

Windsor, Canada

Winnipeg, Canada

Europe Brussels, Belgium

Paris, France

Frankfurt, Germany

Dublin, Ireland

Milan, Italy

Amsterdam, Netherlands

Rotterdam, Netherlands

Warsaw, Poland

Moscow, Russia

Barcelona, Spain

London, United Kingdom

Manchester, United Kingdom


Middle East Cairo, Egypt

Kuwait City, Kuwait

Dammam, Saudi Arabia Al Jubail

Jeddah, Saudi Arabia

Gebze, Turkey Istanbul

Abu Dhabi, UAE

South America Buenos Aires, Argentina

Rio de Janeiro, Brazil

Medellin, Colombia

Lima, Peru

Caracas, Venezuela


TABLE 3. List of US City Locations Anchorage, AK

Atlanta, GA

Baltimore, MD

Boston, MA

Cape Girardeau, MO

Cayey, PR

Charlotte, NC

Chicago, IL

Cincinnati, OH

Dallas, TX

Denver, CO

Fairbanks, AK

Green Bay, WI

Houston, TX

Huntsville, AL

Indianapolis, IN

Kansas City, MO

Knoxville, TN

Las Vegas, NV

Los Angeles, CA

Louisville, KY

New Orleans, LA

New York, NY

Newark, NJ

Oakland, CA

Philadelphia, PA

Phoenix, AZ

Portland, ME

Portland, OR

Sacramento, CA

San Francisco, CA

Seattle, WA

Sherman, TX

Spartanburg, SC

St Louis, MO

Syracuse, NY

Wilkes-Barre, PA


Project Data The ARM knowledge base contains a comprehensive set of values for project level data. These should be considered as a starting point in the evaluation of a project. Concerned users should replace the ARM knowledge base values in their relocated project with more representative values obtained from company surveys of the intended site. • Currency: Exchange rate (FEX), as of the first day of the basis

year, with exchange rate and currency units scaled to meet Icarus currency formats. Scaled currency units are provided at three levels: 3-character symbol, 8-character name and 24-character description. Values are listed in Table 4. o Currency: 33 currencies are defined; some ARM locations

share the same currency o Exchange rate, for each location. The ARM knowledge

base works with exchange rates relative to the currency of each of the four country bases (US, UK, JP, EU). The currency table contains the rates as of the listed date.

o Exchange rates are scaled in size to conform with Icarus exchange rate formats (0.01 to 99.9 in value)

o Scaled currency symbols, names and descriptions are defined to conform to Icarus format; these contain symbols such as K to represent thousands and M to represent millions of scaled currency units, as indicated in Table 4.

TABLE 4. List of Currencies

Country Currency Description

Currency Name

Currency Symbol

Exchange Rate, per USD (1 Jan 2006)

Argentina Argentine Peso Peso-A P 3.0459

Australia Australian Dollar Dollar-A A$ 1.3644

Brazil Brazilian Real Real R 2.3517

Canada Canadian Dollar Dollar-C C$ 1.1641

China Chinese Yuan Renminbi Renminbi R 8.0755

Colombia K Colombian Peso K Peso K-P 2.28393

Egypt Egyptian Pound Pound-E PDE 5.786

European Union Euro Euro EUR 0.8446


Guatemala Guatemalan Quetzal Quetzal Q 7.615

India Indian Rupee Rupee R 45.195

Indonesia K Indonesian Rupiah K Rupiah K-R 9.85222

Japan K Japanese Yen K Yen K-Y 0.117681

Kuwait Kuwaiti Dinar Dinar DK 0.2921

Malaysia Malaysian Ringgit Ringgit R 3.7837

Mexico Mexican Peso Peso-MX P 10.66485

Morocco Moroccan Dirham Dirham-M D 9.3661

Nigeria K Nigerian Naira K Naira K-N 0.1305

Peru Peruvian Nuevo Sol NuevoSol NS 3.422

Philippines Philippine Peso Peso-P P 53.14

Poland Polish Zloty Zloty Z 3.255

Russia Russian Rouble Rouble RBL 28.75

Saudi Arabia Saudi Riyal Riyal R 3.7503

Singapore Singapore Dollar Dollar-S S$ 1.6642

South Africa South African Rand Rand ZAR 6.3359

South Korea K South-Korean Won K Won K-W 1.0287

Taiwan Taiwan Dollar Dollar-T T$ 33.147

Thailand Thai Baht Baht B 41.0767

Turkey Turkish New Lira New Lira NL 1.34979

United Arab Emirate

Utd. Arab Emir. Dirham Dirham-U D 3.6732

United Kingdom British Pound Pound-UK PDS 0.5802

United States US Dollar DollarUS USD 1

Venezuela K Venezuelan Bolivar K Boliv K-B 2.15

Vietnam K Vietnamese Dong K Dong K-D 15.904

Current European Union Locations: • Belgium • France • Germany • Ireland • Italy • Netherlands • Spain


Note: Certain combinations of location currencies and country base currencies may result in exchange rates that exceed the format bounds for exchange rate. In such cases, ARM will automatically scale the exchange rate ratio and revise the currency units, usually with a prefix of "K" to indicate thousands of the above-listed currency unit. Example: The exchange rate for Plant location: India, at 45.145 per USD and Country Base: Japan at 0.1177 is 385.85 R/K Yen, which is beyond the exchange rate bound; the resulting ratio will be scaled by 1000 to 0.38585 KRupee/K Yen and costs will be reported in KRupee (KR) • Equipment: design code (ASME, BS5500, DIN, JIS depending

upon the plant location) • Civil and Steel: seismic acceleration, soil, footing depth,

low/high ambient temperatures, wind velocity, hand excavation

• Electrical: power supply frequency • Equipment Rental: a Construction Technology Level

(CTL) parameter (L, M, and H) is assigned to each location. Locations assigned as H-level draw from the entire system slate of equipment rental items. S-level locations select from a smaller slate than M-level locations.

• Use of gin poles vs. heavy cranes: each location is assigned a value for the heavy lift option

Engineering Work Force The ARM knowledge base contains a comprehensive set of engineering workforce values, which should be considered as a starting point in the evaluation of a project. Concerned users should replace the ARM knowledge base values in their relocated project with more representative values obtained from company surveys of the intended site. The following are provided by ARM for each engineering work force location:

• Hourly rates for each of 77 disciplines in the engineering workforce slate. Hourly rates are provided in the currency of the engineering location. During the processing of a project, these rates are converted, for consistent cost reporting, to the currency of the plant location using the exchange rate ratio:


Discipline Rate in Plant Location Currency = Discipline Rate in the Engineering Location Currency x Plant Location Exchange Rate / Engineering Location Exchange Rate

• Engineering workforce productivity – one value is provided for each engineering location, relative to the engineering productivity at the country base location

• Engineering Indirect Costs – values are provided for each location for each of the eight phases of engineering: o Expense rates o Payroll burdens o Office indirects

The eight phases of engineering are: o Basic Engineering o Detail Engineering o Procurement o Engineering Management o Home Office Construction Services o Field Office Supervision o Construction Management o Start-up, Commissioning

• Engineering confidence level, associated with the sources of the ARM knowledge base data, used to compute a value of engineering contingency. Engineering contingency is computed as the root-mean square value of the user engineering contingency and engineering confidence level. For example, if the user contingency before relocation UC =18% and the ARM location confidence value LC = 10%, then the computed contingency after relocation is

= √ (UC2 + LC2) = √ (182+102 ) = 20.6%

Construction The ARM knowledge base contains a comprehensive set of construction workforce values, which should be considered as a starting point in the evaluation of a project. Concerned users should replace the ARM knowledge base values in their relocated project with more representative values obtained from company surveys of the intended site.

The following are provided by ARM for each construction work force location:


• Field Craft rates – hourly rates (“nearly all-in”) for each of 28 field crafts in the construction work force slate and a foreman differential for each location. By “nearly all-in”, we mean that each craft rate is a unique composite of the following rate contributions:

o Craft Worker Base Hourly Wage Rate o Health, Welfare, Pension o Fringe Benefits o Hourly Indirect Rate for:

Temporary Construction Consumables and Small Tools FICA Unemployment Workers Compensation

Insurance Multi-level construction

Craft rates in the ARM knowledge base do not include indirect construction costs for the following categories as these would be determined during project evaluation: o Construction Equipment Rental, including Fuel, Oil,

Lubrication, Maintenance (FOLM) o Field Supervision o Contractor Home Office Costs

• Construction workforce productivity – one value is provided for each plant location, relative to the construction productivity at the country base location

• Field indirect costs, including construction equipment rental (see Project Data, below), field supervision, home office costs

• Work week: hours, number of shifts, overtime • Construction equipment rental: slate of items (see Project

Data, below) • Extent of hand excavation vs. machine excavation • Construction confidence level, associated with the sources of

the ARM knowledge base data, used to compute a value of construction contingency. Contingency is computed as the root-mean square value of the user construction contingency and construction confidence level. For example, if the user contingency before relocation UC =18% and the ARM location confidence value LC = 10%, then the computed contingency after relocation is:

= √ (UC2 + LC2) = √ (182+102 ) = 20.6%


Material Costs • Location Indexing

The ARM knowledge base contains a set of location indexes which will adjust country base material costs to the plant location. Two sets are provided. The first deals with equipment costs. The second applies to bulk materials. Use of the supplied location indexes should be considered as a starting point in the evaluation of a project. Concerned users should replace the ARM knowledge base values in their relocated project with more representative values obtained from company surveys of the intended site.

The location indexes make use of Aspen Richardson values for the average split of local vs. imported materials. Costs of local and imported materials are figured by applying location values for freight, taxes, VAT, and other expenses. Location indexes are stored for each of the four country bases and are used to characterize material costs by account code (100 to 299 for equipment, 300 to 999 for bulk materials.)

• Unit cost of rebar, ready-mix concrete, in the currency of the plant location

• Material cost confidence level, associated with the sources of the ARM knowledge base data, used to compute a value of material cost contingency. Contingency is computed as the root-mean square value of the user material contingency and material cost confidence level. For example, if the user contingency before relocation UC =18% and the ARM location confidence value LC = 10%, then the computed contingency after relocation is:

= √ (UC2 + LC2) = √ (182+102 ) = 20.6%

9 Aspen Utility Modules 477

9 Aspen Utility Modules

Introduction Important: In Aspen Capital Cost Estimator, only the AUM_Air Utility Module is available. However, if you load Aspen Process Evaluator (Aspen Process Economic Analyzer) when you load Aspen Capital Cost Estimator, the AUM_CW Cooling Water Utility Module is also available.

Both Utility Modules are available in Aspen Process Economic Analyzer. For convenience, the documentation for both is presented in this chapter.

478 9 Aspen Utility Modules

Analyzer Utility Modules (AUM) – Design and Scope Generators for Utility Systems One of the difficulties with process economic analyses, both capital cost and payback determination, is the lack of scope definition for non-process or outside boundary limit (OSBL) portions of the project. With AUM modules creating utility systems in harmony with the process sections of a project, more accurate, realistic and confident business assessments can be made for cost and economics.

Each AUM module works in the same way. It extracts information on the specific utility needs of each project component and area in your project. You can then interactively revise default values for design preferences and configuration, evaluate messages, review reports of design results. On completion, a press of a Load button will automatically transfer to your project, a list of selected, sized, designed project components assembled within a unique date- and time-stamped utility area. Should a prior utility area of the same type be present in your project, you can chose to delete the old one and replace it with new scope.

All of this takes place in times measured in minutes rather than traditional days and weeks. Of course, evaluation time depends on the size of the project. For front end engineering design work, AUM modules can be revisited in each cycle of scope change to ensure the project needs are properly satisfied by each utility system.

A Control Panel, a task bar button and numerous hypertext links provide for easy navigation and rapid access to a status report, specs for preferences and configurations, reports, an a guide. Messages are provided to assure data integrity; an error condition will disallow loading of results into your project.

AUM_CW: Cooling Water Utility Selection, Sizing, and Design Module The cooling water utility module requires Aspen Process Economic Analyzer or Aspen Process Economic Analyzer plus Aspen Capital Cost Estimator to identify cooling water resource streams and their flow conditions. Up to four cooling water systems can be configured for a project, each with its own set of


sized components: cooling towers, circulation pumps, chemical injection pumps, supply and return distribution piping, valves, and fittings.

You can interactively define design conditions such as ambient air temperatures, size limits to distribution piping, equipment types, and assign individual areas to each cooling water system. Redundancy capabilities include stand-alone pumps, two 50% capacity pumps, stand-by spares. Distribution piping includes expansion loops for long runs and circuits include main lines, branch lines, area headers, and risers and laterals for 3D-type areas. Each line type has its own “iso” for valve and fitting type. Line sizes and pump heads are pressure drop based.

AUM_Air: Instrument and Plant Air Utility Selection, Sizing, and Design Module The air utility module can be accessed by either Aspen Process Economic Analyzer or Aspen Capital Cost Estimator. AUM_ Air gathers air requirements from your project in two ways: • Instrument air: From a count of air operated control valves

and controllers and instrument air flow required for each based on control valve size

• Plant air: From an air usage model based on a common air tool usage set, with area utility stations derived from area size and equipment count within an area

Up to four air plant units (APU) can be configured for a project, each with its own set of sized components: • air intake filters/screens • ductwork • compressors • interstage coolers • air receivers • pre-filters • air dryers • after-filters • piping distribution network

You can interactively define design premises such as ambient air conditions, equipment types, equipment redundancy, etc. and assign individual areas to be served by each air plant unit. Redundancy capabilities include stand-alone compressors, start-


up compressors, receivers, dryers. Redundancy choices include one at 100% capacity, two at 50% capacity, stand-by spares. Distribution piping includes two sets, each sized for the required flow of instrument air and plant air. Piping isos for line segments include expansion loops for long runs, valves and fittings, Line segments are defined for main feeders, main manifolds, main lines branch lines, area feeders, area headers and for 3D–type areas, risers and laterals. Each line type has its own “iso” for valve and fitting type. Line sizes are pressure drop based.

Analyzer Utility Module (AUM) Cooling Water (AUM_Water)

Introduction to Analyzer Utility Module (AUM) Cooling Water

Cooling Water Selection, Sizing, Design Model This section is divided into four parts:

1 Overview • Analyzer Utility Module (AUM) • Cooling Water Design Model

o Value in Time and Effort o The Key Steps

2 Working with the Cooling Water Model • Preparation Workflow • The Workflow Cycle • Accessing The Cooling Water Model

o Interactive Session Workflow – the Design Phase o Overview o Details of the Work Process o The Initial Design

• Interactive Session Workflow – The Design Phase o Overview o Details of the Work Process o The Initial Design

3 Working with the Cooling Water Model Worksheets


• Introduction o Worksheets o Button actions

• Cooling Water Design Model Worksheets • Worksheet Details

o Status Worksheet o Preferences Worksheet

How to Revise Default Values Design Preference Categories

o Circuits Worksheet Initial Configuration Step 1: Assignment of Areas to Circuits How Area Assignments are Used for Circuit

Design Step 2: Assignment of Spacing Between

Areas Status messages and Values Used for

Circuit Design

4 Basis for the Cooling Water Design Model o General Flow sheet for cooling water service o Cooling Water Model Circuitry o Cooling water distribution network o Naming conventions

Project cooling water area Areas Requiring Cooling Water Plant bulk pipe item descriptions Distribution Piping Line types

o Sequencing of Areas on the Main Line o Cooling Water ”Footprint Model” o Pipe, Valves and Fittings Count o Line Sizing and Pressure Drop Calculations

Projects with a prior cooling water utility model area

Cooling towers- terminology and the defining stream temperatures


1. Overview

Analyzer Utility Module (AUM) Water One of the difficulties with economic analysis, both capital cost and payback determination, is the lack of scope definition for non-process utility or outside boundary limit portions of the project. The Analyzer Utility Module, AUM, was created as the “home” for a series of automated utility design models to address this difficulty. The Cooling Water Selection, Design and Sizing Model is the first utility design model in AUM and its functionality and method of use is described in detail in this chapter.

Cooling Water Design Model The Cooling Water Design Model is an automated, interactive and rapid design module that is contained in Aspen Decision Analyzer and works with stream-based projects. The cooling water model identifies heat exchanger equipment or any other type of project component that requires cooling water by its connection to a cooling water utility resource stream. To access the Cooling Water Design Model:

1 Starting with an open project that contains utility streams as part of its definition, click Run, then click Utility Model. Or, simply click the U button to access utility models.

2 Click Cooling Water.

At this point built-in design and processing procedures do all the hard work under your control and guidance and a few minutes later, your project will be augmented with a new cooling water utility area that contains designed cooling water circuitry and associated project components. You can use the model results using its set of adjustable design parameters or revise any and default values within prescribed limits to suit your needs.

In the discussions to follow, the term early design metrics is used to indicate values prepared by the cooling water model during an interactive design session. These are presented for guidance in advance of final design values that would be prepared on completing a project evaluation run.

Note: Worksheet names are shown in italic bold face to distinguish the names from text.


Value in Time and Effort The cooling water design model does all the hard work – design, selection, reporting, loading the design results – in minutes rather than traditional hours and days. It is a powerful resource in the development of a typical Front End Engineering Design: • Early process technology evaluation stage - focus is on Inside

Battery Limits (ISBL) components • With the process technology selected and additional scope,

total project costs are sought. Outside Battery Limits (OSBL) components are required, particularly cooling water utility service.

The cooling water design model • Automatically selects, designs, and adds sized utility system

components to the project scope definition • Can be revisited in each cycle of scope change.

The Key Steps On initiating the cooling water model, the model automatically analyzes your project for cooling water requirements and automatically generates selected, sized and designed cooling water utility service project components – all based on initial default design preferences and circuitry. Two interactive workbooks Preferences and Circuitry enable you to revise default values for the design and selection basis. Studying design alternatives starts with either a click of an option box or a data entry. Being interactive, the cooling water model enables you to cycle from design basis to early design results in a matter of mouse clicks. Each new specification results in a new design and a report of key decision metrics. The list of sized project components is retained until you choose to load the results into your project. Messages and metrics reports are provided extensively to guide you quickly and knowingly through a study of design alternatives.

When you have settled on a design you can load the results into your project. The loading operation begins with a click of a Load button and processing is automatic. After a minute or so, the loading process will be complete and the Project Basis view will be displayed on your screen. Scope items added to your project include a uniquely named cooling water area followed by a list of cooling water utility project components: cooling towers, circulation pumps, chemical injection pumps, working and stand-


by spares, and distribution piping, valves and fittings. Each component is selected, designed and sized in harmony with your design basis and the needs of heat exchange equipment in your various project areas.

2. Working with the Cooling Water Model

Preparation Workflow The Cooling Water Design model requires a stream-based project built in either Aspen Process Economic Analyzer or Aspen Decision Analyzer, with components that require cooling water connected to one or more cooling water utility resources.

The flow rates, water temperatures, duties and components provide the basis for the design requirements. The cooling water model will first diagnose the project’s requirements and initiate a design. The user can then revise the design basis and review early design metrics for a variety of design scenarios, settle on a design basis and load the design results into the project.

The Workflow Cycle

Figure 2.1 illustrates the cooling water design cycle: from project to design model and back to the project with added new scope. Two buttons control the process: • U to select the cooling water model • Load to load designed results

Using these two actions, you can participate interactively in the design process, making design selections, reviewing early metrics, revising selections, and clearing any error messages.


Figure 2.1. The Workflow Cycle, extracted from the Welcome worksheet

To initiate a cooling water design model session, three steps are required 1 Save the project under a new scenario name. 2 Evaluate the project 3 Run the Cooling water utility model

Each of these steps is detailed and illustrated in the following sections.

Accessing the Cooling Water Utility Model 1 SAVE AS: Since AUM-Cooling Water processing is automatic,

it is wise to first save your base project under a new name. This will ensure that your base project remains intact for further evaluations.


2 Evaluate the project: Click Run |Decision Analyzer as in Figure 2.2a or click the A button as in Figure 2.2b. This will provide the Decision Analyzer dialog box, Figure 2.2c. Check Evaluate Project and provide a file name.

Figure 2.2a. To evaluate from Run:

Figure 2.2b. To evaluate using the A-button.

Figure 2.2c. Choose Evaluate Project.

The reason for this step is to ensure that the project scope and cooling water requirements developed during evaluation are current and up to date. It will also eliminate an error message (Figure 2.2d) that would be displayed when accessing the cooling water model no evaluation data were available.


. Figure 2.2d. Error message if the project was not evaluated

3 Select the Cooling Water Model: To do this, choose Run>Utility Model (Figure 2,2a) or press the “U” button on the button bar (Figure 2.3a):

Figure 2.3a. To obtain utility models using the U-button.

This will bring up the Utility Model dialog box, Figure 2.3b. A blank value under Status indicates the project does not contain a prior cooling water model area. If a project contained a prior area, the Status field would indicate Loaded.

Figure 2.3b. Utility model selection

3b Select Cooling Water: Click OK. This will either initiate an interactive Cooling Water Design session in MS Excel and display a Load option or display a project-not-evaluated error message (see Step 2 above).

Interactive Session Workflow – the Design Phase

Overview When the cooling water model is invoked, it:


(a) analyzes for project cooling water requirements

(b) works from Preferences (user-modifiable, default set of design parameter values)

(c) prepares an initial design.

Results of the initial design and any subsequent interactive scenario are presented in a Capture worksheet. If the design meets with the user’s approval, a user click of the parked Load button will load the design results into the project, at which time the project can be re-evaluated.

The Preferences and Circuits worksheets allow the user to modify the default design basis. Each spec change will result in a new design. Hyperlinks provide rapid access from one sheet to another and sections in a sheet. The Control Center toolbar button opens the Control Center worksheet, which has hyperlinks to other sheets and their major categories. Worksheet tabs are color coded to match hyperlinks at the top of each worksheet.

The following sections provide a detailed description of the work process as well as detailed descriptions of each worksheet, category and item.

Details of the Work Process

With the click of the OK button in step 3b above, three actions will occur 1 The model first identifies if a prior cooling water model area is

present in the project. If present, the user can choose to Delete the prior area and continue with the model or return to the project. If Delete is chosen, the utility model will proceed with the design and delay deletion until it is time to load the new results.

2 If no prior cooling water utility area is detected, the Welcome screen is displayed and remains present during a time when:

a Project requirements are automatically passed to the model

b The model prepares an initial design

c A Load | Cancel | Minimize option is provided (Figure 2.4). To continue, click the minimize button at the top. This will park the button box for access during the design


phase. Cancel will end the cooling water model session and return normal project functions with no change to the project.

Figure 2.4. Load-Cancel-Minimize button boxes

• a Control Center button bar (figure 2.5) is provided to access the Control Center worksheet from any worksheet

• Seven worksheets are presented in a MS Excel framework: o Welcome o Control Center o Status o Preferences o Capture o Guide

3 The model then displays the Control Center worksheet, which links to all other worksheets and provides an indication of success (green signal) or failure (red signal) to create an initial design based on default design parameters.

The Initial Design

On initiation, the cooling water model will report the Status of the design on the Control Center (see Figure 2.5) worksheet under Status Report, and if any, will identify clashes on the Status worksheet and further, on the Preferences and Circuits worksheet.

A Status Report message: “Successful. A Load can proceed” indicates all is well between project requirements, design parameters and design methodology. At this point, it is wise to review early design metrics by accessing the Captured Results worksheet (see Figure 2.6). The user can return to Preferences and Circuits to study design alternatives. If captured results are acceptable, a click of the parked Load button will (1) carry the design results into the project, (2) close the worksheets and (3) return to the project for evaluation of the augmented project.


Should the design basis produce a clash with project requirements, error messages and flags will be displayed in a top-down succession of worksheets. The first indication is given under Status Report on the Control Center Worksheet. The Status worksheet is the central reporting agency, where checks are made and links are provided to source locations in the Preferences and Circuits input worksheets.

Figure 2.5. Illustration of the Control Center Worksheet, with display of Control Center toolbar and Load button


Figure 2.6. A section of a Results Capture sheet showing values in the project units of measure set.

3. Working with the Cooling Water Model Worksheets

Introduction Worksheets: Seven worksheets are provided, of which Preferences and Circuits are for user input, to revise the design basis:

• Welcome: greetings, workflow graphic • ControlCenter: navigation • Status: message center • Preferences: design selections • Circuits: circuit definition • Capture: early design metrics • Guide: help

Button Actions: The Control Center toolbar is always available during a model session. A click will open the Control Center


worksheet and a hyperlink click will direct you to a chosen worksheet. When the Control Center toolbar is parked together with the Excel Web toolbar you can quickly search forward and backward.

You can step from one sheet to another, revise the design basis, review status and results, decide on an alternate design basis, make revisions, review the results and when ready, click the Load button (see Load-Cancel-Minimize) to inject the results in the project. Or, you can refuse the design using Cancel. Clicking Load conveys the design results to the project, the cooling water design model’s Excel sheets and return to normal Analyzer functions. Cancel bypasses the cooling water model and returns to Analyzer.

Cooling Water Design Model Worksheets

The SPECS cooling Model workbook consists of • Two design basis sheets – this is where you input your

selections o Preferences: process and mechanical design

specs: Red error flags and messages are displayed for

out of range or missing data values Uses click boxes for either/or choices, “B” and

“R” switches to select base (default) or revised value and user value to replace the base value

o Circuits: assignment of areas to a circuit, spacing of areas in a circuit along the main line:

Assignment uses 1, 2, 3, 4 to assign an area to a circuit

Spacing uses the “B” and “R” switch method and user spacing to replace the base H2Hfootprint modelH value

• Status sheet – all messages are summarized here for your review and repair

o Key status message is highlighted in color (green: Loading can be performed, red: Errors must be cleared)

o Summarizes other messages, links directly to input locations for revision

• Capture Results: displays early design metrics for decision making, provides the basis for alternative choices


of preferences or circuitry. By “early design metrics” is meant values in advance of those created during project evaluation

• Guide: provides instructions, describes data entry, color coding

• Control Center: hypertext links interconnect all sheets and main categories for rapid navigation

• All sheets: are conveniently color coded, with red flags appearing on error condition. All error conditions must be cleared before results can be loaded

• Welcome sheet: Welcome, displayed during the initiation process, contains a workflow graphic

On completion of an error-free interactive session, pressing the LOAD button will automatically load and inject the results into the project. The project will then contain new scope additions: (1) a uniquely named, time-stamped cooling water area will be used to contain (2) a selected, designed list of cooling water utility project components. Each item so added by the model may be opened, reviewed, revised in the same way as any other project component.

Worksheet Details

Status Worksheet

The Status sheet reports messages and has hypertext links to source locations in the event of a reported error. Major report categories are:

• Overall status • Existing cooling water area is in the project • Cooling circuit components – wet bulb temperature,

minimum approach temperature, lowest desired cooling water temperature

• Cooling water resources: naming, excluded streams and reasons, net number

• Project components: total, number served by cooling water • Project areas: total number, those served by cooling

water • Cooling water loads: total flow rate, total heat duty,

excess capacity, total flow rate at excess capacity • Layout distances: number of parameters out of range • Pumps specs out of range


• Piping specs out of range • Circuit assignments out of range • Spacing assignments out of range

Figure 3.1 illustrates an extract of a Status sheet

Figure 3.1 Extract, sample of a Status Sheet

Preferences Worksheet Units of measure used in the Preferences worksheet correspond to those defined in the project. Error messages are displayed alongside each entry; errors are flagged in red. This sheet uses click boxes and data entry fields for specifying design preferences. Each preference is provided with a explanatory text, limit values, user entry field and a default value which is used in the initial design and any subsequent design should the user not provide an over-ride selection or value.

How to Revise Default Values

This worksheet uses two methods, check boxes and data entries controlled by switch boxes to revise the supplied set of default (base) design parameters. Throughout data entry discussions, the term used for a model-supplied set of data is referred to as default values. For a particular parameter, the model-supplied value is termed a base value, symbolized by the letter B. A value supplied by the user is termed a revised value and is


symbolized by the letter R. A mouse click will switch between using a base value and a revised value.

See Figure 2.2c (page X577H486X) for information on how to use a check box:

• A default value is provided to the left of the check box • A check box title signifies the alternative to the default

value • The resulting choice is displayed to the right • A status message is displayed that provides additional

information

Figure 3.2 Extract, sample of a Preferences sheet showing click box method of selection

Design Preference Categories: • Cooling Tower (values in this section affect the circuitry,

sizing of cooling towers and flow-related equipment such as circulation pumps and distribution piping)

o Design Capacity, excess capacity o Design Temperature: Summer wet bulb

temperature (see H3HCooling Tower H discussion of wet bulb temperature, approach gradient, range)

o Messages relating to cooling water resource requirements vs. design preferences

o Number of Cooling Towers o Multiple Cooling Towers: choose either one tower

for all circuits or one for each circuit


o Working “Twin”: choose a single tower at 100% capacity or two “(twins), each at 50% capacity

• Layout (these are dimension limit checks that are applied to entries on the Circuits worksheet

o Distance From tower to first branch to an area Minimum value to first branch to an area

(often defined by fire regulations) From a branch to an area header Maximum spacing between areas (a limit

check) Status messages related to distance

• Pumps o Area Pressure Drop: pressure drop for equipment

requiring cooling water, applies to all areas o Working Pumps

Limiting value for number of working pumps in a circuit

Pump type: horizontal (CENTRIF or API 610 model types) or vertical (TURBINE model type, at low speed only)

Pump speed: low or high RPM Stand-by pumps if four or less pumps in a

circuit: yes or no Stand-by pumps if more than four pumps in a

circuit: yes or no Electrical power to pumps based on voltage

choice: LV (low-voltage), MV (mid-voltage), HV (high-voltage). Limiting values of power per pump motor are displayed based on project specifications. A voltage choice defines the maximum power to a motor driver and hence, the number of pumps in a circuit. Recall that each change to a specification results in a completely new design; a voltage selection results in a design value for the number of pumps and can produce an error condition and message if the number of pumps exceeds the limiting value for number of pumps in a circuit.


Design messages for pumps and piping for each of four possible circuits

• Piping: Limiting values for line size, by line type, where line sizes are in the units of measure of the project, either “IN DIAM” or “MM DIAM”

Suction line size for circulation pumps (a flow rate per pump suction line based on selected line size is provided for information purposes)

Main line segment line size Branch line size Area header line size Risers line size (for 3D area types) Laterals line size (for 3D area types)

Circuits Worksheet

Units of measure used in the Circuits worksheet correspond to those defined in the project

This worksheet is designed to handle up to one hundred cooling water areas. Areas are listed vertically. The worksheet is divided into five major categories in columns of data: 1 Initial Configuration

See Figure 3.3 for the initial configuration

Figure 3.3 Extract from Circuits sheet – Initial Configuration (left), Step 1 (right)


The following (see Figure 3.3, left side) are reported for each area being served by a recognized cooling water utility resource stream:

• Initial Sort Sequence: sequenced by area, from the area with highest cooling water requirements to the area with the lowest

• Area Name: user-assigned name, carried into the cooling water design model from project area specs

• Area Type: user-assigned area type, carried into the cooling water design model from project area specs

• Area CW Rate: area cooling water (CW) flow rate, the sum of all recognized cooling water flow rates for equipment in an area as adjusted by the Excess Capacity value in the Preferences worksheet

• Initial Circuit Number: always 1 as all areas are initially assigned to a single circuit

• Initial Circuit ID: always “A” 2 Step 1 – Assignment of Areas to Circuits (User entry one of

two)

Please refer to Figure 3.3 (right side): • Enter a Circuit Number 1, 2, 3, or 4: user value is

required; if only one area requires cooling water, enter 1. If two areas, use 1 for both or assign 1 to one area and 2 to the other. The design model will sequence the areas. In an error condition, an error message and a red flag will be displayed. Error conditions must be resolved to obtain loadable design results.

• System-Assigned Circuit Id: The model will assign a letter ID (A, B, C, D) to each area based on circuit assignments and total circuit flow rate. If the project contains four or more areas, then it is possible to assign areas to circuit numbers 1 to 4. The model will collect all the area flow rates in each circuit and sequence the circuits from greatest flow to least in the sequence A, B, C, D. The “A” circuit will have a larger total flow rate than circuit “B”, “B” will be greater than circuit “C” and “D” will have the least flow rate. Similarly, for three areas in a project, valid circuit numbers range from 1 to 3 and circuit IDs assign to these circuits, based on total flows will be sequenced and labeled A, B and C. A one-area project will be assigned a circuit ID of “A.”


• Status o Status of all entries: summarizes number or errors

to be resolved; if none, “OK” is displayed o Status for individual entries: message is issued for

invalid circuit numbers and field is flagged in red 3 How Area Assignments are Used for Circuit Design

Please refer to Figure 3.4

Figure 3.4 Extract of Circuits sheet – defining area spacing using the B/R switch

Each line item in this section represents an area and its properties. Areas are sorted and sequenced in descending total circuit flow rate and then by area flow rate. Circuits are labeled A, B, C, D with circuit A being the one with the highest flow rate; B is next etc. An area that was tagged as circuit 2 in step 1 may be in a circuit with the lowest flow and would be organized accordingly and given a Circuit ID letter depending on the other circuit flows.

This section displays the properties and attributes of each area in the sequenced list.

Values displayed for information purposes are: • New Sort Sequence: displays values vertically in the

sequence 1, 2, 3, etc • H4HInitial Sort SequenceH: displays the initial sort sequence

number for the area • H5HID of Area In Report Group (ArRg): H the ArRg ID for the area • Area name: user-assigned project area description • H6HArea CW RateH: displays the cooling water rate, as adjusted

by the Preferences value for excess capacity


• Area Heat Duty: heat duty requirements for all equipment within the area identified as requiring a valid cooling water resource

• User circuit number: value entered in Step 1, for reference purposes

• H7HCircuit IDH: letter A, B, C, D assigned by the cooling water model based on sequencing circuit flow rates

• Position Of Area In Circuit: Only one area can be first in line in a circuit. “First” if the area has the highest flow rate of all areas in the circuit, otherwise no a blank display. The area with a “First” position will take on a default distance from the cooling tower as defined by the Preferences value for that distance.

4 Step 2: Assignment of Spacing Between areas Each line item in this section corresponds to item 4 above. A line item represents an area and its properties, with areas being sorted and sequenced in descending circuit and area flow rate.

This section enables the user to revise base values for the spacing of areas along the main line. It uses the “Switch” method to revise a base value as described in the section on Preferences.

• Base Value for Spacing Along Circuit Main Line: This is the run length of the main segment between the prior and current area as developed by the H8Hfootprint modelH.

• Enter Switch: B for Base, R to revise. Choose a blank entry or enter either a B (or b) to indicate use of the base value. Use R (or r) to indicate use of a revised value

o Switch value is blank: design will use the base value o Switch value is B or b: design will use the base

value o Switch value is R or r: indicates a forthcoming user

value will revise the default spacing value. The design will use the revised value if the user value is within range of prescribed limits.

• Enter Revised Spacing Along The Circuit Main Line: This value will replace the base value if it meets range limit conditions set forth in the Preferences worksheet. By spacing is meant the distance between successive areas. As the line items in this section represent areas that are sorted and sequenced, the spacing for a particular line item is the spacing between the start of the prior area and


the start of the current area. This spacing is a measure of the area’s main line segment. See the section on the H9HCooling Water Footprint ModelH. Piping runs lengths are typically longer than spacing as they include pipe to configure fittings, expansion loops, etc.

Enter a value. The resulting action depends on the corresponding switch value

o Switch value is blank, B or b: user value is ignored, base value will be used

o Switch value is R or r: user value is tested against range limits and design criteria. If error free, the user value will be displayed as the Applied Value. Error conditions will display instructional status messages, red flag, and prevent completion of a valid design

5. Status messages and values used for design o Flag: A red flag is displayed to indicate a line item

error condition o Status: B (Base) uses base value, R (Revise) uses

revised value or status message (displays limiting values, error messages)

o Value used for spacing along circuit main line: The value used in the design

4. Basis for the Cooling Water Design Model This section describes the basis of the cooling water design model. It is presented with numerous graphics to enable a clear understanding of the work being performed by the model when it is analyzing and designing cooling water project components that are in harmony with your design preferences and the needs of components requiring cooling water.

General Flow Sheet for Cooling Water Service Figure 4.1 is a schematic diagram of a typical cooling water circuit. In this figure, circulation pumps draw cooled cooling water, the cooling water supply stream, from the supply basin at the bottom of a cooling tower and distribute it through piping to heat exchanger located in one or more project areas. Cooling water return streams are combined and sent to a cooling tower


where it is cooled, principally by evaporative cooling. Motor driven fans mounted on the tower draw (induced draft) or force (forced draft) ambient air into the cooling tower where it contacts the downward flow of cooling water. The cooled cooling water drops down from the tower into a supply basin, awaiting withdrawal by the circulation pumps.

Water is added to make up for losses through evaporation, air-born drift and for blow-down. Water drawn from the system to prevent the build-up of contaminants is termed “blow-down.”

See below for more on H10Hcooling towers H, terminology and defining stream temperatures

Cooling water in such a circuit tends to accumulates algae, corrosion contaminants and particles that slough off the distribution system. Water treatment chemicals are added to alleviate these conditions, with the degree of such treatment depending on the water supply source and environmental conditions. Five types of treatment chemicals are typically used in small quantities to control the water quality. The cooling water model provides each cooling tower with a diaphragm type of pump and a stand-by for each of the treatment chemicals. The model uses the following labels to identify the types:

• Sulfuric acid (pH control) • Sodium hypochlorite (pH control) • Biocide (algae growth control) • Corrosion inhibitor • Dispersant (suspended particles control)

Figure 4.1 Illustration: Cooling Water Flow Diagram


Cooling Water Model Circuitry

The cooling water model is designed to support up to four independent cooling water circuits. Each circuit can have its own cooling tower or all circuits can be defined to share a cooling tower. A circuit consists of pumps and distribution piping to and from project areas. It is the P&ID specs that define the component’s hook-up piping to the cooling water model’s circuitry.

Summarizing, the cooling water model develops piping runs to a project area and distributes cooling water to components in the area via an area header or risers and laterals in the case of 3D area types. Each circuit is provided with a supply and return distribution network; what is supplied must be returned: one supply line implies one return line.

Figure 4.2 is a schematic diagram showing several areas that have equipment requiring cooling water and one that does not. The cooling water model will not serve an area that does not have cooling water requirements. If such an area is to be included, then it is recommended that one or more exchangers connected with cooling water utility streams be introduced in that area.

The cooling water model allows for a one cooling tower (or two 50% towers) to serve all circuits or individual cooling tower (or two 50% towers) for each circuit. Clearly, if only one area requires cooling water, only one circuit can be defined, up to two circuits for two areas, up to three circuits for three areas and a maximum of four circuits for four or more areas requiring cooling water.


Figure 4.2 Single, Independent Cooling Water Circuit

Figure 4.3, case (a) is a diagram showing a single treed circuit. Figure 4.4, case (b), illustrates multiple treed circuits. The difference between the two cases is (a) one cooling tower for each circuit or (b) one for all circuits. Case (a) would apply to projects with a single area or for multiple circuits, with each circuit being served by its own cooling tower.


Figure 4.3 (case a). Illustration of one cooling tower used to serve a set of areas in a single circuit. The model will permit up to four single circuits, each having its own cooling tower and circulation pumps.

Figure 4.4 (case b). Illustration of one cooling tower used to serve multiple circuits. For this case, the model will provide one cooling tower for all circuits and a set of circulation pumps for each circuit.


Cooling Water Distribution Network

This section describes the methodology used in circuit design • Naming conventions • Sequencing of areas on the main line • Cooling water footprint model • Pipe, valves and fittings count • Line sizing and pressure drop calculations

Naming Conventions

Project Cooling Water Utility Area: The cooling water design model will create a cooling water model utility area to contain project components for each circuit. On loading, the area will be named with a date and time stamp to ensure it is unique and can be detected and properly deleted when a new design is to take its place.

The naming convention is: “AUMCoolWater ddmmmyy_tttt”, where

• dd is the day number of the session month (1, 2, 3, ….., 31)

• mmm is a three character representation of the session month (jan, feb, mar, apr, may, jun, jul, aug, sep, oct, nov, dec)

• yy is the last two digits of the session year (05 for 2005, etc)

• tttt is the decimal fraction of the session day

Utility project components are time-stamped in a similar manner. As only four digits are used (tttt), it is possible that a load action might span two tttt times (one ten-thousandth of a day, duration of 8.64 seconds) with no significant resulting consequence.

Once a cooling water utility area is loaded in the project, the user may access any item in the usual way, by using the Project View, clicking on any component and viewing the design parameters in the forms view. Any and all data in the cooling water utility area may be modified as required.

Areas Requiring Cooling Water: Each area that requires cooling water is identified by a unique ArRg number that is made up of system–assigned numeric values for Area ID and Report Group. An ArRg value of 201 indicates Area ID = 2 in Report Group 1. The user-assigned area description, which may not be unique in


a given project, is printed in reports along with its unique ArRg value.

Plant Bulk Pipe Item Descriptions: The naming convention above is combined with the Area Code and is time stamped when loaded into the project. For example, “MainSeg, ArRg 201_T7883” is the item description for main line supply and return line segment that serves area 2 in report group 1, time stamped T7883.

Distribution Piping Line Types: The distribution network in this cooling water model consists of the following named types of lines:

• Main line segment: a portion piping along the main line o “MS” o “MainSeg” o “MainChk” for a main segment that contains a

check valve • Branch segment: a short run of pipe, from the main line

to a specific project area o “B” o “Branch” o “BrChk” for a branch that contains a check valve

• Area header: a line of pipe, valves and fittings that distributes cooling water along the long dimension of the base of a project area

o “AH” o “Area Header” o “ArHdrChk” for an area header that contains a

check valve • Risers – vertical runs of pipe to bring cooling water to each

level in a 3d structure o “R” o “Risers” o “RiseChk” for a riser that contains a check valve

• Laterals – horizontal runs of pipe that distribute cooling water to each floor in a 3D structure

o “L” o “Laterals” o “LatChk” for a lateral that contains a check valve


• Vents and drains – high-point vents, low-point drains on supply and return lines, short runs of small bore pipe

o “VD” o “VentDrain”

Lines with check valves are of minimal length to satisfy the plant bulk PIPE mode and are separate line items as only one check valve is assigned to a supply-return line pair.

Figures 4.5 and 4.6 illustrate these line types for 2D (PAD, GRADE) and 3D area types (OPEN, EXOPEN, FLOOR, MODULE)

Figure 4.5 Schematic of cooling water piping for a 2D area type (PAD, GRADE)


Figure 4.6 Schematic of cooling water piping for a 3D area type (OPEN, EXOPEN, FLOOR, MODULE)

Sequencing of Areas on the Main Line

Upon identifying which areas that require cooling water and their assigned circuit, the cooling water model arranges the areas in decreasing cooling water usage. The largest consuming area is placed at the front of the line and the smallest consumer is placed at the end. In this way, min line segments will be larger in diameter at the front of the line and decrease as each consumer reduces the total flow rate to the next area.

Figure 4.7 illustrates various line types and sequenced areas.


Figure 4.7 Schematic of Line Types Serving Areas Requiring Cooling Water

Cooling Water “Footprint Model”

Upon identifying an area as one that requires cooling water, the footprint model develops an area footprint by using (a) the total number of components in an area, (b) the area type (2D or 3D), (c) the number of level and (d) a packing density (number of components in a bay) and (e) area aspect ratio, length:width, of 1.5:1.0.

The result of the footprint model is a set of dimensions for each area requiring cooling water. These dimensions are used to develop a default value of the spacing between the start of one area along the main line and the next area. The default spacing distances are reported in the Step 2 of the CIRCUITS worksheet and can be over-ridden by the user.

Pipe, Valves and Fittings Count

Each line type is provided with a piping iso model that consists of set of pipe, valves and fittings. Pipe and fitting diameter is determined by volumetric flow rate and limiting line velocity (suction lines being different from distribution lines). Line length is determined by (a) minimum length of pipe required to each type of fitting and (b) the long area dimension, which is


developed from a cooling-water “H11Hfootprint modeHl” for each project area and area type. Fittings are assigned to each line type from a list that includes elbows (EL), tees (TE), reducers (RE), flanges (FL), blind flanges (BL), gate valves (GA), check valves (CH).

Each line type is based on five configuration components. The total line length is determined by as the sum of the linear run distance plus pipe lengths of pipe to satisfy the make-up of the configuration components. The make-up of each configuration component is based on line type and consists of quantities of the following:

• “Main run” component: pipe, of length determined by (a) the footprint model, or (b) user preference value

• “Fixed” component: FL, GA, CH fittings, pipe length based on diameter of run

• “Head” component: EL, FL fittings, pipe length based on diameter of run, to provide directional change

• “Branch point” component: TE, RE, FL, BL fittings, for connection to next line type

• “Vent and drain station” component: TE, FL GA fittings, pipe; frequency of placement is based on linear run distance

• “Expansion loop” component: EL fittings, pipe length based on diameter of run, frequency of placement is based on linear run distance

Expansion loops and vent and drain stations are placed along the run based on line length

The configuration of each line type serving each area is defined as a project component located in the cooling water area created by the cooling water model. Once loaded in the project, any line configuration can be reviewed and modified in the usual manner by opening that project component in its form.

Line Sizing and Pressure Drop Calculations

The Cooling Water Model has a Preferences worksheet where, in the Piping section, limiting sizes of each line type are defined. Once areas are assigned to a circuit, the flows through the circuit are known. Areas are ordered in sequence according to their flow requirements, with the largest consumer at the head of the line. The computations are interactive and a new design will be computed unnoticed each time a design value is revised. It is


wise to check early design results that are displayed in the Capture worksheet when revising design specifications.

Line size and pressure drop computations take place in this general manner:

• Starting point is limiting velocity, as defined in the Icarus Reference Guide

• Flow rate combined with limiting velocity results in required flow area

• Maximum line size determines number of parallel lines • Built-in iso for each line type defines valve and fitting

count • Line length is derived from spacing between areas from

circuitry input, minimum spacing between areas and minimum lengths from line

• Total run length is a combination of line length and number of parallel runs

• Pipe friction is based on Fanning type equation • Line-size based fitting resistances are used to determine

fitting friction losses • A single average value for the pressure drop across cooling

water usage components in any area is defined in the Preference worksheet

• Pressure at junctions, where flows meet, is common to junction streams

• Overall circuit pressure drop comes from a stepwise calculation across all junctions

• An addition head loss due to cooling tower elevation completes the pressure drop determination

It is possible that the limiting line size for branch and area headers may be too small for some circuits with large flows. This would result in a cluster of two or more parallel lines. To alleviate this condition, consider increasing the limiting line size.

Projects with a Prior Cooling Water Utility Model Area

The cooling water model will allow a single cooling water utility area of its making in a project. If a project contains a prior area, the model will detect its presence and defer action until the user decides to load a new cooling water model design. Choosing to load will delete the prior area and the new one will be loaded. Is


the choice is not to load, the model worksheets are closed with a return to the normal view.

Cooling Towers: Terminology and the Defining Stream Temperatures

Figure overview_4.8 shows a cooling tower with air and cooling water streams and their temperatures.

Terms used in the cooling tower industry, illustrated in Figure 4.8, are:

• Cooling tower: a device used to cool water by the countercurrent action of ambient air against a downward flowing stream of water to be cooled. The cooling process involves the cooling of entering water by evaporative cooling of water and sensible heat to a much lesser degree

• Cooling water supply stream: cooling water supplied to heat exchangers for purpose of cooling process streams

• Cooling water return stream: cooling water streams leaving heat exchangers, combined for return to a cooling tower

• Range: cooling water return temperature, Tr – cooling water supply temperature, Ts, directly related to the heat duty

• Approach Gradient: the difference between the wet bulb air temperature and cooling water leaving the cooling tower. Theoretically, the cooling water temperature can not drop below the air wet bulb temperature. For a given cooling water flow rate, as the approach gradient decreases, the cost of a cooling tower will increase.


Notes to Analyzer Utility Model (AUM) Users: Cooling Water utility resources that must accounted in the Analyzer Utility Model (AUM) should be named either:

Cooling Water or "Cooling Water xx"

where:

xx can be two digits ranging from 01 to 99,

for example, Cooling Water 01

User created utility resources that do not adhere to this format (for example, CW, Sea Water, Cooling Water o3) will not be identified as cooling water streams and will be excluded from AUM's cooling water analysis.

Cooling water streams that are not associated with any equipment, will be assigned to the Area with the maximum cooling water flow rate. For areas assigned to two or more circuits, the collected unassigned cooling water flow rate will be assigned to the first area in the circuit handling the largest circuit flow rate.

Cooling water can either be bought or be made. If it is to be made, the dew point of ambient air added to the lower model limit for the approach gradient will determine the lowest possible deliverable temperature. To ensure that your specified cooling water utility resource streams can be made, please review the limits for the two cooling water models: • CTWCOOLING • CTWPACKAGED

AUM_Air

Utility Design and Scope Generator for Instrument and Plant Air

Overview The Air Utility Module automatically and interactively:


• selects, designs, and sizes air plant project components that conform to your:

o Project scope design basis o Interactive entries for air utility design and

configuration preferences • Augments the scope of your project with a list of designed air

utility project components in a unique air utility area on the click of the Load button

• Interactive session enables a review of results prior to LOAD creates

o Status messages, suggestions to alleviate design clashes

o Interactive report of equipment and distribution piping design results

With the Air Utility Module, you can review, revise, add other project components and/or Run the augmented project to obtain a new project evaluation.

The Air utility model can be • applied to projects that have been created using

o Aspen Aspen Process Economic Analyzer, Aspen Decision Analyzer

o Aspen Capital Cost Estimator • within Aspen Aspen Process Economic Analyzer or Aspen

Capital Cost Estimator

Project areas and their project components • Aspen Process Economic Analyzer/Analyzer projects:

o Each group of project components is contained in a unique “Report Group”

o A report group is a project area • Aspen Capital Cost Estimator projects: You can create

o A project area o A report group to coordinate a group of project areas o The AUM Air utility module works with each project

area and its air requirements

Benefits: • You get early design metrics for decision making


• Decide what’s best, then trigger the LOAD operation • With LOAD, a new Air utility area will be inserted into your

project with its designed list of air system project components • Before LOAD, air system project components are interactively

o Selected based on your selection preferences o Designed in accordance with your project basis and

air design preferences o Sized o Reported

• In a small fraction of the time and effort it takes to do this work in the traditional manner

• Change the project scope? Re-run the utility module!

How AUM_Air Works

General AUM_Air Workflow 1 Press U button to initiate. 2 Select Air Utility.

AUM_Air opens in MS Excel 3 Move the supplied Control Center toolbar to the top and

click it. 4 Check Status. 5 Review the Guide, page X578H524X. 6 Select and enter Preferences.


7 Check messages, review results in Report. 8 Revise Configuration parts 1 and 2. 9 Check messages, review results in Report. 10 Click the Load button to close AUM_Air and load the design

results into your project. 11 Review Area and components. 12 Run the project, review results.

Using AUM_Air

Accessing AUM_Air

To access AUM_Air: 1 Starting with an open project that has been evaluated, click

Run, then click Utility Model. Or, click the U button to access utility models.

The Utility Model dialog box appears:

2 Click Air – Instrument, Plant. 3 Click OK.

Three actions now occur

1 The model first identifies if a prior Air – Instrument, Plant model area is present in the project. If present, you can choose to Delete the prior area and continue with the model or return to the project. If you click Delete, the utility model will proceed with the design and delay deletion until it is time to load the new results.


2 If no prior Air – Instrument, Plant utility area is detected, the Welcome screen is displayed and remains present during a time when:

a Project requirements are automatically passed to the model

b The model prepares an initial design

c The model then displays the Control Center worksheet, which links to all other worksheets and provides an indication of success (green signal) or failure (red signal) to create an initial design based on default design parameters.

3 A Load | Cancel | Minimize dialog box is provided. 4 To continue, click the minimize button at the top. This

parks the button box for access during the design phase. Cancel ends the Air – Instrument, Plant model session and returns normal project functions with no change to the project.


Note: A Control Center button bar is provided to access the Control Center worksheet from any worksheet.

Nine worksheets are presented in a MS Excel framework: • Welcome • Control Center • Guide • Status • Preferences • Config 1 • Config 2 • EquipStats • PipeStats

The Initial Design On initiation, the Air – Instrument, Plant model reports the status of the design on the Control Center worksheet under Status, and if there are any, identifies clashes on the Status worksheet and, further, on the Preferences worksheet.

A Status Report message: Successful. A Load can proceed indicates all is well between project requirements, design parameters, and design methodology. At this point, it is wise to review early design metrics by accessing the EquipStats and PipeStats worksheets.

If captured results are acceptable, a click of the parked Load button: • carries the design results into the project • closes the worksheets • returns to the project for evaluation of the augmented project

Should the design basis produce a clash with project requirements, error messages and flags are displayed in a top-down succession of worksheets. The first indication is given under Status Report on the Control Center worksheet. The Status worksheet is the central reporting agency, where checks are made and links are provided to source locations in the EquipStats and PipeStats worksheets.


To load the Air – Instrument, Plant data into your Icarus project:

When you are satisfied with the model and the Status worksheet shows that there are no errors, you can load the Air – Instrument, Plant model into the project. 1 Click the Maximize button on the parked Load | Cancel |

Minimize dialog box.

2 Click Load.

The Aspen Icarus Loader appears, showing the progress of loading the XML data into Icarus.


When the Air – Instrument, Plant data has been loaded into Aspen Icarus, the following confirmation message appears:

3 Click OK.

The Air – Instrument, Plant data is now included in your project.

Modifying Air – Instrument, Plant Data When you have loaded Air – Instrument, Plant data in your project, you modify that data using the AUM_Air module.

To Modify Air – Instrument, Plant Data: 1 On the main menu, click Run, then click Utility Model. Or,

click the U button to access utility models.

The Utility Model dialog box appears. Note that the Status column says Loaded.

2 Click Air – Instrument, Plant. 3 Click OK. The following warning message appears:


Note: Clicking Yes does not actually delete the Air – Instrument, Plant data in your project. You can click Yes, modify the Air – Instrument, Plant data, then choose not to replace the previous Air – Instrument, Plant data with the modified data by clicking Cancel on the Load | Cancel | Minimize dialog box. 4 Click Yes. 5 Modify the data to your satisfaction. If you want to replace the loaded data with your modified data, follow the steps below. 1 Click the Maximize button on the parked Load | Cancel |


2 Click Load.

The Aspen Icarus Loader appears, showing the progress of loading the XML data into Icarus.


When the Air – Instrument, Plant data has been loaded into Aspen Icarus, the following confirmation message appears:

3 Click OK.

The Air – Instrument, Plant data is now included in your project. If you want to keep loaded Air – Instrument, Plant data and not replace it with your modified data, follow the steps below. 1 Click the Maximize button on the parked Load | Cancel |


2 Click Cancel. The following warning message appears:

3 Click Yes to cancel the loading process. Your original loaded Air – Instrument, Plant data is retained.


Guide for the Air Utility Model (AUM)

SPECS Organization Chart

About this SPECS Book


About an Air Plant Unit

About Distribution Piping for an APU

Methods In the conceptual design phase, lacking a plot plan, this method is used to develop air distribution piping. • Some runs may be long, some short. • Components in the augmented project scope definition may

be modified, deleted, new ones added.

The following is a brief description of the methods used. • Areas assigned to an APU are collected in the sequence of the

project and are assembled in a column-row array • Array dimensions are determined from area dimensions • Row and column dimensions are figured from total area,

number of areas and an initial aspect ratio of 3:2

Air Distribution • Piping is developed for Instrument Air as well as Plant Air. • Piping for each service is developed in the same way, except

for volumetric flow and line size

Distribution Piping • The APU feeds air to the array through a Main Feeder (MF) • The Main Feeder length is defined in Preferences


• Two Main Manifolds (MM) are used on extra-wide arrays, els one or none for an array one column wide

• Each MM feeds a Main Line (ML) • Main lines feed Branch Lines (BR) • A tee of the Branch line supplies air to an Area Feeder (AF) • Area Feeders connect to Area Headers (AH) • Area headers, for 2-D area types such as Grade, Pad, etc

supply air to the I-P transducers, control valves o P&ID information from the original project provide

the requirements for I-P and control valve components

o Utility station requirements are developed for each area based on anticipated air tool usage and area size

A plant air connection is made off the Area Header Plant for each utility station

• Area headers, for 3-D area types such as open steel structures, etc supply air to Risers, then Laterals which then connect to I-P transducers and control valves.

o Utility station requirements are developed for each 3-D type area based on anticipated air tool usage and area size

Schematic The following schematic was prepared to illustrate a large project of 78 areas:


Configuration of Air Utility Project Components • Project Components • An Air Plant Unit - APU • Schematic of an APU • Multiple APUs • Compressor Redundancy

Project Components The Instrument and Plant Air Utility Model creates a set of project components in accordance with the needs of your: • Project Scope definition • Design and selection preferences for Instrument and Plant Air


Typical components • Air Compressors • Interstage and After-coolers • Air Filters • Air Receivers • Air Dryers • Air distribution piping (instrument, plant air) • Utility Stations (air, water, steam, condensate drain services) • Associated installation bulks would be developed during

project run

Components are contained in a uniquely defined Area • Area Title contains a unique time and date to differentiate one

run from another • Area can be modified or deleted in the usual way using Aspen

Capital Cost Estimator, Aspen Aspen Process Economic Analyzer/Analyzer

An “Air Plant Unit” - APU • Air intake screens • Air intake ductwork • Air compressors

o One main compressor at 100% capacity or two at 50% capacity each

o Optional standby spare compressor o Optional start-up compressor

• Interstage and after-stage coolers o Optional TEMA water cooled or fin-fan air cooled

exchangers • Air receivers

o Optional individual receivers for instrument and plant air or combined receiver

o Optional main receiver or two at 50% capacity each o Optional stand-by receiver

• Air filters – pre-filter and post-filter, one or more of each • Air dryers - dual tower type (one working, one regenerating)


o One main at 100% capacity or two at 50% capacity each

o Optional standby spare air dryer o Optional dryer for Plant Air

• Utility piping for turbine steam/condensate, cooling water/return

• Distribution piping o Instrument and plant air o Utility stations o Cooling water, steam/condensate headers o Interconnects between two or more air plant units

Schematic of an Air Plant Unit


General Layout

Multiple Air Plant Units for Multiple Areas One or up to four Air Plant Units to serve area air requirements.

Two distribution networks for each APU: • instrument air • plant air


Compressor Redundancy: Multiple, Stand-by, Start-up

Design Considerations • Units of Measure • Designed Components • Volumetric Air Flow Rate • Equipment Selection and Design

o Compressor Model Selection o Interstage and After Coolers; choice of

Air Coolers (for rack mounting) Shell & Tube Heat Exchangers

o Air Receivers o Air Filters o Air Dryers

Units of Measure Values are reported in the Unit of Measure set of the user’s project, in the: • Utility Module interactive worksheets and reports


• Augmented user’s project file

Air Utility Area • Designated as AUM_Air_ddmmyy_tttt (date and time

stamped) • Contains Air Utility system project components

Air Utility Project Components Each item is selected and sized: • Area headers for cooling water/return, steam/condensate,

instrument and plant air • Air intake screens • Air intake ductwork • Compressors • Interstage coolers • Utility piping for turbine steam/condensate, cooling

water/return • Plant and Instrument Air Receivers • Air Pre-filters, After-filters • Air Dryers • Distribution Pipe, Valves, Fittings

o Distribution circuits: up to four circuits (one to four air plant units)

o Distribution piping, for 2D, 3D area types o Utility stations (total number of stations)


Instrument Air (IA) Requirements: Air Flow Rate

Plant Air (PA) Requirements: Air Flow Rate


Compressor Model Selection Method

Sizes compressor based on • Total project air flow • Number of desired air plant units • Project areas assigned to each air plant unit • Air plant unit redundancy (working spares, stand-by spares) • Specs for start-up compressor

Model type is based on compressor air flow rate • Low flow rates – reciprocating • High flow rates – centrifugal • Flow rates less than model minimum -reciprocating

Reciprocating Compressor for Low Capacity Range


Gasoline Motor-Driven Reciprocating Compressor for Low Capacity Range, Stand-by Spare

Centrifugal Compressor for High Capacity Range


Inter- and After-compression stage Coolers

Air Filters


Air Receivers

Air Dryers

Interactive Specs • Design Basis

o Equipment Redundancy o Equipment Configurations o Selection Specs o Design Preferences o Air Distribution

• Areas and Air Plant Units • Layout • Air Distribution Configuration


o Assignment of APUs to Areas

User Preferences • User enters specs interactively in MS Excel SPECS workbook • Preferences worksheet– design and equipment

configuration basis o Organized by category o Color coded o Either/or selections are provided with a base

(default) value o Numeric selections are provided with a base (default)

value o Help messages assist selections o Error messages are issued for out-of-limit or design

clash conditions • CONFIG worksheets: basis for distribution air piping to

areas o Part 1: Assignment of plant air to areas devoid of

equipment o Part 2: Assignment of an APU to an area

Equipment Redundancy • Main item at 100% capacity • Main item split into two, each at 50% capacity • Stand-by spare

o Optional o Same size as main item or main item at 50%

capacity o Power option for stand-by compressors

Electric motor drive Large compressors: steam turbine drive Small compressors: gasoline engine drive

• Start-up compressors only o Optional o Size based on user % of total capacity of main item


Equipment Configurations Equipment configuration choices:

Combined air train

Individual Instrument air train

Wet or dry plant air train

Basis for Design: Preferences - 1 With the exception of item 1 (Conversion of “Quoted cost” items ….) where no default value is provided, every other user preference is supplied with a default value and minimum and maximum limit values where appropriate. Item 1 requires user entry for an exchange rate which is used in an air utility internal cost model to evaluate costs of air intake screen/filters. 1 Conversion of "Quoted cost" items to Project Currency Units

(PCU) o Exchange rate, Project Currency Units per USD:

Note: This entry is required. 2 Ambient Air Conditions (one set for all APUs)


o Dry bulb temperature o Wet bulb temperature o Atmospheric pressure

3 Air Requirements - Capacity for Instrument and Plant air (one set for all APUs)

o Excess capacity, % Instrument air Plant air

o Air system leakage, % o Install utility stations? o Number of utility stations, % adjustment

4 Air intake screens/filters (uses an AUM_Air cost model) o Air to media ratio o Adjustments to model estimate

Cost Hour to install Weight

5 Compressors (one set of specs for all APUs) Main compressor: o Main compressor

One at 100% capacity or two each at 50% capacity

Limiting flow rate for a single main compressor, % of model maximum flow

o Stand-by spare compressor Install? Driver type (electrical or other: turbine, gas

motor) o Start-up compressor

Install? Minimum flow rate to qualify for installation Running time

o Interstage Coolers Type:

• Water cooled (small: Pre-engineered type or large: TEMA BEU)

• Air cooled (AIR COOLER) Cooling water inlet and rise temperature


Air temperature rise for fin-fan air coolers

Notes: If low capacity type is selected, may generate multiple low capacity compressors High capacity compressors may require project mid- and/or high voltage power distribution levels.

o Utility services for compressors Steam lines: run distance from boiler house to

turbines Cooling water lines: run distance from cooling

water plant 6 Air Receivers

o Common or separate receivers for instrument air and plant air?

o One main receiver at 100% capacity or two, each at 50% capacity

o Install a stand-by spare? o Horizontal or vertical vessels? o Maximum diameter o Maximum tangent-to-tangent length o Instrument air supply time during emergency shut-

down o Plant air supply time during emergency shut-down

7 Air Dryers (Dual Bed–one working, one regenerating) o Common air dryer for instrument and plant air? o Is plant air to be dried? o One main dryer at 100% capacity or two, each at

50% capacity o Air purge rate

8 Air Filters o Instrument air

Number of pre-filters Number of post-filters

o Plant air Number of pre-filters Number of post-filters

9 Distribution piping o Minimum line size for air piping


o Distance from APU to process area o Typical tie-in run length from one APU to another

Configuration Layout Method and Distribution

Basis for Air Utility Model Piping o Layout and primary distribution piping is based on

the specs for all areas assigned to an APU o Area feeder and header, risers, laterals are based on

area specs

Area layout in lieu of a project plot plan o Project areas are arranged in project sequence o Each area is given an ID code based on its report

group and area number Example:

• Report group 2 “Solvent Recovery” • Area 4 description: “Distillation” • Is given an ID code of 100 x 2 + 4 = 204 • ID code 204 is characterized by its report

group name and area description o Areas are placed in a rectangular array according to

the total number of areas with an initial aspect ratio of 2:3 (fewer columns than rows)

o Column-row arrangement is modified to obtain a row-column balance

o A branch line is run across each row with area feeder take-offs to each area in a row

o Area headers (and risers and laterals for 3D area types) connect to individual project components in that area

o Branches are fed using a Main Line o Main Lines are fed by Main Manifolds for wide arrays o Main Manifolds are fed by a Main Feeder from the Air

Plant Unit


APU Configuration: o Choose default (one APU for all) or assign each

Report Group to one of four APUs

Example layout – group of areas served by APU “A”

Circuit Preferences: Configuration of APUs • Worksheet provides a list of Project Areas and air

consumption • Configuration in two parts:

o Part 1: enables areas with no Instrument air requirements to be provided with plant air, else no air is provided

o Part 2: enables each area to be assigned to an APU • Initial configuration: all areas are assigned to APU “A”

o Design results are presented for the initial configuration

• Revised configuration: use of up to four (4) APUs o Design results are presented for the revised

configuration


Sample Layouts: One APU

Sample Layouts: Multiple APUs

Design Methods • Sizing Distribution Piping • Schematic of Distribution Piping


Basis for Sizing Air Distribution Piping • Configuration (IA = instrument air; PA = plant air)

o Assignment of an APU to Project Areas o Initial configuration: all are areas assigned to one

APU o APU Air flow for IA and PA is determined from sum of

area usage requirements • Sizing

o Air Module uses a built-in layout model to estimate air distribution piping line lengths

o Each line type is assigned an “Iso” with valve and fitting counts, expansion loops for long runs

o Areas provides air flow requirements for each line o Lines are sized based on air consumption and a

pressure drop of 1 PSI per 100 ft [22.6 KPAG/100 M] or less with a minimum line size as defined in Preferences

o Design pressure: 150 psig [1350 KPAG]

Air Distribution Piping to Project Areas


Distribution for a 3D-Type Area

Sample AUM_Air Worksheets Displayed below are sample AUM_Air worksheets. Note the following details about AUM_air and these sample worksheets: • sheets are non-functional • all worksheets visible to the user have the version number

printed at the bottom of the sheet • the project illustrated is Aspen Process Economic Analyzer

ETOH Sample Project • except for currency and exchange rate, sheets are in the

user's units of measure defined in the user's project specs o currency is referred to as PCU - project currency unit o you must enter an exchange rate when opening a

project for the first time. The exchange rate value will be "remembered" on opening the project thereafter

o ControlCenter, Status and Preferences sheet will always show an error because you must enter an exchange rate for the currency of the project (hyperlinks lead the you from ControlCenter to Status to Preferences to the item to be revised)

o on entering a proper value, the error message is not displayed


List of AUM_Air Worksheets

• Welcome • ControlCenter • Guide • Status • Preferences • Config_1 • Config_2 • EquipStats • PipeStats

Welcome Worksheet


Control Center Worksheet

Guide Worksheet


Status Worksheet


Preferences Worksheet


Configuration Part 1: Assignment of Plant Air to Areas Not Requiring Instrument Air

Configuration Part 2: Assignment of Areas to an APU


Note: For clarity in this documentation, the following screen shot is shown below the one above it. On the actual Config 2 Worksheet, they are side by side.

Report – Equipment Component Stats


Report – Pipe Stats

562 10 Evaluating the Project

10 Evaluating the Project

Running a Project Evaluation After all the process simulator data has been properly mapped and defined, you are ready to run a project evaluation. The project evaluation produces capital costs reports that can then be viewed in Aspen Icarus Reporter and Icarus Editor. If any of the components are modified, the evaluation process must be re-run.

To run a project evaluation:

1 Click on the toolbar.

– or –

On the Run menu, click Evaluate Project.

10 Evaluating the Project 563

2 The dialog box shows the default Capital Costs report file name, Cap_Rep.ccp. This is the report reviewed in Icarus Editor. If you want to give this file a different name, type the file name in the Report File field.

3 Click OK.

If you are using the default Preferences, Aspen Capital Cost Estimator scans the project specifications for errors and/or inconsistencies and any found are listed in the Scan Messages

window.

Note: You can select in Preferences to skip the scan for errors (see page X579H51X).

There are four types of messages:

Scan Message Description/Importance Level

INFOrmational For your information

WARNing Design can be produced, but you are alerted to problems

ERROR A design or cost cannot be produced for an item

FATAL Rare instance for extreme problems

You have the option to continue or stop the evaluation process (except in the case of FATAL errors, which stop the evaluation process). You should carefully review these and fix any problems before proceeding.

When the project evaluation is done, Aspen Capital Cost Estimator lists all errors found in the capital cost evaluation for your reference.


If you are using the default preferences, Aspen Capital Cost Estimator automatically displays reports in Icarus Editor when the evaluation is complete.

Note: You can select in Preferences not to have Icarus Editor automatically appear after the evaluation (see page X580H51X).

Reviewing Results in Icarus Editor Icarus Editor is a fully OLE-compliant, Multiple Document Interface (MDI) text editor program.

Accessing If you are using the default preferences, Aspen Capital Cost Estimator automatically displays evaluation reports in Icarus Editor immediately after you run a project evaluation. If you have selected not to automatically display results, you will need to complete the steps below to display evaluation reports in Icarus Editor. Even if you are using the default preferences, you may want to use the following procedure if the project was evaluated previously and has not changed since.

To display evaluation reports in Icarus Editor:

1 Click on the toolbar. – or – Click Capital Costs View on the View menu.


The Select Report Type To View dialog box appears.

2 Select the Evaluation Reports check box; then click OK. Icarus Editor opens displaying the evaluation reports.

The right-hand pane contains the reports. The left-hand pane contains a tree-structure Contents view that lets you jump to different sections.

Note: Click on the toolbar to turn the Contents view on and off (or click Contents on the View menu).

Printing a Single Section The Contents view also lets you print a single section, rather than the entire report.

To print a single section: 1 Right-click a section.


2 Click Print Barcharts.

Icarus Editor Toolbar

Click this to

New open a new document in the Document View

Open open an existing document

Save save current document to disk

File Properties view selected properties of current document

Print print the current document

Print Preview print preview the current document

Page Setup specify how the current document will be printed

Cut cut selected text to windows clipboard

Copy copy selected text to windows clipboard

Paste paste contents of windows clipboard into insertion location

Bold bold selected text

Italic italicize selected text

Underline underline selected text

Select Font specify font for selected text

Find (CTRL+F) find any text string within the current document

Preferences set and save your preferences

Toggle Contents turn OFF/ON the Contents View

Cascade display multiple documents cascaded

Tile Horizontal display multiple documents tiled horizontally

Tile Vertical display multiple documents tiled vertically

Help Contents display on-line help


Report Sections

Title Page The Title Page includes the following: • Estimate Base: financial quarter from which cost basis is

derived and date of Icarus Evaluation Engine (IEE). • IEE version number. • Run Date: Date and time that project evaluation was run. • Currency symbol used in the report. • Telephone numbers to call for technical support.

Aspen Capital Cost EstimatorVersion: 12.1

Estimate Base: 1st Quarter 2002 (IEE: 31.0)

May 25, 2002

Run Date: 26JUN02-16:57:49

Aspen Capital Cost Estimatoris a Product of: * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *

Aspen Technology/Icarus Office * Throughout this report *

600 Jefferson Plaza * the Symbol "USD" *

5th Floor * represents U.S. DOLLARS *

Rockville, MD 20852-1150 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *

U.S.A.

Telephone: 301-795-6800

Fax: 301-795-6801

In the United Kingdom: In Japan:

AspenTech Limited AspenTech Japan Co., Ltd.

Birkdale House, The Links Atlas Building

Birchwood 5 Ichibancho


Warrington WA3 7RB Chiyoda-Ku, Tokyo 102

United Kingdom Japan

Telephone: +44-192-584-4400 Telephone: +81-3-3262-1710

Fax: +44-192-584-4444 Fax: +81-3-3264-5425

Web: http://www.aspentech.com

Support: [email protected]

Contract Structure The Contract Structure section provides names of contractors and reporting arrangement.

Contents The Table of Contents lists section names and the page number on which each starts. The number of sections may vary depending on the number of report groups. If the project contains only one, then there will be only a single summary. If more than one, there will be a separate summary for each, plus a summary for the total project.

Project Summary The Project Summary provides an overview of project costs.


Project Data Sheet The Project Data Sheet lists items with separate columns showing user-entered values and system default values.


Project Schedule

Total Manpower Schedule The Total Manpower Schedule shows construction manpower loading based on the CPM Construction Schedule.

Ways to influence this schedule include: • Adjusting productivities, shifts per day, length of the

workweek using the General Rates specifications form and the Craft Rates specifications form. These forms are accessed in Project Basis view under Project Basis\Basis for Capital Costs\Construction Workforce.

• Indexing man-hours either at the Project level (Project Basis\Basis for Capital Costs\Indexing) or at the Area level.

The number of MEN PER DAY for each vertical bar is generated by summing the labor assigned to all the work items that fall within the period represented by that bar in the barchart.

Cashflow Summary The Cash Flow Summary shows total capital cost spent.


This barchart schedule assumes that the DESIGN ENG’G AND PROCUREMENT monies are already spent at the start of construction - the curve is not truly tied to the CPM schedule. During construction, capital is then spent for material, direct field labor, equipment rental and subcontract work, Home and Field Office, Start-up, and so on, as the cost is incurred. By the end of construction, the TOTAL,AMOUNT given in the Project Summary is indicated here.

Operating costs, such as start-up utilities, raw materials, initial catalyst charges, and so on, are not included.

Project Schedule Data Sheet The Project Schedule Data Sheet lists the fabrication and ship times for equipment items by class and provides barcharts of the following: • General Schedule: Balanced display of Basic and Detail

Engineering, Procurement and Construction (EPC).


• Engineering Schedule: Details for Basic and Detail Engineering and Procurement; summary for Construction.

• Construction Schedule: Details for Construction- others summarized.

• Contracts Schedule: Schedule for contractor(s). When a single contractor is performing all work, this schedule shows no new information.

Contract Summary The Contract Summary breaks costs down by contractor.


Summaries By Report Group Summaries By Report Group provides the direct material and labor costs and manhours by report group for all areas reporting to that group.

Area Lists of Equipment and Bulk Material For each Area, the Equipment and Bulk Material List is divided into three sections. First there is the Component List, followed by the Area Bulk Report, and finally the Area Data Sheet. Following the last Area of each Report Group, there are two more reports - the Report Group Summary and the Report Group Equipment Summary.

Appendix A- Detailed Bulk Material and Field Manpower Listing Appendix A lists the design and cost details for every component, whether system-generated or user-added. The results are reported in the sequence that the items appear in the Area tree diagram.

Appendix B- Bulk Material and Field Manpower Summary- by Report Group Appendix B consists of one summary of the material and manpower man-hours and cost for all direct costs in the project. There is one report per Report Group; if there is only one Report Group, then this report is eliminated. It is replaced by the project bill of material (see Appendix C description below).


Appendix C –Bulk Material and Field Manpower Summary - Total Project Appendix C is a project bill of material (BOM) providing a material and manpower summary for each plant bulk category. Due to the fact that the numbers are large, this is the best source of material costs and man-hours for calibration.

Appendix D – Direct Material and Manpower Summary by Major Account - Total Project Appendix D is a project bill of material (BOM) providing direct material and manpower summary by major account for the total project.

Appendix E – Units of Measure Data Sheet Appendix E lists the Icarus default units of measure as well as any user modifications.

Reviewing Results in Aspen Icarus Reporter

Accessing Aspen Icarus Reporter

To access Aspen Icarus Reporter:


– or –

Click Capital Costs View on the View menu.

The Select Report Type To View dialog box appears.


2 Keep Interactive Reports selected; then click OK.

Reporter imports and loads the reports from Aspen Capital Cost Estimator.

After the reports are loaded, the Aspen Icarus Reporter window appears.


Aspen Icarus Reporter Menu Bar

File Menu

Click this to

Import Data Import project reports. See page XX581H602XX for instructions. Run Report Run selected report. See pages XX582H578XX (Standard reports), XX583H595XX (Excel

reports), and XX584H589XX (HTML reports) for instructions. Open Workbook

Open the last Excel workbook created. See page XX585H599XX for instructions.

Create User Database

Export SQL database. See page XX586H603XX for instructions.

Exit Close Aspen Icarus Reporter.


Trend Menu

Click this to

Add Trend Data to Database

Add the trend data from the project reports currently loaded in Aspen Icarus Reporter to the trending database. See page XX587H600XX for instructions.

Create New Trend in Excel

Export trending database to Excel. See page XX588H600XX for instructions.

View Existing Trend Data

Open the trending data workbook in Excel. See “Data Trending,” pages XX589H599XX through XX590H602XX, for instructions.

Clear All Saved Trends

Clear the trending database. See page XX591H599XX for instructions.

Which Report Mode? Four report modes are available: Standard reports, HTML reports, Management reports, and Excel reports. All but Management reports present Capital Costs and Design and Basis reports. Management reports contains snapshots of project data frequently requested by project management.

Standard, HTML, and Excel reports do not just present the same data in different applications. Because of the differing capabilities of the applications, data is presented differently in each. The choice of mode may depend upon what you wish to do with the data at a particular time.

Standard Reports With Standard reports selected in the Report Mode section, the Reports section displays a tree-structure grouping of standard reports.

Report Descriptions Open the necessary category and sub-category folders and click on a report to display a brief description of that report in the Description section.


Note: See page X592H577XX for descriptions of all Standard reports.

Opening a Report Not all of the reports contain each of the features described in this user’s guide. For example, the Contents view only appears on reports with multiple sections. In order to see all the features described, select the Contractor – COA Summary report located in the following folder:

Capital Cost Reports\Direct Costs\COA Summaries

To open the selected report: • Do one of the following

• Click the Run Report button.

-or- • On the File menu, click Run Report.


-or- • Double-click on the report.

The report window appears.

Navigating If there are multiple sections, a tree-structure Contents view appears on the left side of the window, allowing you to jump to a section simply by clicking the section in the Contents.

The arrow buttons on the toolbar allow you to page through the report:

Next Page Previous Page

Last Page First Page

Since the last page of a report usually contains the totals, clicking the Last Page button is a convenient way to access them.

Magnification To change the magnification level: • Click in the Magnification box, then click the desired level

from the menu.


You can also click directly in the Magnification box (without clicking ) and then zoom in and out using the up and down arrow keys on your keyboard.

When viewing the report at large magnification, you may wish to hide the Contents view by clicking the Toggle Group Tree

button . This makes more room for the report.

Segregating a Cost Section If the cursor changes into a magnifying glass icon when placed over a cost section’s title or totals, you can double-click to open a separate tab window containing only that cost section.

For example, under Civil in the Contractor – COA Summaries report, the cursor changes into a magnifying glass when placed over the Concrete cost section’s title or totals.


Double-clicking on this cost section’s titles or totals opens a separate tab window.

Note: Here, the Concrete cost section is displayed in a separate tab window, where it can be viewed and printed apart from the rest of the report.

Searching To search the report:



2 Enter the text string for which you want to search and click Find Next.

The next instance of the text string is framed in red.

Printing To print the report:

1 Click on the toolbar. 2 The Print dialog box appears.

3 Make any desired changes to the default settings and click

OK.


List of Standard Reports


HTML Reports With HTML reports selected in the Report Mode section, the Reports section displays a tree-structure grouping of HTML reports.

Report Descriptions Open the necessary category and sub-category folders and click on a report to display a brief description of that report in the Description section.


Opening an HTML Report To open the selected report: 1 Do one of the following:




A status window tells you when the export is complete and asks if you would like to view the report now.

2 Click Yes.

Your browser displays the report.


Note: Generating the report as .htm file allows the report to be sent in an e-mail.

Management Reports When Management Reports is selected as the Report Mode, the Reports section displays a tree-structure grouping of Management reports. These reports are intended to serve as snapshots of the project scenario.

Opening a Management Report To open a Management report: • Select the report and do one of the following:




The Management Reports Viewer displays the report. Pictured below is the Detailed Weight Information report, one of the Piping reports in the Discipline folder.


Other reports, like the Equipment Cost (Total Cost) report shown below, show simply a bottom-line total.

Exporting Management Reports to Excel You can export Management reports to Excel. This is particularly useful for when you want to be able to e-mail the report.

To export a Management report to Excel: 1 Click Export to Excel on the Viewer’s File menu. 2 Reporter searches for the last Excel workbook to which you

exported a report. • If no existing workbook is found, Reporter asks you to specify

a worksheet name (see step 3) and creates a workbook – either DefaultWB.xls in the Reporter output folder (if this is your first export to Excel since last re-booting) or a workbook with the file and path name of the last workbook to which you exported since starting your computer.


• If an existing workbook is found, the Export to Excel Workbook dialog box appears, asking if you want to overwrite the existing workbook, append the report to the existing workbook, or create a new workbook.

Click To do this

Overwrite existing workbook

Reset the existing workbook with the selected report as the only worksheet; any previously created worksheets will be cleared.

Append to existing workbook

Add the report as another worksheet in the existing workbook; previously created worksheets will be retained.

Create new workbook Specify a new workbook in which the selected report will appear as a worksheet.

Clicking Create new workbook expands the dialog box to let you select a folder and enter a file name.


Note: Do not enter a file extension or period when entering a new workbook name. 3 Make your selection and click OK. 4 Enter a name for the worksheet.

5 Click OK.

The Export Status dialog box informs you when the export is done and asks if you would like to open the workbook now.


4 Click Yes to open the workbook.

Excel displays the report.

Excel Reports When you select Excel reports as the Report Mode, the Reports section displays a tree-structure grouping of Excel reports.

Report Descriptions You can have Aspen Icarus Reporter display a description of the selected Excel report.

To display a brief description of a report: 1 Open the necessary category and sub-category folders. 2 Click a report to display a brief description of that report in

the Description section.


Opening an Excel Report

To open a report: 1 Mark the checkbox next to the desired report.

You can mark multiple report checkboxes to open multiple reports.

Marking a folder’s checkbox will open all of the reports in the folder. 2 Click the Run Report button or click Run Report on the File

menu.

Reporter searches for the last Excel workbook to which you exported a report.


• If no existing workbook is found and this is your first export to Excel during this session, Reporter creates DefaultWB.xls in the Reporter output folder:

...Economic Evaluation V7.1\ic_cache\Reporter\Output • If no existing workbook is found, but you have exported from

Reporter to Excel since you last started you computer (to a file that’s since been moved or deleted), Reporter creates a workbook with the file and path name of the last workbook to which you exported.

• If an existing workbook is found, the Export to Excel Workbook dialog box appears, asking if you want to overwrite the existing workbook, append the report to the existing DefaultWB.xls workbook, or create a new workbook.

Click to do this

Overwrite existing workbook

Reset the existing workbook with the selected report as the only worksheet; any previously created worksheets will be cleared.

Append to existing workbook

Add the report as another worksheet in the existing workbook; previously created worksheets will be retained.

Create new workbook Specify a new workbook in which the selected report will appear as a worksheet.

Clicking Create new workbook expands the dialog box to let you enter a workbook path and name.


Note: Do not enter a file extension or period when entering a new workbook name. 3 After you make your selection, click OK. Excel opens a

workbook displaying the report.


Note: Exporting the report to an .xls file allows it to be sent in an e-mail

AutoFilter Several of the larger Excel reports generated by Aspen Capital Cost Estimator take advantage of the AutoFilter feature in Excel. In order to view a report that includes AutoFilter, open the following report:

Capital Cost Reports\Direct Costs\Item Summaries\Combined

When AutoFilter is available, clicking next to a column displays a list of all entries made in the column. Selecting an entry displays only rows that contain that entry in the column.

For example, clicking 105 – Misc. Item Allowance in the COA Description column of the Item Summary Combined report would display only accounts with Code of Account (COA) 105. • Clicking Top Ten displays only items that contain one of the

top ten most frequent entries. • Selecting Blanks (from the bottom of the list) displays only

rows that contain a blank cell in the column, while clicking NonBlanks displays only rows that contain a value in the column.


Opening Workbook without Running a Report To view the last workbook created without running a new report, click Open Workbook on the File menu.

Data Trending Data Trending facilitates comparison of scenarios by allowing you to review capital cost summaries of different scenarios in a single Excel workbook. If, for example, you created three different scenarios for a project, you could use the Data Trending feature to display the direct costs of each on one spreadsheet, with a separate row for each scenario.

Clearing Trending Database Since you only wish to compare certain scenarios, the first step is usually to clear the database used to populate the Excel trending workbook.

To clear the trending database: 1 On the Trend menu, click Clear All Saved Trends.


2 Click Yes to confirm clearing of the data.

The Trending Data Update dialog box tells when this is done.

3 Click OK.


Adding Trend Data to Database The next step is to add trend data to the database.

To add the current project reports’ trend data to the database: 1 On the Trend menu, click Add Trend Data to Database.

The Trending Data Update dialog box tells you when Reporter has finished adding the trend data.

2 Click OK.

You will need to add the trend data from the project reports of the other scenarios you are comparing. For each of the other scenarios, open the reports in Reporter and complete the Adding Trend Data to Database instructions above.

Using Reporter’s import function, you can open the other scenarios’ reports in Reporter without opening the scenarios in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator. See page XX593H602XX for instructions.

Creating a New Trend in Excel After you have added the trend data from the Capital Cost reports of the scenarios you are comparing, you are ready to create a new trend in Excel.

To create a new trend in Excel: 1 On the Trend menu, click Create New Trend in Excel.


The Export to Excel Trending Workbook dialog box gives you the choice of either appending the trend data to the existing file or creating a new file.

2 Make you selection and click OK.

The Export Trend Data into Excel dialog box appears. By default, all six capital cost categories are marked.

3 Clear any categories you wish to exclude from the workbook

and click OK.

The Export Status window tells you when the export is complete and asks if you would like to open the trending workbook now.

4 Click Yes.

Excel displays the trending workbook containing a spreadsheet for each of the capital cost categories. Each set of trend data


entered into the trending database is displayed on a separate row. (The workbooks for any categories excluded at the Export Trend Data into Excel dialog box are blank).

After having created the trending workbook, you can access it from Reporter by clicking View Existing Trend Data on the View menu.

Importing Data into Aspen Icarus Reporter When you have a project scenario open in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator and select Capital Costs (Interactive) from Aspen Capital Cost Estimator, Reporter automatically imports that project scenario’s Capital Cost reports as it opens.

However, once you’re at the Aspen Icarus Reporter window, you can import a project scenario’s Capital Cost reports without having the project scenario open in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator.

To import a Capital Cost report:

1 Click Import Data from the File menu.


The Import Selection dialog box appears.

2 Use the browse tree to locate the project scenario folder,

which should be at:

...Data\Archives_Aspen Capital Cost Estimator\[Project]\[Project Scenario]

After clicking the project scenario folder, PROJID should appear in the File set to import section. 3 Select PROJID and click Import.

Reporter imports the data. When complete, the selected scenario’s reports can be run from Reporter.

Creating a User Database You can export the Icarus SQL Database, listing the Relation attributes used by the Icarus Evaluation Engine (IEE), to a Microsoft Access Database (.mdb) file.

Note: Icarus Reference, Chapter 35, “Database Relations”, defines the Icarus Database Relations and the different attributes under each.

To create a user database: 1 Click Create User Database on the File menu.


Reporter searches for the last .mdb file it created.

If the file is not found or if this is your first database creation, the Create User Database dialog box appears with only one Export Option: Create New Workbook. The lower part of the dialog box provides fields for selecting a path and filename.

However, if the last created file is found, the Export Options also include Overwrite Existing Workbook. This option is marked by default, so the lower part of the dialog box is not visible until you mark the Create New Workbook checkbox.

2 Select a folder, enter a database name, and then click OK.

Reporter creates the .mdb file.

To review and work with the database: • Start Microsoft Access and open the .mdb file.


Reviewing Investment Analysis Note: Investment Analysis is only included in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator if you are licensed to use Icarus Process Evaluator (Aspen Process Economic Analyzer) or Analyzer and you select at startup to use one of them in the Aspen Capital Cost Estimator environment.

If you are using the default Preferences, Aspen Capital Cost Estimator automatically displays the four Investment Analysis spreadsheets in the Main Window after you run a project evaluation. You can set Preferences so that Aspen Capital Cost Estimator does not automatically display the spreadsheets, in which case you would have to select to view them as described below.

Viewing Investment Analysis To view the Investment Analysis: 1 Do one of the following:


–o – • Click Investment Analysis View on the View menu.

2 Use the tabs at the bottom of the window to move among the four spreadsheets.

Equipment Summary The Equipment Summary (EQUIP.ICS) contains a list of project components used in the analysis.


For each component, the summary contains the following information: Area Name The name of the operational unit

area.

Component Name The name of the project component.

Component Type The type symbol for the component.

Total Direct Cost The total direct material and labor costs associated with the project component (including installation bulks), in the project currency.

Project Summary Project Summary (PROJSUM.ICS) contains a project summary for the capital costs (equipment plus bulks) and schedule. This worksheet also includes operating unit costs (labor wage rates and utility unit costs), utility flow/use rates (steam/water flow rates, and so on) and operating and maintenance costs.


Project Summary Input Data The following information on the Project Summary spreadsheet is user-entered, except where noted:

Project Information

Project Name Aspen Capital Cost Estimator project name

Project Description

Brief description of Aspen Capital Cost Estimator project, from Project Properties

Analysis Date and Time

The date and time this analysis was performed

Simulator Type The name of the process simulator from which process data was imported

Simulator Version

The version of the process simulator

Simulator Report File

The name of the process simulator report file

Simulator Report Date

Date and time of the process simulator report file

Economic Analysis Type

The name of the Icarus system used for the evaluation

Aspen Capital Cost Estimator Version

Version number for Aspen Capital Cost Estimator system

Project Directory Directory path for the current Aspen Capital Cost Estimator project

Scenario Name Name of the current scenario (if applicable)

Scenario Description

Description of the current scenario, from Project Title in General Project Data

Capital Cost Evaluation Basis

Date Date of capital costs/schedule analysis


Country Country basis for the capital costs/schedule analysis

Units of Measure Units of Measure for analysis

Currency (Cost) Symbol

System currency symbol which depends on the selected country basis

Currency Conversion Rate

Conversion factor between user-selected currency to the currency used by the system internally for the selected Country basis. For example, if the US country basis is selected, the internal system currency is US Dollars. Therefore, all numbers will be reported in US Dollars. However, if a currency conversion rate of 1.5 is specified, all internal values will be multiplied by 1.5 and then reported

System Cost Base Date

The capital costs basis date of the system. The Adjusted Total Project Cost represents the calculated capital cost of the project (calculated at this base date) escalated to the Start Date of Engineering.

Project Type Project type identified in the standard basis specs

Design code Selected design code for equipment

Prepared By Identifier for the preparer of the process evaluator

Plant Location Location of the plant

Time Difference Between System Cost Base Date and Start Date for Engineering

Number of days between the date of the system’s Cost Base data (for example, first quarter, 2000) and the project’s start date for basic engineering.

User Currency Name

User assigned name for the currency

User Currency Description

User assigned description of the currency

User Currency Symbol

User assigned symbol of the currency. This is the symbol used for reporting the cost results in the reports.

Descriptions for the following parameters are provided in more detail under Investment Parameter specifications (page XX594H188XX).

Time Period

Period Description Duration of time

Operating Hours per Period

Number of hours in specified period

Number of Weeks per Period

Number of weeks in specified period

Number of Periods for Analysis

Set to 20 periods for investment analysis


Schedule

Start Date for Engineering

The beginning date for EPC (engineering, procurement, and construction)

Duration of EPC Phase

The calculated EPC duration in weeks

Length of Start-up Period

Number of weeks scheduled for start-up beyond the end of the EPC phase

Duration of Construction Phase

The calculated construction duration in weeks

Completion Date for Construction

The calendar date for the end of EPC

Capital Costs Parameter

Working Capital Percentage

Percentage of total capital expense per period required to operate the facility until the revenue from product sales is sufficient to cover costs.

Operating Costs Parameters Operating Supplies Indicates the lump-sum cost of operating

supplies.

Laboratory Charges Indicates the lump-sum cost of laboratory charges.

User Entered Operating Charges (as percentage)

Indicates the user-entered value for total operating charges.

Operating Charges (Percent of Operating Labor Costs)

Includes operating supplies and laboratory charges. If the user enters a lump-sum value for either “Operating Supplies” or “Laboratory Charges”, the addition of the two values will override the “User Entered Operating Charges”

Plant Overhead (Percent of Operating Labor and Maintenance Costs)

Consists of charges during production for services, facilities, payroll overhead, and so on

G and A Expenses (Percent of Subtotal Operating Costs)

General and administrative costs incurred during production such as administrative salaries/ expenses, R&D, product distribution and sales costs.

General Investment Parameters

Tax Rate The percent per period of earnings that must be paid to the government.

Desired Rate of Return

Indicates the desired (that is, user- entered) return rate, in percent per period, for the investment.

Economic Life of Project

Indicates the length of time in terms of periods over which capital costs will be depreciated.

Salvage Value The expected value of an asset at the end of its


(Fraction of Initial Capital Cost)

usable life for the company. The difference between an asset’s cost and its salvage value is the amount to be depreciated over the asset’s usable life.

Depreciation Method

There are four depreciation methods allowed in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator: Straight Line, Sum of the Digits, Double Declining (Balance), Accelerated Cost Recovery System (ACRS). See “Investment Parameters” in Chapter 3 for a detailed definition of each depreciation method.

Escalation Project Capital Escalation

Rate at which project capital expenses may increase expressed in percent per period. If the addition of Engineer-Procure-Construct (EPC) period and start-up period is greater than one whole period, Project Capital Escalation is used to escalate the capital expenses for periods beyond the first period.

Products Escalation Rate at which the sales revenue from products of the facility are to be escalated (increased) in terms of percent per period.

Raw Material Escalation

Rate at which the raw material costs of the facility are to be escalated (increased) in terms of percent per period.

Operating and Maintenance Labor

Rate at which the operating and maintenance costs of the facility are to be escalated (increased) in terms of Escalation percent per period. The operating labor costs include operators per shift and supervisory costs.

Utilities Escalation User-entered percentages reflecting the anticipated utility price increase each period.

Project Summary Output Data The following OUTPUT data is generated by Aspen Capital Cost Estimator : Project Results Summary

Total Project Capital Cost

The total capital cost investment needed for the project. If the calculated EPC period is more than a year, the capital costs expenditure will be spread out over the length of the EPC period.

Total Raw Materials Cost

The total raw material cost of the facility ex pressed in terms of cost per period.

Total Products Sales

The total product sales of the facility expressed in terms of cost per period.


Total Operating and Maintenance Labor Cost

The operating labor (including operators/shift and supervisors/shift) and maintenance labor costs in terms of cost per period. The maintenance cost includes maintenance labor and supplies.

Total Utilities Cost The total utilities usage cost expressed in cost per period.

Total Operating Cost

The total of raw material, utility, operating labor, maintenance, operating charges, plant overhead and G and A expenses.

Operating Labor Cost

Includes operators per shift and supervisors per shift costs.

Maintenance Cost Maintenance cost of the equipment including labor and materials.

Operating Charges Includes operating supplies and laboratory charges.

Plant Overhead Consists of charges during production for services, facilities, payroll overhead, and so on

Subtotal Operating Cost

Subtotal cost of raw materials, operating labor, utilities, maintenance, operating charges, and plant overhead.

G and A Cost General and administrative costs incurred during production. This is calculated as a percentage of the Subtotal Operating Costs.

The costs listed under Project Results Summary are broken down into individual elements under Project Capital Summary:

Project Capital Summary

Purchased Equipment

The total material cost of process equipment and quoted equipment cost items. Material cost is accounted for in the codes of account 100 - 299.

Equipment Setting The total construction labor cost for setting equipment in place.

Piping

Civil

Steel

Instrumentation

Electrical

Insulation

Paint

The cost reported for each of these items indicates the total material and construction labor cost calculated for the category. The above cost items may have originated from two sources:

Installation Bulks (please refer to Icarus Reference).

User: The user can add project components that create cost items in these categories. The project components may be in the following categories: Plant bulks, Site development and Buildings.

Other This item is the total of the following costs: design, engineering, and procurement costs; material charges (freight and taxes); and construction field indirect costs (fringe


benefits, burdens, consumables/small tools, insurance, equipment rental, field services, field office construction supervision, and plant start-up).

Subcontracts The total cost of subcontracted work. This cost item is normally zero in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator.

G and A Overheads

General and administrative costs associated with engineering, materials, and construction work.

Contract Fee The total cost of contract fees for engineering, material, construction, any subcontracted work.

Escalation The total capital costs escalation amount. This cost item is normally zero in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator.

Contingencies The additional costs required to bring this project to completion. In Aspen Capital Cost Estimator, this cost item is automatically calculated based on the project type and process complexity.

Total Project Cost The total project capital cost of the plant calculated by the Icarus Capital Costs Engine as of the “System Cost Base Date”.

Adjusted Total Capital Cost

Indicates the Total Project Cost (described above) adjusted to the Start of Basic Engineering. The Total Project Cost is escalated (using the Project Capital Escalation Parameter) from the system Cost Base date to the start date of basic engineering.

Raw Material Costs and Product Sales

Raw Materials Cost per Hour

Total raw material usage cost per hour specified in the Raw Material Specifications file.


Total cost of raw materials per period. This number is generated by multiplying Raw

Products Sales per Hour

Total produced product sales expressed in cost per hour.

Total Products Sales Total product sales per period. This number is generated by multiplying Products Sales per Hour by Operating Hours per Period.

Main Product Name The main product of the plant is considered to be the product which produces the largest sales figure per period. This field contains the description of the main product (assigned by the user).

Main Product Rate The production rate of the main product. Main Product Unit Cost

The unit cost rate of the main product.


Main Product The production basis (or unit of measure) of Production Basis the main product (LB, GALLONS, and so on).

Main Product Rate per Period

The production rate of the main product per period .

Main Product Sales The total sales figure of the main product per period.

By-product Sales The total sales figure per period of the by- products (that is,, products other than the main product of the plant).

Operating Labor and Maintenance Costs

Operating Labor

Operators per Shift The number of operators per shift per hour necessary to operate the plant.

Unit Cost The wage rate for each operator expressed in cost per operator per shift.

Total Operating Labor Cost

Total operating labor cost obtained by multiplying number of operators per shift by the unit cost and by Operating Hours per Period.

Maintenance

Cost/8000 Hours The cost of maintaining the facility equipment for 8000 hours of operation of the facility.

Total Maintenance Cost

The total maintenance cost of the facility per period.

Supervision

Supervisors per Shift The number of supervisors per shift per hour necessary to oversee personnel who operate the facility.

Unit Cost The wage rate for each supervisor expressed in cost per supervisors per shift.

Total Supervision Cost

Total supervising labor cost obtained by multiplying number of supervisors per shift by the unit cost and by Operating Hours per Period.

Utilities Costs

The utility cost breakdown is given below for electricity, potable water, fuel and instrument air as well as user defined process utilities such as steam. The description of each utility includes:

Rate The rate of use of the utility in terms of amount per hour.

Unit Cost The unit cost of the utility in cost per amount.

Total Cost The total cost of the utility in cost per period.


Cashflow Cashflow (CASHFLOW.ICS) calculates the Net Present Value (NPV), Internal Rate of Return (IRR), Profitability Index (PI), payback period, and so on

The spreadsheet displays the cashflow information shown by period. The beginning part of the spreadsheet contains data/results carried over from the Project Summary (PROJSUM.ICS) spreadsheet.

Item Description

TW Number of Weeks per Period

T Number of Periods for Analysis

DTEPC Duration of EPC Phase

DT Duration of EPC Phase and Startup

WORKP Working Capital Percentage

OPCHG Operating Charges

PLANTOVH Plant Overhead

CAPT Total Project Cost


RAWT Total Raw Material Cost

PRODT Total Product Sales

OPMT Total Operating Labor and Maintenance Cost

UTILT Total Utilities Cost

ROR Desired Rate of Return/Interest Rate

AF ROR Annuity Factor

TAXR Tax Rate

IF ROR Interest Factor

ECONLIFE Economic Life of Project

SALVAL Salvage Value (Percent of Initial Capital Cost)

DEPMETH Depreciation Method

DEPMETHN Depreciation Method Id

ESCAP Project Capital Escalation

ESPROD Products Escalation

ESRAW Raw Material Escalation

ESLAB Operating and Maintenance Labor Escalation

ESUT Utilities Escalation

START Start Period for Plant Startup

PODE Desired Payout Period (excluding EPC and Startup Phases). Reserved for future use.

POD Desired Payout Period: Reserved for future use.

DESRET Desired Return on Project for Sales Forecasting: Reserved for future use.

END End Period for Economic Life of Project.

GA G and A Expenses.

DTEP Duration of EP Phase before Start of Construction.

OP Total Operating Labor Cost.

MT Total Maintenance Cost.

Sales


A number will appear in this category only after the time allotted for all prior phases (engineering, procurement, construction and startup phases) has expired.

SP (Products Sales)

The total products sales value per period calculated in PROJSUM.ICS.

SPF (ForecastedSales Annuity Factor)

Reserved for future use.

SF (ForecastedSales)

Reserved for future use.

S (Total Sales)

Indicates the amount received per period from sold products. This number is either SP or SF.


Expenses

Includes both capital and operating expenditures per period listed below.

CAP (Capital Costs)

Indicates, by period, total funds spent prior to startup.

Unescalated Cumulative Capital Cost: Indicates the total capital costs spent through the current period. This is based on the Total Project Capital Cost in PROJSUM.ICS.

Capital Cost: Indicates, by period, the amount of initial, non-variable costs associated with the project. This number is based on the Total Project Capital Cost found in PROJSUM.ICS.

Cumulative Capital Cost: Indicates capital expenditures through period n. For example, the number in period 4 represents the total capital expenditures beginning in period 1 and ending in period 4.

Working: Indicates the amount required to operate the facility before the revenue from product sales is sufficient to cover costs. Working Capital is a lump-sum amount which takes effect during the start-up period. It is escalated at rate equal to the Project Capital Escalation rate.

OP (OperatingCosts)

Indicates, by period, the total expenditure on the following items necessary to keep the facility operating: Raw Materials, Operating Labor Cost, Maintenance Cost, Utilities, Operating Charges, Plant Overhead, Subtotal Operating Costs, and G and A Costs. This number is the Total Operating Cost imported from PROJSUM.ICS and entered in this field after capital expenditures cease.


(R)Revenue

Indicates, by period, the amount of money available after capital and operating expenses have been paid. This number is obtained by subtracting Capital Costs and Operating Costs from Sales.

DEP Indicates the amount by which the value of the capital cost decreases each period. The Total Project Capital Cost is depreciated, via the chosen depreciation method, over the useful Economic Life of the facility. The Straight Line Method assumes that the item will depreciate by a constant amount over its Economic life. When the Sum of the Years Method is used, the depreciation expense decreases during each year of the project’s useful life. When the Double Declining Balance Method is used, the project is depreciated in geometric increments. The Accelerated Cost Recovery System assumes that the project begins operating in the second half of the first year, rather than in the beginning of the first year.

E Indicates the funds available after all expenses have been paid. This number is obtained by subtracting the Depreciation and the Interest Expenses from the Revenue.

TAX Indicates amount owed to the government. This number is obtained by multiplying the tax rate by Earnings Before Taxes.

NE Indicates the funds available after taxes have been paid. This number is obtained by subtracting the Taxes from the Earnings Before Taxes.

TED Indicates total cash available from project. This number is computed by adding the Depreciation Expense to the Net Earnings. Since the depreciation expense is a non-cash expense (no cash actually leaves the facility in order to pay the depreciation expense) adding the depreciation to the net earnings gives the total cash flow obtained from the project. Inclusion of the Depreciation Expenses reduces the amount of taxable income.

TEX Specifies the total expenses of the project including capital, operating, and any interest expense.

FVI Sums the Sales received through period n and indicates what the Sales would be if they had been received in the current period. For example, the value in period 4 is what the sales in periods 1-4 would have been if all of these funds had been received in period 4.


PVI Indicates the current worth of all the cash received through period n. For example, the number in period 4 represents the value that the sales generated in periods 1 through 4 would be if those sales were received in the first period. This number is obtained by summing all of sales from prior time periods adding this amount to sales in the current time period. Using the specified interest rate, this total is then discounted back to the first time period.

PVOS If the user enters a number for PODE, this number indicates the current worth of all of the cash paid through period n.

PVOP Indicates the current worth of all of the cash paid through period n. For example, the number in period 4 represents the value that the expenses paid in periods 1 through 4 would be if those expenses were paid in the first period. This number is obtained by summing all of the outflows (Capital Costs, Operating Costs, Interest Expense) from prior time periods and adding this amount to the outflows in the current period. Using the specified interest rate, this total is then discounted back to the first time period .

PVO Represents PVOS or PVOP depending on whether or not you entered a desired payout period. If you entered a desired payout period, the basis for the cash outflow calculation is the Forecasted Sales. Otherwise, the basis is Product Sales.

PV Indicates the present worth of the Total Earnings received in the current period. For example, the number in period 4 represents the value that the Total Earnings generated in period 4 discounted back to the first time period.

Final results are shown below:

NPV Indicates the current worth of all the Net Earnings received through period n. For example, the number in period 4 represents the value that the Net Earnings generated in periods 1 through 4 if those earnings were received in the first period. This number is obtained by summing all of the Net Earnings from prior time periods and adding this amount to the Net Earnings in the current time period. Using the specified interest rate, this total is then discounted back to the first time period. The sign of this value determines the analysis result. If, in a certain period, the sign of the net present value is negative, then the proposed


investment appears not to be profitable, thus far. For example, if the sign of the net preset value is negative in period 3, then the project does not appear to be profitable during periods 1, 2, and 3. However, if the sign is positive, then the project appears to be profitable, from period 3 onward. If the net present value equals zero, then the project does not incur any losses or gains (break-even point).

IRR Is the rate at which the present value of all cash flows is zero. It is also known as the Discounted Cash-Flow Rate of Return. This value is calculated at the “End Period for Economic Life of Project” (that is,, “Economic Life of Project” and considering the length of EPC and Startup Period). At the “End Period for Economic Life of Project”, it is assumed the salvage value of the plant and the working capital are recouped. IRR is the after-tax interest rate at which the organization can borrow funds and break even at the end of the project life.

MIRR Indicates the profitability of the project. The internal rate of return is the interest rate which equates the present value of a project’s expected cash inflows to the present value of the project’s expected costs (or outflows). The internal rate of return for each period is calculated by dividing the Present Value of Cumulative Inflows by the Present Value of Cumulative Outflows and raising this to a power and multiplied by 100. Two criteria are critical in evaluating the internal rate of return. First, if the sign of the rate of return is negative, the project appears not to be profitable. If the sign is positive, then the project appears to be profitable. If the rate of return equals zero then the project incurs no losses or gains (break-even point). In addition, if the rate of return is greater than the rate which could be obtained from other opportunities (that is,, investing in a bank), then the project probably should be undertaken.

NRR Indicates the profitability of the project. The net rate of return for each period is calculated by dividing the Net Present Value by the Present Value of Cumulative Outflows and then multiplying the result by 100.

PO Represents the expected number of years required to recover the original investment in the project. This row will indicate the length of time that the facility needs to operate in order to recover the initial capital investment (total capital cost plus working capital). If a number is entered for the Desired Payout Period, the spreadsheet will determine the amount of Sales necessary to meet this desired payout.


ARR Measures a project’s contribution to the firm’s net income. This number is the ratio of the project’s Average Annual Expected Net Income to its Average Investment. For example, the Average Annual Expected Net Income for the fourth period is determined by summing net earnings from periods 1 through 4 and divided by 4. The Average Investment is determined by finding the Salvage Value, and adding this number to the Total Project Cost and dividing this total by 2. If the accounting rate of return is greater than one, then this is an indication that the project might be a profitable undertaking. If the sign is negative, then the project does not appear to be profitable. If this number equals zero then the project incurs no losses or gains (break-even point).

PI The profitability index shows the relative profitability of any project; it shows the present value of the benefits relative to the present value of the costs. For each period, this number is computed by dividing the Present Value of the Cumulative Cash Inflows by the Present Value of the Cumulative Cash Outflows. If the profitability index is greater than one, then the project appears to be profitable. If this index is less than one, then the project appears not to be profitable. If this number equals zero then the project incurs no losses or gains (break-even point).

Analysis Analysis results are shown by period. “( - )” indicates the project in the current period appears unprofitable, while “0” indicates break-even status.

Depreciation Calculations

This section presents details on the calculation of depreciation.

Executive Summary Executive Summary (EXECSUM.ICS) contains a project summary intended to be reviewed by executives and other business decision makers.


It contains the following information:

PROJECT NAME

Aspen Capital Cost Estimator project name

CAPACITY Capacity of plant for major product

PLANT LOCATION

Location of plant

BRIEF DESCRIPTION

Brief description of project, from Project Properties

SCHEDULE


The beginning date for EPC (engineering, procurement, and construction)

Duration of EPC Phase

The calculated EPC duration in weeks


The calendar date for the end of EPC

Length of Start-up Period

Number of weeks scheduled for start-up beyond the end of the EPC phase


INVESTMENT

Currency Conversion

Conversion factor between user-selected currency to the currency used by the system internally for the selected Country basis. For example, if the US country basis is selected, the internal system currency is US Dollars. Therefore, all numbers will be reported in US Dollars. However, if a currency conversion rate of 1.5 is specified, all internal values will be multiplied by 1.5 and then reported

Total Project Capital

The total capital cost investment needed for the project. If the calculated EPC period is more than a year, the capital costs expenditure will be spread out over the length of the EPC period

Total Operating Cost

The total of raw material, utility, operating labor, maintenance, operating charges, plant overhead and G and A expenses


The total raw material cost of the facility expressed in terms of cost per year

Total Utilities Cost

The total utilities usage cost expressed in terms of cost per year

Total Product Sales

The total product sales of the facility expressed in terms of cost per year

Desired Rate of Return

Desired rate of return expressed in terms of percent per year.

PROJECT INFORMATION


Simulator Type

The name of the process simulator from which process data was imported

Version The version of the process simulator

Report File The file name of the process simulator report file

Report Date Date and time of the process simulator report file

Economic Analysis Type

The name of the Icarus system used for the evaluation

Version Version number of the Icarus system.

System Cost Base Date

The capital costs basis date of the system. The Adjusted Total Project Cost represents the calculated capital cost of the project (calculated at this base date) escalated to the Start Date of Engineering.

Project Directory

Directory path for the current Aspen Capital Cost Estimator project

Analysis Date Date investment analysis was run.

Country basis Country basis for the capital costs/schedule analysis

Project Type Project type identified in General Specs

Design code Selected design code for equipment

Prepared By Identifier for the preparer of the process evaluator


Using the Reporting Assistant The Reporting Assistant feature lets you create your own customized report spreadsheets, combining information from all other Icarus generated spreadsheets.

To develop a customized spreadsheet file and template: 1 On the Tools menu, click Options and then Reporting

Assistant.

The Reporting Assistant Options dialog box appears.

2 On the Report File tab view, click New. 3 In the Save As dialog box, type a name for the report file

that will contain your customized spreadsheet. For example, type “Custom” as shown below.


3 Click Save. 4 Switch to the Report Templates tab view.

5 In the Template Files section, click New. 6 In the Save As dialog box, type a name for the template file

(for example, “summary”) and click Save.


Note: This example creates a reporting template for future use called Summary.tra. 7 In the Template Entries section, click New Entry. In the

Column Label field, enter a label (for example, “Project Name”) for the first column on your custom report spreadsheet. The Display Column box should automatically display “1”.

8 The Entry Definition section defines the data to be entered in the above column. Select a file name in the Source box, then enter the column and row of the source data. For example, in the figure below, the contents of Column C, Row 8 of Project.ics has been specified to appear in the customized report spreadsheet’s Project Name column.


9 Follow the same procedure (steps 7 - 8) to add more entries. You can use a variety of sources. For example, adding the following entries will result in a report template that uses all three of the previously discussed .ics files as sources.

Column Label Display Column Source

Source Column Source Row

Project Name 1 projsum.ics C 8


2 projsum.ics C 61

Tax Rate 3 projsum.ics C 112

Purchased Equipment Cost

4 projsum.ics C 172

Total Project Cost 5 cashflow.ics C 14

Total Maintenance Cost

6 cashflow.ics C 40


7 execsum.ics B 17

10 When all the template entries are added, return to the Report File tab view. To the right of the Template File field, click Browse.

11 Select the newly created template file (for example, Summary.tra) and click Open.

12 Click OK to exit the Reporting Assistant Options dialog box.

Generating the Custom Report

To generate a report developed in Reporting Assistant: 1 Run a project evaluation. 2 On the Run menu, click Add Entry for Reporting

Assistant.

Aspen Capital Cost Estimator generates the report based upon the template created in the Reporting Assistant. The data that was entered under List of Entries on the Reporting Assistant Options dialog box appears as columns in the spreadsheet.


Every time Add Entry for Reporting Assistant is selected, the latest data is entered on the bottom row of the report. This way, you can compare results.

Item Evaluation Aspen Capital Cost Estimator lets you run an evaluation on a single component and view an Item Report. The type of Item Report displayed can be selected in Preferences (see page XX595H52XX).

To run an item evaluation and display the Item Report: 1 Right-click on the component in either Project Explorer or the

List view, and then click Evaluate Item on the pop-up menu.

Aspen Capital Cost Estimator runs the item evaluation. 2 Right-click on the component and click Item Report on the

pop-up menu.

You can also click the Evaluate button on the Component Specifications form to run the item evaluation and display the Item Report.

Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays the Item Report in the Main Window.


Note: If the evaluation has already been run, you only have to select Item Report.

You can include multiple components in the Item Report: on the List view (area level), select the desired components, right-click on one of the components, and click Item Report on the pop-up window. The resulting Item Report lists individually the summary data (cost or sizing) for each selected component.

Automatic Item Evaluation You can have Aspen Capital Cost Estimator automatically run an item evaluation whenever you click OK or Apply on a Component Specifications form.

To turn automatic item evaluation on and off: 1 On the Tools menu, point to Options. 2 On the Options sub-menu, a check appears next to

Automatic Item Evaluation when the feature is turned on. Clicking Automatic Item Evaluation turns the feature on and off.


Sample Item Report The following Item Report is for a floating head shell and tube heat exchanger with “Example” as its item description


Sample Item Report (continued)

636 11 Introducing IPS

11 Introducing IPS

ICARUS Project Scheduler (IPS) is the intelligent scheduling interface between Aspen Capital Cost Estimatorand Primavera Enterprise Project Manager (P3E). IPS creates complete P3E project networks, including all of the activities, resources, and durations that represent the engineering and construction work contained in your Aspen Capital Cost Estimatorproject estimate.

IPS provides three types of networks, AREA, ITEM and FULL.

AREA - Summary activity for all similar components per area

IPS will generate a concise, easy-to-manipulate, summary bar chart schedule with a detailed overview of the engineering, procurement and a summary overview of construction phases of the project.

ITEM - One summary activity per major code of accounts (COA) for each component

IPS will generate a concise, easy-to-manipulate, summary bar chart schedule similar to AREA type except in the construction phase it will generate one summary activity per major COA for each component in an area.

FULL - Detailed list of activities for each component

IPS will generate a detailed overview of engineering, procurement, and detailed installation tasks in each bulk account (piping, steel, civil etc.) for each project component.

Depending on your need, IPS can present you with a P3E project showing summary tasks to more detailed construction installation tasks. The network developed from IPS contains

11 Introducing IPS 637

many chains of activities and adapts them dynamically to the scope of your Aspen Capital Cost Estimator project. Relationships are re-evaluated based on actual tasks to be performed as identified in the estimate. You can also make any desired modifications to condense or delete activities, add or delete relationships to activities, and/or change durations for activities using options in the IPS Project Schedule Settings.

IPS will jump-start your effort by providing your planning staff with the opportunity to benefit from engineering knowledge and project scope data previously validated by the Aspen Capital Cost Estimatorestimate. Additional benefits can be derived by configuring the estimators’ data to include the planner’s recommendations for duration adjustments, delivery times, and parallel work areas.

638 12 Getting Started With IPS

12 Getting Started With IPS

Starting Icarus Project Scheduler After completing the installation, you can start IPS.

To start IPS: 1 Click the Windows Start button. 2 Point to Programs and then to AspenTech.

3 Point to Aspen Engineering Suite and then to Economic

Evaluation V7.1. On the Economic Evaluation V7.1 menu, click Aspen Icarus Project Scheduler 2006.5.

IPS starts. The Main Window, empty because no project is open, appears on the left. The Palette appears in the upper-right and the Properties Window appears in the lower-right.

12 Getting Started With IPS 639

Note: You can change the position of the Main Window, Palette, and Properties Window, as explained under Customizing the Interface Arrangement on page XXX596H39XXX.

Starting a Project Scenario Note: Viewing the sample project scenario provided with IPS before creating a new one will allow you to familiarize yourself with IPS without having to fill out specifications. To open the sample project, follow the instructions under “Opening an Existing Project Scenario”.


Creating a New Project Scenario

To create a new project scenario: 1 On the File menu, click New.

–or–

Click on the toolbar.

2 Select a Aspen Capital Cost Estimator project as a basis for a new IPS project from the dialog box.

3 In order to schedule a project in IPS, it is necessary to have a developed and evaluated Aspen Capital Cost Estimator Project scenario available. If you do not have an Aspen Capital Cost Estimatorproject scenario available, use Aspen Capital Cost Estimatorto develop and evaluate a full project. (Without a pre-existing, evaluated Aspen Capital Cost Estimator project, it is not possible to schedule using IPS.) Select an existing


Aspen Capital Cost Estimator project and scenario, and click OK, a Create New Project dialog box appears. Enter a new project name,long filenames are accepted, including spaces. However, punctuation marks, such as question marks (?), exclamation points (!), tildes (~), and asterisks (*), are not allowed.


This is the name of the scenario within the project. As with the Project Name, long filenames are accepted, including spaces, while punctuation marks, such as question marks (?), exclamation points (!), tildes (~), and asterisks (*) are not allowed.

If you do not enter a Scenario Name, IPS uses “BaseCase” as the default. 5 Click OK.



6 Enter a Project Description. The description can be up to 500 characters in length and can be comprised of letters, numbers, and punctuation. You can enter or revise the description later on the Project Properties form accessed from the Project Basis view ().

Opening an Existing Project Scenario To open an existing project scenario: 1 On the File menu, click Open.

–or–

Click on the toolbar.

The Open Existing Project dialog box appears. 2 Click the project scenario you want to open; then click OK.

Creating a Primavera Schedule For both IPS and Aspen Capital Cost Estimator/IPS, the primary step towards scheduling a project involves clicking the Run | Project Scheduler button as shown below.

Upon completion of loading the Aspen scheduling engine results into the Primavera database, the P3E (or P3E/C for Construction)


interface is launched automatically. You must enter the password as shown in the next figure.

Upon entering the password, the primavera project manager screen “Select Project Portfolio” appears. Select the “Open Existing Project” button and choose the appropriate project from the P3E project list. (IPS creates P3E projects with titles specified in the Project Basis View using the IPS project schedule settings ->Schedule Appearance Adjustments -> Title form). This brings up the Project Manager “Home” screen where the user may select the activities button in the left hand pane to arrive at a schedule layout as shown in the subsequent page.


Navigating the Schedule in P3E It is possible to view the predecessors, successors, resources, and activity codes under the activity layout using the Show/Hide Bottom Layout icon on the P3E activity pane. A number of example layouts are provided in the AspenTech\ Economic Evaluation V7.1 \Program\Schedule folder; these can be imported by pressing the Layout dropdown button in the activities screen. These layouts are named Aspen Icarus ---.plf. In a similar manner, a number of standard reports have been created and placed in the AspenTech\Economic Evaluation V7.1\Program\Reports directory. These reports (.ERP files) may be imported into P3E using the Tools | Reports | Reports menu function on the P3E activities screen. Once the P3E Reports screen appears, right click on the Report Name button to locate and import the desired report. These reports can be run using the P3E database.

Developing Schedule Basis Libraries Development of the Icarus Project Scheduler settings input is not a trivial task. To facilitate reuse of prepared input models, you can use the library option. Outside a project, it is possible to create a “Project Scheduler” library. As shown below, use the Library tab to create different prepared input models.


Selecting a Project Scheduler Library, brings up the IPS input tree structure, which can be edited with the input forms described earlier. Right-clicking on the Default file allows editing and/or duplication into user customized library files.

Selecting a Schedule Basis inside a Project After an IPS basis is created, it can be used inside a project to load company specific data. Inside a project, right-clicking on the IPS project schedule settings brings up a list of IPS basis files that have been created. Selecting the appropriate basis file will lead to the reuse of previously generated IPS input data. Use of a standardized IPS basis, which can be company-specific, will lead to rapid schedule generation.


Understanding the Icarus Interface The Icarus interface lets you see multiple windows and documents. You can customize the interface arrangement. Refer to Getting Started in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator User Guide for details.

650 13 IPS Project Schedule Settings

13 IPS Project Schedule Settings

IPS Project Schedule Settings Note: IPS Project Schedule Settings are only included in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator if you are licensed to use Aspen Icarus Project Scheduler (IPS). You need to create a Aspen Capital Cost Estimator project with Project Execution Schedule Settings and Evaluate the project in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator before you can open the project in the IPS user interface.

If you are licensed to use Aspen Icarus Project Scheduler (IPS) and selected to use IPS in the Aspen Capital Cost Estimator environment at startup or start the IPS product separately, the IPS Project Schedule Settings folder is included in the Project Explorer’s Basis view.

The Project Schedule Settings discussed in this section lets you make adjustments to the Primavera Enterprise schedules produced by Aspen Capital Cost Estimator.

13 IPS Project Schedule Settings 651

Changes made to the IPS Project Schedule Settings will be reflected in the scheduling reports generated for display in Primavera. The following are descriptions of the settings.

Schedule Appearance Adjustments

Title

To enter a project schedule title to replace the system-generated title: 1 Double-click Title (or Right-click and click Edit on the pop-up

menu ). 2 Enter a title, up to 60 characters.

3 Click Apply.


Note: Regardless of the IPS Project/Scenario Name, any title entries made here will become, by default, the P3E project name.

Description Modification - Engineering

To modify an engineering activity description: 1 Double-click on Engineering (or Right-click and click Edit

on the pop-up menu).

If you have not previously entered a description modification, there should be one blank column (Item 1). If it has already been filled-in, click Add to add a new column in which to enter a modification. 2 Select an activity or group of activities for which the


The parts of the Activity Number are broken up into the fields under ACTIVITY NUMBER. Activity Numbers are listed in Appendix A have 10 characters. If you want to modify a group of activities, you can enter “wildcard” asterisks in some fields. At least one of the fields (besides the two preset fields) must contain numbers.


Note: See Appendix A for a list of Activity Numbers. − Preset engineering field 1


− Engineering phase The fourth character of the Activity Number indicates the major engineering phase: 0 – Basic engineering phase 1 – Detail engineering phase 2 – Procurement phase To select all phases, enter an asterisk (*).

− Engineering contractor number The fifth and sixth characters of the Activity Number indicate the engineering contract number. For fixed project-level activities, these characters will be “00”. The engineering contract number is determined based on your specifications for contractors under Basis for Capital Costs in the Project Basis (see ). It must be a number between 01 and 40. If all engineering contractor numbers are to be selected, enter two asterisks (**).

− Account group number The seventh character of the Activity Number indicates the account group number. It is derived from the first character of the Code of Accounts. 0, 1, 2– Equipment or general 3– Piping 4– Civil 5– Steelwork 6– Instrumentation 7– Electrical

8 – Insulation 9– Painting If all account groups are to be selected for modification, enter one asterisk (*).

− Preset engineering field 2 The eighth character of the Activity Number is fixed and the same for all activities. It is always “0”.

− Sequence in account group number The ninth and tenth numbers provide sequential grouping within the major hierarchy of the first eight characters. If all numbers within a sequence group are to be selected, enter two asterisks (**).

Note: where applicable, the seventh and ninth characters of the Activity Number indicate the process equipment class (01-26). Equipment classes are defined in Appendix C.


Exception: where applicable, the seventh and ninth characters of the Activity Number indicate the process equipment class (01-26). Equipment classes are defined in Appendix C.


4 If you are modifying the activity description, enter the new description in the Engg. activity description field (up to 32 characters).



7 Click Apply/Ok when done to commit the changes. Click Cancel to close the form without committing the changes.

Description Modification – Construction

To modify a construction activity description: 1 Double-click on Construction (or Right-click and click Edit

on the pop-up menu).

If you have not previously entered a description modification, there should be one blank item column (Item 1). If it has already been filled-in, click Add to add a new item column in which to enter a modification.


2 Select an activity or group of activities for which the description modification is to be made. This is done by specifying all or part of the Activity Number. The Activity Number is broken up into the fields under ACTIVITY NUMBER. Construction Activity Numbers are listed in Appendix B have 12 characters. If you want to modify a group of activities, you can enter “wildcard” asterisks in some fields. However, at least one of the fields must contain numbers. − Area number


− Identification number The third through fifth characters contain the user-specified reference number from the specifications form for equipment items and plant bulks. For substations, the fourth and fifth characters contain the substation reference number (01-99) specified by the user or, if not specified, the System default reference number of 00. If all reference

numbers are to be selected, enter three asterisks (***). − Equipment type

The sixth and seventh characters contain the Equipment Code. See Appendix D for Equipment Code definitions. All other activities have a fixed identifier in positions six and seven of the activity number, as listed in Activity Numbering Conventions table in Appendix B. Enter two asterisks (**) if all Equipment Type numbers are to be selected.

− Account group number The eighth character, the account group number, refers to the type of work performed in the activity. The account group number combined with the account code (in the field below), form the three-character code by which the construction and site development activities are listed in Appendix B. If all account group numbers are to be selected, enter an asterisk (*).

− Account code Enter the ninth and tenth digits of the Activity Code for the activities to be selected for modification (that is,, excluding the first character, which is the

Account Group number, above). If all Activity Codes are to be selected, enter two asterisks (**).

− Contractor number The eleventh and twelth characters are the contractor numbers. If all contractors are to be selected, enter two asterisks (**).


4 If you are modifying the activity description, enter the new description in the Constr. activity description field (up to 32 characters).

See page Appendix D for the Equipment Code definitions.

The construction activities are listed in Appendix B, by the last three characters of the Activity Number. These last three characters form the account group number and account code.





Schedule Adjustments by Duration The activity duration and construction crew size are interrelated, such that an adjustment to the duration will cause an inversely proportional adjustment to the activity crew size, and vice versa. You may specify either a duration adjustment, a maximum crew size, a minimum crew size, or all three. If a conflict occurs, the crew size adjustment will override the duration adjustment.

If not adjusted, durations are calculated for each activity based on the type of activity and associated direct construction man-hours.

Crew Size You can adjust the system activity durations by entering minimum/maximum crew sizes for various construction activities within each account group.

To adjust crew size: 1 Double-click on Crew Size (or Right-click and click Edit on

the pop-up menu).


2 Specify minimum and maximum crew sizes for each construction crew type.


Crafts The Craft Adjustments form lets you modify the system-defined crafts. The craft code and craft description may be completely replaced by a user-defined code and description.

In addition, the maximum craft pool sizes may be modified as required. Modifying the craft pool sizes will affect the activity durations and the overall job durations.

To adjust a craft: 1 Double-click on Crafts (or Right-click and click Edit on the

pop-up menu). 2 Select the craft to be adjusted by entering the System craft

code. See Icarus Reference, Chapter 30, for lists of craft codes by Country Base.

3 Enter a numeric (01-99) User craft code to substitute for the preceding System craft code.


Note: If you specify a craft code already in use (that is,, a system craft code or a previously added user craft code), Aspen Capital Cost Estimator will combine all pool sizes and resource requirements for the specified craft code and the existing code. 4 Enter a description for the craft in the User craft

description field, up to 20 characters. 5 Enter the number of men in the user craft pool or enter an

adjustment relative to the system craft pool size. The system craft pool size is calculated based on the system craft man--hours and schedule duration.

6 Enter a 4-character user craft symbol. If nothing is entered, the system craft symbol is used.

7 To enter another adjustment, click Add. This adds another

column where you can repeat the process. 8 Click Apply/Ok when done to commit the changes. Click

Cancel to close the form without committing the changes.

Durations The engineering, construction, and procurement duration forms can be used to adjust durations by percentage.

Engineering • Engineering Duration Adjustments

You may enter a percentage adjustment to the durations calculated by the system for Basic Engineering, Detail Engineering, and/or Procurement.

• Client Review Period (Future Implementation)


You can use the Basic engineering review period field to set the duration of Activity 0000003013, “CLIENT APPROVAL-ESTIM&SCHED”. Since all Detail Engineering activities are preceded, directly or indirectly, by this activity, you may impose a delay of any duration on the continuation of engineering activity. This effectively breaks up the work flow to simulate, for example, budget approval delay.

Construction

You may enter a percentage adjustment to the durations calculated by the system for nine different construction activities. Any change in activity duration will cause a corresponding change in activity resource (crew).

Procurement

For each equipment group, you may enter the number of weeks needed to fabricate and ship the equipment to the site after vendor data approval.


If you make no adjustment, Aspen Capital Cost Estimator uses the following durations:

Equipment Group Duration

Vessels 24 weeks

Towers 36 weeks

Storage Tanks 32 weeks

Pumps 22 weeks

Compressors 50 weeks

Turbines 50 weeks

Heat Exchangers 32 weeks

Boilers 55 weeks

Furnaces 40 weeks

Air Coolers 28 weeks

Package Refrigeration 44 weeks

Generators 26 weeks

Air Dryers 24 weeks

Conveyors 28 weeks

Mills 45 weeks

Fans 16 weeks

Elevators 26 weeks

Motors 16 weeks

Dust Collectors 30 weeks

Filters 16 weeks


Centrifuges 40 weeks

Mixers 16 weeks

Cooling Towers 32 weeks

Miscellaneous Equipment 26 weeks

Package Items 36 weeks

Packings and Linings 20 weeks

Schedule Adjustments by Activity and Logic

Logic Modification Aspen Capital Cost Estimator provides sequencing logic, varying with the activities present, for all engineering and construction activities, except the following: • Where logical relationships cannot be predicted for

system-designed activities, such as project site development. • Where logical relationships cannot be predicted because the

activity is user-specified. • Where a logical chain of activites has been substantially

broken by deletion of activities.

The Logic Modification forms provide the means to either add relationships between successor and predecessor activities not provided by the Aspen Capital Cost Estimator logic or to modify the Aspen Capital Cost Estimator logic by adding and deleting relationships. Separate forms are provided for engineering and construction sections of the network. When adding relationships, a particular relationship type may be specified.

However, when deleting relationships, all relationships between the specified activities are deleted, regardless of relationship type.

For engineering activities, only engineering predecessors are allowed. For construction activities, engineering and construction predecessors are allowed.

To add or delete an engineering relationship: 1 Double-click on Engineering (or Right-click and click Edit on

the pop-up menu) to display the Logic Modification form for engineering.


2 In the Add/delete logic option field, select + or – to

indicate whether you are adding or deleting a relationship. 3 Select a successor activity, or group of activities, for which

logic modifications are to be made. This is done by specifying all or part of the Activity Number. The parts of the Activity Number are broken up into the fields under SUCCESSOR ACTIVITY. Activity Numbers, which are listed in Appendix A, have 10 characters. If you want to modify a group of activities, you can enter “wildcard” asterisks in some fields. At least one of the fields (besides the two preset fields) must contain numbers. − Preset engineering field 1

The first three characters of the Activity Number are fixed and the same for all activities. They are always “000”. − Engineering phase


0 – Basic engineering phase 1 – Detail engineering phase 2 – Procurement phase

See Appendix A for a list of Activity Numbers.


To select all phases, enter an asterisk (*). - Engineering contractor number

The fifth and sixth characters of the Activity Number indicate the engineering contract number. For fixed project-level activities, these characters will be “00”. The engineering contract number is determined based on your specifications for contractors under Basis for Capital Costs in the Project Basis (refer to the Aspen Capital Cost Estimator User Guide for further information). It must be a number between 01 and 40. If all engineering contractor numbers are to be selected, enter two asterisks (**).

− Account group number The seventh character of the Activity Number indicates the account group number. It is derived from the first character of the Code of Accounts. 0, 1, 2– Equipment or general 3– Piping 4– Civil 5– Steelwork 6– Instrumentation 7– Electrical

8 – Insulation 9– Painting If all account groups are to be selected for modification, enter one asterisk (*).




4 Select an activity, or group of activities, to be added or deleted as predecessor(s) to the specified Successor. Use the fields under PREDESSOR – ENGG. ACTIVITY to select an activity the same way you selected a successor activity.

5 In the Relationship type field, select the specific type of logical sequence to use when adding relationships: A – Finish-to-Start (default) S – Start-to-Start F – Finish-to-Finish Finish-to-Start (A) and Start-to-Start (S) relationships use the Predecessor’s work week to calculate calendar lag between activities. Finish-to-Finish (F) relationships use the successor’s work week.



The Relationship Type field is not used by the system when deleting relationships; all relationships between the specified activities will be deleted, regardless of relationship type.


7 Click Apply.

8 To add or delete another relationship, click Add and repeat the process.

To add or delete a construction relationship:

Note: Enter either an engineering or a construction predecessor, not both.

1 Right-click on Construction and click Edit on the pop-up menu.


2 In the Add/delete logic option field, select + or – to indicate whether you are

adding or deleting a relationship.

3 Select a successor construction activity, or group of activities, for which logic modifications are to be made. This is done by specifying all or part of the Activity Number. The Activity Number is broken up into the fields under SUCCESSOR ACTIVITY. Construction Activity Numbers, which are listed in Appendix B, have 12 characters. If you want to modify a group of activities, you can enter “wildcard” asterisks in some fields. However, at least one of the fields must contain numbers. − Area number

The first and second characters of the Activity Number indicate the Area number, 01 through 90, or other project-level items, such as substations, control panel and power transmission lines, which always


use 91. If activities from all Areas are to be selected, enter two asterisks (**).

− Identification number The third through fifth characters contain the user-specified reference number from the specifications form for equipment items and plant bulks. For substations, the fourth and fifth characters contain the substation reference number (01-99) specified by the user or, if not specified, the System default reference number of 00. If all reference

numbers are to be selected, enter three asterisks (***). − Equipment type

The sixth and seventh characters contain the Equipment Code. See Appendix D for Equipment Code definitions. All other activities have a fixed identifier in positions six and seven of the activity number, as listed in Activity Numbering Conventions table in Appendix B. Enter two asterisks (**) if all Equipment Type numbers are to be selected.


− Account code Enter the ninth and tenth characters of the Activity Code for the activities to be selected for modification (that is,, excluding the first character, which

is the Account Group number, above). If all Activity Codes are to be selected, enter two asterisks (**).

− Contractor number The eleventh and twelfth characters are the contractor numbers. If all contractors are to be selected, enter two asterisks (**).

4 You can select either an engineering or a construction activity, or group of activities, to be added or deleted as predecessor(s) to the specified Successor. This is done by entering all or part of an engineering or construction Activity Number. To specify an engineering activity, enter all or part of an engineering Activity Number in the fields under PREDESSOR – ENGG. ACTIVITY. Engineering Activity Numbers, which are listed in Appendix A, have 10 characters. If you want to modify a group of activities, you can enter “wildcard” asterisks in some fields. At least one of the fields (besides the

two preset fields) must contain numbers. − Preset engineering field 1


− Engineering phase The fourth character of the Activity Number indicates the major engineering phase: 0 – Basic engineering phase

See Appendix D for the Equipment Code definitions.

The construction activities are listed in Appendix B by the last three characters of the Activity Number. These last three characters form the account group number and account code.

See Appendixes A and B for lists of Engineering and Construction Activity Numbers.


1 – Detail engineering phase 2 – Procurement phase To select all phases, enter an asterisk (*).

− Engineering contractor number The fifth and sixth characters of the Activity Number indicate the engineering contract number. For fixed project-level activities, these characters will be “00”. The engineering contract number is determined based on your specifications for contractors under Basis for Capital Costs in the Project Basis (see page 597H117). It must be a number between 01 and 40. If all engineering contractor numbers are to be selected, enter two asterisks (**).

− Account group number The seventh character of the Activity Number indicates the account group number. It is derived from the first character of the Code of Accounts. 0, 1, 2– Equipment or general 3– Piping 4– Civil 5– Steelwork 6– Instrumentation 7– Electrical 8– Insulation 9– Painting





To specify a construction predecessor activity or group of activities, enter all or part of a construction Activity Number it in the fields provided under PREDECESSOR – CONSTR. ACTIVITY, the same way you specified a successor construction activity.

5 In the Relationship type field, select the specific type of logical sequence to use when adding relationships: A – Finish-to-Start (default) S – Start-to-Start F – Finish-to-Finish



Finish-to-Start (A) and Start-to-Start (S) relationships use the Predecessor’s work week to calculate calendar lag between activities. Finish-to-Finish (F) relationships use the successor’s work week. The Relationship Type field is not used by the system when deleting relationships; all relationships between the specified activities will be deleted, regardless of relationship type.


7 Click Apply.

8 To add or delete another relationship, click Add and repeat the process.

Activity Modification The Activity Modification forms for engineering and construction allow you to modify the coding of activities. Activities may be combined within a common activity number or deleted entirely.

Activities can be combined by changing an activity number to another existing number. Specify all or part of an existing activity number, then all or part of the other activity number that will replace it. Icarus Project Scheduler (IPS) will sort the activities into numerical order, merging all identically numbered activities, including the craft resources.

Activities can be deleted by selecting an activity and then entering asterisks instead of the number of a modified activity.

To modify engineering activities:

1 Right-click on Engineering and click Edit on the pop-up menu.


2 Select a source activity. This is done by specifying all or part of the

Engineering Activity Number. The parts of the Engineering Activity Number are broken up into the fields under SOURCE ACTIVITY. Engineering Activity Numbers, which are listed in Appendix A, have 10 characters. If you want to modify a group of activities, you can enter “wildcard” asterisks in some fields. At least one of

the fields (besides the two preset fields) must contain numbers. − Preset engineering field 1


− Engineering phase The fourth character of the Activity Number indicates the major engineering phase: 0 – Basic engineering phase 1 – Detail engineering phase

2 – Procurement phase To select all phases, enter an asterisk (*).

− Engineering contractor number The fifth and sixth characters of the Activity Number indicate the engineering contract number. For fixed project-level activities, these characters will be “00”. The engineering contract number is determined based on your specifications for contractors under Basis for Capital Costs in the Project Basis (see page 598H117). It must be a number between 01 and 40. If all engineering contractor numbers are to be selected, enter two asterisks (**).

See Appendix A for a list of Engineering Activity Numbers.


− Account group number

The seventh character of the Activity Number indicates the account group number. It is derived from the first character of the Code of Accounts. 0, 1, 2– Equipment or general 3 – Piping 4 – Civil 5– Steelwork 6– Instrumentation 7– Electrical

8 – Insulation 9 – Painting If all account groups are to be selected for modification, enter one asterisk (*).



Note: where applicable, the seventh and ninth characters of the Activity Number indicate the process equipment class (01-26). Equipment classes are defined in Appendix C. 3 In the fields under MODIFIED ACTIVITY, specify the changes that are to

be made to the source activity.

4 Click Apply.

5 To modify another activity, click Add and repeat the process.

To modify construction activities: 1 Right-click on Construction and click Edit on the pop-up menu.

Exception: where applicable, the seventh and ninth characters of the Activity Number indicate the process equipment class (01-26). Equipment classes are defined in Appendix C, page 599H725.


2 Select a source activity. This is done by specifying all or part of the

Construction Activity Number.

The Construction Activity Number is broken up into the fields under ACTIVITY NUMBER. Construction Activity Numbers, which are listed in Appendix B, have 12 characters. If you want to modify a group of activities, you can enter “wildcard” asterisks in some fields. However, at least one of the fields must contain numbers.

− Area number The first and second characters of the Activity Number indicate the Area number, 01 through 90, or other project-level items, such as substations, control panel and power transmission lines, which always use 91. If activities from all Areas are to be selected, enter two asterisks (**).

− Identification number The third through fifth characters contain the user-specified reference number from the specifications form for equipment items and plant bulks. For substations, the fourth and fifth characters contain the substation reference number (01-99) specified by the user or, if not specified, the System default reference number of 00. If all reference numbers are to be selected, enter three asterisks (***).


− Equipment type The sixth and seventh characters contain the Equipment Code. See Appendix D for Equipment Code definitions. All other activities have a fixed identifier in positions six and seven of the activity number, as listed in Activity Numbering Conventions table in Appendix B. Enter two asterisks (**) if all Equipment Type numbers are to be selected.


− Account code Enter the tenth and eleventh characters of the Activity Code for the activities to be selected for modification (that is,, excluding the first

character, which is the Account Group number, above). If all Activity Codes are to be selected, enter two asterisks (**).

− Contractor number The eleventh and twelfth characters are the contractor numbers. If all contractors are to be selected, enter two asterisks (**).


4 Click Apply.

5 To modify another activity, click Add and repeat the process.

Primavera Information

To edit Primavera information: 1 Right-click on Project manager information in the Primavera information

folder and click Edit on the pop-up menu.

See Appendix D for the Equipment Code definitions.

The construction activities are listed in Appendix B by the last three characters of the Activity Number. These last three characters form the account group number and account code.


2 You can specify the following information:

− User name − Password − Database name

Name of Primavera database where Aspen IPS data will be loaded (for example,, pmdb).

− Remote or local host server Indicates mode of operation, remote server (RMT) or local machine (LCL).

− Enterprise project structure ID Project structure ID for Primavera Enterprise. If nothing is entered, the Aspen Capital Cost Estimator project name will be used.

− Enterprise project structure name Project structure name for Primavera Enterprise. If nothing is entered, the Aspen Capital Cost Estimator project name will be used.

− Enterprise project manager name Name of manager (OBS) responsible for Primavera Enterprise. If nothing is entered, the Aspen Capital Cost Estimator project name will be used.

− Enterprise project WBS name Work Breakdown structure name for Primavera Enterprise. If nothing is entered, the Aspen Capital Cost Estimator project name will be used.

3 Click Apply to save changes.

IPS Appendix A: Engineering and Procurement Activity Numbers 675

IPS Appendix A: Engineering and Procurement Activity Numbers

Numbering Convention Engineering and Procurement Activity Numbers include both fixed and variable numbers, as follows: • Fixed numbers – activities relating to the overall project. • Numbers that are repeated for each engineering contract,

varying the digits that identify each contractor. • Numbers that vary for each class of equipment required

within each area (see “Equipment Codes” on page XX600H727XX).

As illustrated by the table on the following page, the first three characters and the eighth character in the ten-character ID number are always “0” for all Engineering and Procurement activities. The rest of the characters – the fourth through seventh, the ninth, and the tenth – are used to indicated the engineering phase, area number, contract number, account number, equipment class, or simply sequential grouping, as described below: • The fourth character indicates the major engineering phase:

o 0 Basic Engineering o 1 Detail Engineering o 2 Procurement

676 IPS Appendix A: Engineering and Procurement Activity Numbers

• The fifth and sixth characters indicate the engineering contract number. For fixed project-level activities, these characters will be “00” (unless contracts are used). The engineering contract number is determined by your specifications for contractors in the estimating system input and must be a number between 01 and 40.

• The seventh character indicates the Code of Account series: o 0, 1, 2 Either Equipment of General o 3 Piping o 4 Civil o 5 Steelwork o 6 Instrumentation o 7 Electrical o 8 Insulation o 9 Paint

• The ninth and tenth characters simply provide sequential grouping within the major hierarchy of the first eight characters.

Note: There is one exception to the numbering conventions discussed here. Where applicable, the process equipment class is indicated by the seventh and ninth characters and can be a number from 01 to 26. See page XX601H725XX for Equipment Class definitions.

Engineering and Procurement – Activity Numbering Conventions

Category Range

Basic Engineering:

Fixed, project-level 000-0-CC-0-0-01 through 000-0-CC-7-0-09

Equipment, by contractor and class 000-0-CC-X-0-X1 through 000-0-CC-X-0-X9

Detail Engineering:

Fixed, project-level 000-1-CC-0-0-11 through 000-0-CC-9-0-02

Variable, by contractor 000-1-CC-1-0-21 through 000-1-CC-7-0-97

Procurement:

Variable, by contractor 000-2-CC-0-0-01 through 000-2-CC-9005

Equipment, by contract and class 000-2-CC-X-0-X1 through 000-2-CC-X-0-X5


CC = Contract Number (01-40)

XX = Process Equipment Class (01-26); see page XX602H725XX.

List of Activity Numbers

The Engineering and Procurement Activity Numbers are listed below, divided by Phase: • Basic Engineering: page XX603H677XX • Detail Engineering: page XX604H694XX • Procurement: page XX605H705XX Activity Number Definition

Basic Engineering

Preliminary

0000000001 AUTHORIZATION TO PROCEED 0000000002 START ENGINEERING 0000000003 STAFFING, MOBILIZATION 0000000004 REVIEW PREVIOUS JOB 0000000005 PROJECT STAFF CONFERENCE 0000000006 CUSTOMER COORDINATION MEETING 0000000007 ANALYZE OUTSTANDING CLIENT

INPUT 0000000008 ONGOING CLIENT INPUT 0000000009 RECEIVE ALL CLIENT INPUT Basic Engineering – Project Level

Materials, Vessels STDS

0000002071 PREP PRELIM MATERIALS OF CONST 0000002072 MATERIALS DEPARTMENT REVIEW 0000002073 PREP & ISSUE VESSEL STANDARDS 0000002074 CLIENT APPROVAL VESSEL STDS 0000002075 REVISE & REISSUE VESSEL STDS User-Specified Drawings – General

0000002080 DRAFT & CHECK, USER DWG (XX) 0000002081 APPROVAL, USER DWG (XX) 0000002082 REVISE & IFC, USER DWG (XX) 0000002085 DRAFT & CHECK, USER DWG (XX) 0000002086 APPROVAL, USER DWG (XX) 0000002087 REVISE & IFC, USER DWG (XX) 0000002090 DRAFT & CHECK, USER DWG (XX) 0000002091 APPROVAL, USER DWG (XX) 0000002092 REVISE & IFC, USER DWG (XX)


0000002095 DRAFT & CHECK, USER DWG (XX) 0000002096 APPROVAL, USER DWG (XX) 0000002097 REVISE & IFC, USER DWG (XX) Process Scope Estimating

0000003001 PREPARE PRELIM PROCESS SCOPE 0000003002 PROCESS SCOPE 50% COMPLETE 0000003003 ISSUE PROCESS SCOPE 0000003004 CLIENT APPROVAL PROCESS SCOPE 0000003005 UPDATE PROCESS SCOPE 0000003006 PREPARE BUDGET ESTIMATE 0000003007 CLIENT APPROVAL BUDGET

ESTIMATE 0000003008 REVISE PROCESS SCOPE 0000003009 CLASS 2 ESTIMATE WORKSHEETS 0000003010 UPDATE CLASS 2 ESTIMATE 0000003011 COMPLETE 70% CLASS 2 ESTIMATE 0000003012 COMPLETE CLASS 2 ESTIMATE 0000003013 CLIENT APPROVAL - ESTIM &

SCHED User-Specified Drawings – Piping

0000003080 DRAFT & CHECK, USER DWG (XX) 0000003081 APPROVAL, USER DWG (XX) 0000003082 REVISE & IFC, USER DWG (XX) 0000003085 DRAFT & CHECK, USER DWG (XX) 0000003086 APPROVAL, USER DWG (XX) 0000003087 REVISE & IFC, USER DWG (XX) 0000003090 DRAFT & CHECK, USER DWG (XX) 0000003091 APPROVAL, USER DWG (XX) 0000003092 REVISE & IFC, USER DWG (XX) 0000003095 DRAFT & CHECK, USER DWG (XX) 0000003096 APPROVAL, USER DWG (XX) 0000003097 REVISE & IFC, USER DWG (XX) Project Scope

0000004001 PREP & ISSUE PRELIM SCOPE DOC 0000004002 PREP & REISSUE PROJECT SCOPE Fire Protection

0000004011 REVIEW FIRE PROTECTION REQMTS 0000004012 PREP & ISSUE FIRE PROTN SPECS 0000004013 CLIENT APPROVAL FIRE


PROTECTION Soils

0000004021 SOILS ANALYSIS 0000004022 PREP & ISSUE SOILS REPORT Environmental

0000004031 PRELIM ENVIRONMENTAL INVESTIGTN

0000004032 ISSUE ENVIRONMENTAL DATA Structural

0000004041 PREP & ISSUE STRUCTURAL SPECS 0000004042 CLIENT APPROVAL STRUCTURAL

SPECS 0000004043 PRELIM FOUNDATION DESIGN 0000004044 CIVIL,ARCHITECTURAL & HVAC

ESTIM Utilities

0000004051 UTILITY DIAGRAM WORKSHEETS 0000004052 DRAFT & CHECK UTILITY FDS 0000004053 UPDATE & ISSUE UTILITY FDS 0000004054 CLIENT APPROVAL UTILITY FDS 0000004055 REVISE & REISSUE UTILITY FDS 0000004056 DRAFT & CHECK UTILITY P&IDS 0000004057 CLIENT APPROVAL UTILITY P&IDS 0000004058 UPDATE & ISSUE UTILITY P&IDS Electrical

0000004061 PREP & ISSUE ELEC STANDARDS 0000004062 CLIENT APPROVAL ELEC STANDARDS 0000004063 PREP & ISSUE ONE-LINE DIAGRAM 0000004064 UPDATE ONE-LINE DIAGRAM 0000004065 PREPARE MAJOR ELEC EQPT REQNS 0000004066 APPROVE MAJOR ELEC EQPT REQNS 0000004067 MAJOR ELEC EQUIPMENT QUOTES 0000004068 TAB & SELECT ELEC EQPT VENDOR 0000004069 CLIENT APPROVE ELEC EQPT

VENDOR 0000004070 PREPARE AREA CLASSIFCN PLAN 0000004071 DRAFT & CHECK CLASSIFCN PLAN 0000004072 CLIENT APPROVAL,CLASSIFCN PLAN 0000004073 REV & ISSUE CLASSIFICATION

PLAN 0000004075 ELECTRICAL COST ESTIMATE User-specified Drawings – Civil/Building


0000004080 DRAFT & CHECK, USER DWG (XX) 0000004081 APPROVAL, USER DWG (XX) 0000004082 REVISE & IFC, USER DWG (XX) 0000004085 DRAFT & CHECK, USER DWG (XX) 0000004086 APPROVAL, USER DWG (XX) 0000004087 REVISE & IFC, USER DWG (XX) 0000004090 DRAFT & CHECK, USER DWG (XX) 0000004091 APPROVAL, USER DWG (XX) 0000004092 REVISE & IFC, USER DWG (XX) 0000004095 DRAFT & CHECK, USER DWG (XX) 0000004096 APPROVAL, USER DWG (XX) 0000004097 REVISE & IFC, USER DWG (XX) PFD’s

0000005001 ANALYZE PROCESS REQUIREMENTS 0000005002 HEAT & MATERIAL BALANCE 0000005003 PROCESS FLOWSHEETS 0000005004 DRAFT & CHECK PFDS 0000005005 UPDATE & ISSUE PFDS(1) 0000005011 CLIENT APPROVAL PFDS(1) 0000005012 REVISE & REISSUE PFDS(2) 0000005013 CLIENT APPROVAL PFDS(2) 0000005014 REVISE & REISSUE PFDS(3) Instrumentation

0000005021 PREPARE INSTRUMENT STANDARDS 0000005022 CLIENT APPROVAL INSTRUMENT

STDS 0000005023 REVISE & REISSUE INSTRUMENT 0000005024 PREPARE INSTRUMENT INDEX Piping

0000005031 PRELIMINARY P&ID WORKSHEETS 0000005032 INTERNAL REVIEW P&IDS 0000005033 DRAFT & CHECK P&IDS 0000005034 UPDATE & ISSUE P&IDS(1) 0000005035 CLIENT APPROVAL P&IDS(1) 0000005036 REVISE & REISSUE P&IDS(2) 0000005037 PREPARE & ISSUE LINE LIST 0000005041 PREP & ISSUE PIPING STANDARDS 0000005042 CLIENT APPROVAL PIPING STDS 0000005043 REVISE & REISSUE PIPING STDS 0000005044 PIPING ARRANGEMENT STUDIES


0000005045 DRAFT INTERCONNG PIPING DWGS 0000005046 REV & ISSUE INTERCONNG PIPING 0000005047 PIPING MATERIAL TAKEOFF Plot Plans

0000005051 PREPARE SITE PLANNING MODEL 0000005052 GA, PLOT PLAN STUDIES 0000005053 DRAFT & CHECK GA, PLOT PLANS 0000005054 UPDATE & ISSUE GA, PLOT PLANS 0000005055 CLIENT APPROVAL GA, PLOT PLANS 0000005056 REVISE & REISSUE GA, PLOT

PLANS User-Specified Drawings – Steelwork

0000005061 PRELIM SIZING MECHANICAL 0000005062 PREPARE ELECTRICAL LOAD LIST 0000005071 PREPARE & ISSUE MECH STANDARDS 0000005072 CLIENT APPROVAL MECH STANDARDS 0000005073 UPDATE & ISSUE MECH STANDARDS 0000005080 DRAFT & CHECK, USER DWG (XX) 0000005081 APPROVAL, USER DWG (XX) 0000005082 REVISE & IFC, USER DWG (XX) 0000005085 DRAFT & CHECK, USER DWG (XX) 0000005086 APPROVAL, USER DWG (XX) 0000005087 REVISE & IFC, USER DWG (XX) 0000005090 DRAFT & CHECK, USER DWG (XX) 0000005091 APPROVAL, USER DWG (XX) 0000005092 REVISE & IFC, USER DWG (XX) 0000005095 DRAFT & CHECK, USER DWG (XX) 0000005096 APPROVAL, USER DWG (XX) 0000005097 REVISE & IFC, USER DWG (XX) Process Studies

0000006001 PROCESS STUDIES Control System

0000006010 PANEL/CONSOLE LAYOUT STUDY 0000006011 DRAFT & CHECK PANEL/CONSOLE

DWGS 0000006012 APPROVE PANEL/CONSOLE DWGS 0000006013 REV & ISSUE PANEL/CONSOLE DWGS 0000006020 SCOPE SHARED DISPLAY SYSTEM 0000006021 IFQ DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM 0000006022 APPROVE DIG CONTROL SYSTEM 0000006030 PREPARE CONTROL PANEL SPECS 0000006031 IFQ CONTROL PANEL REQNS


0000006032 APPROVE CONTROL PANEL REQNS User-Specified Drawings – Instrumentation

0000006080 DRAFT & CHECK, USER DWG (XX) 0000006081 APPROVAL, USER DWG (XX) 0000006082 REVISE & IFC, USER DWG (XX) 0000006085 DRAFT & CHECK, USER DWG (XX) 0000006086 APPROVAL, USER DWG (XX) 0000006087 REVISE & IFC, USER DWG (XX) 0000006090 DRAFT & CHECK, USER DWG (XX) 0000006091 APPROVAL, USER DWG (XX) 0000006092 REVISE & IFC, USER DWG (XX) 0000006095 DRAFT & CHECK, USER DWG (XX) 0000006096 APPROVAL, USER DWG (XX) 0000006097 REVISE & IFC, USER DWG (XX) Misc, Documentation

0000007001 PREPARE PRELIM EQUIPMENT LIST 0000007002 SCHED & ESTIMATE PROCESS WORK 0000007003 PREPARE EARLY ENGINEERING CPM 0000007004 PREPARE EQUIPMENT STATUS LIST 0000007005 UPDATE & ISSUE EQUIPMENT LIST 0000007006 PREPARE & ISSUE BIDDERS LIST 0000007007 CLIENT APPROVE BIDDERS LIST 0000007008 REVISE & REISSUE BIDDERS LIST 0000007009 PREPARE & ISSUE PROJECT CPM User-Specified Drawings – Electrical

0000007080 DRAFT & CHECK, USER DWG (XX) 0000007081 APPROVAL, USER DWG (XX) 0000007082 REVISE & IFC, USER DWG (XX) 0000007085 DRAFT & CHECK, USER DWG (XX) 0000007086 APPROVAL, USER DWG (XX) 0000007087 REVISE & IFC, USER DWG (XX) 0000007090 DRAFT & CHECK, USER DWG (XX) 0000007091 APPROVAL, USER DWG (XX) 0000007092 REVISE & IFC, USER DWG (XX) 0000007095 DRAFT & CHECK, USER DWG (XX) 0000007096 APPROVAL, USER DWG (XX) 0000007097 REVISE & IFC, USER DWG (XX) Basic Engineering – Equipment, Variable by Class and Contractor


Vessels

0000010011 PROCESS SPECS, PRESS VESSELS-01

0000010012 REV PROC SPECS, PRESS VESSELS-01

0000010013 MECH DESIGN, PRESS VESSELS-01

0000010014 PREPARE REQNS, PRESS VESSELS-01

0000010015 OBTAIN QUOTES, PRESS VESSELS-01

0000010016 SELECT VENDORS, PRESS VESSELS-01

0000010017 APPROVE VENDOR, PRESS VESSELS-01

0000010018 APPROVE REQNS, PRESS VESSELS-01

0000010019 REISSUE REQNS, PRESS VESSELS-01

Towers

0000010021 PROCESS SPECS, TOWERS-01 0000010022 REV PROC SPECS, TOWERS-01 0000010023 MECH DESIGN, TOWERS-01 0000010024 PREPARE REQNS, TOWERS-01 0000010025 OBTAIN QUOTES, TOWERS-01 0000010026 SELECT VENDORS, TOWERS-01 0000010027 APPROVE VENDOR, TOWERS-01 0000010028 APPROVE REQNS, TOWERS-01 0000010029 REISSUE REQNS, TOWERS-01 Storage Tanks

0000010031 PROCESS SPECS, STORAGE TANKS-01

0000010032 REV PROC SPECS, STORAGE TANKS-01

0000010033 MECH DESIGN, STORAGE TANKS-01

0000010034 PREPARE REQNS, STORAGE TANKS-01

0000010035 OBTAIN QUOTES, STORAGE TANKS-01

0000010036 SELECT VENDORS, STORAGE TANKS-01

0000010037 APPROVE VENDOR, STORAGE TANKS-


01 0000010038 APPROVE REQNS, STORAGE TANKS-

01 0000010039 REISSUE REQNS, STORAGE TANKS-

01 Pumps

0000010041 PROCESS SPECS, PUMPS -01

0000010042 REV PROC SPECS, PUMPS -01

0000010043 MECH DESIGN, PUMPS -01

0000010044 PREPARE REQNS, PUMPS -01

0000010045 OBTAIN QUOTES, PUMPS -01

0000010046 SELECT VENDORS, PUMPS -01

0000010047 APPROVE VENDOR, PUMPS -01

0000010048 APPROVE REQNS, PUMPS -01

0000010049 REISSUE REQNS, PUMPS -01

Compressors

0000010051 PROCESS SPECS, COMPRESSORS -01

0000010052 REV PROC SPECS, COMPRESSORS -01

0000010053 MECH DESIGN, COMPRESSORS -01

0000010054 PREPARE REQNS, COMPRESSORS -01

0000010055 OBTAIN QUOTES, COMPRESSORS -01

0000010056 SELECT VENDORS, COMPRESSORS -01

0000010057 APPROVE VENDOR, COMPRESSORS -01

0000010058 APPROVE REQNS, COMPRESSORS -01


0000010059 REISSUE REQNS, COMPRESSORS -01

Turbines

0000010061 PROCESS SPECS, TURBINES -01

0000010062 REV PROC SPECS, TURBINES -01

0000010063 MECH DESIGN, TURBINES -01

0000010064 PREPARE REQNS, TURBINES -01

0000010065 OBTAIN QUOTES, TURBINES -01

0000010066 SELECT VENDORS, TURBINES -01

0000010067 APPROVE VENDOR, TURBINES -01

0000010068 APPROVE REQNS, TURBINES -01

0000010069 REISSUE REQNS, TURBINES -01

Heat Exchangers

0000010071 PROCESS SPECS, EXCHANGERS -01

0000010072 REV PROC SPECS, EXCHANGERS -01

0000010073 MECH DESIGN, EXCHANGERS -01

0000010074 PREPARE REQNS, EXCHANGERS -01

0000010075 OBTAIN QUOTES, EXCHANGERS -01

0000010076 SELECT VENDORS, EXCHANGERS -01

0000010077 APPROVE VENDOR, EXCHANGERS -01

0000010078 APPROVE REQNS, EXCHANGERS -01

0000010079 REISSUE REQNS, EXCHANGERS -01

Boilers

0000010081 PROCESS SPECS, BOILERS -01


0000010082 REV PROC SPECS, BOILERS -01

0000010083 MECH DESIGN, BOILERS -01

0000010084 PREPARE REQNS, BOILERS -01

0000010085 OBTAIN QUOTES, BOILERS -01

0000010086 SELECT VENDORS, BOILERS -01

0000010087 APPROVE VENDOR, BOILERS -01

0000010088 APPROVE REQNS, BOILERS -01

0000010089 REISSUE REQNS, BOILERS -01

Furnaces

0000010091 PROCESS SPECS, FURNACES -01

0000010092 REV PROC SPECS, FURNACES -01

0000010093 MECH DESIGN, FURNACES -01

0000010094 PREPARE REQNS, FURNACES -01

0000010095 OBTAIN QUOTES, FURNACES -01

0000010096 SELECT VENDORS, FURNACES -01

0000010097 APPROVE VENDOR, FURNACES -01

0000010098 APPROVE REQNS, FURNACES -01

0000010099 REISSUE REQNS, FURNACES -01

Air Coolers

0000011001 PROCESS SPECS, AIR COOLERS -01

0000011002 REV PROC SPECS, AIR COOLERS -01

0000011003 MECH DESIGN, AIR COOLERS -


01 0000011004 PREPARE REQNS, AIR COOLERS -

01 0000011005 OBTAIN QUOTES, AIR COOLERS -

01 0000011006 SELECT VENDORS, AIR COOLERS -

01 0000011007 APPROVE VENDOR, AIR COOLERS -

01 0000011008 APPROVE REQNS, AIR COOLERS -

01 0000011009 REISSUE REQNS, AIR COOLERS -

01 Pkg Refrigeration

0000011011 PROCESS SPECS, PKG REFRIG -01

0000011012 REV PROC SPECS, PKG REFRIG -01

0000011013 MECH DESIGN, PKG REFRIG -01

0000011014 PREPARE REQNS, PKG REFRIG -01

0000011015 OBTAIN QUOTES, PKG REFRIG -01

0000011016 SELECT VENDORS, PKG REFRIG -01

0000011017 APPROVE VENDOR, PKG REFRIG -01

0000011018 APPROVE REQNS, PKG REFRIG -01

0000011019 REISSUE REQNS, PKG REFRIG -01

Generators

0000011021 PROCESS SPECS, GENERATORS -01

0000011022 REV PROC SPECS, GENERATORS -01

0000011023 MECH DESIGN, GENERATORS -01

0000011024 PREPARE REQNS, GENERATORS -01

0000011025 OBTAIN QUOTES, GENERATORS -01


0000011026 SELECT VENDORS, GENERATORS -01

0000011027 APPROVE VENDOR, GENERATORS -01

0000011028 APPROVE REQNS, GENERATORS -01

0000011029 REISSUE REQNS, GENERATORS -01

Air Dryers

0000011031 PROCESS SPECS, AIR DRYERS -01

0000011032 REV PROC SPECS, AIR DRYERS -01

0000011033 MECH DESIGN, AIR DRYERS -01

0000011034 PREPARE REQNS, AIR DRYERS -01

0000011035 OBTAIN QUOTES, AIR DRYERS -01

0000011036 SELECT VENDORS, AIR DRYERS -01

0000011037 APPROVE VENDOR, AIR DRYERS -01

0000011038 APPROVE REQNS, AIR DRYERS -01

0000011039 REISSUE REQNS, AIR DRYERS -01

Conveyors

0000011041 PROCESS SPECS, CONVEYORS -01

0000011042 REV PROC SPECS, CONVEYORS -01

0000011043 MECH DESIGN, CONVEYORS -01

0000011044 PREPARE REQNS, CONVEYORS -01

0000011045 OBTAIN QUOTES, CONVEYORS -01

0000011046 SELECT VENDORS, CONVEYORS -01

0000011047 APPROVE VENDOR, CONVEYORS -


01 0000011048 APPROVE REQNS, CONVEYORS -

01 0000011049 REISSUE REQNS, CONVEYORS -

01 Mills

0000011051 PROCESS SPECS, MILLS -01

0000011052 REV PROC SPECS, MILLS -01

0000011053 MECH DESIGN, MILLS -01

0000011054 PREPARE REQNS, MILLS -01

0000011055 OBTAIN QUOTES, MILLS -01

0000011056 SELECT VENDORS, MILLS -01

0000011057 APPROVE VENDOR, MILLS -01

0000011058 APPROVE REQNS, MILLS -01

0000011059 REISSUE REQNS, MILLS -01

Fans

0000011061 PROCESS SPECS, FANS -01

0000011062 REV PROC SPECS, FANS -01

0000011063 MECH DESIGN, FANS -01

0000011064 PREPARE REQNS, FANS -01

0000011065 OBTAIN QUOTES, FANS -01

0000011066 SELECT VENDORS, FANS -01

0000011067 APPROVE VENDOR, FANS -01

0000011068 APPROVE REQNS, FANS -01

0000011069 REISSUE REQNS, FANS -01


Elevators

0000011071 PROCESS SPECS, ELEVATORS -01

0000011072 REV PROC SPECS, ELEVATORS -01

0000011073 MECH DESIGN, ELEVATORS -01

0000011074 PREPARE REQNS, ELEVATORS -01

0000011075 OBTAIN QUOTES, ELEVATORS -01

0000011076 SELECT VENDORS, ELEVATORS -01

0000011077 APPROVE VENDOR, ELEVATORS -01

0000011078 APPROVE REQNS, ELEVATORS -01

0000011079 REISSUE REQNS, ELEVATORS -01

Motors

0000011081 PROCESS SPECS, MOTORS -01

0000011082 REV PROC SPECS, MOTORS -01

0000011083 MECH DESIGN, MOTORS -01

0000011084 PREPARE REQNS, MOTORS -01

0000011085 OBTAIN QUOTES, MOTORS -01

0000011086 SELECT VENDORS, MOTORS -01

0000011087 APPROVE VENDOR, MOTORS -01

0000011088 APPROVE REQNS, MOTORS -01

0000011089 REISSUE REQNS, MOTORS -01

Dust Collectors

0000011091 PROCESS SPECS, DUST COLLECTR-


01 0000011092 REV PROC SPECS, DUST COLLECTR-

01 0000011093 MECH DESIGN, DUST COLLECTR-

01 0000011094 PREPARE REQNS, DUST COLLECTR-

01 0000011095 OBTAIN QUOTES, DUST COLLECTR-

01 0000011096 SELECT VENDORS, DUST COLLECTR-

01 0000011097 APPROVE VENDOR, DUST COLLECTR-

01 0000011098 APPROVE REQNS, DUST COLLECTR-

01 0000011099 REISSUE REQNS, DUST COLLECTR-

01 Filters

0000012001 PROCESS SPECS, FILTERS -01

0000012002 REV PROC SPECS, FILTERS -01

0000012003 MECH DESIGN, FILTERS -01

0000012004 PREPARE REQNS, FILTERS -01

0000012005 OBTAIN QUOTES, FILTERS -01

0000012006 SELECT VENDORS, FILTERS -01

0000012007 APPROVE VENDOR, FILTERS -01

0000012008 APPROVE REQNS, FILTERS -01

0000012009 REISSUE REQNS, FILTERS -01

Centrifuges

0000012011 PROCESS SPECS, CENTRIFUGES -01

0000012012 REV PROC SPECS, CENTRIFUGES -01

0000012013 MECH DESIGN, CENTRIFUGES -01


0000012014 PREPARE REQNS, CENTRIFUGES -01

0000012015 OBTAIN QUOTES, CENTRIFUGES -01

0000012016 SELECT VENDORS, CENTRIFUGES -01

0000012017 APPROVE VENDOR, CENTRIFUGES -01

0000012018 APPROVE REQNS, CENTRIFUGES -01

0000012019 REISSUE REQNS, CENTRIFUGES -01

Mixers

0000012021 PROCESS SPECS, MIXERS -01

0000012022 REV PROC SPECS, MIXERS -01

0000012023 MECH DESIGN, MIXERS -01

0000012024 PREPARE REQNS, MIXERS -01

0000012025 OBTAIN QUOTES, MIXERS -01

0000012026 SELECT VENDORS, MIXERS -01

0000012027 APPROVE VENDOR, MIXERS -01

0000012028 APPROVE REQNS, MIXERS -01

0000012029 REISSUE REQNS, MIXERS -01

Cooling Towers

0000012031 PROCESS SPECS, COOLING TOWER-01

0000012032 REV PROC SPECS, COOLING TOWER-01

0000012033 MECH DESIGN, COOLING TOWER-01

0000012034 PREPARE REQNS, COOLING TOWER-01

0000012035 OBTAIN QUOTES, COOLING TOWER-


01 0000012036 SELECT VENDORS, COOLING TOWER-

01 0000012037 APPROVE VENDOR, COOLING TOWER-

01 0000012038 APPROVE REQNS, COOLING TOWER-

01 0000012039 REISSUE REQNS, COOLING TOWER-

01 Misc. Equipment

0000012041 PROCESS SPECS, MISC EQUIP -01

0000012042 REV PROC SPECS, MISC EQUIP -01

0000012043 MECH DESIGN, MISC EQUIP -01

0000012044 PREPARE REQNS, MISC EQUIP -01

0000012045 OBTAIN QUOTES, MISC EQUIP -01

0000012046 SELECT VENDORS, MISC EQUIP -01

0000012047 APPROVE VENDOR, MISC EQUIP -01

0000012048 APPROVE REQNS, MISC EQUIP -01

0000012049 REISSUE REQNS, MISC EQUIP -01

Package Items

0000012051 PROCESS SPECS, PACKAGE ITEMS-01

0000012052 REV PROC SPECS, PACKAGE ITEMS-01

0000012053 MECH DESIGN, PACKAGE ITEMS-01

0000012054 PREPARE REQNS, PACKAGE ITEMS-01

0000012055 OBTAIN QUOTES, PACKAGE ITEMS-01

0000012056 SELECT VENDORS, PACKAGE ITEMS-01

0000012057 APPROVE VENDOR, PACKAGE ITEMS-01


0000012058 APPROVE REQNS, PACKAGE ITEMS-01

0000012059 REISSUE REQNS, PACKAGE ITEMS-01

Packings and Linings

0000012061 PROCESS SPECS, PACK&LININGS -01

0000012062 REV PROC SPECS, PACK&LININGS -01

0000012063 MECH DESIGN, PACK&LININGS -01

0000012064 PREPARE REQNS, PACK&LININGS -01

0000012065 OBTAIN QUOTES, PACK&LININGS -01

0000012066 SELECT VENDORS, PACK&LININGS -01

0000012067 APPROVE VENDOR, PACK&LININGS -01

0000012068 APPROVE REQNS, PACK&LININGS -01

0000012069 REISSUE REQNS, PACK&LININGS -01

Detail Engineering

Project Level

CPM

0001000011 UPDATE & ISSUE PROJECT CPM 0001000012 FINALIZE CPM FOR CONSTRUCTION Definitive Estimate

0001000021 DEFINITIVE ESTIMATE MTO 0001000022 PREPARE DEFINITIVE ESTIMATE 0001000023 REVIEW & ISSUE DEFIN ESTIMATE 0001000024 UPDATE DEFINITIVE ESTIMATE 0001000025 FINALIZE CONTROL ESTIMATE Site Development

0001001011 CIVIL DESIGN,LAYOUT STUDIES 0001001012 PREP SITE GRADING DRAWINGS 0001001013 DRAFT & CHECK SITE GRADING

DWGS


0001001014 PREP SITE DEVELOPMENT DETAILS 0001001015 DRAFT & CHECK SITE DEVEL

DETAILS 0001001016 CLIENT APPROVE SITE DEVEL DWGS 0001001017 REV & ISSUE SITE DEVELOPMT

DWGS Equipment Layout

0001002001 UPDATE EQUIPMENT LIST 0001002010 EQUIPMENT LAYOUT STUDIES 0001002011 REVIEW EQUIP LAYOUTS & FREEZE Line List

0001003000 PREPARE & ISSUE LINE LIST Piping Model (if specified)

0001003010 PREPARE MODEL 0001003011 PROJECT REVIEW,UPDATE MODEL 0001003012 CHECK & IFC MODEL 0001003015 REVISE & REISSUE PFDS Civil

0001004000 PREP & ISSUE BUILDING SPECS 0001004001 REBAR, CONCRETE BULK MTO 0001004002 PREPARE & ISSUE REBAR REQNS 0001004003 CLIENT APPROVE REBAR REQNS 0001004004 MTO & REQN EARLY UNDERGRND

MATL Structural

0001005002 PRELIM STRUCTURAL MTO Control System

0001006004 MTO & REQN JUNC BOX, MAJOR CABLE

0001006007 INSTRUMENT CABLE TRAY STUDY 0001006070 PREP CONTROL ROOM/CONSOLE DWGS 0001006071 DRAFT&CHK CONTRL RM/CONSOLE

DWGS 0001006072 APPROVE CONTROL RM/CONSOLE

DWGS 0001006073 REV CONTROL RM/CONSOLE DWGS Electrical

0001007000 UPDATE ELECTRICAL LOAD LIST 0001007001 MTO & REQN ELEC BULK MATLS 0001007002 MTO & REQN MINOR ELEC EQUIP 0001007003 MTO & REQN CABLE TRAY,


HARDWARE 0001007004 MTO & REQN ELEC TRACING MATL 0001007007 ELEC CABLE TRAY STUDY 0001007008 ELEC HEAT TRACING STUDY 0001007009 LIGHTING STUDY Insulation

0001008000 PREP & ISSUE INSULATION SPECS 0001008001 CLIENT APPROVE INSULATION

SPECS 0001008002 REV & ISSUE INSULATION SPECS Paint

0001009000 PREP & ISSUE PAINTING SPECS 0001009001 CLIENT APPROVE PAINT SPECS 0001009002 REVISE & ISSUE PAINTING SPECS Detail Engineering – Variable by Contractor

Equipment Layout (GA’s)

0001011022 REV,IFD EQUIP LAYOUT DWGS -01

User-Specified Drawings – General

0001011080 DRAFT & CHECK, USER DWG (XX) 0001011081 APPROVAL, USER DWG (XX) 0001011082 REVISE & IFC, USER DWG (XX) 0001011085 DRAFT & CHECK, USER DWG (XX) 0001011086 APPROVAL, USER DWG (XX) 0001011087 REVISE & IFC, USER DWG (XX) 0001011090 DRAFT & CHECK, USER DWG (XX) 0001011091 APPROVAL, USER DWG (XX) 0001011092 REVISE & IFC, USER DWG (XX) 0001011095 DRAFT & CHECK, USER DWG (XX) 0001011096 APPROVAL, USER DWG (XX) 0001011097 REVISE & IFC, USER DWG (XX) Rotating Equipment

0001012012 ROTATING EQP STRESS ANALYSIS -01

Piping

0001013001 BULK PIPING MTO (80%) -01

0001013002 PREP PIPING REQNS (80%) -01


0001013003 PREP REMOTE SHOP REQNS -01

0001013017 REVISE & ISSUE P&IDS -01

0001013021 PREPARE PIPING LAYOUT -01

0001013022 UPDATE PIPING LAYOUT -01

0001013023 PIPING STRESS ANALYSIS -01

0001013031 DRAFT & CHECK PIPE ARNGMNT -01

0001013032 CLIENT APPROVAL PIPE ARNGMNT -01

0001013033 UPDATE,IFC PIPING ARNGMNT -01

0001013041 DRAFT & CHECK ISOMETRICS -01

0001013042 CLIENT APPROVAL ISOS -01

0001013043 REVISE & ISSUE ISOS -01

0001013045 FINALIZE LINE INDEX -01

0001013051 PREPARE PIPE TEST SCHEDS -01

0001013052 CHECK,IFC PIPE TEST SCHEDS -01

0001013055 FINALIZE UTILITY P&IDS -01

0001013060 DESIGN SPECIAL HANGERS -01

0001013061 DRAFT & CHECK ENG HANGERS -01

0001013062 APPROVE HANGER DRAWINGS -01

0001013063 REV & ISSUE HANGER DWGS -01

0001013071 DRAFT & CHECK STM TRACING DWG-01

0001013072 APPROVE STEAM TRACING DWGS -01

0001013073 REV,IFC STEAM TRACING DWGS -01


User-Specified Drawings – Piping

0001013080 DRAFT & CHECK, USER DWG (XX) -01

0001013081 APPROVAL, USER DWG (XX) -01

0001013082 REVISE & IFC, USER DWG (XX) -01










Civil

0001014010 DESIGN EQUIPMENT FOUNDATIONS -01

0001014011 DRAFT & CHECK EQUIP FDN DWGS -01

0001014012 APPROVAL, EQUIP FDN DWGS -01

0001014013 REV & IFC,EQUIP FDN DWGS -01

0001014020 DESIGN STEELWORK FOUNDATIONS -01

0001014021 DRAFT & CHECK STEELWORK FDNS -01

0001014022 APPROVE STEELWORK FDN DWGS -01

0001014023 REV & IFC STEELWORK FDN DWGS -


01 0001014030 DESIGN PAVING -

01 0001014031 DRAFT & CHECK, PAVING DWGS -

01 0001014032 APPROVAL, PAVING DWGS -

01 0001014033 REV & IFC PAVING DWGS -

01 0001014040 DESIGN MISC. CONCRETE -

01 0001014041 DRAFT & CHECK, MISC CONC DWGS-

01 0001014042 APPROVAL, MISC CONCRETE DWGS -

01 0001014043 REV & IFC MISC CONCRETE DWGS -

01 0001014050 PREP UNDERGROUND PIPE LAYOUT -

01 0001014051 DRAFT & CHECK U-GRND PIPING -

01 0001014052 CLIENT APPROVE U-GRND PIPING -

01 0001014053 REV & ISSUE U-GRND PIPING -

01 Buildings

0001014060 PREP BUILDING PLANS,ELEVNS -01

0001014061 DRAFT&CHECK BLDG PLANS,ELEVNS-01

0001014062 APPROVE BLDG PLANS,ELEVNS -01

0001014063 REV,IFC BLDG PLANS,ELEVNS -01

0001014071 DRAFT & CHECK ARCH DETAILS -01

0001014072 APPROVE ARCH DETAILS -01

0001014073 REV & ISSUE ARCH DETAILS -01

User-Specified Drawings – Civil/Building














Steelwork

0001015010 STRUCTURAL STEEL DESIGN -01

0001015011 DRAFT & CHECK STRUCT DWGS -01

0001015012 CLIENT APPROVE STRUCT DWGS -01

0001015013 REV & ISSUE STRUCT DWGS -01

0001015021 DRAFT & CHECK MISC STEEL -01

0001015022 APPROVE MISC STEEL DWGS -01

0001015023 REV & ISSUE MISC STEEL -01

0001015031 DRAFT & CHECK GRATING DWGS -01

0001015032 APPROVE GRATING DWGS -01


0001015033 REV & IFP GRATING DWGS -01

0001015034 MT0 & REQN GRATING -01

0001015035 APPROVE GRATING REQNS -01

User-Specified Drawings – Steelwork













Instrumentation

0001016000 PREPARE, IFC INSTR INDEX -01

0001016001 FINALIZE, IFC INSTR INDEX -01

0001016003 MTO & REQN TAGGED ITEMS -01

0001016010 DESIGN LOOP DIAGRAMS -01

0001016011 PREP LOOP DIAGRAMS, IFP -01

0001016012 APPROVE INSTR LOOP DGS -


01 0001016013 REVIEW LOOP DIAGRAMS -

01 0001016014 REVISE,IFC LOOP DIAGRMS -

01 0001016021 DRAFT&CHECK INSTR LOCN PLANS -

01 0001016022 CLIENT APPROVAL INSTR LOCN -

01 0001016023 REV & IFC INSTR LOCN PLANS -

01 0001016031 DRAFT & CHECK 2-WIRE DIAGRAMS-

01 0001016032 APPROVE 2-WIRE DIAGRAMS -

01 0001016033 REV & IFC 2-WIRE DIAGRAMS -

01 0001016041 DRAFT&CHECK INSTR SCHEMATICS -

01 0001016042 APPROVE INSTRUM SCHEMATICS -

01 0001016043 REV & IFC INSTR SCHEMATICS -

01 0001016051 DRAFT&CHK CONN DIAG/JBOX DWGS-

01 0001016052 APPROVE CONN DIAG/JBOX DWGS -

01 0001016053 REV & IFC CONN DIAG/JBOX DWGS-

01 0001016061 PREP,CHECK CABLE SCHEDULES -

01 0001016062 APPROVAL, CABLE SCHEDS -

01 0001016063 REV & ISSUE CABLE SCHEDS -

01 User-Specified Drawings – Instrumentation



0001016082 REVISE & IFC, USER DWG (XX) -


01 0001016085 DRAFT & CHECK, USER DWG (XX) -

01 0001016086 APPROVAL, USER DWG (XX) -

01 0001016087 REVISE & IFC, USER DWG (XX) -







01 Electrical

0001017010 PREPARE LIGHTING DWGS -01

0001017011 DRAFT & CHECK LIGHTING DWGS -01

0001017012 APPROVE LIGHTING DWGS -01

0001017013 REV & IFC LIGHTING DWGS -01

0001017015 PREPARE GROUNDING DWGS -01

0001017016 DRAFT & CHECK GROUNDING DWGS -01

0001017017 APPROVE GROUNDING DWGS -01

0001017018 REV & IFC GROUNDING DWGS -01

0001017020 PREPARE CABLE TRAY DRAWINGS -01

0001017021 DRAFT & CHECK CABLE TRAY DWGS-01

0001017022 APPROVE CABLE TRAY DRAWINGS -01

0001017023 REV & IFC CABLE TRAY DWGS -


01 0001017025 REV,IFD ELECTRICAL ONE LINES -

01 0001017026 CLIENT APPROVE ELEC ONE LINES-

01 0001017027 FINALIZE ELECTRICAL ONE LINES-

01 0001017030 PREPARE ELECTRICAL SCHEMATICS-

01 0001017031 DRAFT ELECTRICAL SCHEMATICS -

01 0001017032 APPROVE ELECTRICAL SCHEMATICS-

01 0001017040 PREPARE POWER DISTRIBUTION -

01 0001017041 DRAFT POWER DISTRIBUTION DWGS-

01 0001017042 APPROVE POWER DISTRIB DWGS -

01 0001017050 PREPARE CIRC SCHD & CONN DIAG-

01 0001017051 DRAFT CIRC SCHD & CONN DIAG -

01 0001017052 APPROVE CIRC SCHD & CONN DIAG-

01 0001017060 PREPARE SUBSTATION LAYOUT -

01 0001017061 DRAFT SUBSTATION LAYOUT DWGS -

01 0001017062 APPROVE SUBSTATN LAYOUT DWGS -

01 0001017065 ASSEMBLE,CHECK POWER PKG -

01 0001017066 REV & ISSUE ELEC POWER PKG -

01 0001017070 PREPARE ELEC TRACING DWGS -

01 0001017071 DRAFT&CHECK ELEC TRACING DWGS-

01 0001017072 APPROVE ELEC HEAT TRACING -

01


0001017073 REV & IFC ELEC TRACING DWGS -01

User-Specified Drawings – Electrical













Procurement

Fixed Activities

0002001000 ASSEMBLE,IFC SITE DEVL DWGS 0002002000 ASSEMBLE,IFC EQUIPMENT DWGS 0002002009 EXPEDITING -EQUIP DELIVERY 0002003000 ASSEMBLE,IFC,PIPING DWGS 0002004000 ASSEMBLE,IFC,CIVIL DRAWINGS Control System Procurement

0002004011 OBTAIN REBAR QUOTES 0002004012 TAB & RECOMMEND REBAR VENDOR 0002004013 CLIENT APPROVE REBAR VENDOR 0002004014 ISSUE BLANKET P.O., REBAR 0002004016 QUOTE & PURCHASE U-GRND MATL 0002004017 DELIVER EARLY U-GRND PIPING 0002005000 ASSEMBLE,IFC STRUCTURAL DWGS


0002006000 ASSEMBLE,IFC C0NTROL SYSTEM DWGS

0002006011 DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM QUOTES 0002006012 SELECT DIGITAL CONTRL SYSTEM 0002006013 APPROVE DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM 0002006014 PURCHASE DIGITAL CONTROL

SYSTEM 0002006015 RECEIVE VENDOR DATA,DIG CTRL

SYS 0002006016 REVIEW VENDOR DATA,DIG CTRL

SYS 0002006017 FAB & DELIVER DIG CONTROL SYS 0002006021 CONTROL PANEL QUOTES 0002006022 TAB & RECOMMEND PANEL VENDOR 0002006023 CLIENT APPROVE PANEL VENDOR 0002006024 ISSUE P.O., CONTROL PANEL 0002006025 RECEIVE VENDOR DATA, PANEL 0002006026 REVIEW VENDOR DATA, PANEL 0002006027 FABRICATE CONTROL PANEL 0002006028 INSTALL PANEL INSTRMTS & SHIP 0002006031 PURCHASE JUNC BOX, MAJOR CABLE 0002006032 DELIVER JUNC BOX, MAJOR CABLE Electrical

0002007000 ASSEMBLE,IFC ELECTRICAL DWGS 0002007011 OBTAIN QUOTES, ELEC BULKS 0002007012 TAB & SELECT VENDOR, ELEC

BULKS 0002007013 CLIENT APPROVE ELEC MATL

VENDOR 0002007014 PURCHASE ELECTRICAL BULK MATLS 0002007015 DELIVER ELECTRICAL BULK MATLS 0002007021 OBTAIN QUOTES,MINOR ELEC EQUIP 0002007022 TAB&SELECT VENDOR,MINOR ELEC

EQ 0002007023 APPROVE VENDOR, MINOR ELEC EQ 0002007024 PURCHASE MINOR ELEC EQUIPMENT 0002007025 DELIVER MINOR ELEC EQUIPMENT 0002007031 ISSUE MAJOR ELEC EQUIP P.O. 0002007032 RECV VENDOR DATA,MAJOR ELEC EQ 0002007033 REVIEW,RETURN MAJOR ELEC EQ


DATA 0002007034 FAB,DELIVER MAJOR ELEC EQUIP 0002007041 OBTAIN QUOTES, CABLE TRAY 0002007042 TAB & SELECT VENDR,CABLE TRAY 0002007043 APPROVE VENDOR, CABLE TRAY 0002007044 PURCHASE ELEC CABLE TRAY 0002007045 DELIVER ELEC CABLE TRAY 0002007071 OBTAIN QUOTES, ELEC TRACING 0002007072 TAB & SELECT VENDOR,ELEC

TRACING 0002007073 APPROVE VENDOR,ELEC TRACING 0002007074 PURCHASE ELEC TRACING MATERIAL 0002007075 DELIVER ELEC TRACING MATL Insulation

0002008000 ASSEMBLE,IFC,INSULATION SPECS Paint

0002009000 ASSEMBLE,IFC,PAINTING SPECS Procurement – By Contractor

0002010001 PREPARE MECHANICAL BID PACKAGE 0002010002 APPROVE MECHANICAL BID PACKAGE 0002010003 BID CYCLE, MECHANICAL CONTR 0002010004 APPROVE MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR 0002010005 MOBILIZE, MECHANICAL

CONTRACTOR Procurement – By Equipment Class Contract

Vessels

0002010011 ISSUE P.O., PRESS VESSELS-01

0002010012 REC VENDOR DATA,PRESS VESSELS-01

0002010013 REVIEW DESIGN, PRESS VESSELS-01

0002010014 APPROVE DESIGN, PRESS VESSELS-01

0002010015 FAB & SHIP PRESS VESSELS-01

Towers

0002010021 ISSUE P.O., TOWERS -01

0002010022 REC VENDOR DATA,TOWERS -01

0002010023 REVIEW DESIGN, TOWERS -


01 0002010024 APPROVE DESIGN, TOWERS -

01 0002010025 FAB & SHIP TOWERS -

01 Storage Tanks

0002010031 ISSUE P.O., STORAGE TANKS-01

0002010032 VENDOR DATA STORAGE TANKS-01

0002010033 REVIEW DESIGN, STORAGE TANKS-01

0002010034 APPROVE DESIGN, STORAGE TANKS-01

0002010035 FAB & SHIP STORAGE TANKS-01

Pumps

0002010041 ISSUE P.O., PUMPS -01

0002010042 REC VENDOR DATA,PUMPS -01

0002010043 REVIEW DESIGN, PUMPS -01

0002010044 APPROVE DESIGN, PUMPS -01

0002010045 FAB & SHIP PUMPS -01

Compressors

0002010051 ISSUE P.O., COMPRESSORS -01

0002010052 REC VENDOR DATA,COMPRESSORS -01

0002010053 REVIEW DESIGN, COMPRESSORS -01

0002010054 APPROVE DESIGN, COMPRESSORS -01

0002010055 FAB & SHIP COMPRESSORS -01

Turbines

0002010061 ISSUE P.O., TURBINES -


01 0002010062 REC VENDOR DATA,TURBINES -

01 0002010063 REVIEW DESIGN, TURBINES -

01 0002010064 APPROVE DESIGN, TURBINES -

01 0002010065 FAB & SHIP TURBINES -

01 Heat Exchangers

0002010071 ISSUE P.O., HEAT EXCHNGRS-01

0002010072 REC VENDOR DATA,HEAT EXCHNGRS-01

0002010073 REVIEW DESIGN, HEAT EXCHNGRS-01

0002010074 APPROVE DESIGN, HEAT EXCHNGRS-01

0002010075 FAB & SHIP HEAT EXCHNGRS-01

Boilers

0002010081 ISSUE P.O., BOILERS -01

0002010082 REC VENDOR DATA,BOILERS -01

0002010083 REVIEW DESIGN, BOILERS -01

0002010084 APPROVE DESIGN, BOILERS -01

0002010085 FAB & SHIP BOILERS -01

Furnaces

0002010091 ISSUE P.O., FURNACES -01

0002010092 REC VENDOR DATA,FURNACES -01

0002010093 REVIEW DESIGN, FURNACES -01

0002010094 APPROVE DESIGN, FURNACES -01

0002010095 FAB & SHIP FURNACES -01

Air Coolers


0002011001 ISSUE P.O., AIR COOLERS -01

0002011002 REC VENDOR DATA,AIR COOLERS -01

0002011003 REVIEW DESIGN, AIR COOLERS -01

0002011004 APPROVE DESIGN, AIR COOLERS -01

0002011005 FAB & SHIP AIR COOLERS -01

Pkg Refrigeration

0002011011 ISSUE P.O., PKG REFRIG -01

0002011012 REC VENDOR DATA,PKG REFRIG -01

0002011013 REVIEW DESIGN, PKG REFRIG -01

0002011014 APPROVE DESIGN, PKG REFRIG -01

0002011015 FAB & SHIP PKG REFRIG -01

Generators

0002011021 ISSUE P.O., ELEC GENERATR-01

0002011022 REC VENDOR DATA,ELEC GENERATR-01

0002011023 REVIEW DESIGN, ELEC GENERATR-01

0002011024 APPROVE DESIGN, ELEC GENERATR-01

0002011025 FAB & SHIP ELEC GENERATR-01

Air Dryers

0002011031 ISSUE P.O., AIR DRYERS -01

0002011032 REC VENDOR DATA,AIR DRYERS -01

0002011033 REVIEW DESIGN, AIR DRYERS -01

0002011034 APPROVE DESIGN, AIR DRYERS -


01 0002011035 FAB & SHIP AIR DRYERS -

01 Conveyors

0002011041 ISSUE P.O., CONVEYORS -01

0002011042 REC VENDOR DATA,CONVEYORS -01

0002011043 REVIEW DESIGN, CONVEYORS -01

0002011044 APPROVE DESIGN, CONVEYORS -01

0002011045 FAB & SHIP CONVEYORS -01

Mills

0002011051 ISSUE P.O., MILLS -01

0002011052 REC VENDOR DATA,MILLS -01

0002011053 REVIEW DESIGN, MILLS -01

0002011054 APPROVE DESIGN, MILLS -01

0002011055 FAB & SHIP MILLS -01

Fans

0002011061 ISSUE P.O., FANS -01

0002011062 REC VENDOR DATA,FANS -01

0002011063 REVIEW DESIGN, FANS -01

0002011064 APPROVE DESIGN, FANS -01

0002011065 FAB & SHIP FANS -01

Elevators

0002011071 ISSUE P.O., ELEVATORS -01

0002011072 REC VENDOR DATA,ELEVATORS -01

0002011073 REVIEW DESIGN, ELEVATORS -01


0002011074 APPROVE DESIGN, ELEVATORS -01

0002011075 FAB & SHIP ELEVATORS -01

Motors

0002011081 ISSUE P.O., MOTORS -01

0002011082 REC VENDOR DATA,MOTORS -01

0002011083 REVIEW DESIGN, MOTORS -01

0002011084 APPROVE DESIGN, MOTORS -01

0002011085 FAB & SHIP MOTORS -01

Dust Collectors

0002011091 ISSUE P.O., DUST COLLECTR-01

0002011092 REC VENDOR DATA,DUST COLLECTR-01

0002011093 REVIEW DESIGN, DUST COLLECTR-01

0002011094 APPROVE DESIGN, DUST COLLECTR-01

0002011095 FAB & SHIP DUST COLLECTR-01

Filters

0002012001 ISSUE P.O., FILTERS -01

0002012002 REC VENDOR DATA,FILTERS -01

0002012003 REVIEW DESIGN, FILTERS -01

0002012004 APPROVE DESIGN, FILTERS -01

0002012005 FAB & SHIP FILTERS -01

Centrifuges

0002012011 ISSUE P.O., CENTRIFUGES -01


0002012012 REC VENDOR DATA,CENTRIFUGES -01

0002012013 REVIEW DESIGN, CENTRIFUGES -01

0002012014 APPROVE DESIGN, CENTRIFUGES -01

0002012015 FAB & SHIP CENTRIFUGES -01

Mixers

0002012021 ISSUE P.O., MIXERS -01

0002012022 REC VENDOR DATA,MIXERS -01

0002012023 REVIEW DESIGN, MIXERS -01

0002012024 APPROVE DESIGN, MIXERS -01

0002012025 FAB & SHIP MIXERS -01

Cooling Towers

0002012031 ISSUE P.O., COOLING TOWER-01

0002012032 REC VENDOR DATA,COOLING TOWER-01

0002012033 REVIEW DESIGN, COOLING TOWER-01

0002012034 APPROVE DESIGN, COOLING TOWER-01

0002012035 FAB & SHIP COOLING TOWER-01

Misc. Equipment

0002012041 ISSUE P.O., MISC EQUIP -01

0002012042 REC VENDOR DATA,MISC EQUIP -01

0002012043 REVIEW DESIGN, MISC EQUIP -01

0002012044 APPROVE DESIGN, MISC EQUIP -01

0002012045 FAB & SHIP MISC EQUIP -01

Package Items

0002012051 ISSUE P.O., PACKAGE ITEMS-


01 0002012052 REC VENDOR DATA,PACKAGE ITEMS-

01 0002012053 REVIEW DESIGN, PACKAGE ITEMS-

01 0002012054 APPROVE DESIGN, PACKAGE ITEMS-

01 0002012055 FAB & SHIP PACKAGE ITEMS-

01 Packing and Linings

0002012061 ISSUE P.O., PACK&LININGS -01

0002012062 REC VENDOR DATA,PACK&LININGS -01

0002012063 REVIEW DESIGN, PACK&LININGS -01

0002012064 APPROVE DESIGN, PACK&LININGS -01

0002012065 FAB & SHIP PACK&LININGS -01

Activities Variable by Contractor

Piping – Material Vendor

0002013011 PIPING (80%) QUOTES -01

0002013012 TAB & RECOMMEND VENDOR -01

0002013013 APPROVE PIPING VENDOR -01

0002013014 ISSUE P.O., PIPING(80%) -01

0002013015 DELIVER PIPING (80%) -01

0002013016 ISSUE P.O., FINAL PIPING -01

0002013017 DELIVER FINAL PIPING -01

Piping – Remote Shop

0002013021 PIPE FAB SHOP QUOTES -01

0002013022 TAB & RECOMMEND PIPE SHOP -


01 0002013023 CLIENT APPROVAL, PIPE SHOP

-01 0002013024 ISSUE PO, PIPE FABRICATION -

01 0002013025 FAB & SHIP SPOOLS (80%) -

01 0002013026 FAB & SHIP FINAL SPOOLS -

01 Civil Contract

0002014001 PREP CIVIL&STRUC BID PACKAGE 0002014002 APPROVE CIVIL&STRUC BID

PACKAGE 0002014003 BID CYCLE, CIVIL & STRUCTURAL 0002014004 APPROVE CIVIL&STRUC CONTRACTOR 0002014005 MOBILIZE, CIVIL CONTRACTOR Civil

0002014015 FAB & DELIVER,REBAR,INBEDS -01

0002014021 PREPARE BID PKG,BUILDINGS -01

0002014022 APPROVE BID PKG, BUILDINGS -01

0002014023 OBTAIN BIDS, BUILDINGS -01

0002014024 SELECT CONTRACTOR,BUILDINGS -01

0002014025 APPROVE CONTRACTOR,BUILDINGS -01

0002014026 SIGN CONTRACT,BUILDNGS -01

0002014027 MOBILIZE,BUILDING CONTRACTOR -01

Steel

0002015006 QUOTE,SELECT STEEL FABRICATOR-01

0002015007 RECEIVE SHOP DWGS, STRUCTURAL-01

0002015008 REVIEW SHOP DWGS ,STRUCTURAL -01

0002015009 FAB & SHIP STRUCTURAL STEEL -01

0002015010 MISC STEEL SHOP DRAWINGS -


01 0002015011 REVIEW SHOP DWGS, MISC STEEL -

01 0002015012 FAB & SHIP MISC STEEL -

01 0002015020 QUOTE & PURCHASE GRATING -

01 0002015021 DETAIL,FAB & DELIVER GRATING -

01 Instrumentation

0002016041 QUOTE INSTR TAGGED ITEMS -01

0002016042 SELECT VENDORS,TAGGED ITEMS -01

0002016043 APPROVE VENDORS,TAGGED ITEMS -01

0002016044 PURCHASE INSTR TAGGED ITEMS -01

0002016045 DELIVER INSTR TAGGED ITEMS -01

Insulation Contract

0002018001 PREPARE BID PACKAGE, INSULATION

0002018002 APPROVE BID PACKAGE, INSULATION

0002018003 BIDS,SUPPLY & INSTALL INSULATION

0002018004 APPROVE INSULATION CONTRACTOR 0002018005 MOBILIZE, INSULATION

CONTRACTOR Painting Contract

0002019001 PREPARE BID PACKAGE, PAINT 0002019002 APPROVE BID PACKAGE, PAINT 0002019003 OBTAIN BIDS, PAINTING 0002019004 APPROVE PAINTING CONTRACTOR 0002019005 MOBILIZE, PAINTING CONTRACT

Appendix B: Site Development and Construction Activity Numbers 717

Appendix B: Site Development and Construction Activity Numbers

Numbering Conventions The table below illustrates IPS Site Development and Construction activity ID’s as they are described below. The first seven characters of the ten-character activity ID indicate the functional source of the activity (for example, a pipe-rack or a particular item of equipment), and the last three characters indicate the type of work, with a standard description.

The first seven characters contain variables, as described below: • The first and second characters indicate the schedule Area

number, 01 through 90; and other project-level items, such as substations, control panel and power transmission lines, which always use 91.

• The third through fifth characters contain the user-specified tag number (columns 5 - 7) from the estimating system input for equipment items and plant bulks. For substations, the fourth and fifth characters contain the substation reference number (01-99) specified by the user or, if not specified, the System default reference number of 00.

718 Appendix B: Site Development and Construction Activity Numbers

• The sixth and seventh characters contain an IPS Equipment Code corresponding to the Equipment Symbol (see Appendix D). All other activities have a fixed identifier in positions six and seven of the activity number, as listed in the table on the following page.

• The eighth through tenth characters always refer to the type of work performed in the activity. These last three characters generate a standard activity description, as listed in the Activity ID’s list.

Note: For Control Centers or Operations Centers, the fifth and sixth characters contain the Center reference number (01-99) specified by the user.

Site Development and Construction – Activity Numbering Conventions

Category Range

Construction – Areas

Equipment Items AA-XXX-YY-2-00-NN through AA-XXX-YY-2-35

Plant Bulks, Buildings, Area SD items AA-XXX-91-1-00-NN through AA-XXX-91-9-35

Area Bulks AA-XXX-91-3-00-NN through AA-XXX-91-9-35

Construction – project-level

Unit Substation 91-OBB-00-4-00-NN through 91-OBB-00-7-27

Main Substation 91-1BB-00-4-00-NN through 91-1BB-00-7-27

Control Center 91-20C-C0-6-00-NN through 91-20C-C0-6-35

Operations Center 91-21C-C0-6-00-NN through 91-21C-C0-6-35

Transmission Line 91-300-00-7-29-NN through 91-300-00-7-30

Elec. Hookup and Testing 91-300-00-7-31-NN through 91-300-00-7-33

Demobilize Project 91-450-00-0-80-NN only

AA – Schedule area number

BB – Substation reference number


CC – Control or operation center reference number

NN – Contractor number

XXX – Component reference number

YY – Equipment type

List of Activity Numbers The following Site Development and Construction Activity Numbers are listed by the last three characters only of the 10-character Activity Number. The first seven characters will be listed according to numbering conventions discussed above.

Note: A blank description or * indicates no logic provided by Aspen Capital Cost Estimator.

Site Development

100 EARLY SITE DEVELOPMENT COMPLETE

* 101 DELIVER SITE MATERIAL 102 SUBCONTRACT SITE

DEVELOPMENT 103 104 105 SOIL BORINGS 106 DEMOLITION 107 CLEAR SITE 108 DEWATERING 109 PILING 110 111 112 WATER WELLS 113 RETAINING WALLS 114 SITE FILL AND

COMPACTION 115 HAULING EARTH 116 BULK EXCAVATION 117 EMBANKMENTS AND DIKES 118 SOIL STABILIZATION 119 ROCK EXCAVATION 120 121 DRAINAGE SYSTEMS 122 BASE PREPARATION

123 SUBPAVING 124 ASPHALT PAVING 125 CONCRETE PAVING 126 CURB, GUTTER,

SIDEWALK 127 TRENCH AND STRUCTURAL

EXCAVATION 128 HAND EXCAVATION 129 RAILROADS 130 MASONRY AND CONCRETE

WALLS 131 FENCING 132 LANDSCAPING 133 134 SITE DEVL USER

SUPPLIED ITEM 135 MISCELLANEOUS SITE

DEVELOPMENT Equipment Setting

200 EQUIPMENT SETTING * 201 DELIVER EQUIPMENT 202 SUBCONTRACT EQUIPMNT 203 FIELD FABRICATE

VESSEL 204 FIELD FABRICATE TOWER 205 SET VESSEL IN

STRUCTURE


206 SET TOWER IN STRUCTURE

207 SET EXCHANGER IN STRUCTURE

208 PUMP SETTING 209 DRIVER SETTING 210 211 VESSEL SETTING 212 TOWER SETTING 213 SETTING COOLING TOWER 214 SETTING PACKAGE

BOILER 215 FIELD ERECT EQUIPMENT 216 SETTING STORAGE TANK 217 FIELD ERECT STORAGE

TANK 218 TURBINE SETTING 219 FURNACE SETTING 220 REACTOR SETTING 221 COMPRESSOR SETTING 222 HEAT EXCHANGER

SETTING 223 AIR COOLER SETTING 224 CONVEYOR SETTING 225 FAN/BLOWER SETTING 226 STACK/FLARE SETTING 227 MILL/CRUSHER SETTING 228 CRANE/HOIST SETTING 229 BLENDER/MIXER SETTNG 230 EQUIPMENT SETTING 231 INSTALL LININGS 232 INSTALL PACKINGS 233 234 EQUIPMENT USER

SUPPLIED ITEM 235 MISCELLANEOUS

EQUIPMENT SETTING Piping

300 PIPING WORK * 301 DELIVER PIPING

MATERIAL

302 SUBCONTRACT PIPING * 303 DELIVER

PREFABRICATION PIPE 304 305 306 FIELD SHOP PIPING

FABRICATION 307 FABRICATE PIPE

SUPPORTS 308 ERECT PIPE SUPPORTS 309 ERECT PIPING 310 311 FIELD WELD PIPE,

FITTINGS 312 ERECT VALVES 313 BOLT UP CONNECTIONS 314 MAKE THREADED

CONNECTION 315 316 317 UTILITY PIPING 318 319 320 BURIED PIPE 321 COAT AND WRAP PIPE 322 PROCESS DUCTWORK 323 STEAM TRACING 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 PIPING SYSTEM TESTNG 333 * 334 PIPING USER SUPPLIED

ITEM 335 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING Civil


400 CIVIL WORK * 401 DELIVER CIVIL

MATERIAL 402 SUBCONTRACT CIVIL 403 404 EXCAVATE FOUNDATION 405 406 EXCAVATE TRENCH 407 408 BACKFILL AND COMPACT 409 SHORING EXCAVATIONS 410 GRADE AND COMPACT

BASE 411 FIELD FABRICATE

FORMWORK 412 INSTALL FORMWORK 413 STRIP AND CLEAN

FORMWORK 414 415 FIELD FABRICATE REBAR 416 INSTALL REBAR 417 418 FIELD MIX CONCRETE 419 POUR AND FINISH

CONCRETE 420 CONCRETE CURING TIME 421 422 SET ANCHOR BOLTS 423 GROUT BASE PLATE 424 425 BUILDING STRUCTURAL 426 BUILDING PLUMBING 427 BUILDING ELECTRICAL 428 429 SAND MAT FOUNDATION * 430 INSTALL PRECAST UNIT 431 CONCRETE STRUCTURES 432 433 MISCELLANEOUS

CONCRETE 434 CIVIL USER SUPPLIED

ITEM 435 MISCELLANEOUS CIVIL

WORK

Steel

500 STRUCTURAL STEELWORK * 501 DELIVER STRUCTURAL

STEEL 502 SUBCONTRACT STEELWORK 503 504 UNLOAD AND HANDLE

STEEL 505 506 ERECT STEEL STRUCTURE 507 ERECT PIPERACK STEEL 508 EQUIPMENT SUPPORT

STEEL 509 510 GRATING, STAIRS, AND

SO ON 511 512 513 514 515 516 517 518 519 520 521 522 523 524 525 526 527 528 529 530 531 532 533 534 STEEL USER SUPPLIED

ITEM 535 MISCELLANEOUS

STEELWORK Instrumentation


600 INSTRUMENTATION * 601 DELIVER INSTRUMENTS 602 SUBCONTRACT

INSTRUMENTS 603 604 INSTALL LOCAL

INSTRUMENTS 605 INSTALL INSTRUMENT

PIPING 606 INSTALL INSTRUMENT

WIRING 607 INSTALL JUNCTION

BOXES 608 INSTALL CONTROL PANEL 609 CONNECT PANEL

INSTRUMENTS 610 * 611 COMPUTER INSTALLATION * 612 COMPUTER TEST RUNS 613 614 INSTRUMENT TESTING 615 INSTALL TUBE BUNDLES 616 PULL MULTICORE RUNS 617 618 INSTALL TERMINATION

CABINETS 619 INSTALL RELAY/PC

CABINETS 620 621 INSTALL DATA HIGHWAY 622 623 INSTALL CONSOLE/VDU 624 625 626 627 628 629 630 631 632 INSTRUMENT CONTINUITY

CHECK

633 CONTROL SYSTEM TEST 634 INSTRUMENT USER


INSTRUMENTION Electrical

700 ELECTRICAL WORK * 701 DELIVER ELECTRICAL

MATERIAL 702 SUBCONTRACT

ELECTRICAL 703 704 INSTALL BURIED CABLE 705 INSTALL CABLE TRAYS 706 CABLE IN TRAYS 707 INSTALL

CONDUIT/FITTINGS 708 PULL WIRE IN CONDUIT 709 710 ELECTRICAL TRACING 711 RECEPTACLES AND

SWITCHES 712 INSTALL PANELBOARDS 713 INSTALL LIGHT

FITTINGS 714 PUSH BUTTON, PILOT

LIGHT 715 BUS DUCT 716 717 SUBSTATION STEEL

STRUCTURE 718 INSTALL SWITCHGEAR 719 INSTALL SUBSTATION

DISCONNECT 720 INSTALL TRANSFORMER 721 INSTALL MOTOR CONTROL

CENTER 722 723 BUILDING LIGHTING 724 * 725 INSTALL CATHODIC


PROTECTION 726 727 GROUNDING SYSTEM 728 729 TRANSMISSION TOWERS 730 TRANSMISSION LINES 731 ELECTRICAL POWER

HOOK-UP 732 ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT

CHECK 733 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

TEST 734 ELECTRICAL USER


ELECTRICAL Insulation

800 INSULATION WORK * 801 DELIVER INSULATION

MATERIAL 802 SUBCONTRACT

INSULATION 803 804 PIPE INSULATION 805 EQUIPMENT INSULATION 806 807 808 809 810 FIREPROOFING 811 812 813 814 815 816 817 818 819 * 820 ACID RESISTANT TILE 821 822 823 824

825 826 827 828 829 830 831 832 833 834 INSULATION USER


INSULATION Paint

900 PAINTING WORK * 901 DELIVER PAINT

MATERIAL 902 SUBCONTRACT PAINTING 903 904 SURFACE PREP -

STEELWORK 905 PAINT STEELWORK 906 907 SURFACE PREP -

EQUIPMENT 908 PAINT EQUIPMENT 909 910 SURFACE PREP - PIPING 911 PAINT PIPING 912 913 914 915 916 917 918 919 920 921 922 923 924 925 926


927 928 929 930 931 932 933 * 934 PAINT USER SUPPLIED

ITEM 935 MISCELLANEOUS

PAINTING

IPS Project Schedule Settings 725

Appendix C: Equipment Class Definitions

Equipment Class Number

Vessels 01

Towers 02

Storage Tanks 03

Pumps 04

Compressors 05

Turbines 06

Heat Exchangers 07

Boilers 08

Furnaces 09

Air Coolers 10

Package Refrigeration 11

Generators 12

Air Dryers 13

Conveyors 14

Mills 15

Fans 16

Elevators 17

Motors 18

Dust Collectors 19

Filters 20

Centrifuges 21

Mixers 22

Cooling Towers 23

Miscellaneous Equipment 24

Package Items 25

726 Appendix C: Equipment Class Definitions

Packings and Linings 26


Appendix D: Equipment Codes

The Equipment Code identifies the component. In addition, equipment codes can include non-equipment items. The Equipment Codes are as follows.

Equipment Item Symbol Description

Equipment Code

AC Air Compressor 01

AD Air Dryer 03

AG Agitator 72

AT Agitated Tanks 04

BL Blender 06

C Condenser 07

CE Crane 09

CO Conveyor 10

CP Centrifugal Pump 11

CR Crusher 12

CRY Crystallizer 13

CT Centrifuge 14

D Dryer 16

DC Dust Collector 17

DD Drum Dryer 18

DDT Double Diameter Tower 15

E Evaporator 19

EG Electric Generator 20

EJ Ejector 21

EL Elevator 22

F Filter 24

FE Feeder 26

728 Appendix D: Equipment Codes

FL Flaker 27

FLR Flare 28

FN Fan 29

FU Furnace 70

GC Gas Compressor 32

GP Gear Pump 34

HE Heat Exchanger 36

HO Hoist 37

HT Horizontal Tank 38

HU Heating Unit 39

K Kneader 42

LIN Lining 73

M Mill 43

MOT Motor/Motor Reducer 68

MX Mixer 44

P Pump 45

PAK Packing 74

R Reactor 48

RB Reboiler 69

RD Rotary Drum 49

RU Refrigeration Unit 50

S Scale 52

SE Separation Equipment 54

ST Stock Treatment 53

STK Stack 55

T Thickener 57

TDS Tray Drying System 58

TUR Turbine 71

TW Single Diameter Tower 60

VP Vacuum Pump 62

VS Screen 63

VT Vertical Tank 64

WFE Wiped Film Evaporator 65

WTS Water Treatment System

66

Other 76

Non-Equipment Codes Open Steel Structure and Mill Building 00


Pipe Rack 01

Pad 02

Shell 03

None 04

Buildings 11-20

Supplemental Bulks 31-80

Area Bulks 91

730 Appendix E: Tutorial

Appendix E: Tutorial

In this appendix, a brief tutorial for modifying and preparing the IPS project schedule settings is discussed. Under the tree node IPS Project Schedule Settings => Schedule Appearance Adjustments, the Title of the IPS project is the first input. The default P3E project title (that is,, IPS project title) is the same as the scenario name of the Aspen Capital Cost Estimator project. Typing the IPS project name results in a P3E project with the same name, and the corresponding P3E Enterprise Project Name has also the same name. The EPS project name and EPS Id can be modified using the input provided under Primavera Information => Project Manager Information. Modification of activity description is performed using Description Modification node of the input tree.

As an example, consider a detailed engineering activity, (variable by contractor) under civil account with an activity id 0001014013 with an internal description REV & IFC,EQUIP FDN DWGS. The user may wish to change to a less detailed description “PREPARE CIVIL DRAWINGS” as shown above. All the input is entered from the activity number, and the new activity description is


entered. Several similar examples are provided above. Description modification for construction is very similar. Adjustments to calculated durations for the generated activities may be performed using the schedule adjustment by duration node. Duration for the engineering and procurement activities can be adjusted as shown below.

All three phases may be zeroed out; if the detailed engineering durations are zeroed out, basic engineering activities are automatically set to zero; and if procurement activities are set to zero, basic and detailed engineering activities are zeroed out. In a similar manner, duration of construction activities may be modified as shown below. The durations of construction activities are adjusted by account. Duration of procurement activities are modified by providing the fabrication and ship time of equipment as shown in the next page.


The IPS-generated activities may be replaced or combined to generate activities as per the user requirements using the activity modifications node. As an example, the figure below shows engineering activity modification screen, and


item 1 shows the use of * (in the contract number, activity sequence number and account group number) for the source activity, to combine all basic engineering activities into one single activity with an id of 000003013. Item 2 shows that all detailed civil engineering activities (0001014010 through 0001014097) have been combined into one single civil design activity 0001**4013. Item 3 shows how steel activities are combined into one.

If activities are modified and combined, it becomes necessary to generate logic for created activities. In the figure given below, logic modification for several detailed engineering activities are listed, owing to the fact that all basic engineering activities have been combined to one. As an instance, activity 1**2011 (design equipment and piping layout) is assigned a predecessor 1**6007 (Instrument cable tray study) in item 2 of the figure shown below. Existing predecessors for 1**6007 are removed in item 1.


The remaining schedule adjustments by crew size and crafts have been described in the main section; to be noted is that craft adjustment is simply used to replace the system craft code and description by the users, and des not serve to modify the schedule duration.


Index

2

2/3 rule 174, 346

A

About command Help menu 46

Absolute Basis streams 275

Account allocation Code of Accounts 94

ACCUM, escalation 77 Activate Custom Model option

Preferences 55 Activity modification

IPS project schedule settings 150, 666

Add Area command 281 Add button

Engineering Discipline Info form 82

Pipe Details form 298 Wage Rate Info form 89

Add Contractor command 116 Add Project Component

command 286 Add Stream button

toolbar 275 Add Stream command

View menu, PFD 271 View menu, PFD 275

Add Trend Data to Database command

Trend menu, Aspen Icarus Reporter 575, 598

Adding areas 281, 282 barchart items 131 COA sets 92 contractor sets 120 contractors 116 custom pipe specs 72 drawing types 83 EML items 436, 438 Equipment rental items 103–

106 lines to pipe volumetric

model 297 loop to instrument

volumetric model 300 power distribution items 107 process control items 111 project components 284–286 project directories 56–59 rental days 104 simulation units 159 streams 199, 206–209, 321–

325 UCL items 442, 445

Adjusting schedule and barcharts

project execution schedule settings 127–129

736 Index

Air coolers design criteria specifications

173 Air supply

instrumentation loop 302 All Crafts Percent of Base

General Wage Rates 87 Allow Docking command 40 Allow Pipeline Areas

General Project Data dialog box 24–25

Alternate project directories 57 Analyzer

importing from 25–27 Analyzer Scale-Up Module

(ASM) 455–459 Anchor bolts

civil installation bulk 299 Apply 2/3 Rule for Design

Pressure Design Criteria 174

Apply button Component Specifications

form 629 Develop Stream

specifications form 201, 323

Installation Bulks form 292 Interactive Sizing form 330 Mat'l Man-hour Adjustments

form 294 Preferences dialog box 52

Area icons 31 List view display of items 33 mapping 247 simulator 239, 248, 254, 267

Area Information dialog box 281

Area title 283, 284 Areas

adding 281, 282 deleting 309 dimensions 283, 284 electrical specifications 283,

284 equipment specifications

283, 284 importing 304 index manhours 283, 284 index material costs 283,

284 insulation specifications 283,

284 linking to Consets 121 linking to unit substations

109 paint specifications 283, 284 piping specifications 283,

284 pop-up menu 286 re-numbering 310 steel specifications 283, 284 title 283, 284 type definition 281, 283, 284

ASM See Analyzer Scale-Up Module (ASM)

Aspen Customer Piping Specs Manager 72

Aspen Icarus Project Scheduler (IPS)

using in Kbase environment 132

Aspen Icarus Reporter Data trending 597 Excel reports 588–96 HTML reports 586–88 importing data 600 Management reports 588–92 menu bar 574 report mode 575 standard reports 575–86


Aspen Plus link to IPE 228 map specs 162, 163 models used in sizing towers

352 AspenTech

Aspen Plus simulator program 162, 163

AspenTech support 16 AspenTech Support Center 16 Auto Filter 596 Automatic Item Evaluation

checked command Tools menu 45, 629

Automatic task backup 54

B

Backup options Preferences 54

Barcharts custom-designed bars 131–

132 project component activity

bars 130 Schedule Adjustments

specifications form 127–129

Base stream 202 Base Stream

Develop Streams dialog box 275

BaseCase, default scenario name 21, 639

Basic engineering 79 Basis

Map dialog box 248 streams 275

Basis for Capital Costs Code of Accounts 91–96 construction workforce 86–

89

contingency and miscellaneous project costs 75

contracts 114 design basis 70 equipment rental 103–106 escalation 76–78 indexing 96 input units of measure 66 introduction 66 libraries 210 output (reports) units of

measure customization 68 systems 106–114

Batch Import Tools menu 45

BFD See Block Flow Diagram (BFD)

Block Flow Diagram (BFD) displaying 241 Drag & Find feature 242 introduction 241 right-click commands 243 View menu 245 Zoom commands 244–245

Bottom sump height towers, design criteria 174

Buildings 279

C

Cached project information 48 Cancel button

Develop Stream specifications form 201

Capacity changing 455

Capacity over-design factor See Pump overdesign factor

Capital Cost errors 562 Capital Costs

depreciation 188–189 escalation 189

738 Index

investment parameters 189 reports 53 View command 246, 269,

270 Capital Costs View

View menu 44, 45 CARBONST.DAT 72 Cascade command

Window menu 33, 46 Cash Flow Summary

reports, Icarus Editor 568 Cashflow spreadsheet 612–20 CASHFLOW.ICS

Cashflow spreadsheet 612–20

ChemCAD map specs 164 simulator report preparation

229–231 Civil

installation bulk 299 material costs and man-

hours 293 specs, design basis 72

Clear All Saved Trends command

Trend menu, Aspen Icarus Reporter 597

Close command File menu 43

COA See Code of Accounts (COA)

Code of Accounts (COA) adding a COA set 92 allocating costs to 94 allocating UCL item costs to

443 exceptions to account

allocations 95 introduction 91

Codes of Accounts (COA)

instrumentation field hook-up 219

Cold Inlet Stream field 330 Cold Outlet Stream field 330 Color coding

Component Specifications form 290

Component Map Information 252, 254

Component Name 253 Component Specifications form

accessing 289 color coding 289, 290 Options button 290, 291 P&ID button 296, 300

Component Status 253 Components See Project

components Components view

Palette 37, 38 Compressors

design criteria specifications 170

sizing 320 Computer name

scenario information 28 Configuration options

mapping 250, 254 Connectivity, stream

explanation 205 Consets

adding 120 deleting 125 editing 123–124 linking 121 unlinking 122

Construction equipment rental 103–106 management 76, 80, 127 manpower, escalation 76 schedule 127, 570


workforce 86–89, 116 Contingencies

Project Summary spreadsheet (PROJSUM.ICS) 610

Contingency and miscellaneous project costs 75

Contract scope definitions 119–125 exceptions 124

Contractor adding 116 assigning engineering

drawings 85 definition, editing 117 deleting 118 linking to workforces 116 reports 570 sets 119–125 unlinking from workforce 117

Contracts Contractors tree diagram

115–119 introduction 114 Scope tree diagram 119–125

Control center adding 111–113 instrument volumetric

models 301 introduction, power

distribution 111 linking to area 113 linking to Consets 121 linking to power distribution

items 109 Control Center button bar

517 Control centers

instrumentation loop 302 Control signal

instrumentation loop 302 Control valve

instrumentation loop 301–303

Conversion factor input units of measure 23,

68 simulator units of measure

158 Conversion rate

currency 24 Copy command

project components 306 Cost libraries

deleting 454 duplicating 453 Equipment Model Library

(EML) 434–440 importing 452 introduction 433 Unit Cost Library (UCL) 440–

450 Costs

total direct cost, Equipment Summary (EQUIP.ICS) 604

total project cost, Cashflow spreadsheet (CASHFLOW.ICS) 612

Country Base 24 CPM barchart

project schedule 127 CPM Schedules 14 Craft code 89 Craft names

modifying 91 Craft rates

construction workforce specifications 89–90

Create New Project dialog box 20, 25, 59, 638

Create New Trend in Excel command


740 Index

Create Stream dialog box 206, 208, 323, 324

Create tab view Develop Streams dialog box

206 Create User Database

command File menu, Aspen Icarus

Reporter 574, 601 Create User Database dialog

box Aspen Icarus Reporter 602

creating line sizing equations 401

Creating project scenario 20–25, 20–

25 streams 199, 206–209, 321–

325 Crew mixes

modifying 90–91 Crew size


Currency Conversion Rate 24, 65


Currency Name 24 Currency Symbol 24


Current Map List Project Component Map

Specifications dialog box 161

Custom Model instructions 310–315 Preferences 55

Custom P&ID's attaching to a component

407 setting as component’s

default in active project only 408

setting as component's default 404

Custom piping specs design basis 71–72

Custom Tasks command Tools menu 45

Customer External Files selecting in project 126

customer support 16 customizing

instrument field hook ups 217

Cut command project components 306

Cyclone inlet linear velocity design criteria specifications

182

D

Data trending Aspen Icarus Reporter 597

Decision Analyzer command Run menu 44

DEFAULT.DAT 72 Delete button

Pipe Details form 298 Delete Mappings command

254 Deleting

areas 309 components 308 contractors 118 cost libraries 454 cost library items 451 mappings 254


power distribution items 110 process control items 114 projects and project

scenarios 48 specification files 215 streams 209

Delivery times equipment classes 129 project components 130–131

Density Develop Stream

specifications form 203 Depreciation method

Cashflow spreadsheet (CASHFLOW.ICS) 613, 617, 620


Depreciation Method investment parameters 188

Design basis editing 74 introduction 70

Design Criteria specifications, project basis

168–182 Design engineering 127 Design pressure

applying 2/3 rule for 174, 346


sizing agitators 340 sizing heat exchangers 347 sizing towers 360 utility specifications 185

Design temperature design criteria specifications

169 sizing agitators 340 sizing heat exchangers 347 sizing towers 360 utility specifications 185

Desired rate of return Cashflow spreadsheet

(CASHFLOW.ICS) 613 Executive Summary

spreadsheet (EXECSUM.ICS) 622

Project Summary (PROJSUM.ICS) spreadsheet 607

Desired Rate of Return investment parameters

specifications 188 Detail engineering 79 Develop Equipment Library

Model form 437 Develop Product Specifications

dialog box 196 Develop Schedule

command Run menu 44

Develop Stream specifications form 201, 323, 325

Develop Streams dialog box 206, 207, 322, 324

Develop Utiltiy Specifications dialog box 183

Dimensions, areas 283, 284 Direct costs

instrument field hook-ups 216

Directories project, locations -

Preferences 56–59 Disciplines

engineering 81 Disconnect command

streams 278 Disconnected Streams dialog

box 277 Discounted Cash-Flow Rate of

Return See Internal Rate of Return (IRR)

Display results after evaluation Preferences 53

742 Index

Docking 40 Documentation 16 Double-jointed pipe

requirement pipeline area specifications

285 Draw Disconnected Stream

button toolbar 277

Draw Disconnected Stream command

View menu, PFD 277 Draw Disconnected Stream

command View menu, PFD 271

Drawing count engineering workforce

specifications 84 Drawing number 84, 85 Drawing type

engineering workforce specifications 83

Duct installation bulk 298 Durations


E

e-bulletins 16 Economic Life of Project

investment parameters 188 Economy - local and world,

escalation 76 Edit Connectivity button

toolbar 272, 273 Edit Connectivity command

View menu, PFD 271, 272 EI (escalation indices) 77 Electrical

installation bulk 303

material costs and man-hours 293

specs, areas 283, 284 specs, design basis 74

Electricity operating unit costs

specifications 192 E-mail

reports 588, 589, 595 EML See Equipment Model

Library (EML) Engineering

assigning responsibility for 123

disciplines 81 drawings 83 management 80 phases 79 schedule 570 workforce 116

Engineer-Procure-Construct (EPC) period

Cashflow spreadsheet (CASHFLOW.ICS) 612

investment parameters 189 Project Summary

spreadsheet (PROJSUM.ICS) 607

EQUIP.ICS investment analysis

spreadsheets 603 Equipment

adding 284–286 class delivery times 129 item delivery times 130 number 104, 105 rental 103–106 specifications, areas 283,

284 specs, design basis 71


Equipment Model Library (EML)

adding an item to 436 adding EML item as a

component 438 creating 434 definition 433

Equipment Rental Summary report 105

Equipment Summary investment analysis

spreadsheets 603 ERROR message 561 Escalating library costs 451 Escalation




specifications 76–78 Estimate Class 65 Estimate Date 66 EU country base 24–25 Euro

currency, General Project Data 24

Evaluate button Component Specifications

form 290, 628 Evaluate Item command 628 Evaluate Project button

toolbar 42, 560 Evaluate Project command

Run menu 44, 560 Evaluation

item 628 Preferences 53 project 560

Evaluation Engine 350, 601 Excavation and backfill

civil installation bulk 299

Excel Custom Model files 310–315

Excel reports Auto Filter 596 descriptions 592 opening 593

EXECSUM.ICS 620–23 Executive Summary

spreadsheet 620–23 Exit command

Kbase File menu 45–46 Export to Excel Trending

Report dialog box Aspen Icarus Reporter 599

Export to Excel Workbook dialog box

Aspen Icarus Reporter 590, 594

Export to Icarus SPECS File command

File menu 43 Export Trend Data into Excel

dialog box Aspen Icarus Reporter 599

External Simulation Import Tool command

Tools menu 233–236

F

Facility Type investment parameters 190

FATAL message 561 Field

instrumentation, process control 111

supervision, project schedule 127

Field hook-up assembly and parts 216–222

Fieldbus system instrumentation specs,

design basis 73 short-circuit protection 73

744 Index

File menu Aspen Icarus Reporter

menu bar 574 Kbase menu bar 43

Fireproofing insulation specs 74

Fit into one page Zoom dialog box 244

Float in Main Window command 40

Flow rate units product specifications 198

Fluid classes utility streams 184

Foaming tendency trayed towers, design criteria

177 Foreman wage rate

general wage rates 88 Form work

civil installation bulk 299 Fraction basis 204 Freeze Content button

Properties Window 39 Fuel

operating unit costs specifications 192

Furnace fractional efficiency heat exchanger design

criteria 173

G

G and A expenses Cashflow spreadsheet

(CASHFLOW.ICS) 613 Project Summary

spreadsheet (PROJSUM.ICS) 607, 609

G and A Expenses investment parameters 190

Galvanizing (for steel)

civil/steel specs, design basis 73

paint installation bulk 303 General and administrative

costs Cashflow spreadsheet

(CASHFLOW.ICS) 613 investment parameters 190 Project Summary


General materials, escalation 76

General Project Data creating a new project

scenario 24 defining the Project Basis 64

General rates construction workforce

specifications 86–88 Gray borders


Green borders Component Specifications

form 290 Grid Settings command

View menu, PFD 270, 271 Grids

viewing in Block Flow Diagram (BFD) 246

viewing in Process Flow Diagram (PFD) 271

Grids Visible command View menu, BFD 246

Grout civil installation bulk 299

H

Heat exchangers



sizing 345–349 utility specifications 182

help desk 16 Help menu 46 Helper wage rate

general wage rates 88 HETP (height equivalent of a

theoretical plate) packed towers, design

criteria 176 Hook-ups

customizing 216–222 extra wire for 73 instrumentation 73, 216–222

Hot Inlet Stream field 327 Hot Outlet Stream field 330 HTML reports

descriptions 586 Item Report 53 opening 587, 588

HYSIM map specs 165 models used in sizing towers

352 simulator report preparation

231–233 HYSYS

map specs 166 models used in sizing towers


233–236

I

Icarus Editor printing report section 563 reviewing results 562–72 toolbar 564 Tools menu 45

Icarus Evaluation Engine (IEE) 350, 601

Icarus interface 29–41, 29–41 Icarus Project Component

Selection dialog box 252, 438, 445, 447

Icarus Project Scheduler (IPS) See Aspen Icarus Project Scheduler (IPS)

icziputil.exe 61 IEE See Icarus Evaluation

Engine (IEE) Import command

File menu 43 Libraries view, Palette 213,

452 Import Connected Streams

option Preferences 55

Import Data command File menu, Aspen Icarus

Reporter 574 File menu, Aspen Icarus

Reporter 600 Import Installation Bulks

option Preferences 55

Import Selection dialog box Aspen Icarus Reporter 601

Importing areas 304 components 304 project from previous version

25–27 scenarios 305 specification files 213

Inasmbly.dat 217 Inch-Pound (IP), units of

measure 22, 211, 213 Incomplete items 35 Indexing

Project Basis specifications 96

Indicating signal instrumentation loop 302

Indices

746 Index

escalation (EI) 77 system base 77 user base 77

Indirect costs general wage rates 87 Project Summary


reports 609 Unit Cost Library (UCL) 434

Indirects field Wage General Info

specifications form 87 INFOmational message 561 Inparts.dat 217, 219 Input units of measure

customization 22–23, 66–68

Input Units of Measure Specifications dialog box 22, 67

Installation bulks accessing 291 civil 299 duct 298 electrical 303 instrumentation 299 insulation 303 introduction 291 material man-hour additions

295 paint 303 pipe details 296 pipe spec 295 Preferences 54 steel 299

Installation Details report 216 Installation, assigning

responsibility for 123 Instrument air

operating unit costs specifications 192

instrument field hook-ups customizing 217

Instrument field hook-ups 216–222

Instrument volumetric model adding loop to 300 deleting loop on 301 instrument bulk items 299–

303 replacing loop on 301

Instrumentation customizing field hook-ups

216–222 Fieldbus system 73 installation bulk 299 loop adjustments 301–303 material costs and man-

hours 293 specs, design basis 73

Insulation installation bulk 303 material costs 293 specs, design basis 74

Interactive sizing 318–332 Interactive Sizing form 249,

253, 327, 330 Interface layour

customizing 40 Interface layout

Save Window States option 53

understanding 29–41, 29–41 Internal Rate of Return (IRR)

Cashflow spreadsheet (CASHFLOW.ICS) 612, 619

Investment Analysis project specifications 186–

199


Investment Analysis View View menu 45, 603

Investment Analysis View command

View menu 603 Investment Parameters

project specifications 186 IP, units of measure 22, 211,

213 IPE 5.0/5.1

importing from 25–27 IPS Also See Aspen Icarus

Project Schedulaer (IPS) IPS project schedule settings

activity adjustments 150, 666

appearance adjustments 133, 649

displaying Also See Aspen Icarus Project Schedulaer (IPS)

duration adjustments 139, 654

logic adjustments 144, 659 IRR See Internal Rate of

Return (IRR) Item evaluation

automatic 629 running 628 sample item report 631

Item Report instructions for running 628 Preferences 53 sample 631

Item Report command 628

J

Japan country base, General

Project Data 24 Job Number field 65 JP country base 24–25 Junction boxes 111

instrumentation loop 302

K

Kbase Project Workflow 14 KbaseLog.txt

Preferences, Logging 60 K-Yen (KY)


L

Labor cost per unit Unit Cost Library (UCL) 443

Labor hours per unit Unit Cost Library (UCL) 443

Labor Unit Costs operating unit costs

specifications 192 Laboratory charges


Laboratory Charges investment parameters 189

Ladders, steel - installation bulks 299

Length of delivered pipe section

pipeline area specifications 285

Length of Start-up Period investment parameters 191

Libraries Basis for Capital Costs 66,

210 cost libraries 310–454 Equipment Model Library

(EML) 434 moving to another directory

216 specification libraries 210–

215 Unit Cost Library (UCL) 440

748 Index

view 37 line sizing equation

creating 401 Line Sizing Equations 400 Line sizing Tutorial 399 Link Area command

process control 113 scope definitions 121

Link Control System command power distribution 109

Link to Const. Work Force command 116

Link to Engg. Work Force command 116

Linking contractor sets to areas 121 contractor sets to power

distribution 121 contractor sets to process

control 121 Liquid entrainment method

179, 368 List view

description 33 mapped components 253 relationship to Project

Explorer 33 simulator file name 239 Status column 253, 287

Load Data button toolbar 239

Load Data command Run menu 239

Local economy, escalation 76 Locations

plant relocation 455 preferences 57

Logging Preferences 60

Logic modification


Loops instrumentation field hook-

ups 217 instrumentation installation

bulks 299 modifications 301–303

M

Magnification Block Flow Diagram (BFD)

244–245 Main Area

default report group 280 Main substations

adding 107–108 Main Window

display options 40 interface, default position 30 printing 43 understanding 32–33

Management reports 588–92 Man-hour indexing 96 Manpower Productivity

Expert (MPE) Tools menu 45

Map All Items option Map dialog box 248

Map command pop-up menu 247

Map dialog box 248 Map Items button

toolbar 247 Map Items command

Run menu 44, 247 Map Selected Item(s) option

Map dialog box 248 Mapping simulator models

design criteria 168–182 instructions 247–254


specifications 162 units of measure mapping

specs 157–160 unsupported models 55

Mass flow Develop Stream

specifications form 203 Material adjustments

indexing, area level 283, 284 Material and man-hour

additions 295 Material and man-hour

adjustments 293 installation bulks 312

Material and man-hour indexing 96

Material cost per unit Unit Cost Library (UCL) 443

Material costs code of account allocations

95 escalation 220 indexing 96 inparts.dat file 220

Material Index Info form 98 Material piping specs 71 Material streams

product specifications 196 Mean temperature difference

(MTD) 347 Menu bar

Aspen Icarus Reporter 574

Kbase 30, 45–46 Metric, units of measure 22,

211, 213 Microsoft Access Database

(.mdb) file 601 Mixture button


Mixture Specs developing streams 203

Modify command

simulator block 240 streams 277

Modify tab view Develop Streams dialog box

200 Monthly Rate field

equipment rental specifications 104, 106

MTD See Mean temperature difference (MTD)

Multi-core runs instrumentation loop 302

MUSE design criteria specifications

173

N

Net Present Value (NPV) Cashflow spreadsheet

(CASHFLOW.ICS) 618 Net Rate of Return (NRR)


New command File menu 20, 25, 43, 638

New Component Information dialog box 287

New Mapping button Project Component Map

Specifications dialog box 161

New Project button toolbar 20, 42, 638

NPV See Net Present Value (NPV)

NRR See Net Rate of Return (NRR)

Number of Periods for Analysis investment parameters 187

Number of shifts 87 Number of Weeks per Period

investment parameters 187

750 Index

O

OK button Develop Stream

specifications form 201 Installation Bulks form 54,

292 Mat'l Man-hour Adjustments

form 295 Open button

toolbar 27, 42, 640 Open command

File menu 27, 43, 640 Palette Projects view 29

Open Existing Project dialog box 28

Open Workbook command File menu, Aspen Icarus

Reporter 574, 597 Opening an existing project

640 Operating and Maintenance

Labor Escalation Cashflow spreadsheet



Operating charges Cashflow spreadsheet



Operating costs Cashflow spreadsheet

(CASHFLOW.ICS) 615 Executive Summary

spreadsheet 622 investment parameters 189

product specifications needed to evaluate 197

Project Summary spreadsheet (PROJSUM.ICS) 607, 609

raw material specifications needed to evaluate 194

Operating hours per period Project Summary


total operating labor cost calculation 611

total product sales calculation 610

total supervision cost calculation 611

Operating Hours per Period investment parameters 191

Operating labor and maintenance costs

investment parameters 190, 192

Operating Mode investment parameters 190

Operating supplies Project Summary


Operating Supplies investment parameters 189

Operating Unit Costs project specifications 191–

192 Operator center

adding 111–113 introduction, power

distribution 111 Options button

Component Specifications form 290, 291


Options menu Component Specifications

form 54 Options sub-menu

Tools menu 45 Order Number 309 Output (reports) units of

measure customization 68–69

Overall column efficiency design criteria specifications

178 tower sizing 361

Overdesign factor 331 heat exchangers 174, 347 pumps 170

Overtime hours,general wage rates

88 rate, general wage rates

88 Overwrite Project Backups

option 53, 54

P

P&ID See P&ID button; P&ID Libraries; P&ID Editor; Piping and instrumentation drawings (P&ID’s)

P&ID button 296, 300, 403 P&ID Editor 399 P3 setup 60 Packed towers


sizing 365, 366 Paint

material costs 293 specs, areas 283, 284 specs, design basis 74

Palette Components view 37, 38,

286

cost libraries 434–454 deleting a project from 48 description 36–38 docking and undocking 40 dragging components from

286 floating in Main Window 40 hide/display 38 interface, default position 30 Libraries view 37, 210–215,

434–454 opening projects 28 Projects view 28, 36, 38, 48,

50, 57 Recent Items folder 286 specification libraries 210 unlocking projects from 50 View menu 44, 269

Paste command project components 306

Period Description investment parameters 187

Phases engineering 78

Pipe Details installation bulk 296

Pipe Spec installation bulk 295

Pipeline Also see Pipeline area; Pipeline project; P&ID Editor; Piping and instrumentation drawings (P&ID’s)

fluid type, pipeline area specifications 285

internal lining type, pipeline area specifications 285

title, pipeline area specifications 285

Pipeline area adding 285 allowing 24–25 editing 285 specifications 285

752 Index

Pipeline project creating 24–25 description 24–25

Piping installation bulks 295,

296–298 material costs and man-

hours 293 specs, design basis 71–72 volumetric model \r 297

Piping and instrumentation drawings (P&ID’s)

Editor 399 manual 296, 300 printing 403 sending through electronic

mail 403 Piping specifications

areas 283, 284 Piping volumetric model

adding lines to 297 changing lines on 298 deleting lines on 298 replacing lines on 298

Plant bulks 279 Plant capacity

changing 455 Plant location

changing 455 Plant overhead


Project Summary spreadsheet (PROJSUM.ICS) 607, 609

Plant Overhead investment parameters 190

Platforms, steel - installation bulks 299

PLC (Programmable Logic Control) center


distribution 111 Ports Visible button

toolbar 272 Ports Visible command

View menu, PFD 270 Potable water

operating unit costs specifiations 192

utilities costs, Project Summary spreadsheet (PROJSUM.ICS) 611

Pounds (PS) currency, General Project

Data 24 Power distribution

adding items 107–108 deleting items 110 introduction 106 linking to Consets 121 links to areas 109 links to control systems 109

Power supply frequency electrical specs 74

Precooler suffix for mapping 251 tower configurations 255,

355, 358 Preferences

accessing 51 Backup tab view 54 buttons 51 description 51 General tab view 52 introduction 51 Locations tab view 56–59 Logging tab view 60 Process tab view 55 prompts 52 saving window states 53


Schedule 60 Tools menu 45

Prepared By field General Project Data 65

Primary fluid component 201, 203, 323

Primavera Information 155, 670

Primavera user name 60 Prime contractor 115 Print command

Kbase File menu 43 Print Preview command

File menu 43 Print Setup command

File menu 43 Printing

Aspen Icarus Reporter 580 forms and reports in Main

Window 43 Icarus Editor 563

Pro/II map specs 167 models used in sizing towers

352 R/R minimum 175 simulator report preparation

236–237 Problem description

SimSci report preparation 236

Process connection intrumentation loop 302

Process control adding items 111–113 deleting items 114 editing items 112 introduction 110–111 linking to a contractor set

121 linking to contractor sets 121 links to areas 113

Process Design specifications 132–186

Process equipment 279 Process Flow Diagrams (PFD)

267–278 Process Fluids

investment parameters 191 Process options

Preferences 55 Process Stream field

product specifications 198 raw material specifications

194 Process vessel height to

diameter ratio design criteria specifications

178 vessel sizing procedure 371,

373 Procurement

engineering phases 79 schedule settings 127

Product specifications investment analysis

specifications 196–199 Productivity adjustments 87 Products Escalation




Profitability Index (PI) 620 Programmable Logic Control

(PLC) centers adding 111–113 introduction, power

distribution 111 Project areas See Areas Project Basis

Basis for Capital Costs 66–132

default specifications 210 General Project Data 64 introduction 62

754 Index

Investment Analysis 186–199

Process Design 132–186 Project Properties 63 specification libraries 210 Streams 199–210 view 31

Project Capital Escalation Cashflow spreadsheet



Project component connecting to stream 273

Project Component Map Preview dialog box 249, 252, 254

Project Component Map Specifications

dialog box 160 project specifications,

Process Design 160–168 Project components

adding 286 component specifications

289 copying 306 deleting 308 Equipment Model Library

(EML) items 438 importing 304 installation bulks 291 re-numbering 309 scheduling 130–131 Unit Cost Library (UCL) item

445 Project Data Sheet

reports, Icarus Editor 567 Project Description


Project Description field Project Properties 22, 64,

640 Project directories

alternate directories 57 copying 50 default, setting 59

Project evaluation Preferences 53 running 560 scan for errors 53, 561

Project execution schedule settings

project basis specifications 127–132

Project Explorer 30, 31 docking and undocking 40 floating in Main Window 40 interface, default position 30 relation to Palette 36 View menu 44, 269

Project in use - message 49 Project Indirect Summary

report equipment rental items 105

Project menu Contracts command 114

Project Name Aspen Plus - IPE simulator

link 228 Project Summary


Project Name field creating a new project 21,

639 Project Properties


creating a new project 21, 639

defining the Project Basis 63 Project scenarios

creating new 20–25, 20–25 deleting 48 importing 305 opening existing 640 salvaging 48 saving 47 unlocking 49

Project Schedule Data Sheet reports, Icarus Editor 569

Project Summary reports, Icarus Editor 566 spreadsheet, reviewing

investment analysis 604–11

Project Title 605 General Project Data 65

Project Type Executive Summary

spreadsheet 623 Project Summary


Project view 31 Projects

copying 50 creating 20–25, 20–25 deleting 48 opening existing 640 view 36, 38

PROJSUM.ICS spreadsheet description 604–11

Prompts Preferences 52

Properties Window description 39 docking and undocking 40 floating in Main Window 40 Freeze Content button 39 interface, default position 30

relationship to specifications form 39, 290

View menu 44, 269 PROVISION See SimSci's

Pro/II with PROVISION Pump overdesign factor

design criteria specifications 170, 350

sizing procedures 349, 350 Pumps


sizing 320

Q

Question mark in Status column 287, 289

component specifications 253

Quoted cost item mapping overhead/bottoms

split to 354 mapping unsupported

models to 55 Quoted cost items

mapping unsupported models to 162

Quoted equipment 279, 291

R

Rate field product specifications 198 raw material specifications

195 Rate Units field


195 Raw material

costs, project specifications 196

escalation 189

756 Index

project specifications 192–196

Raw Material Costs Executive Summary

spreadsheet 622 Project Summary


Raw Material Escalation Cashflow spreadsheet



Raw Material Specifications investment analysis, project

basis 192–196 Rebar

civil installation bulk 299 Recent Items folder 286 Reconnect Sink command

stream, Process Flow Diagrams (PFD) 278

Reconnect Source command streams, Process Flow

Diagram (PFD) 278 Red borders


Refrigerant 328 Relation attributes 601 Relative Basis

streams 275 Remarks field

project properties 22, 64 Rental action code 104, 106 Rental Days Required field

equipment rental specifications 104, 106

Re-number command

Run menu 44, 309, 310 Re-numbering

areas 310 project components 309

Report files Reporting Assistant 624

Report groups adding 280 deleting 280 Preferences, deletion prompt

53 Preferences, display 53 renaming 280 showing, Preferences option

32 Report templates

Reporting Assistant 625 Reporter See Aspen Icarus

Reporter Reporting Assistant 624–28 Reports

customizing 624–28 data trending 597–600 Excel 588–96 HTML 586–88 Item report 628 Management reports 588 producing 628 Standard reports 575–86

Reroute All Streams command Run menu 269

Reset button Develop Stream

specifications form 201 Residence time

design criteria specifications 177, 178, 179

sizing crystallizers 343 sizing vessels 367, 371, 373

Re-Size command


project component pop-up menu 249, 320

Run menu 44 Run Report command

File menu, Aspen Icarus Reporter 574

S

Sales Cashflow spreadsheet

(CASHFLOW.ICS) 613, 614

Project Summary spreadsheet (PROJSUM.ICS) 608, 610, 611

Salvage Project As dialog box 49

Salvage Value Project Summary

(PROJSUM.ICS) 607 Salvage Value (Percent of

Initial Capital Cost) impact on depreciation 188 investment parameters 188

Salvaging project scenarios 48 Sample_Inasmbly.dat 216,

217 Sample_Inparts.dat 216, 219 Save As command

File menu 43, 47 Save button

toolbar 42, 47 Save command

File menu 43, 47 Save Project As dialog box 47 Save Window States checkbox

Preferences 53 Saving

cached information 48 project scenarios 47 window states 53

SBI (System Base Indices), escalation 77

Scan for Errors before evaluation

Preferences 53 Scan for Errors command

Run menu 44 Scan Messages 561 Scenario Description


Scenario Name field Create New Project dialog

box 21, 26, 639 Save Project As dialog box

47 Scenarios

creating 20–25, 20–25 deleting 48 importing 25, 305 opening existing 27–29 salvaging 48 saving 47 unlocking 49

Schedule Project Schedule Data Sheet

569 settings 127–132

Schedule Adjustments specifications form 127–129

Scheduling and cost tracking user name, Preferences 60

Scope definitions 123–124 exceptions 124

Screens design criteria specifications

182 Seismic data

civil/steel specs 72 Select a Suffix dialog box 251 Select command

758 Index

Project Basis pop-up menu 215

Select Import Type dialog box 26

Select Simulator Type dialog box 238

Sensor instrumentation loop 301–

303 Separation factor


sizing vessels 367, 368 Show Page Bounds

View menu, BFD 246 View menu, PFD 270

Sieve tray design 363 Signal cabling, instrumentation

- installation bulks 299 SimSci's Pro/II with

PROVISION map specs 167 models used in sizing towers

352 R/R minimum 175, 366 SHORTCUT column operation


236–237 Simulation reports

Aspen Plus 224–229, 352, 355

ChemCAD 229–231 HYSIM 231–233, 352, 355 HYSYS 233–236, 352, 355 loading 32 Pro/II 236–237, 352 selecting 238

Simulation units 159 Simulator data

loading 237–240

mapping 247–254 mapping specifications 162 unsupported models 55

Simulator File Name project specifications,

Process Design 238 Simulator Type

Executive Summary spreadsheet 623

project specifications, Process Design 237


Simulator Units of Measure Mapping Specs

project specifications, Process Design 157–160

Single Component Summary Report

Preferences 53 Site development 279 Size button 319, 327 Size Icarus Project

Component(s) options Map dialog box 249

Size Item option 274, 318 Sizing

calculations 337–373 ChemCAD items 230 defaults 337–373 HYSIM items 232 mapped components 249,

253, 318 overview 318 parameters 168, 173, 175,

176, 179, 180, 183 requirements 337–373

Sizing Expert 183, 249, 274, 318–332

Sizing Method field


Equipment Model Library (EML) 437

Snap to Grid checkbox Grid properties 271

Snap to Grid command View menu, BFD 246 View menu, PFD 270

Solids handling information design criteria specifications

182 Source

Map dialog box 248 Spare parts

equipment specs, design basis 71

SPC center adding 111–113 introduction, power

distribution 111 Specialty center


distribution 111 Specification basis

product specifications 197, 198

raw material specifications 194, 195

Specification files creating 211 deleting 215 duplicating 213 importing 213 introduction 210 modifying 212 moving to another directory

216 selecting 215 selecting for use in project

215 Specification libraries

customizing 211 introduction 210

moving to another directory 216

SPREAD, escalation 77 Spreadsheets

customizing 624–28 viewing investment analysis

603 SQL database

exporting to Microsoft Access 601

Stairs, steel - installation bulks 299

Standard Basis file, changing location 59 file, selecting 215 input file, General Project

Data 65 Standard reports

descriptions 575 navigating 577 opening 576 printing 580 searching 579

Starting program 18, 636 Start-up period, length

investment parameters 191 Startup, commissioning

engineering phases 79 Status bar 30

View menu 44, 269 Status column

List view 253, 287 Steam utility 328 Steel

design basis specifications 72 fireproofing - insulation

specs 74 installation bulk 299 material costs and man-

hours 293 specifications, areas 283,

284 Streams

absolute basis 208

760 Index

adding 274 basis mode 208 connecting to equipment

during sizing 326–332 connectivity, Process Flow

Diagram (PFD) 272 creating 274 creating from Project

Explorer 199, 206–209, 321–325

deleting 209, 278 material 196 modifying 200 process 198 product specifications 196 relative basis 208

Streams List command View menu, BFD 246 View menu, PFD 270

Subcooling tower configurations 255

Subtype 96 Suffixes

mapping 250, 251 Supervision

costs, Project Summary spreadsheet (PROJSUM.ICS) 611

number of supervisors per shift, Project Summary spreadsheet (PROJSUM.ICS) 611

wage rate, Project Summary spreadsheet (PROJSUM.ICS) 611

support, technical 16 System Base Indices (SBI),

escalation 77 System cost base data

Project Summary (PROJSUM.ICS) 606

Systems power distribution 106–110 process control 110–114

T

Tax Rate Cashflow spreadsheet



technical support 16 Template files

Reporting Assistant 625 Tile command

Window menu 33, 46 Timed backup 54 Toolbar

buttons 42 description 42 docking 42 interface, default position 30 View menu 44, 269

Tools menu 45 Total Manpower Schedule

reports, Icarus Editor 568 Total pipeline length

pipeline area specifications 285

Total project cost Cashflow spreadsheet

(CASHFLOW.ICS) 612 Tower configurations

mapping 250, 257–265, 354–358

Transducers instrumentation loop 302

Transmission lines adding 107–108


Transmitters, instrumentation - installation bulks 299

Trayed towers design criteria specifications

176 sizing 361, 362, 366

Tree diagrams Contractors 115–119 Power Distribution 106–110 Process Control 110–114 Scope 119–125


Trending database reports 597–600

Trim cooler suffix for mapping 251 tower configurations 255,

355, 358 Type definition, area 283, 284

U

UBI (User base indices), escalation 77

UCL See Unit Cost Library (UCL)

UK country base 24–25 Unique Project Backup options

54 Unit Cost field


196 Unit Cost Library (UCL)

adding an item to 442 adding UCL item to a project

445 creating 440 definition 434

Unit substations adding 107–108 linking to areas 109

United Kingdom

country base, General Project Data 24

United States country base, General

Project Data 24 Units of measure

input customization 22, 66 output (reports)

customization 68 project properties 22 Project Summary


scenario information 28 Unit Cost Library (UCL) 443

Units of Measure Specification dialog box 158

Unlink command contractors 117 power distribution 110

Unlock command 49 Unsupported simulator models

Preferences 55 Update button


US country base 24–25 USD


User base indices (UBI), escalation 77

User Custom Model 310–315 User name

scenario information 28 UserData folder 216 Utilities

costs 611, 622 escalation 608, 613 list of availiable utility

resources 328 usage estimation 204

Utilities Escalation

762 Index




Utility costs heat-transfer utilities 186 non-heat transfer utilities

192 Utility Specifications

project specifications 182–186

Utility stream creating 183 modifying 183

Utility Unit Costs operating unit costs

specifications (non-heat transfer utilities) 192

utility specifications (heat-transfer utilities) 186

V

Valve tray sizing 364 Valves

Design Basis instrumentaton specs 73

instrumentation installation bulks 301

piping installation bulks 298 Vapor disengagement height

towers, design criteria 175 Version

scenario information 28 Vessel

design criteria specifications 180–182

height to diameter ratio 178, 371, 373

sizing 320, 367

View Existing Trend Data command


View menu 44, 269 Voltage levels

electrical specs 74 Volumetric models

instrumentation installation bulk 300–301

introduction, main features 13

piping installation bulk 297–298

W

Wages construction workforce 86–

89 WARNing message 561 web site, technical support 16 What-You-See-Is-What-You-

Get Zoom dialog box 244

Wind data civil/steel specs 72

Window menu 46 Window states, saving 53 Wire distribution system

electrical specs 74 Workbook mode

understanding 32–33 View menu 44, 269

Workforce reference base General Wage Rates 88

Workforces construction 86–89 linking to contractors 116

Working capital Cashflow spreadsheet

(CASHFLOW.ICS) 615


Working capital percentage Cashflow spreadsheet

(CASHFLOW.ICS) 612 Project Summary


Working Capital Percentage investment parameters 189

World economy, escalation 76 WYSIWYG

Zoom dialog box 244

Y

Yen currency, General Project

Data 24

Z

Zoom Aspen Icarus Reporter 577 Block Flow Diagram (BFD)

244–245

aspen capitalcostestimator(kbase)-usr_guide v7.1 (2009) $$$$

Documents

aspen engineering v7

aspen leaf logo

new project scenario

existing project scenario

contents contents

aspentech proprietary

related documentation

aspentechs software